India thether but also by the Peguans themselues whereof many dwell in India some of them being Christians which tell it and confesse it for a truth as also the neerenesse of place and neighbourhood maketh it sufficiently knowne The people of Aracan Pegu and Sian are in forme manner and visage much like those of China onely one difference they haue which is that they are somewhat whiter then the Bengalon and somewhat browner then the men of China The pictures songs after their manner whereby they are wondred at which maketh them proude and hee that dwelleth in India and can not speake the Malayans speach wil hardly with vs learne the French tongue their forme and figures are heere set downe together with those of the Ilands of Iaua whereof hereafter we will speake more The 19. Chapter Of the Iland of Sumatra in times past called Taprobana SVMATRA INSVLA RIght ouer against Malacca Southeast about 20. miles from the firme land by Malacca wher the straight is at the narrowest lieth the â—amous Ilande of Taprobana now called Sumatra by some Historiographers named Chersoneâ—o Aurea others affirme it to be Ophir from whence Salomon had his Golde as the Scripture rehearseth and say that in times past it was firme land and ioyned vnto the Countrie of Malacca The Iland beginneth from the first pointe which lyeth right against the Gulfe of Bengala vnder fiue degrees on the North side and stretcheth also before Malacca South Southeast vntill it passeth by the Iland called Iaua Maior where it endeth vnder 6. degrées on the South side and is in length 170 miles and in breadth 60. miles The Portingals dwell not therein in any place but deale and trafique in some places thereof yet very few for that the inhabitants themselues doe bring many of their commodities vnto Malacca Malachae incolae sermone et moribus quam reliqui Indi cultioribus et magis comes In woonders van Mallacka welcke alle andere Indianen in taele courtosije en amoreushcÿt te boven gaen Insulanus e Iava gens durae cervicis Een cÿlander wt â—ava welcks volck is hart neckich en opstinaet The Iland is very rich of mynes of Gold Siluer Brasse whereof they make greate Ordinance precious stones and other mettall of all kinde of Spices sweete woode rootes and other medicinable Herbes and Drugges it hath a hill of Brimstone that burneth continually and they saye there is a fountaine which runneth pure simple Balsame it hath likewise great store of Silke At the last besieging and troubles of Malacca the Kinge of Acheijn sent a péece of Ordinance such as for greatnes length and workmanship the like is hardly to bee found in all Christendome which hee gaue in marriage with his daughter to the King of Ior a town lying by Malacca vpon the coast of Sian but this péece with his daughter were taken vpon the way by the Portingals and brought into Malacca which péece was after laden in the Ship that sayleth euery yeare from Malacca to Portingale and sent vnto the King for a present being so heauie that they were forced to lay it in the Balast of the ship The same péece lyeth at this present in the I le of Tarcera because the said shippe stayed there being in our companie as I returned out of India also the Towne of Ior vpon the same occasion was by the Portingals besieged and at the last wonne and by them rased to the ground and for euer made wast wherin they found about 150. Brasse péeces smal great some of them beeing no greater then a Musket and some greater and so of all sorts verie cunningly wrought with Flowers and personages which I haue purposely set down to let you know that they haue other kindes of Mettals and know howe to handle them But returning to our matter There are some places in this Iland where the Portingales doe traffique which are those that vse to traffique to Malacca as a Towne called Pedir which lyeth 20. miles from Achejin vppon the coast right ouer against Malacca from whence commeth much Pepper and Golde from an other place called Campar which lyeth almost vnder the Equinoctiall line vppon the corner on the South side on the same side on the West coast of the Iland lyeth a place called Manancabo where they make Poinyards which in India are called Cryses which are very well accounted and estéemed of and is thought the best weapon in all the Orient whereof those of Iaua Malacca do make gret prouision for theÌ„selus The 20. Chapter Of the Iland of Iaua Maior with their wares Marchandises and trades waights myntes and prices thereof with other particularities IAVA MAIOR SOuth Southeast right ouer against the last point or corner of the I le of Sumatra on the south side of the Equinoctiall line lyeth the Iland called Iaua Maior or great Iaua where there is a straight or narrow passage betweene Sumatra and Iaua called the straight of Sunda of a place so called lying not far from thence within the I le of Iaua this Iland beginneth vnder â— degrées on the south side and runneth east and by south 150 miles long but touching the breadth it is not found because as yet it is not discouered nor by the Inhabitants themselues well knowne Some thinke it to be firme land and parcell of the countrie called Terra incognita which being so shoulde reach from that place to the Cape de Bona speraÌ„ce but as yet it is not certainly known therefore it is accouÌ„ted for an Iland the inhabitants say that within the land there is a Riuer wherin if any wood doth fal it turneth into stone Through this straight or narrowe passage Thomas Candish an Inglish captaine passed with his Ship as he came out of the south parts from Noua Spaigne This Iland aboundeth with Rice and all manner of victuals as oxen kyne hogges shéepe and hennes c. also Onyons Garlicke Indian nuttes and with al kind of Spices as cloues Nutmegges and mace which they carry vnto Malacca The principall hauen in the Iland is Sunda Calapa whereof the straight beareth the name in this place of SuÌ„da there is much Pepper and it is better then that of India or Malabar wherof there is so great quantitie that they could lade yearlie from thence 4 or 5 thousand kintales Portingale waight it hath likewise much frankinsence Beniom of Bonien called Folie Camphora as also Diamantes to which place meÌ„ might very well traffique without any impeachment for that the Portingales come not thether because great numbers of Iaua come themselues vnto Malacca to sell their wares And although it be besyde the matter yet doe I not esteeme it vnnecessary in briefe to shewe in what sort they vse to buy sell and deall with ware money and waight seing we are now in hand with the said Iland of Iaua You must vnderstand that in Sunda there is no other kind of money then certaine copper mynt called
of her burthen These beastes are verie profitable and necessary no lesse then Cammels in Egypt Affrica and are fedde with a little Maiz and other meate specially those that they vse to ride vpon to labor and to carry burthens They goe likewise as Cammels doo foure or fiue dayes together without drinking and but little meate some of them called Pachos haue verie fine wool with long fleeces wiâ—h verie good holsome and sauorie flesh like our gammons of Bacon The hauen of Chile or S. Iacomo lieth vnder 32. degrees and 2 â— parts sayling further along the coast in the same course you come to the riuer of Calma distant from Chile eighteene miles it is here also to be considered that all the coast from Tumbez to this place is verie good to sayle by and a calme sea without tempestes or foule weather whereby the shippes may lye at anker where they think good Nine miles from Calma you see the poynt of the riuer called Manque or Mâ—ule in our card Maole and ten miles and a half further there is another riuer called Iâ—ata in our Carde Rio Tatuâ—a and so sailing south and southwest eighteene miles there is another called Biobio lying almost vnder eight and thirtie degrees in the same course kéeping along the shore full eleuen miles distant there is a great Island about foure miles distant from the firme land caled Lucengo and somwhat further beyond this Island is a great broad créeke called Valdiuia in our carde La Baldibia wherein there runneth a great riuer caled Ayntlendo in our Carde Rio Aymlendos this Créeke lieth vnder 39. degrées and â…” Following the same course further by the shore to south southwest you come to the Cape S. Maria lying vnder 42. degrées and 1 â— towards the south and from as the Pilots report the coast reacheth southâ—â—st to the straits of Magellana and betweene them lie many hauens and places needlesse to rehearse as being noted in the carde inwarde in the land there is the Countrey of Patagonen wherein there are Giantes of nine and of tenne foot high that paint their faces with diuerse colours made of hearbs pressing out the sap And heerewith making an end for the rest I referre the Reader to the Carde The end of the second booke THE THIRDE BOOKE The Nauigation of the Portingales into the East Indies containing their trauels by Sea into East India and from the East Indies into Portingall also from the Portingall Indies to Malacca China Iapon the Ilands of Iaua and Sunda both to and fro and from China to the Spanish Indies and from thence backe againe to China as also of al the coast of Brasilia and the Hauens thereof With a description of the Firme land and the Ilands of the Spanish Indies lying before it called Antillas together with the Nauigation of Cabo de Lopo Gonsalues to Angola in the coast of Ethiopia with all the courses Hauens Ilands Depthes Shallowes Sands Drougths Riffes and Cliffes with their situations also the times of the yeares when the winds blow with the true tokens and knowledge of the tides and the weather water and streames in all the Orientall coasts and Hauens as they are obserued and set downe by the Kings Pilots in their continuall and dayly Viages Translated out of Dutch by W. P. IEHOVA I Wolfe excu W Rogers sculp LONDON Printed by John VVolfe 1598. The third Booke The Nauigation of the Portingales into the East Indies containing their trauels by Sea into East India and from the East Indies into Portingall also from the Portingall Indies to Malacca China Iapon the Ilands of Iaua and Sunda both to and fro and from China to the Spanish Indies and from thence backe againe to China as also of all the coast of Brasilia and the Hauens thereof With a description of the Firme land and the Ilands of the Spanish Indies lying before it called Antillas together with the Nauigation of Cabo de Lope Gonsalues to Angola in the coast of Ethiopia With all the courses Hauens Ilands depthes shallowes Sands drougthes Riffes and Cliffes with their situations Also the times of the yeares when the winds blow with the true tokens and knowledge of the tydes and the weather water and stormes in all the Orientall coastes and Hauens as they are obserued and set downe by the Kings Pilotes in their continuall and dayly Viages THE I. CHAPTER Of the courses and Viages of the Portingales into the East Indies FIrst you must vnderstand that all Christendome lyeth on the North side of the Equinoctiall line and Lisbone vnder thirtie nine degrées and a halfe and lyeth with the Iland of Madera Northeast southwest the Viage being 172 Spanish miles and Madera lyeth vnder 32 degrées and is distant from the Iland la Palma which the shippes sayling to India may easily perceiue 63. miles The Iland la Palma lyeth vnder 28. degrées ¼ from thence you must sayle Southward as long as time will permit for commonly when you come vnder fiue or sixe degrées you find south eastwardes and then you must saile southwest as much as you can vntill you passe the cape of S. Agustine which lieth vnder 8 degrees ½ on the south side that is vpon the coast of Brasilia from the Ilande la Palma to this Cape of Saint Augustine are 900. miles the course lying north-Northeast and southwest when you are past the point you must sayle Southwest because the winde is there commonly south and southeast and from the Ilands of Tristan da Cunlia lying vnder 34. degrées on the south side of the Equinoctial you must hold southwest and when you thinke you haue passed these Ilands you must sayle till you come vnder 36. degrées and kéepe Eastward vntill you haue passed the Cape de Bona Speranza and then you must holde north-Northeast towardes the land and hauing knowne the land according to the place you then haue knowne you shall set your course to Mosambique or outward about the Iland of Saint Laurence from the Cape of Saint Austine to the Cape de Bona Speranza are 1060. miles which Cape de Bona Speranza lyeth full vnder 34 degrées and a halfe on the south side of the Equinoctiall and is East southeast and West Northwest with the Cape Das Agulhas which is 32. miles and Cape das Agulhas is full vnder 35. degrées lying with the Cape do Infante East and West and somewhat East and by North and West and by South the course is 26. miles Cabo do Infante is vnder 34. degrées and 2 â— and lyeth with the Cape Talhado East Northeast and West Southwest 19. miles Cabo Talhado is vnder 34 degrées lyeth with Bahija Fermosa East and West 1â— miles Bahija Fermosa is vnder the same hight of Cabo Talhado and lyeth with the Ilands Chanos East north-northeast and West Southwest 37. miles and with the first point called Punta Primiera Northeast and Southwest and somewhat north-Northeast and by East and southwest by West the course is 50.
miles Punta Primiera is vnder 32. degrees and lyeth from the last land called Terra do Natal 50. miles which is vnder 30. degrées and a halfe and lyeth with the land called Terra dos Fumos Northeast and Southwest and somewhat of north-Northeast and by North and Southwest by South and the course is 75. miles the land of Terra dos Fumos is vnder 27. degrees and a halfe and lyeth with the Cape das Correntes Northeast and Southwest and somewhat Northeast and by East and Southwest and by West the course is 95. miles Cabo das Correntes is vnder 24. degrees and a halfe and lyeth with Insulas Primieras Northeast and Southwest and somwhat Northeast and by North Southwest and by West the course is 132 miles the Insulas Primieras are scarce vnder 17. degrees and a halfe and lye with Mosambique Northeast and Southwest the course is 52. miles Mosambique is vnder 15. degrees and putting forth from Mosambique towards India you must sayle Northeast vntill you come before the Iland of Comora the course is 80. miles till you come vnder 11. degrées and then you must yet take your course north-Northeast vnto the Iland As Ilhas do Almirante which are vnder thrée degrées and a halfe on the south side being past those Ilands you must take your course north-Northeast and north-Northeast and by East wherewith you shal come to the Ilands As Ilhas Queimadas which are vnder 16. degrées vppon the coast of Goa or India here you must remember that at this time the streames in that countrie doe alwaies runne Northwest that is towards the Straights of Mecca or to the red Sea therefore presently when you are vnder 16. degrées to kéepe your right course you shall stil hold your course aforesaid which is Northeast and by East or somewhat more as you finde occasion your Compasse will alwaies shew you what you may doe and thus must you sayle for y e space of 200 miles towards the coast of India being sure you goe no lower then 15 degrées to auoide the drougths called Os Baixos de Pandua which lie vnder 13. degrees Northward also when you thinke to bee vppon the coast of India you must still hold aboue 16. degrées for that the streame and water vpon that coast runneth Southward commonly the wind is there out of the North Northwest and to know when you are vppon the coast of India you shal find these tokens that is 300. miles from the coast you shall see Crabbes and 50. miles from the coast you find Snakes in the water as big as Eales or Lampernes which is alwayes most certain and within 20. miles from the land you haue ground at 80. fadome and 14. or 15. miles from the shore 70. fadome you néed not feare to fall on the coast for it is faire and without danger and hath good Ankeridge and all the Ilands and Cliffes vpon the coast lie close to the Firme land whereby there is no danger and all the coast called India lie North and South and somewhat North and by West and south and by East and you must vnderstand that al the coast of India Persia Arabia the Straights of Mecca or the red sea the coast of Choramandel Seylon Bengalen Pegu Sian Malacca Camboia Cauchinchina China Iapon c. lie on the north side of the Equinoctiall line The 2. Chapter The course or viage to East India made and set downe by the Kings Pilot called Diego Astonso a Portingall SAyling from Lisbone to the Iland of Madera you must set your corse Southwest and make towards the Iland Porto Santo from thence you must passe betwéene the Iland Deserta and Madera shunning the Ilands or Cliffes called Os Saluagiens lying two miles southwestward froÌ„ the Madera for thereabouts are great drougthes which by night are very dangerous you may passe by theÌ„ on the East side so keepe your course to the Iles of Canares and hauing passed those Ilands of Canares you must set your course Southward till you come vnder 14. degrées kéeping 50. miles downwards from Cabo Verde and from thence you must set your course southwest and Southwest and by West till you come vnder 6. degrées and from thence southwest and southwest and by South so y t you hold your course 70. miles from the drougth of the ryuer called Rio Grande 80. miles from Saint Anna alwaies doing your best to get vnder the Equinoctiall line letting your course stil be somwhat about the south and if the wind be South then rather chuse the East then the West side although you be vnder the line and as long as you haue no Southeast wind hold Eastward not once approching the land called I' erra do Mallagetta neerer theÌ„ 50. or 60. miles distant and when you haue the Longitude and Latitude whereby you may know you haue passed the Cape Das Palmas then when you Lauere make short turnings I meane vnder the line or on this side therof least the streame should driue you within the Cape aforesaid but rather stricke all your Sayles then driue in there for otherwise you cannot saue your selfe neither yet get into India I haue before shewed you what you shall do being an hundred fortie myles vnder the lyne then crosse right ouer so to passe before Brasilia for that following the way and course aforesayd you can not fayle but you must néedes passe by Brasilia on the aforesaid coast of Malagetta the streame with a new Moone runneth Southwest therefore as then you shall not set your course towards Brasilia being vnder the lyne but when you set your course South West hold you as long therein as the wynd continueth good and then vse all speed and diligence as I sayd before to passe the lyne ouer the syde of Brasilia thereby to get vnder eyght degrees vnder the which lyeth the poynt called Cabo de S. Augustin and then if vnder those eight degrees you desire to leaue the sight of the land then turne not vpon the other syde but rather cast anker vntill the wynd commeth good to keepe on your course and you must vnderstand that the streame on this syde of Brasilia Cape de S Augustin and that couÌ„trey runneth to the Antillas which are the Ilands of new Spayne wherefore I thinke it not your best way to Lauere for if you do without all doubt you will be forced to turne againe vnto Poâ—tingaleâ— from thence y t shall take an other way vnto the Iland of Martin Vaas hauing past the lyne the righter you keepe this way it is the better From the Iland of Martin Vaas or from the hight vnder which they lie to the Ilandes of Tristan de Cunha hauing a fore wind you shal hold your right course without any racking or abatement of your reckening for those Ilands lie with the others all vnder one longitude and latitude with the difference that the Compasse hath in those Countries that is by the Ilandes of Tristan de
13. fadom at the end this channel by y e North Ilande of the Ilandes of Nicobar lyeth an Iland where you may passe throgh w t y t greatest shippe that is the South end of this Ilande lyeth vnder 6. degrées and ¼ and the channell aforesaid vnder 7. degrées if you go through the middle of the channell lying vnder 6. degrées you shal at the entry to the Ilands see 4. Ilands whereof thrée lie halfe a mile from the Iland two of them are great and high the other small the fourth lyeth distant from the Ilande about thrée miles and is a great round Iland flatte on the top and Northward you shall see another Iland lying vnder 8. deg the entry of this Iland hath a thicke high backe flat at the end and being in the middle of the channel you shall sée another Iland lying hard by that vnder 8. deg a flat land distant from the other about two miles from the Ilandes of Nicobar to the Northerly Ilands are about 7. miles and there you néed not feare any thing at the end of this channell the Ilande of Nicobar hath a round houell at the foote whereof lyeth an Iland I counsel you not to passe by the south side of the Ilande Nicobar thereby to kéepe your selfe out of the daunger of those of Acheiin in the Ilande of Sumatra which are continually thereaboutes and are deadly enemies to the Portingalles but rather doo your best to passe the way I spake of before although you should saile vnder 8. and ¼ or 8. degrees and ◠for you may passe without danger for they are all channelles or thorow fares being past the Ilandes of Nicobar as I said before you shall take your course towards the Iland Pulo Cuto you runne betweene Pulo Cuto and Nicobar East and West and somewhat East and by South and West and by North the course is nyne miles and lyeth vnder 6. degrees and 2 ◠to know Pulo Cuto comming out of the Sea towardes it vpon the East side thereof you shall see a high round land on the shore very low they are thrée Ilands together hauing on the South side on the furthest point of them 3. or 4. cliffes or rocks that lie vncouered on the North side an other mouth or opening running between the great Ilande the Ilande of the sea in this Ilande on the Southeast side there is a very good place to take in fresh water lying by a long point of lande you may likewise take your course frō the Ilands of Nicobar to the Ilande Pulo Pera which is a small round Iland without trees lying vnder 5. deg and ⅔ the course being about 100. miles you run East Southeast and West Northwest from Pulo Pera to the Iland Pulo Pinaon are 15. miles and are one from the other East and west somewhat East and by South West and by North. This Iland Pulo Pinaon lyeth 5. miles from the firme lande full vnder fiue degrées and ¼ the marke thereof is that it is high in the middle hauing on the North point a round houell and an Island lying in the middle way from the same Islande and comming along by the lande it hath a great creeke with a sandie strand at the end wherof lyeth an Iland where there is a place of fresh water on the South point it is lowe land making an other Iland Pulo Pinaon lyeth with Pulo Sambilaon North south there you must looke well to your selfe for frō this Ilande Pulo Pinaon there runneth a banke reaching to a point or booke of high land which runneth into the sea at the least 2 miles vpon it you shal find 5. fadome déepe somewhat more but towards the land lesse when the point aforesaid lyeth frō you east east by north then you shal see Sambilaon the course from Pulo Pinaon to Pulo Sambilaon is 22. miles and lyeth almost vnder 4. deg East West from Pulo Sambilaō 4. or 5. miles to seaward lyeth the Iland called A Ilha das Iarres which is a smal round Iland ful of trees and on the Southwest side it hath fresh water but verie little but in Pulo Sambilaon you haue very good fresh water in all the 4. Ilands thereof the greatest wherof nearest the land lyeth in the middle in the which on the North side there stādeth a houel on both sides whereof are sandie strandes wherein are fresh water likewise the other 3. Ilandes that are in the middle haue euery one vpon the east Northeast side sandie strands in the middle whereof where there is an opening you shall finde very good fresh water at the foote of a great trée by all these Ilands as well on the sea as the lande side as also through the channel running betweene them you may freely passe without feare for it is deepe enough you may anker in sight of the land at 20. 25. fadome deep If you desire to passe through the great channell of Pulo Sambilaon then you must run south south and by East to y e Islands called As Ilhas d'Aru which lie vpon the coast of y e Iland Sumatra they are 3 smal flat Ilands full of bushes and woodes and when you are within a mile of these Ilands you shall sayle southeast southeast by east east southeast till you be at 10. fadome déep towards Pulo Parcelor which is a high hill lying vppon y e coast of Malacca shewing far off to be an Iland it standeth in a flat land whereby the land is not seene vntill you be full vpon it frō Pulo Parcelor to y e point called Cabo Rachado that is the clouen point lying ful vnder 2. degr ½ you saile to Malacca East southeast West Northwest along y e coast forwarde it is altogether a countrie full of points and houels but high and being in the middle way betweene Cabo Rachado and Malacca you shall presently discouer the Ilands that lie about halfe a mile from Malacca close by the land The 17. Chapter To saile from Pulo Sambilaō or through the great channel to Malacca SAiling from Pulo Sambilaon to the Ilandes As Ilhas de Aru lying on the coast of the Island Sumatra you shal hold your course south for the space of 13. miles whereby you shal come vpon y e banke so that it is all one to saile from Pulo Sambilaon running southward as from the Iland das Iarras that is the Iland of pots southeast southeast by south for you come out al at one place whē the Ilands de Aru lie west west and by North from you then cast out your leade and you shal finde sandy ground frō thence you shal hold your course southeast stil casting out your lead finding 10. fadome kéeping the same course til you be at 13. fadom muddie ground you shal runne southeast southeast and by east but finding 16. 17. fadome sandie ground then winde towards
the side of Malacca to 12. 13. fadome setting your course againe southeast southeast and by east if you finde your selfe to be at 10. fadome then turne againe to the southeast alwaies séeking to be at 10.12 13. fadom for it is the best ground and depth of y e channel when you see a round hil right before you which sheweth like an Ilande y t is Pulo Parselar to the which the droughts or sands aforesaid do stretch notwithstaÌ„ding you shal not let to passe on your way not coÌ„ming nearer to Pulo Parselar then 2. miles Northeastwarde for then you are past the drougthes aforesaid from thence forward put towards the lande about a mile distant holding your course southeast towardes y e point of Cabo Rachado before you come within 3. miles thereof you find a Riffe lying foure miles from the coast which is but 4. fadome deep at high water to seawarde froÌ„ thence there is a channel of 10. fadom deep running from the Island of de Aru to Pulo Parselar you shal vse all the meanes you can to haue the greatest Ilande de Aru Southwest and southwest by west from you holding your course southeast alwaies at 18. at the least 17 fadome if you wil put from Pulo Parselar to the Ilandes de Aru you shal let Parseâ—ar lie Northeast northeast by east from you running northwest Northwest and by West alwaies at 16.17 18. to 15 fadome deep this way is not otherwise to be done for I haue past so my selfe and founde it a very good way The 18. Chapter The course from Malacca to Goa with the stretchings and situations of the Coastes DEparting from Malacca to Goa or India your best course is to saile a mile or a mile and a halfe along by the coast of Malacca alwaies hauing in sight the strikes and neather partes of the Trées that stand vpon the land till you be at Pulo Parcelar and from thence you haue from 16. to 27. and 28. fadome déepe but you must remember not to passe aboue 14. fadome neyther on the one side nor the other and sailing from Malacca about two miles and ½ or 3. miles from thence you finde 2. or 3. droughts of stonie cliffes reaching about halfe a mile into the sea lying right ouer the cesterne or the Kinges Bath by the Portingales called Tanque del Rey you shall likewise looke that you goe not neere the chéeke of Cabo Rachado which Cape lieth vnder two degrees and ½ vppon the same Coast of Malacca Northwest and by North ten miles distant as well vpon the Southeast as the Northwest side and goe not neare the land by a mile at the least as I said before there you haue a good mile and a halfe to the principall part of the channell that runneth to Parcelar and passing by Pulo Pacelor and desiring to crosse ouer from the droughts you shall kéepe off from Pulo Parcelor about 2 miles because that from it there reacheth a banke that iutteth about halfe a mile into the sea being as I said about two miles froÌ„ the land to passe ouer the droughtes being with a flood then Pulo Parcelor shall lie Eastward from you and at an ebbe East Northeast therefore it is néedefull for you to haue great care of the tides that you be not deceiued comming in this sort into those parts you shall runne west Northwest kéeping either on the one side or the other as the tides fal and if you crosse ouer the sea Pulo Parcelor it is best for you to kéepe east and east and by south from it and being in the middle way to the Ilands of Daru lying close vpon the coast of Samatra vnder 3. degrees west Northwest and 30. miles from Malacca then if you see Pulo Pacelor let it be betwéen east southeast and east by south from you and yet you haue a good course and comming towards Pulo Parcelor you must haue it to lie north-northeast and southwest being two miles from it but when you leaue it to make towards the Ilands of d' Aru then it is best to haue it east and east and by south and being in the sight of the Iland of d' Aru making towards the great Iland you may run within a mile or two thereof safely and without danger for it is all deepe ground The depthes you shall finde by the droughts aforesaid passing through the Channell are from 10. to 11. fadome but not aboue and the greatest depthes you shall finde running through the channel are 12.13.14.15.16 and 17. fadome and although at 3. or 4. castinges you come to 10.9 8. fadome of small fine and blacke sand or muddy ground yet your course is good for you shall presently againe come to 12.13 and 14. fadome and hauing this depth and ground and holding the course aforesaid although at some castings you finde small fine white sand yet your course is good but if you finde great sand or shels then you are out of the channell and when you finde the ground full of black shels and great sand I counsell you to seeke againe for fine small and blacke sand or muddie ground for the ground of great sand and shels is out of the channell therefore you must not cease to cast out your lead to assure your selfe it is likewise good to know the depth with two leads vpon each side of the ship one with good and carefull ouersight alwaies hauing your ankers ready with a cable of 12. or 15. fadome long if need be therewith to help your selfe because herein there is mention many times made of Pulo Pacelor I thought it good likewise to set downe vnder what height it lieth although it is sufficiently set downe us the Sea Cardes it is a land that maketh a point like to a Cape lying on the Coast of Malacca Northwest and by North about fiftéene miles distant ful vnder thrée degrées also you must remember that taking your course from Pulo Parcelor to the Iland of d' Aru being in the middle way you must let Pulo Pacelor lie in East and East and by South from you and beeing somewhat nearer the Islands then Pulo Parcelor is from you almost East Southeast that is as you goe neere the Islandes for that running in this sort you haue a good course and are sure and safe from the droughtes and if by night you passe ouer the droughts then you shall marke the land in the day time as I said before hauing a good winde alwaies looking to your tides that they deceiue you not driuing you vpon the one or the other side for there the streame runneth verie strong as well in the flood and as in the ebbe alwaies ruling your selfe according to the tides and holding your course in such manner that you may cast out your lead and as the aforesaide great Island of d'Aru lieth Southwest from you béeing about two miles from it then
find the ground full of bankes for from Coulaon to Batecola that is by Onor not farre from Goa the ground is bankie and you may Anker at 8. fadome without feare from Batecola to Goa the ground in some places deeper whereby you may gouerne your selfe Touching your Ankerage from Cochijn to Cananor you néede not feare onely to take héede of the Iland called Ilha Cagado lying Southward from Cananor seuen miles and thrée miles Northward from the fortresse of Mangalor there lyeth a row of Ilands Cliffes and Rockes along the coast vntill you come to the fortresse of Barcelor from thence to Batecola you haue certaine Cliffes but they are close to the land and the two Ilands of Batecola you may passe betwéene the first of them and the Firme land without feare for it is 15. or 16. Fadome déepe a little further lyeth the Iland of Honor close to the Firme land then followeth the Ilandes of Angediua which reach as the coast doth and if it bee late in the yeare you shal not put farre into the Créeke of Ancola for as then there is no Terreinhos or land winds to driue you out againe therfore it is then better to runne something far from the coast for you haue many times the Viracoins or Sea winds somwhat farre off and being néere the shore they would not much helpe you This must be from the twentie of March forward If you chance to be by Angediua and had néede of a Road or harber you must enter into Angediua on the North side as far from that land as from the Firme land and rather somewhat néerer the Iland then the Firme land where you haue a good Road or harber for there many times diuers shippes doe winter being constrained therevnto within it is sixe fadome déepe a little further from Angediua lie foure or fiue Ilands from the ryuer Sanguisijn close by the Firme land and from thence about halfe a mile further forward lyeth the Iland of Goa Velha that is old Goa and then there are no other Ilands heerein to bee noted You must vnderstand that oftentimes it happeneth that along the coast you shall find the wind Northwest and North Northwest without chāging which bloweth very strong with the which wind I aduise you not to set sayle although it blow out of the North but if it be cleare day then you may hoyse Anker and put to Sea wards and if the wind commeth not about to north-Northeast being foure miles from the land and before noone about nine or ten of the clocke you shall Anker till it be noone till the Viracoins or Sea winds come therewith to sayle againe towards the land for in this sort you shall get aduantage to loofeward although it bee with paine and labour as likewise the time will shewe you what you shall doe I must further aduertise you that when you are by the coast of Seylon it being about the fifteene of Februarie or past then you néede not sayle further then to the Ilands Verberijn and from thence to the Cape de Comorijn for as then you néede neither to feare water nor streames to driue you outward yet you must not bee negligent therin for some yeares the stormes come later sometimes sooner as the winds blow whereof you must be carefull and being the fiftéene of Februarie or past you must remember not to runne inwards but kéepe out for as then the streames runne inwards which might deceiue you and the later it is in Februarie the stronger they draw inward comming to Cochijn betwéene the 15. and 20. of March you may wel get from thence to Goa although the Viage is some thing doubtfull but being past the twentie of March I would not counsell you to do it for that of late many years together there hath béene vpon the coast of India in Aprill and May diuers blustering stormes of crosse winds blowing towards the coast with darke and cloudie skies which would bring you in great danger therefore against that time it is best to chuse a good Hauen neuerthelesse God can send faire weather winds when it pleaseth him To put into the Hauen of the fortresse of Barcelor in the coast of Malabar aforesaide you must vnderstande that when you see a round Houell vppon the end of the hil of Batecola towards y e Northeast and north-Northeast and by East then you are right against the fortresse of Barcelor may put in at 7. fadome so you haue the fortresse East and halfe a stricke to East and by North from you and you shall sée all the Cliffes lying along the coast to the Ilands as Ilhas de Saint Maria which are altogether stonie Cliffes but they stand close to the land The 19. Chapter A description of all the Hauens places coastes and Sands vpon the East and South side of the Ilands Seylon with their heights courses stretchings situations with the course from thence to the fortresse of Columbo holden by the Portingales FIrst I will beginne with Trinquanamale which lyeth vnder nine degrées vppon the East side of the Iland Seylon eight myles from thence Southwarde lyeth a smal ryuer and before you come at it putting from Trinquanamale ther are some Ilands that with Birds fileings looke white and in the mouth of the riuer aforesaid lie two smal Ilands full of trées from Trinquanamale to this ryuer the course is North and South and North and by East and South and by West and running along the coast towards this ryuer then you shall leaue the Ilands aforesaid on the land side sayling without thē for that betwéene them and the land are many stones and Cliffes this ryuer and Trinquanamale lie distant from each other eight or nine miles at the furthest From the saide ryuer with the Ilands in the entrie thereof to the ryuer of Mataqualou are 12. myles and lieth vnder the hight of seuen degrées and 1 ◠The course from the one to the other is Northwest and Southeast being past this ryuer comming betwéene the Ilands the mouth therof you may go as néere the shore as you will for it is without danger within a great shotte of the land it is 20. fadome déepe From Mataqualou about fiue or sixe miles the course is North and South till you come to the point or hooke and from this point fiue or sixe miles further you runne along the coast North and South and North and by East and South and by West further forward towards the first Sand about fiue or sixe miles Northward there standeth a woode of Palme trées and comming right ouer against it the coast runneth North Northeast and South southwest and somewhat North and by East and South and by West from those fiue miles to the first sand the course is North East and southwest and north-Northeast and by East and Southwest and by West and before you come within foure or fiue miles of these Sandes you shall sée some Houels and hillockes of red
Earth along the Sea side inward to the land there appeareth certaine high hilles whereof one of them lying most Northward hath a Houell striking out of the toppe thereof which séemeth to bee a blocke house being of redde Earth You may passe betwéene the first Sand and the land at seuen or eight Fadome déepe alwaies kéeping as farre from the land as from the Sand for they are a good myle distant and running about by the Sea you shall find Sandie ground round about it this Sand lyeth vnder 6. degrees and from this first Sand about 6. or 7. miles southward there is yet an other Sand and the course from this one to the other is east north-Northeast and West southwest along the coast this second Sand lyeth scarce vnder 6. degrées betwéene the which and the Firme land are 12 and 13. Fadome déepe all good ground and from the last Sand to a Créeke called Aâ—alla the coast runneth East and West and East and by North and West and by South 4. or 5. miles further forward froÌ„ this Créeke there lieth an other Créeke called Hulpulam from whence to Tanadare are about 7 miles Tanadare is a point of the land whereon there standeth a woode of Palme trees and when you are right ouer against it you shall see a white Pagode that is a Temple of the Indian Idoles and on the North side of this Pagode stand certaine Houels of white and red Earth and passing before it you shal not goe to close to the shore for there abouts are certaine Sands and beeing past this point then goe presently at 20. Fadome deepe for it is al good and cleare ground and if it should be calme there you may Anker From Tana dare to Belliguon are about sixe myles Belliguon is a verie great Creeke on the South side wherof are certaine Houels of red Earth that stand within the Creeke for that you cannot see them before you haue fully discouered the Creeke and on the North side it hath two Ilands lying close by the land on the South side of those Ilands along ther lyeth a Riffe or Sand. From Belliguon to Gualle are fiue myles all this way from the one to the other the land is altogether close and full of trees along the Sea side about halfe a mile from Belliguon to Gualle there lyeth a stonie Iland close by the land and an other on the South side of Gualle and making towards it you shall sée a high flat land full of trées and an euen wildernesse and on the North side of the bay there standeth a great wood of Palme trées vppon the Sea coast and within the Hauen you shall see a white house which is a small Chappell of the Virgin Marie passing from Belliguon to Gualle and comming right against this point on the South side towards the Bay you must put to Seaward thereby to shunne a Sand wheron you shall sée the Sea breake and to Anker you shal runne North North Northwest in such manner that you may alwaies sée certaine Cliffes that lie on the North side and inwards from the Bay you shall sée the Palme trées which will be vpon the south side towards Belliguon which lay hidden by the point there you shall finde 14. and 15. fadome water and running till you come to 13. fadome finding sandie ground you may Anker for to Seaward it is altogether stones From Tanadare to this Hauen of Gualle which are twelue miles the course is Northwest and Southeast and Northwest and by West and southeast and by East this Hauen of Gualle lieth vnder 5. degrées and 1 â— from thence passing along the coast you sayle about the Portingalles Fort called Columbo this course I haue already sufficiently declared in the Nauigation from Malacca to India therefore it is néedlesse here to be rehearsed The 20. Chapter The righr course from Malacca to Macau in China with the stretchings of the coasts DEparting from Malacca to the Straights of Sincapura and so to China you must set your course to the Ilands called Ilha Grande lying thrée miles from the Hauen of Malacca passing for more securitie without about the Ilands from those Ilands to the ryuer called Muar are thrée miles which hath for a marke a Houel full of trées on the south east side without any other high land thereabouts From the riuer of Muar to the riuer called Rio Fermoso you run along the coast Northwest and southeast and Northwest and by West and southeast and by East the course is nine miles this riuer of Fermoso is great and faire hauing in the entrie 6. and 7. Fadome déepe and also within you enter into it by the foote of a high hill on the South southeast side and it lyeth on the South side of Malacca it hath certaine bankes sticking out into the Sea from the point lying North east which is a flat plaine countrie which you must shunne From this Rio Fermoso to the Iland Pulo Picon the coast runneth the same course southeast and by East and the Iland Pulo Picon lieth halfe a mile from the coast hauing thrée Ilands by it two on the Sea side and one vpon the land side but you must not passe betwéene it and the land for there are many Sands it is distant seuen miles southeastward towards the Sea from Pulo Picon there lyeth a great and a verie high Iland with many Ilands about it called Pulo Carimon along by the West side of the same Iland towards the straight of Sabon which is the way to Sunda and the Iland of Iaua the nauigation and course whereof I will in an other place set downe therefore for this time it shall not be touched and will procéede to our matter aforesaide From this Iland of Pulo Picon to a pointe of land that stretcheth out called Taniamburo you runne East ward by the coast being about thrée miles this point maketh a hooke and from thence forward the coast turneth inward like an arme running froÌ„ thence right southward about a mile froÌ„ this point lyeth a riuer and a little mile further forward there is an other ryuer with a great mouth where there lyeth an Iland called old Sincapura being deepe and faire ground this ryuer issueth out againe in the Hauen of Iantana where Antonio Mello by chance did once enter with a ship of eight hundreth Bhares great each Bhar waighing thrée Quintals and a halfe Portingall waight came out againe at the ryuer of Iantana from this ryuer the land runneth downe towards the South as I saide before which maketh a hooke where the mouth or entrie of the first straight y t you must passe through beginneth The land on the North side of this entrie is higher then the South which is low and flat hauing a Houell of trées striking out about all the rest there is the end or furthest point of that land for that going Eastward on then you finde Ilands and stonie Cliffes which first reach
and when you begin to come neere them theÌ„ you shall keep towards Pedra BraÌ„ca and looke that you kéep half a mile from it taking heede you come not neere the syde of the Ilandes for two causes the one because the windes at that tyme when you sayle to China doe alwaies blow off from the syde of Binton which is the Monson that commeth out of the South southwest and if the winde should scant and fall into the Southeast as often tymes in those countries it happeneth being on the syde of the Ilandes you could not passe by the Riffes whereby you should bee compelled to passe through the channell that runneth betweene Pedra Branca and the Ilandes or els you should spend so much tyme in staying there and that the Monson that is the tyme of your voyage to China would bee spent the other is that if you chance to bee there with a slow wind and tyde or with few sailes spred then the streames would driue you vpoÌ„ the Riffes before you could auoyde them as it happened to the shippe of Don Diego de Meneses whose Pilot was Goâ—â—alo Vieâ—a who by the water was driueÌ„ vpoÌ„ 10. fadome where he ankered and then after he came to 7. fadom where he spent 3 dayes by ankering to get out againe for the which 2 causes I aduise you to keepe on the side of Pedra Branca or the white cliffes aforesaid FroÌ„ Pedra Branca to the IlaÌ„d Pulo Tâ—nge y t run north south north by east south and by west the course is 13. miles this IlaÌ„d is high and rouÌ„d hauing in the middle a high sharp hil ful of trées it lieth by the coast of the firm land betwéene it y e firm land there is good sayling but it is not Oorbaer this IlaÌ„d lieth with Pulo TimoÌ„ northeast southwest and are distant about 7. miles to sayle to Pulo Tinge you shall take your course from Pedra Branca a great myle Eastward and from thence North and north and by East alwaies with the lead in your hand till you be past the Riffes being at 14 fadome being as you gesse in that country you shal presently kéepe off from it into the sea being before it you néed not feare any thing but y t you sée before your eyes in this course to Pulo Tinge in the sight of the Iland there lieth 4 or 5 Ilands which shal lie on the land side froÌ„ you and when you are hard by Pulo Tinge then you shal presently sée Pulo Timon the IlaÌ„d of Pulo Timon is great high and on the side whereunto you sayl are two eares of land which are ful of great high trées to make small mastes ankers because in those countries they vse such kind of wooddeÌ„ ankers and it is commonly couered with mistes clouds and hath all ouer a cleane muddy ground therein are 2 places wher you find good fresh water one being on the side of the land in the middle of a long strand a little inward to the land where you find a good réed but wheÌ„ you come early thereunto as in the Moneth of Iune and the beginning of Iuly it is dangerous to anker there because of the west wind which at that time bloweth with great force in those countries therefore I thinke it better to run to the other place where you likewise find fresh water on the East side towards the sea ruÌ„ning right vpon the face of the Iland along by the East side and being past a certain houel that maketh a hooke you shal find a sandy Bay where you must enter into the land and when the point or hooke lieth southeast you may anker where you may lie for the Momson and there you shal haue 20 fadome déepe there is likewise great fishing for excellent good fish and in the same bay there lieth the place where you take in fresh water which runneth into the sea also on that syde you haue much better wood néerer to fetch there you ly safe from west winds on that side of the land you haue certain IlaÌ„ds along the coast from the north point of this IlaÌ„d Pulo TimoÌ„ about the shot of a great péece there lieth an other Iland and by the South point an other likewise about 3 miles south eastward ther lieth 3 other Ilands wherof y e one is great rouÌ„d y e other 2 being somwhat smaller are called Pulo Laor the Iland of Pulo TimoÌ„ lieth vnder 2 degr â…” on y e north side of the Equinoctial 12 miles northwest ward stroÌ„ it lieth the riuer Pan in the firme land ouer against the which about 2 miles to seaward there lieth a small Iland hauing an euen round trée in the middle half a mile froÌ„ it it is 6 fadom déep grouÌ„d FroÌ„ Pulo TimoÌ„ to Pulo Condor the course is North north-northeast Westsouthwest 115 miles Pulo CoÌ„dor lieth vnder 8 degr â…” it is a great IlaÌ„d with high hils hauing close by it 5 or 6 Ilands and on the northeast side it hath a smal Iland or stony cliffe which sheweth farre off like a ship vnder sayle it is ouer al good grouÌ„d at 10 or 12 fadome déepe and on the Northwest side it hath a place of fresh water it lieth north and south with the riuer of Camboia which is called the hauen of Malaios 12. miles distant but you are not sure to haue fresh water ther for wheÌ„ it is late in the yere you haue there the winds at north and northwest w t some thunder whereby you may not stay with one sayle only for that being without sayles it would strike you to ground and cast your ship away when it is early in the yeare theÌ„ you haue East winds From Pulo Timon to Pulo Condor y u shal alwaies find ground at 35 38 fadome and to hold your right course to Pulo Condor you shall sayl north north-northeast not accounting any winding of the compas for if y u should do so you should run on the south side to seaward and run by without séeing it which is an euill course for that y e winds alwaies in this course doe blow froÌ„ the side of the land and if it chance that before you sée the IlaÌ„d Pulo Condor you find y e water thicke troubled foule then cast out your lead you shal find 18 or 19 fadome water with a soft muddy ground so runne half a strike in that course til you come to 17 fadome and being there then rune north-northeast and being at 1 1 6 fadome before you sée the Iland theÌ„ hold your course East East and by north alwaies at 16 fadome déepe whereby you shall land on the south side of the Iland wher you must take héed of 2 Ilands lying 7 miles on the West side of Pulo Condor full of bushes a mile or thereabouts distant from each other and if it be possible you shall
of Enseada dos Ladroins or créek of Rouers 7. miles southeastward This Iland Sanchoan is great high and full of hils among the which there is a crooked hill with high houels on the top thereof like the ioints of a mans fingers when his hand is closed which is a sure and good marke This Iland hath many trées great creeks hayes where in times past men vsed to traffique betwéen this Iland and the Firme land lieth 4. or 5. other high Ilands without bushes or trées which lie vnder one course with the Firme land and the Iland Sanchoan in such sorte that Sanchoan maketh the furthest hook or end outward and from thence reacheth towards the land northwest and southeast so that a farre off it séemeth to bee all one land these are the first Ilands of Canton which lie vnder 21. degrees and 1 ◠from thence to Lamon you saile outward about the Ilands east north-northeast and from Sanchoan to the land there runneth 3. channels or passages which make those Ilands through the which you may passe with ships the best channel is that which runneth along by the Iland of Sanchoan which is the furthest outward to the sea of 6. and 7. fadome déepe it hath in the entry therof vpon the same Iland a small Iland full of bushes and on the northwest side lieth two great high Ilands which make the mouth or entry and at the entry along by the strand there lieth some small Ilands and hillocks before the Ilands aforesaid towards y e land lieth an other Iland making another mouth or entry betweene this and the two Ilands aforesaid from this Iland to the land is the third mouth or entry through these two entries great ships doe passe with the tides it is altogether soft muddie ground to know the Iland of Sanchoan besides the markes aforesaid or to know if those Ilands lie before or behind you must remember that Sanchoan maketh a point lying outward and that from thence you runne towards the land northwest and southeast from thence further east north east and west south west and marke the course with your compasse and you shall presently know whether you be forward or backeward and if you be so far to seaward that you sée the one coast reacheth east north east and the other northwest then you are right ouer against it by this meanes I found it out for I was the first that marked it and such as know it learned it of me The course from Pulo Caton towards China is thus you shall not saile aboue 2. or 3. mile at the furthest to seaward for the causes afore rehearsed and being past then runne north northwest or northwest vntill you finde an opening betwéene the Iland and the Firme land and as it beginneth to open then runne halfe a strike north north east towards the point of the Iland Aynon and passing betwéene the Iland Pulo Caton and the Firme land you shall keepe the same course because the streame in that monson runneth towards the créeke of Cauchinchina and with this course you shall sée Aynon being 7. or 8. miles to seaward from thence and it may bee that if you come thether at a spring tide or with a slacke winde that you will be driuen further inward when you perceiue the land then marke your compasse and if the coast reacheth east north-northeast then kéep that course vntill you thinke you to bee past it and if the coast stretch north-northeast and north east and by east as the Iland lieth then run so till you may wel discerne the land being 5. or 6. miles from thence that from thence you desire to sayle to Sanchoan then runne with the same course for halfe a strike north northeast whereby you shall sée Pulo Tio if you be 4. or 5. miles frō thence to seaward then runne northeast northeast by north and if you be but two miles from thence thē run your course for halfe a strike betwéene north-northeast north-northeast by north with this course you shal come to the Iland of Sanchoan shall sée the Iland called Do Mandoriin which is a small round and high land lieth 5. or 6. miles from the Ilands if you desire to put into the Hauen of Macau then runne north east east and by north running to seaward 5. or 6. miles from Sanchoan when you are within 15. or 20. miles of the Ilandes then you shall finde muddie ground at 25. fadome déepe when you sée the Ilandes looke well to your selfe as I saide before you must goe neere them and run along by them about a mile distant from Sanchoan to Macau are 18. miles there are fiue channels or passages the first betwéene the Iland Sanchoan the Island Vasco de Faria about 5. miles broad This Iland of Vasco de Faria lieth nearer the land thē Sanchoan hath a high pointed hil on the sea side a high round houell being betwéene it and the hill very low land so that a farre off it sheweth like two Ilands when you are hard by it and that you begin to discouer the flat land it sheweth like a channell and not farre from it towardes the 〈◊〉 it hath two or thrée small Ilands This Iland lieth north and south with Sanchoan a mile from it lieth a small long Iland without bushes which all along the Iland hath a crooked rigge or backe descending at the end this Iland is called Pulo Baby by this Iland along by the land of Sanchoan lieth a Rocke somewhat aboue the water I here place all these markes and tokens of this channell because it should the better be knowne to such as haue occasion to passe through it which they may boldly do being past the Ilands of the Iland Vasco de Faria the first that you then come to sée is in the fourth mouth or entrie which openeth not because an Ilād lieth right before it 4. or 5. miles forward lie other Ilandes along by the Iland which you shall leaue on the West southwest side all vpon a row and a farre off séeme to runne one through the other but when you are right ouer against them then they lie as I saide before they are fiue or sixe in all both great and little from these Ilands about two miles East north-northeast there lieth two Ilands close together stretching North and South by these you haue others vpon the same row towards the land all in the same strike or course in the entrey hard by those two Ilands there lieth a great high and round Iland betwéene the aforesaid row of Ilandes the Ilands aforesaid there is a good hold or opening through the which you haue the nearest way to Macau for the better knowledge wherof about three or foure miles further east north east there are thrée Ilands distant from each other which from the land all in a row doe reach into the Sea whereby they lie further outward then
the other which you passe along by so that they ly right ouer against you and when you come to the mouth or entry of Macau and begin to put into it it is altogether opeÌ„ without any Ilande to bee sayled or compassed about sayling right towards the firme lande which is 8. miles Northwarde from thence where the mouth or entry is whereby you goe to Caton by the Portingalles called Aâ— Orelhas de Lebre that is the hares eares In this entery it is 8.9 and 10. fadome déepe and if you come thether at the ebbe of a spring tide the streame runneth so strong stiffe that no wind will serue to get vp therfore it is best to anker there with all your sayles vp vntill you sée it flow running along by the row of Ilands that lie on the east side so inward shunning a rocke lying close by those Ilands aboue the water putting to seaward for that you cannot passe betweene it and the Ilands with any ship also you shall finde anoâ—â—er Cliffe vpon the west side being in the middle way séeing right before you a small and low Iland lying in the same rowe of Ilandes in the East as you goe then you are by the mouth or entrey of the second chaÌ„nell that runneth to Macau This entery reacheth East and West and may be about a mile broad you must make to that smal Iland and leauing it vpon the North side you must hold your course betwéene it and the other Ilands and so put in alwaies kéeping nearest to the small Iland where the depth will begin to lessen and much more wheÌ„ you are past it for there you haue a banke of 28 spannes of water of soft muddie ground the land lying vpon the south side of the channell is foure or fiue Ilands close one by the other which reach east and west and they haue on the north side a great and high Iland which runneth to the hauen where the Portingales inhabite and hath a créeke or bay that strecheth Northward at the mouth of this Hauen lieth a great and high Iland close by the land on the north side betwéene which and the Iland it is drie and shallow ground and before you come to this Iland there lyeth vppon the side of the north Iland a Cliffe vnder the water to seaward towards the middle of the chaÌ„nell therefore you shall hold off from this north land and put nearer to the south and when you being to discouer the Portingales towne with the Hauen where the shippes lie at anker theÌ„ you shal put to the east hooke of the entrey of this Hauen kéeping close to it till you be in where you shall find foure fadome and ½ or 5. fadome déepe shunning the west side for there it is all ouer bankes and sands and along by the point you finde muddy ground this point or hooke is a high land and from thence inward about the shot of a great peece further lieth another point of saÌ„d and from the low land runneth a banke of 18 spannes of water reaching crosse ouer to the other side as far as the first houses and before you come to it in the middle of the Riuer there lieth a Riffe therefore you must hold vpon the east side and runne along by it till you anker it is good muddie ground at foure fadome and ½ deepe The 21. Chapter The course from the Kingdome of Sion to China with the situation of the places DEparting out of the hauen or riuer of the towne of Sion or Sian you shall holde your course Westward and comming to it you shall finde a Riffe lying on the north side of the coast Hauen called Bancolea two miles from the land and betwéene it and the land there is a channell of foure fadome déepe notwithstanding you must passe without it as farre aboue it as you can this hauen of Bancosea lieth with the Hauen of Sion north-northeast and southwest and somewhat north-northeast and by east and southwest and by west and being against the coast you shall kéepe along by it for it is all good ground and when you haue past the Riffe aforesaid The Coast vpon the shore is low land hauing inward a small houell stretching North and south 4. miles from Bancosea Southward This low land maketh a point reaching outward lying vnder 14. degrées and ½ from thence forward you shall sée a great thicke land which séemeth to runne inward to the sea but before you come at it there is a riuer called Chaon at the mouth whereof stand certaine trées like palme trees and comming to the aforesaid land you shall see another great thicke land which sheweth to lie east and west inwards to the land hauing manie sharpe rockes there the land maketh a point or end which is commonly called the point of Cuy thetherto the lande reacheth Southeast this point of Cuy lieth vnder 12. degrees and â…” and betweene it and the aforesaid thicke land that lieth behind you you shall finde 11. and 12. fadome deepe with good ground when you are past or about this point of Cuy then you shall hold your course south southeast for the space of 25. miles and then you must sayle south east and southeast and by south whereby you shall see an Iland which a far off showeth like 3. Ilands being long flat ful of trees lieth ful vnder 10. degrees which will be on the east side all this way you must take care not to fall to leeward and being by this Iland aforesaid you shall run southeast and rather hold aloofe to the south then to fall to the west because of the sharpe winde which you commonly finde in that part and in this course you shall see another Iland greater then the first and reacheth East and West beeing on the toppe thicke and flatte land The West pointe a great thicke hooke pointed towards the sea side Eastwarde it descendeth towardes a black lande which séemeth to be a close and thick bushie place lying full vnder 9. degrees ½ This Iland lyeth with the Iland of Pulo Wy southeast northwest and so you must runne 25. miles Pulo Wy are two Ilandes whereof the greatest reacheth North and South hauing a high houell on the South side and on the North side two low houels with a valley in the middle thus the West side sheweth but on the south side it séemeth altogether high and rounde with a small valley in the middle making 2. rocks shewing like two men the other and the smaller Iland lyeth on the southeast side somewhat distant from the other making a channell betwéene both where you may passe through for it is fayre grounde this smal Iland on the Southeast side hath a smal Iland of stonie cliffes from the which there runneth a stonie Riffe which you must auoide for all the other places are good and faire being twelue fadome déep close by the Iland and in the greatest Iland on the south West side
there is fresh water with a sandie bay and when you make towardes this Iland comming to it you shall finde thereaboutes 14. fadome deepe with hard ground and if you find muddie grounde then you are hard by the land from Pulo Wy to the firme lande of Camboia are 7. miles this coast of Camboia is low land full of trées and along by it it is banky and muddy grounde it lyeth Northwest and southeast to a point which lyeth with Pulo Wy East Northeast and West Southwest stretching likewise the same course of the aforesaide point to the hauen of Camboia which is twelue miles distant this hauen is called Dos Malyos that is of the Malaquiters or those of Malacca lying right ouer against Pulo Condor which lyeth with this hauen or Riuer Northwest and Southeast and northwest by North and southeast and by South from Pulo Wy Northwestwarde there lyeth a great Riuer being thrée fadome déepe within the hauen on the side sandie grounde and in the middle muddie ground the Chinars that saile froÌ„ Sion to China passe by y e north side of Pulo Wy and when they are right ouer against it then they run Eastward to knowe the hooke aforesaid running the same course to Pulo Condor which they see vppon the North side when you are right against this point or hooke then you shall find ten fadome deepe muddie grounde and somewhat further 13. fadome sandie ground but you must not run nearer then this 13. fadom towards the land but rather kéep at 14. fadome for it is surer take heed of 2. Ilands that lie 6. miles from Pulo Condor which will bee on the South side and right before you you shal haue the North point of the Ilande Pulo Condor lying vnder 8. degrées and â…” and you runne with Pulo Wy East West and somewhat east and by south and west and by North and if you sée Pulo Wy on the south side and so it should be on your North side then you shall runne within a mile or halfe a mile thereof alwaies taking héede of the aforesaid Riffe of the Ilandes â—â—king your course Eastwarde to Pulo Condor with good regard of the Ilandes the Ilande to the which you shall come on the south point passing by the South side of Pulo Wy within 3. miles thereof you shall finde 16. fadome deep and keeping your course to Pulo Condor at the depth aforesaide you shall passe within halfe a mile to the south side of the Ilandes being 6. miles from Pulo Condor but rather take the depth for more securitie of scarce seuentéen fadome whereby you shal come on the South side of Pulo Condor within 3. or 4. miles thereof at the furthest and when you are in sight of the Ilands then you must put to Pulo Condor as you will leauing the Ilands on the North side if you passe on the south side of Pulo Condor to go to the firme land to the cost of Champa theÌ„ runne North Northeast and north-Northeast and by north which will bring you to the sea coast and to shunne the sands whereon Mathias de Brito fell which lie 4. miles from the land if you runne along the shore at 13 fadome then you come vppon those sandes but when you are past them all the rest of the course from Champa forwardes is farye and good ground and being in this Countrey you shall take your course as I haue shewed you in the description and nauigation from Malacca to China the sands aforesaid lie vpon the coast of Champa runne with Pulo Condor North and South and North and by East and south and by West and almost halfe a strike more The 22. Chapter Of the course from the Island Pulo Condor to the hauen of Sian FRom Pulo Condor to Pulo Wy there are about full 20. miles lying from each other East and West and somewhat East and by North and West and by south and to go to Pulo Wy hold your course right west not reckening any abatement for the yéelding of the Compasse and being founde what more theÌ„ halfe way you shal finde a banke of muddie ground of 8. or 9. fadome deepe and being northward in the sterne of the shippe you shal see the trees vpon the coast of Camboia which is a verie low lande this banke aforesaid being past it will not bee long before you shall see Pulo Wy right ouer against you and as soone as you sée it you shal make towards it on the north side you must vnderstand y t this land of Camboia maketh a point froÌ„ whence the banke aforesaid runneth of from this point to y e hauen of Sian you run along the coast north northwest by y t which lyeth many Ilands stretching along by it till you bee vnder 12 and 12. degrees and ½ In this countrie ly the most and greatest Ilandes one by the other and there make a hooke for the land hath a créeke called A Ensâ—â—da de Lian which runneth a good way inwardes and lyeth vnder 12 degrees and ½ the north point of the land of the mouth of this creeke lyeth vnder 12 degrees ¾ and the land of this point aforesaide which lyeth inwardes reacheth east north-northeast and hath many trees w t a sandy strand froÌ„ this point to sea ward there lyeth 2. high round Ilands without any trees you cannot passe beetweene the first Iland and the land for the channell or passage lyeth betweene the first and the second or the better to bee vnderstood betweene them both there is a small channell but very deep of 60. fadom water and there runneth a strong streame vnder the hight of the point aforesaid of this creeke little more or lesse about half a mile from the land on the inner side there lyeth a very long cliffe stretching as the land doth which at low water may bee seene you run from this point to the hauen of Sian along by the land north and south the Islandes aforesaide are within 10. miles of the hauen as you passe along they are not ouer great neyther haue they any trees nor fresh water and all along you find good ground till you be within halfe a mile and nearer you shall not goe neither runne in betweene them and the land but let them lie on the east side comming to Pulo Wâ— vntill the tenth of February there you find much east wind whereby the west coast lyeth like an emptie wall therefore you shal keepe on the east side of the aforesaid Ilands that ly along by the coast being sure not to put in betweene them keeping this course north northwest along the shore as I saide before and comming to the furthest pointe of the said Iland which is full vnder 12. deg without seeing any more Ilandes then bee assured that you are within the creeke of Lyon and being there you shall presentlie set your course Northwest Northwest and by North to get out of the creeke least the streame should driue you
you shal still sayl with your lead in hand and when you find 15. or 16. fadom thē you are at the end of the riffe and it may be that as thē you can not sée Pedra Branca and comming to 18. fadome then put no further to the sea and running in that sort till you sée Pedra Branca running as then to the poynt of the land that you shall sée on the land of Iantana which is the land on the North side which you shall passe along by till you come to see redde Houels lying at the Hauen of Ior and before you come to the hauen of Ior you shall hold off from it not putting into the hauen for there lyeth a Banke but you must passe the redde Houels and runne towardes the land which is a sandie strand and as you passe along to the mouth or entrie of the straight of Singapura you must be carefull that as soone as you are within Pedra Branca you runne to the land of Iantana without turning to the other side for there it is verie bad ground and the wind would hinder you to get ouer and if you desire to run on the inside of the Iland Pulo Tymon you may wel doe it The 25. Chapter The course from Malacca to Sunda lying in the Iland of Iaua Maior with the situation of the countrie SAyling from the great Iland lying 3. myles southeast from Malacca to the Riuer called Rio Fermosa your course lieth Northwest Southeast and Northwest and by west and southeast and by east which is 13. miles all this way if you will you may anker and it is not aboue 30. fadome déepe good muddy ground This Rio Fermoso lyeth on the Coast of Malacca within the entry on the Southeast side hath high land and on the Northwest side low land it is in the Hauen sixe or seuen fadome deepe when you enter into it you shall put to the Southeast syde keeping from the Northwest for ther you shall find shallowes From this Rio Fermoso to the Iland Pulo Picon which lyeth in the same Coast a myle from the land aforesayd you runne Northwest and Southeast and Northwest and by north and Southwest and by south betwéene this Iland and the firme land it is shalow groūd and the course is 6 miles from Pulo Picon to Pulo Carymon which is a great and high land with trees with some Ilands round about it you runne North and south and north and by west and South and by east and are distant 5. miles from the Iland Carymon there is about 3. miles to the coast of Samatra you must make towardes this Iland and from thence run along by it on the west syde for it is good way On the south point of this Iland Carymon lyeth certain Ilandes from these Ilandes two myles forward lieth an other smal long Iland called Pulo Alonalon there the channell is at the narrowest From this Iland beginneth the straight called Estrecho de Sabon that is y e straight or narrow passage of Sabon and being as farre as that Iland you shall hold about half a mile from it from Alonalon to the great Iland of Sabon are about 2 miles in the middle of this channel there lieth other smal Ilands that shall all lie on the East side from you hauing good regard not to fall vpon them whē you run through this channel you must be aduertised that in the middle thereof there lieth a hidden Cliffe vnder the water whereon a ship did once strike with her Ruther Comming by the Iland Alanolon on the Southwest thereof that is on the syde of Sumatra you shal see two small Ilands with an other somewhat lesse full of trées bee all rampard with certaine cliffes lying by them and whē those Ilandes are southwest south west by west frō you thē you shal hold your course South where you shall find nyne fadome water alwaies keeping off from the Coast of Sabon which is the east syde for it is shallow but run in the middle of the channel for it is good ground half a mile off from the Iland Sabon lieth a small Iland called Pulo Pandha this Iland in the middle hath a stonie cliffe and when you are so farre that Pulo Pandha lyeth Eastsoutheast from you thē hold your course southward and you shal find 9. fadome deepe running half a myle distant from the Iland of Sabon the Iland and cliffe aforesaid being past you shall find hard ground holding your course South vntill the Iland Pulo Pendha lieth northnorth east from you where you shall presently find muddy ground and from thence forward you may anker if you will and when the aforesayd Cliffe lyeth from you as aforesayd then on the West syde you shall see two Ilandes or Cliffes whereof the first hath some trees and the other which lyeth nearest to the mouth of Campar in the Iland of Sumatra hath no trées they close one to the other from thence to Sumatra are many stone Cliffes when you come to passe by these Ilandes that shall lie from you on the side of Sumatra you shall runne through the middle of the channell betwéene the Ilandes and the coast of Sabon southward as I saide before holding your course along the coast of Sabon about halfe a mile from it where you shall alwayes finde eyght fadome muddy ground vntill you come to a small Iland lying hard by the coast of Sabon hauing many Cliffes round about it and as you passe by it you shall keepe outwarde from it leauing it on the side of Sabon there likewise you haue muddie ground and the shot of a great péece further off the depthes will presently begin to lessen to seuen and sixe fadome and ½ from thence you shall runne to a point of the Island Sabon lying right ouer against one of the mouthes of Campar those mouthes or holes ly on the coast of Sumatra right in the face of this point about two bowes shot from the land there lyeth two Cliffes which at full sea cannot be séene they are called Batotinge betwéene them and the land are sixe or seuen fadome deepe and betwéene them both nyne fadome you may passe with a shippe betweene them and to seawarde from them towards Sumatra you finde hard by 12. and 13. fadome déepe to make towards these cliffes and also to passe by them you shall take your course as soone as you sée the aforesaide Islands that by the Island of Sabon being past as you do passing along by Sabon with your lead in your hand at seuen sixe ½ ◠fadom deep and thether the depths will lessen being all muddie ground which you shall haue vntill you come right against the highest houell of those that stande vppon the point of Sabon and with a point of the lande of Sumatra being one of the sides of the mouthes of Campar called As Bocas de Campar from whence the one land lyeth with the other East and West in this country are
the aforesaid cliffs of Batotinge being here the depthes will presently beginne to increase to seauen and eight fadome which depthes you shall holde vntill the Cliffes lie behinde you and from thence putting to sea towards the side of Samatra leauing Sabon side being carefull to kéepe from it for you haue nothing els in that place that can hurt you but onely the cliffes which the streames runne vnto you shall likewise take heed on both sides as wel of Sabon as Sumatra for they are all ouer from thence along the coast full of bankes and shallowes These two Cliffes aforesaid being past which you shall almost leaue behinde you you shall presently runne to the land of Sumatra with the lead in your hand not passing lesse then fiue fadome nere vnto the land nor aboue seauen fadome to seaward with your lead neuer out of hand for in this countrie you must rule your selfe more by the lead and depthes then by the compasse When you are at the end of this Iland of Sabon then you haue another Island called Pulo Dure which reacheth to another Island called Pulo Boyon then another Iland called Pulo Buron which lie so close to Sumatra that they séeme to be all one land at the end of this Iland Dure lie 3. Ilands one great and two small This Iland Dure lieth with the point of Sabon where the two small Cliffes lie north northwest and south southeast they are in distance about sixe or seuen miles with 6.7 and 8. fadome water muddie ground when you are right ouer against the Iland called Pulo Buron which lieth close to the coast of Sumatra then run southeast and southeast by south and following that course vntil you come to tenne fadome then runne Southeast vntill you come by a point of the land of Sumatra called Tanianbaro from this point to the Iland of Pulo Buron are three miles which is without the channell and when this point of Tanianbaro lieth westward frō you then run south and south and by east to the 3. Ilands called Calantigas whereof the first hath an Iland lying by it on the south side the middle Iland hath nothing at all and the third Iland that lieth most southward hath an Iland lying by it on the North side These Ilands as you passe by them shall lie eastward from you from this point Tanianbaro somewhat further lieth an other point called Tanianbaro which is very euen with the sea betwéene these 2. points lieth the Riuer of Andargyn and the aforesaid point of Tanianbaro lieth with the Ilands East and West betweene both the points are 9. miles When you sée this point then from thence forward you shall no more sée the land of Sumatra because there are many créekes from this point you make to the Ilands Calantigas Northwest and Southeast and is in length about seauen miles These Ilands lie vnder 1. degree vpon the south side of the Equinoctiall on the east side of these Ilands you haue many stonie cliffes both aboue vnder the water therefore you must put off from them to seaward for that betweene them the Iland of Linga it is very foule and dangerous if you will goe from the Islandes Calantigas to the Island Varella then hold your course Southeast and Southeast and by East whereby you shall come to it They are in distance 9. miles and in this way you shall finde seuen or eight fadome déepe and close by the land sixtéene and seuentéene fadome on the North side but on the South side it is lesse This Island hath fresh water it lieth right ouer against a point of the land of Samatra called Tanianbon from the which point to the Island are two miles and you runne North Northwest and South Southeast and you must passe betwéene this Island and the point leauing the Island to seaward On the backe bord side in the face of this point lieth thrée Islandes whereof the greatest is called Iambe but along by the land of Samatra you haue neyther Islandes nor Cliffes To runne from the Island Pulo Varella to the Straightes of Palimbon then run Southeast at seuen fadome muddy ground and with this course you shall sée the hill called Monte de Manopyn which standeth right in the face of the Island Banca When you sée this hill then you can hardlie sée the coast of Samatra because of the créekes and you shall kéepe the same course to the said hill runnning a mile and a halfe from it towards the coast of Samatra leauing the hill on the northeast side not comming any nearer to it for it hath a great Riffe lying a mile from it and when you are right against the hill Manopyn thē you are right against the mouths or créekes called as Vocas de Palimbon lying vppon the Coast of Samatra a mile from the aforesaid point of Palimbon forward there lieth a smal or thin point of land and on the south side of the same point there are many cliffes rockes about a mile into the sea al lying vnder the water which make the riffes aforesaid wherefore I aduise you to kéep at the least a mile and a halfe or two miles from it be not deceiued by the great depthes that are along by those riffes for that from many depthes you will at the last fall on ground as it happened to a ship which sailing on that side close to the Island Banca at fiftéene fadome strak with his ruther vpon the stones You must likewise bee carefull not to kéepe too neere the land called as Bocas de Palimbon or the mouthes of Palimbon for they are altogether shallowes and sandes let your Lead be still in hand and goe no nearer then fiue fadome and ½ to the land vntill you be past them nor aboue eight fadome to seaward and if you come to eight fadome then rather kéepe at lesse depth as I said before You runne from this hill Manopyn which standeth in the Iland Banca to the mouthes or creekes of Palimbon that lie on the other side of Samatra north northeast south southwest and is in course fiue miles From thence beginneth the straight called Palimbon which reacheth southeastward and sometimes eastward and in other places southward till you be past through it being past the hill of Manopyn about two miles beyond it you shall hold your course to the first mouth or creeke of Palimbon with the Lead in hand keeping a mile from it at 5. fadome and ½ and goe no nearer to it for they are altogether shallowes and sandes wherefore I counsell you not to goe nearer then 5. fadome and ½ and towards Banca not nearer then 8. fadome holding your course in this manner till you be about a mile beyond the last mouth of Palimbon being there you shall make with the land of Samatra till you be within halfe a mile thereof where th◠land about a long mile right out before you maketh a point and being
by this point you shall sée another point which is distant from the first point 4. miles and the course from the one to the other is east southeast west northwest and beeing at this second point about a mile beyond it on the same coast lieth a small riuer and betwéene this point and the riuer you runne halfe a mile of the shore or coast of Samatra alwaies with your lead in hand From this riuer aforesaid you shall put from the coast from this Riuer to another point lying 5 miles forward it is altogether bankes and shallowes with muddie ground therefore you shall still saile with your lead in hand goe no nearer then 5. fadome to the coast of Samatra for if you doe you run on ground and at this depth you shall run to the aforesaid point that lieth before you right against it on the other side of the Iland Banca hath a point or hooke of high land where the channell is at the smalest and comming by this point aforesaid you shall presently finde more depthes When you come to this point aforesaid then runne south southeast holding that course till you come to the Iland of Lasapara which lieth right before you being distant from the saide point 9. miles This Iland is small and low land being round about full of sands and shallowes and when you sée it then runne South and South and by east within two miles of the land on the south side of Samatra and sixe and seauen fadome for it is your right way and course to passe before that Iland and if you finde ten or twelue fadome then turne againe to the coast of Samatra séeking for fiue fadome that you may runne at sixe and seauen fadome and beeing there keepe that course leauing the Iland of Lasapara on the east side and when you begin to enter therein then run southward and being right against the Iland then your depthes will begin to lessen to 5. fadome but bee not abashed for it is the right depthes you find in that place and when the Iland is Eastward from you then you are right ouer against it from the Iland Lasapara twelue miles forward there is an Iland lying close by the Land of Samatra that maketh a smal créeke or bay and for a marke it hath this token that the trees thereof are higher then those of the coast and séeme little woodes you runne from this Iland to Lasapara North North east and south southwest from the which Iland there runneth a Riffe reaching two miles and a halfe into the sea therefore if you desire to saile thether being in the night time you shall run southward with your lead in hand at 8. and 9. fadome and though you come to 11. fadome yet your course is good but you shall not runne vnder 7. fadome and as you thinke you are past by the Iland then you shall take your course againe towardes the land and there you shall finde 8. and 9. fadome comming to this Iland in the daie time you shall put so far from it into the sea that you may onely sée the toppes and vpper parts of the trees and when it lieth Northwest from you then you are past the Riffe then againe runne in with the land at 8. and 9 fadome déepe as aforesaid for the right way and course is alwaies along the Coast beyond this Ilād forward there lieth a gréene creeke vpon the coast which you shall shun for there it is altogether shallowes and the corner therof towards the south hath a thick point of land that sticketh further out then al the rest that are there abouts within this hooke toward the créeke lieth a Riuer from whence there commeth a banke reaching 2. miles into the sea and is foure fadome deepe all hard sand in that countrie where I haue passed therfore I aduise you not to leaue the depthes of 8. 9. fadome which is the right course and you passe from this Iland to the aforesaid Riffe south southwest and North Northeast being distant ten miles from this point of the creeke to two Ilandes lying on the same coast of Samatra forward you run in the same course of north north-northeast and south southwest and is in course ten miles in all this way you shall finde 9.10 and 11. fadome These Ilandes are distant from the land 3. or 4. miles and comming to these Ilandes then the land and coast of Samatra maketh a thicke crooked ridge or backe and if it be cleare weather you shall sée right before you two high landes wherof one lieth southwestward from you which is the land of Samatra and the other southward which is the land of Sanda part of the Iland Iaua Maior From the two Ilands aforesaid you shall alwaies hold your course along by this crooked thicke ridge of the coast of Samatra being at the point thereof then the land beginneth againe to be low and then you begin clearely to sée the two foresaid lands Betweene those two high landes there runneth a channell or straight inward to the sea betwéene the land of Samatra and Iaua Maior which is called the straight of Sunda beeing past the great thick ridge of the coast of Samatra and comming againe by the low land then runne no longer by the coast but if you haue a good forewind then presently crosse ouer holding your course south southeast to the land of Sunda to the southeast side of a point or hooke of that land by the which lieth the way to Sunda therefore I aduertise you hauing a good forewind to crosse ouer for that if the winde should begin eyther to be calme in the middle way the tide being with you the streame would driue you to the channell which is no good course for the least depth of the channell is 40. fadome and more the streames and tydes therein runne very stiffe both out and in and if they should driue you in as the streame commeth forth being with a Northeast or east winde you should finde the waues of the sea hollow and full that no cable would be strong enough to hold against them by force would driue you out againe which would be no small labour and paine to you I say this because I my selfe haue found it so comming into it by mine owne vnaduisednes in crossing ouer to the high land lying on the side of Sunda and held our course right vpon the midle thereof but the streame draue you ouerthwart before we perceiued it therfore I aduise you that you runne southeast to it for the more you runne eastward the lesse depth you shall haue to anker in if the winde should calme and it is good ground and being by the land aforesaid close by it you shall presently sée a great flat Iland full of trées with many hilles hauing to seaward from it or toward the northeast another flat Iland and from thence to the hauen of Sunda it is
about 4. miles you shall hold your course to the Hauen along by the Iland that lieth on the coast keeping to seaward or halfe a mile from it for it is all faire and good ground at 6 and 7. fadome deepe and so you shall runne along to the end therof and being there about a mile southeastward you shall sée a small Iland full of trees which you shall leaue on the southeast side running inward from it right to a high pointed hill that standeth within the land and when you begin to come néere it then you shall see the houses of the towne which lieth along by the strand and there you may anker at 4. and 3. fadome as you thinke good for it is all muddie ground and if you desire to runne into the Hauen through a Channell which passeth betweene the great Iland and the high land of Sunda you may well doe it alwaies running along by the land vntill you be by the Hauen for you shall leaue the Iland aforesaid and six Ilands more that are somewhat further to seaward but you finde but two fadome and ½ stonie ground wherefore the way passing about is the best as I said before The 26. Chapter The course from the Hauen of Bantam to the Hauen Calapa called Sunda Calapa both lying on the north side of the Iland Iaua Maior SAyling from the Hauen of Bantam to Sunda Calapa you should holde your course betweene the little Iland and the Iland lying right ouer against the crooked point because the streames runne towardes the Channell or straights sayling about the shot of a great peece from all the Ilands or along by them for it is all good way at fiue and sixe fadome deepe muddie ground because that froÌ„ the hooke of the bow or crooked point there runneth a great banke or sand and being about this hooke you shall run 6. or 7. fadome deepe till you be a good mile from it for from this crooked point to another that lieth on the same land it is altogether bankie shallow sandie ground and to seaward from this point lyeth a long Iland called Pulo Tunda and three or foure miles Eastward from thence there lieth a whole row of Ilands both great and small which are al vnder the same course at the end of those Ilands which are foure one great and thrée smal they are ioyned together with Riffes and along by those Riffes you shall finde twentie foure twenty fiue fadome deepe and you shall leaue al those Ilandes standing on a row to seaward from you from the point aforesaid called the crooked hooke All the coast vnto Calapa runneth East and somewhat East and by south you runne along by it at 7. and 8. fadome for if you put further to seaward then the streames run too stiffe towards the straight or the channell that runneth outwardes betweene Iaua and Samatra which is against you and is of manie depthes â—oure miles froÌ„ the crooked hooke or point forward then the coast hath another point of land where right ouer against it about a mile to seaward from it there lieth a round Iland but you must not passe betweene it and the land for it is very shallow stonie ground only small fusts may passe through it but you shall runne about halfe a mile to seaward from it for it is all along nothing but stones a little mile beyond this Iland there is another Iland and then yet a little further close by there lyeth another little Iland from these two Ilandes a mile southeastward close by the land there lyeth two other Ilands betwéene the two first Ilands and these two Ilands there is a channell of 6. or 7. fadome deepe which passing through you shall runne nerest to the Ilands that lie most to seaward if you will not passe through then run about to seaward from them at 12.13 and 15. fadome déepe from this long Iland northward endeth the Ilands that lie to seaward hauing the Riffs as I said before and make a mouth or opening of a channel of a great mile long you shall here run nearest to the Ilandes that lye closest to the land for that running by to the Ilands that lie to seaward you shall presently sée the Riffes which with a low water are most part vncouered being past this long Iland the other that lieth the shot of a great péece from it as also the two that lie further forward the land of the coast that hath the point then somewhat beyond this point 4. other Ilands betwéene the which and the land you may by no meanes passe a small mile further eastward there lieth other 4. Ilands two and two together at the end whereof to seaward there is a white saÌ„d that alwaies lieth vncouered all these Islandes you shall leaue on your right hand on the land side and being on the south side somewhat past this white sand you shall sée two high hils within the land which lie east west one from the other at the foote of the east hill lieth the hauen of Calapa where you shall anker if you wil enter into the hauen being past the foresaid sands an Iland that lyeth from thence toward the land then there wil foure Ilandes lie southeastward from you which teach towards the land another close by he land then you shal take heed of a sand lying north east close by the hauen which you may alwaies see and when it is high water it is washed away by the flood you shal runne towardes these Islandes which lie to seaward from the hauen béeing day time to shunne the droughtes aforesaid The 27. Chapter The course from the Iland Pulo Timon to the Hauen of Sunda in the Iland of Iaua Maior FRom the Iland of Pulo Timon you run to the Iland of Binton to a point of land that from the same Iland runneth almost Eastward into the sea south Southeast and North Northwest and hard by this point lieth certaine Riffes of small rockes and cliffes and on the north side of this point it hath an opening or mouth wherein there lieth a great Iland with two hilles and a vallie in the middle and along by this point lesse then halfe a mile from the land there are eight fadome deepe of flatte and cleare sandy ground and hath no foulenes but the stone Cliffes Rockes that lie close by the land from this point aforesaid of the Iland of Binton to the Southeast point of the Iland Pulo Panion which hath an Iland lying to seaward from it you runne Southeast and Northwest Southeast and by east and Northwest and by West betweene this Iland Pulo Panion and the Iland of Binton lieth an opening which in the middle way hath two flat small Ilands full of trées and if you cannot passe Pulo Panion on the east side then you may passe inward betwéene it and the land it hath fiue and sixe fadome déepe good
ground and you need feare nothing but that you sée before you This Iland of Pulo Panion lieth close to the land of Binton and if you fortune to be so neare the land that you may not passe by it on the sea side then you must runne to the northwest point where there lieth a rouÌ„d Iland which you shall leaue on the side of the Iland not running betwéene it and the Iland but round about it close to the land for it is faire running so inward along by the Ilands as I said before on the southeast point of this Iland Panion there lieth many Ilands and Cliffes and two miles Southeastward from it lieth a round Iland full of trées you shall passe betwéene these two Ilands towards the Iland of Linga which is a faire cleare way and sea and if you chance to be by this aforesaid mouth or opening then you shall runne on your course outward about the Iland for it is good way from this round Iland or two miles southward lieth a stonie Riffe about the length of the shot of a great péece and hath but one Rocke that is vncouered yet you may sée the water breake vpon them which you must shun From this Iland to the end of the Ilandes of the land of Linga lying close on the East side of the same Iland you shall holde your course South and South and by East and runne Southward outward alwaies along the Ilandes which shall lie Westward from you and when you haue sayled twelue miles you shall sée right before you on the Southwest side a small round Iland lying to Seaward somewhat distant from the rest which is almost of forme like the Iland das Iarras lying by Malacca and foure miles before you come at it you shall sée two other smal round Ilands lying along by the land and seperated from the rest but not far and when you are as farre as the first round Iland béeing cleare weather then you shall sée the high land of the Island of Linga lying West Southwestward from you aboue or beyond the Ilandes whereby you passe which are all low houels and vallies and in this sort you shall runne along by the Ilands comming about thrée miles beyond the round Island you shall sée a small Island somewhat distant from the land which at the first sheweth like two Cliffes and there the land hath a point from thence running inwards making a créeke called a Enseada de Linga and when you are as farre as this small Island then West Northwestward you shall sée the high land of Linga which sheweth like two high rockes or hils seperated from each other and reach North and South that in the North hauing two toppes like a Hares eares and Westward you shall sée another Land which maketh a high crooked ridge somewhat stéepe downeward In all this way to the aforesaid round Iland you shall finde seauentéene and eightéene fadome déep hard and faire ground to the point or end of these Islands and by it you shall haue twentie eight fadome and comming by this point where you discouer the land lying West Southwest from you to goe to Pulo Pon which is an Island distant from Linga 8. miles on the North side hauing two small Ilandes and when you are on the Northeast side it séemeth to be round with a sharpe hill in the middle and from the Southeast side it sheweth two Hilles with a Vallie in the middle as in effect it is then you must runne South Southwest and being thrée or foure miles forward you shal sée the Iland of Pulo Pon lie before you in it you haue fresh water and round about it is fayre ground when you see it you shall make towards it on the West side and halfe a mile from it you shall finde 15. fadome deep and being by it runne South and south and by East with the which course you shall sée the hill of Manopijn lying vppon the point of the Islande Banca where the straight of Palimbon beginneth and the seuen Ilands called Pulo Tayo shall lie southeastwarde from you which are distant from Pulo Pon 7 miles and if in this way you find your depthes to be aboue ten fadom then you are on the East side and hauing ten fadome then you are 6. or seuen miles from Banca and finding 8. fadome you shall not be long before you sée the land of Sumatra and as soone as you sée Manopijn then runne within two miles thereof before you enter into the straight or channell in the same manner holding your course to the mouthes or créekes of Palimbon towards the coast of Sumatra shunning a great créek lying Northwest froÌ„ y e mouthes of PalimboÌ„ vpon y e same coast of Sumatra which hath a verie great hauen and entrie whereby many shippes haue béene deceyued that entred therein it hath no shallowes and presently as you passe along the coast you shall sée the lande thereof stretching south southwest from thence forwarde you holde your course to Sunda as in the voyage from Malacca to Sunda and Iaua is alreadie set down therfore it is not necessarie to rehearse it againe The 28. Chapter The course along the coast of Sumatra fâ—oÌ„ the outside beginning at the fâ—rthest point lying vnder fiue degrees on the North side of the Equinoctiall to the straight of Sunda and so to the Islande Iaua Maior with the situation of the coasts BEing by the furthest point or ende of the Island of Sumatra on the out side then you must runne south along the coast it is a very high and pleasant country to behold with many great créekes and Bayes along by the coast From this first further point called Achein 12. miles forward to another point that reacheth into the sea the coast runneth South and from thence to the sands called Os Baixos de Tristan de Tayde that is the sandes of Trystan de Tayde you must runne along the coast Southeast and southeast and by south the course is fiftie miles by these Ilandes of Tristan de Tayde there are many sandes and shallows that lie round about them on the west Northwest and North sides with many Ilandes and Cliffes on the same sides these Ilandes aforesaid are somewhat like the Ilandes of Pulo Sambilon lying on the coast of Malacca to seawarde from these Ilands of Tristan de Tayde there lyeth 2. Ilandes called Ilhas d'Ouro that is the gold Ilandes whereof the nearest lyeth at the least 10 or 12. myles distant the other 12. or 13. miles further into the sea they lie vnder two degrées and ½ on the North side of the Equinoctiall line from thence you runne to the straight of Sunda hauing many Ilandes all along as you passe as first thrée Ilands lying vnder a degrée and a halfe on the southside of the Equinoctiall East and West from these Ilands lyeth a point vppon the coast of Sumatra called Cabo das Correntes that is the point of the streame because
there the streame runneth very strong towardes the Southwest wherefore there is no other remedy then onely to runne close by the shore if you desire to goe to the straight of Sunda you must be verie careful for there are so many Ilandes along by the coast that they are not to be numbred from the Iland of Tristan de Tayde to the Ilandes of Manancabo are about 100. miles and your course is Northwest and southeast somewhat Northwest and by North and southeast and by south you must run between the Ilandes As Ilhas d'Ouro and the lande by which course you shall come to the poynt O Cabo das Correntes which is verie high running into the sea further then all the rest of the land but you must not go too neere to the point for there are certaine sandes and cliffes sticking out from it this point lyeth vnder one degrée and â…” on the South side of the Equinoctiall I set down no other marke to know the countrie of Sumatra because the streames draue to seaward without all these Ilands so I could not take a better course then to put to the Iland called Ilha d'Ouro de Manancabo that is the golde Iland of Manancabo and I fel on it vpon the sea side running for the space of 4. or 5. daies along by it it is a verie high and faire Iland to behold so that you may easily iudge well perceyue that it hath Gold it is altogether of a smooth stéepe grounde along by the sea side it is about 10. or 12. miles in length you run by it North south and somewhat north and bâ— West and south and by East it hath on the sea side 5. or 6. Ilandes about a myle and a halfe distant from the land vnder thrée degrees which is the height that I found but they are distant from the firme lande of Sumatra 8. or 9. myles the Riuer of Manancabo lying on the land of Sumatra right ouer against this countrie I think it to be a verie great riuer for from thence there runneth a great streame and much wood and other trash driueth from it at the least 10. or 12. miles into the sea The best marke we found vpon this coast of Sumatra was that we neuer left the sight of land but ran along by it for by that course you come to the Iland Ilha de Ouro scarce to 3. and 3. degrées and ½ I write this because you shall not trust to the running of the streame that draweth Southwestward as I said before from the Iland Ilha de Ouro you run to the straight of Sâ—nda southeast and Southeast and by south and being past Ilha de Ouro there lyeth two Ilandes which reach North and south one from the other in the same course with the Island of Gold about 5. or 6. miles nowe to runne to the mouth or entry of the straight of Sunda you must not leaue the coast of the firme land hauing good respect to the Ilandes and cliffes whereof there are very many lying by it that you can hardly know where to find y e mouth of the straight but onely by the knowledge of the Islande which is very high lying right ouer against a point of the Iland of Sumatra on the north side this firme land of Sumatra endeth there where with the Iland of Iaua Maior it maketh the straight it hath on the Northwest side of this straight two or thrée Ilands lying about a mile from the land and vpon the Ilandes that lie néerest to the lande there was once a shippe taken with French men the great shotte being kept by the kinges of the Islande of Banda and Calâ—pa and aâ— mile southwarde from the lande lyeth the Iland that hath a high sharpe pointed hill as I saide before and on the North side of this high sharp hil or Iland are 4. Ilands whereof one is verie high reaching north-Northeast and southwest they lie somewhat further from it that is by the aforesaid Ilands close by the point on the north-Northeast side betweene al these Ilands the land there is a great créeke of manâ— hidden cliffes lying vnder the water whereof some are vncouered and thinke not to enter into this créeke vnlesse it be with a Fuste or a very small ship for it is better to runne towardes the Iland lying on the south side thereof along by the point which you neede not feare for it hath nothing that can hurt you and then you shall presently sée lying before you on the north-Northeast side a poynt of lande which sheweth to haue 2. or 3. Ilands at the end thereof along by this point lyeth the mouth or entrie of the straight of Sunda where you must passe through this point reacheth North and south hauing in the North a high houell the south side being the ende of the same land close by the mouth of the straight for a better marke Northeastward from you you sée a long Iland and on the southeast part a high land which land lyeth aboue Bantam a hauen in the Ilande of Iaua where the Portingalles lade Pepper which groweth is gathered in that Ilande and behind the aforesaide high lande lyeth the towne of Bantam and before you come to the said land that lyeth aboue Bantam you shall in the East Northeast perceiue two or thrée Ilands and if you desire to go to Bantam you may passe betweene these Ilands but I once againe aduise you of the Iland lying in the mouth or channell or straight of Sunda aforesaide which is for a marke of the said straight being very high and deepe withall and hath this token that when you are past or about the first point or hooke you may then anker at 20. and 25. fadome deepe as you haue occasion vnlesse it be close to the land where there lyeth many white stones and rockes and further to seawarde it is altogether muddie grounde at 20. and 25. fadome but it is best for you to anker as neere the lande as you may for your best securitie for there are many stiffe blastes that come out of the land this high Island or poynted hill lyeth vnder fiue degrees and ½ for there I haue often taken the height of the sunne as I lay at anker and the mouth or entry of the straight of Sunda lyeth vnder y e same height to sea warde you haue these Ilandes as you passe to the mouth or entry of the straight the first Ilandes lying West to seaward from the aforesaid pointed high hill or Iland and West Southwest or seuen miles from thence there is a rowe of Ilandes with certaine Cliffes lying about them and Southward other sixe or seuen miles there lyeth other high and great Ilands and also Southwestward from thence there are other Ilandes betweene all these Ilandes there are many channelles which are so narrow that men can hardly get out of them the best channell to runne through I founde by the aforesaide high pointed
right ouer against it in y e Ilande of Banca there lyeth an other hooke or point of land where the channell is at the narrowest it is from the one land to the other about three miles from the first point to the second the course is North and South from the seconde poynt sixe miles forwarde there is another point vppon the coast of Sumatra which you must runne with the other poynt North Northwest and South southeast and betwéene them both it is altogether bankie and very shallow muddie ground which reacheth also about by the middle way of the channell being aboue foure miles in length along by the coast of Sumatra to a Riuer which you shall sée and being as farre as the aforesaid point be not negligent in casting forth your leade and there you shall come to fiue fadome muddie ground but runne no lower for then you shoulde presently bee at foure fadome you must rule your selfe according to your depthes alwaies holding your course on the coast of Sumatra not passing aboue seuen fadome and when you see the aforesaide Riuer and beginne to bee neere it then your depthes will presently begin to increase running close by it vntill you bee right against it being within halfe a mile of the point foure miles from this third point lyeth yet an other point which lyeth with the third point East Southeast and West Northwest holding your course along by the coast within halfe a mile of the lande at seuen and eight fadome déepe it is altogether to the fourth point muddie ground from this fourth point to y e first mouth or creek of Palimbon called A Premeira Boca de Palimbon is about two myles and you runne East and West and East and by South and West and by North and being about a mile beyonde this fourth point aforesaide you shall keepe off from the coast to seaward to shun the mouth of Palimbon aforesaid running two miles from it because of many sands and shallows that are thereabout alwayes with the lead in hand not running aboue sixe fadome néere the land to be the more assured for from 5. fadome you come presently to foure and then on ground and runne not too néere towardes the side of the Islande Banca for there you find stones and rockes whereupon the Iunco that is the shippe of Antam de Payua did runne which was at fiftéene fadome and strake with his rother vpon stones cliffes therefore I aduise you not to runne aboue 8. fadome nor vnder sixe or fiue fadome and ½ from the second mouth or creeke called A Secunda Boca de Palumbon close by the third mouth for when the hill of Manopiâ—n that is the point of the Iland Banca lyeth full Eastward from you then you shal crosse ouer kéeping your course two miles from it to auoide a Riffe that lyeth southeast from it being in this parte whereby the hill of Manopiâ—n lyeth southeastward from you then you shal run North and north-Northeast by east by y e which course you shal see 7 Ilands lying altogether by the country people called Pulo Taye which lie about 15. miles from Manopiâ—n these Ilands shall lie on the southeast side from you being right against these Ilands you shal see a little Iland lying in the north-Northeast which hath 2. houelles in forme like two men it lyeth about seuen miles froÌ„ the aforesaid Ilandes is called Pulo Pon. From these Ilands aforesaid then your course lyeth along by this Iland and if it be cleare wether beyond this Iland you shall perceiue the IlaÌ„d of Lingâ— which is very great hauing two high rockes lying north south from each other on the south rocke vpon the North poynt thereof it hath a high sharpe point with two houels stiking out like hares eares in this course you shall find 9. or 10. fadome water all muddy ground About 5. or 6. myles Northeastward from these aforesaid Ilands there lyeth an other Iland hard by the Iland of Banca you shall see 2. or 3. Ilands and wheÌ„ you see them then passe not by them for they are the Ilandes of Pulo Tayo which you séeke being by these IlaÌ„ds of Pulo Tayo as I said before you shall doe your best to runne closer to them then to the Iland Pulo Pon holding your course north and north by east whereby you shall see the Ilande of Binton and Pulo Panyon which is hard by on the East point making a smal channel betweene them both From this Iland Pulo Panyon about two miles southeastward lyeth a round Iland full of trees you may passe betwéene both the Ilandes or outward about the round Ilande for it is all faire and good ground shunning a riffe lying in the South about two miles from the rouÌ„d Iland wherevpon you shal sée the sea breake it is about the length of the shot of a great péece being beyond this Iland then runne North whereby you shal see Pedra Branca that is the white stone or cliffe which in the course from Malacca to China we haue oftentimes spoken of from thence forward you shal hold your course as I haue set it downe in the description of the course from Malacca to China therefore here again néedlesse to rehearse From the Iland Pulo Tayo aforesaid to the aforesaid Iland Pulo Panyon it may be about 37 miles litle more or lesse The 30. Chapter The course together with the descriptioÌ„ of the Iland of Canton with all the coasts hauens and pointes of the kingdom of China to Liampo Nanquin with the situation and stretchings of the same IN the description of the nauigation from Malacca to China we haue shewed the entrie of the Channelles of the first Ilandes called Canton lying vnder 21. degr â— which is the Iland called Ilha de Sanchoan and the other lying to landward from thence as also the IlaÌ„d of Valco de Faria you must vnderstand that from this Iland Sanchoan which as I said is the first furthest to the sea ward to a point lying 12. miles from the Iland Lamon you runne without all those Ilands eastnortheast westsouthwest these Ilandes reach about 38. or 39. miles along by the Iland of Sanchoan and from this Iland to Lampacon are 11. miles and in the hauen of Macau eighteene myles and from Macau to the end of the Ilands are twentie one miles these Ilands lying from Sanchoan to Macau from the seaward vpon the row are many and close one to the other which farre off séeme to be all one land from theÌ„ce forward they begin to lessen and to separate one from the other whereby they may easily be perceiued to be Ilands all this way to the end of them to seaward from them you need not feare any thing but that you see before your eyes onlie that you haue 10. or 12. Ilandes or stony cliffes lying 10. miles from Macau forward to seaward from an Iland betwéen the which Iland and cliffe
you may well passe running along by the Iland for it is a faire and great Channel or if you will you may passe to seaward without the cliffes if you desire not to runne between them you shall holde the course as I heere set downe Thorough the Channell that is betweene these Ilandes called As Ilhas de Sanchoan or of Canton and fourteene miles North-northwestward from the Iland Sanchoan there lyeth a poynt of land which reacheth from thence to the hauen of Comaye also from thence the land runneth East for the space of fyue miles where it maketh an end reaching from thence foure myles inwarde towardes the North from whence againe it putteth outward to the East to Macau in this land that stretcheth North there is a small Creeke from whence you runne Eastward to Comaye it is much sayled by the Lanteas and Bancoins which are the barks and Lighters of China that carie the Marchandise and goods aborde the Iuncos or shippes that come thether from Sian to take in lading this land maketh an Iland called Taaquinton three miles beyond the aforesaid small Creeke lyeth one of the mouthes or entries of the Riuer of Canton which is called Camon it is a verie good entrie for that through it the great Bancoins or Chinish Lighters doe passe to the Towne of Canton Beyond this mouth or entrie of Camon lyeth the Hauen of Pinhal to the seaward and close by the entrie thereof lyeth a sand which you must shunne and 2. miles beyond this hauen of Pinhal there is the other mouth or entrie where you put into Canton with small Lanteas and Bancoins which by the Portingales is called As Orelhas de Lebre that is the Hares eares because that inward to the land it hath two high and sharpe pointes of land like a Hares eares a little within this entrie lyeth a riffe which may easily be seene from thence to the Hauen of Macau are about three myles you runne along by the land thorough a small shallow Channel which is but a fadome and a half deepe at high water the West poynt of Taaquinton aforesayd lyeth North and South with the middle of the Channel from the entrie of Sanchoan and the Iland of Vasco de Faria This Ilande of Vasco de Faria reacheth Eastward like Taaquinton and they lie north and South from each other This entrie or Channel which both these Ilandes make is faire and good muddie ground therein to anker and you anker close by the Iland of Faria in the midde way where it is good fresh water from the East point or hooke of this Ilande aforesayd to the poynt of Taaquinton there is a Banke of three fadome deepe muddie ground the deepest part thereof is by the Iland of Faria aforesaid and being past that you haue more depthes if you desire to sayle from the Iland of Sanchoan to Macau you haue two wayes whereof the safest is outward through the mouth or Channel betweene the Iland of Vasco de Faria running to seaward along by the Ilandes like those that come outward from the sea the other way is East through the Channell of Taaquinton and Vasco de Faria and béeing at the end thereof about foure miles Northeastward you shall see the hauen of Lampacon which is two great and high Ilandes with manie trees lying East and West The mouth or entrie of this hauen which is betweene the Ilandes aforesayd hath within foure or fyue fadome déepe of verie soft muddie ground therefore it is hard ankering there and besides there runneth a great streame at the entrie on the west side it hath a great Iland or stony cliffe right in the middle of the mouth such as desire to enter on the west syde of this Hauen must runne between this great Cliffe and 3. Ilands there you find a bank of 8. spannes of water muddy ground on the South part of these 2. Ilands there is an other great high Iland which reacheth north-northeast southwest betwéen this Iland and Lampacon you may passe through on the east side of the mouth or entry of the hauē of Lampacon lieth a great and high Iland reaching north and south the south point of this Iland lieth East and west with the East poynt of the North Iland of Lampacon and the chānell that runneth betwéene these 2. Ilands which reach Northward it is déepe and faire hauing about the length of the shot of a great péece in breadth right on the East point of the south Iland of Lampacon lieth a round stony cliffe and somewhat eastward lieth a great and high Iland reaching on the north side east and west and on the west side northwest southeast the channel which this stony cliffe maketh is faire and déepe from this stonie cliffe South-eastward ther is an issue or going forth reaching inward to sea al sandy ground with 3 fadome déepe through the which al the ships do passe that come from Lampacon and desire to be outward what way soeuer they go for on the west side it is shalow as I said before Frō Lampacon 7. miles eastward lieth Macau and there is a row of Ilands in the same course of Macau al these Ilandes ly on your south side and from thence to the firme land are 5. or 6. miles this gulf or space betwéene the Ilands the firm land as also from Lampacon to Macau is altogether an open sea hath no more but 2. or 3. Ilandes yet it is all ouer bankie ground for the déepest part therof is but 2. fadome which reacheth about a mile néere the firme land and the Channell which runneth from the sea to the mouth or entry of the riuer of Canton called the hares eares runneth along by the Ilands of the hauen of Macau but returning backe again to the Iland of Vasco de Faria comming right ouer against the end thereof there you haue an other high round Iland and betwéen these 2. Ilands you runne through to sea ward and beyond this Iland there is a row of other Ilands which reach to the mouth or Channel where you passe through when you come out of the sea to Macau and lie Eastnortheast all this Channell or passage that runneth betwéen them out of the sea is faire and good way and there is nothing to be feared but that you sée before your eyes you must run along by these Ilandes leauing them on the south side on the north side hauing the Ilands of Lampacon and when you are right against them northeastward you shall sée an Iland that hath a point of land of very white sand to the which point you shal goe for frō thence to the Iland of Lampacon there is a sandie banke the déepest part thereof being along by this point by the which you shal run along within the length of a shot of a great peece and when you are past this point run Northeast and then on the Northwest side there wil be a great high Iland which lyeth
vnder 29. degrées and ◠accounting for one mealetide thirtéene miles so that I gessed as then to be 25. myles from China On Sonday after noone we held our course in the same sort East and East and by South for all that euening and the night following till the next day at noone with a still winde and water and had no Sunne to take the height but I made my account of eightéen miles for a meale tide at halfe a strike to the East and East and by North the wind being scant South From Monday at noon we still had a calme South wind which continued so that euening and all night and about Tuesday morning the wind was somwhat fuller till noone whē I tooke the height of the Sunne and found vs to be vnder 29. degrees and ¾ running East and East and by South for the space of 22. miles From Tuesday at noone being vnder the height aforesaid I willed them to saile east hauing the same wind but somewhat calmer all that night to Wednesday at noone and then we began to sée driuing in the sea some Sea-scumme or Cuttle bones hauing sayled fiftéene myles making my account to be yet 30. miles from the Island Tanaxuma hauing neither Sunne nor Starres to take the heights From Wednesday at noone the wind began to blow somwhat full South Southwest and because it was signified vnto me that the streames in that countrey ranne towardes the Island of Lequeo and perceiuing likewise in some places a certaine yellowe skumme driuing vpon the water which appeared vnto vs like ripe Limons I willed them presently to holde East Northeast and about euening wée sawe many signes of land as péeces of réedes risen and such like things At night I badde them runne East and East and by North but the first watch béeing done when the Chinish Pilot should watch his course hée had gone a great way out of the course hauing runne Eastward till the morning when againe I willed them to sayle East and by North the winde béeing as it was till Thursday at ten of the clocke and then although it was darke and close weather wee beganne to sée a land that séemed verie cloudie and couered with dampie mistes lying Southeast from vs and were about thrée myles from it Along by the same lande there lay two Islandes wée holding our course in the same sort vntill by the first land Eastward wee sawe another great high and long lande and at the end of the aforesaid high land Eastward wée sawe two other Islandes whereof the one was verie great stretching Northeast and Southwest and the other close by it stretching North and South being the smallest with many pointes On the North side of this small Island about a mile from thence there are fiue small Islands or stonie Cliffes vpon a rowe from the first Island that we sawe which is the last Island of those that are called As Sete Irmaas that is the seuen sisters lying on the north-Northeast side to the aforesaid small Island with many pointes it may be about sixe myles Eastward as we were right against the aforesaid first Island of Stonie Cliffes it might bée about fiue houres after noone hauing run as we thought since wee had sight of land about twentie and foure miles The Thursday aforesaid in the morning wée tooke the height of the North Starre being vnder thirtie degrees and ⅙ Comming within two myles of the Island that wée saw first of the Islands of stonie Cliffes wee ranne Northeast and Northeast and by East and when wee were right against it whereby it laie Southward from vs béeing about thrée myles from it on the North side thereof wée sawe another great high and long Iland with many trees which as wée learned is called Icoo it reacheth East and West and wée were about three miles from it but by reason of the darke weather and mistes wee could not discerne it and comming somewhat néerer to it wée sawe another Island lying close by the West point of the aforesaid Iland beeing lesse than the other and because wée were by the aforesaid West point betweene both wee were fully determined to runne through the channell that shewed betweene the said two Islandes but because there was no man in the shippe that had any knowledge thereof fearing Riffes and shallowes wee durst not aduenture but wound vp to the East point to passe by the winde about the high Island running as much as wée might with a Southerly winde hauing great waues that put vs to the lande and so wee sayled East Southeast hauing yet about two myles to passe by the Island but night came on beeing verie darke so that wee could discerne no land although wee were close by it and to keepe from it wee ranne the same course till about one of the clocke after midnight then the moone shined yet wée could not see the Island but made Northward towardes it with fewe Sailes to the Island of Tanaxuma which according to my account should lie right before vs wherewith wée passed ouer the rest of the night till the morning when we sawe the Island Tanaxuma that laye right before vs beeing about two myles from it it beeing verie cloudie and wée made Northward towardes it to passe by the West side thereof but wée could not doe it by reason that the winde was Southwest and wee were by the South point thereof running along by the East side about halfe a mile from it This Island reacheth North and South beeing long and lowe ground hauing white sandie strandes with a verie gréene countrey of valleyes it hath many Pine trees but they stand scattering from each other and verie open it is about seuen or eight myles long hauing in the middle way on the East side close by the land an Island or stonie Cliffe which farre off sheweth like a Foist vnder Saile This Island lyeth vnder thirtie degrees and ½ right in the middle it is all saire and cleare ground From this Island of Tanaxuma Northwarde wée sawe a verie great and high lande reaching East and West about eight miles making as it seemed on the same coast Northeast and north-Northeast and by North from Tanaxuma an opening which is the mouth of the creeke called Xabuxij This Créeke hath for a marke that the lande on the East side thereof runneth all stéeping to the hooke or point of the Creeke beeing a flatte ground and on the West side the land is as high as the first that wee sawe lying North and South with Tanaxuma This coast aforesaid may lie distāt ouerthwart from the Island of Tanaxuma about seuen or eight myles From the North point of this Island wee made towardes the Créeke and béeing in the middle of our way the wind fell West Southwest whereby wee were enforced to lye by it the weather béeing calme so that the water that with the flood ranne Eastward draue vs off that wée could hardly get the Hauen but the ebbe that
Islands and great Rockes reaching from the land to seaward Within these Islands and stones lyeth the Hauen of Tanora and to put into it you shall take your course towards the end of those Islands and stones that reach to seaward from the land When you are right against the end thereof then Northeastward from you to Sea-ward there will lye another Island or stony Cliffe You shall runne within this Island and betwéene it and the Land there is a great Créeke where you may anker at fiue and twenty fadome déepe if néed be but there is not the right Hauen but when you are about the Islands and stones that lye outward to Sea then you shall presentlie runne along betwéene a point of Lande Northward on the right hand and the Islands into the Hauen that you shall sée lye open without feare and being about this point of land you shall presently sée a Creeke stretching Northward inwards and then you shall put to that point of land which will bée on your right hand where you may fréely enter for it is foure fadome déepe all muddy ground and anker by the East land shunning the West From this Créeke of Tanora forward you runne Northward along the coast which is the land of Fiungo and Bungo all faire and cleare ground hauing nothing thereon to feare then that you see before your eyes and eightéene myles further you shall find a very great Island that will bee on the East side from you which is the land of Toca and reacheth East and West and East and by North and West and by South about fortie myles long comming out by Sacay and Miaco The Southside of this Island is faire and cleare along the which you runne to Sacay betweene this Island and the coast of Bungo on the West side thereof there is a straight or passage of foure fiue or more myles broad and such as will goe to Bungo must alwaies kéepe along by the coast of Tanora and Fiunga shunning the coast of Toca But returning to the coast of fiue and twenty degrées ½ beyond the Island of Lequeo Pequeno as aforesaid If you desire to saile to the Island Firando you shall runne from thence in the aforesaid course of Northeast and Northeast and by east to eight and twenty degrées and ¼ and being there kéepe Northeast by the which course you shall see two small long bare and broken Islands lying North and South with each other on the South side hauing two Islands or cliffes halfe a mile distant froÌ„ each other These two Islands aforesaid lye vnder one and thirtie degrées and ¼ Thrée or foure miles Northeastward from these Islandes lyeth an Island or stony Cliffe clouen in the middle hauing vpon it foure or fiue sharpe points or toppes when you are right against the aforesaid Island then you are yet tenne myles from the coast of Iapon Westward and running the same coast Northeastward you shall goe right vpon a very great high Island called Coiaquijn which lyeth East and West with the hauen of Angone being three or foure myles distant from the coast of thrée or foure myles long on the East side towards the Land it hath manie Islands and stony Cliffes If you chance to fall within the Island finding your selfe by the coast of Iapon whereby you cannot passe without the Island then take your course inward betwéene the Land and the Island without all the Islands and Stones about the length of the shotte of a great Peece from it but goe not neare the coast for that from the North Land there is a Point that reacheth to the other side Being past the length of the Island along by the Islands and stony Cliffes as I said before you shall presentlie put along by the Island outward to Sea-ward whereby Northward you shall sée the Point of Lande aforesaid which hath some Cliffes and Riffes within the which Northward lyeth the Hauen of Amacusa This point of land lieth right ouer against another point of lande that sticketh out from the Island lying North and South with each other and when you haue past beyond this point of lande then you shall hold along the coast about a mile from it You runne along by this coast from the one point of lande to the other North Northwest and South Southeast and if you passe without the Island of Coiaquin you shall take the same way béeing past and about it to come vnto the coast and so runne along by it as aforesaid From the aforesaid point of Amacusa that hath the Cliffes and Riffes thrée or foure miles forward there is another great and high point of lande in the same coast and beeing past it you shall sée a great opening or entrie of a Channell which is called O estrechio d'Arima that is the Straight of Arima within this straight lyeth two good Hauens the first called Xiquij which is one of the best Hauens of Iapon This Hauen lyeth about halfe a mile from the entrie inwarde on the South side and the right hand Westward at the end of a great Créeke which hath a harbour for all windes with foure or fiue fadome déepe muddie ground but in this Hauen three or foure Portingales were slaine I thinke it happened by their filthie pride and presumptuousnesse for in all places they will be Lordes and masters to the contempt and embasing of the inhabitants which in all places will not be endured namely in Iapon being a stubborne and obstinate people But to to the matter On the North side of this créeke on the land lying on the other side there lieth a high round Island and hitherto it is all ouer faire and cléere sea and ground To put into Arima you shall goe towards the North Lande for on the South side as soone as you are past the Creeke of Xiquij you haue two stones and thereabouts it is all ouer full of riffes and other filth This straight aforesaid as you first enter into it reacheth Eastward and then turneth Northwarde and along by the point where it turneth northward there runneth strong streames and so stiffe that if you be not carefull it will turne the shippe about and put it backe againe if you haue not a stiffe forewind to breake the force of the streames Being about this point aforesaid on the same land there lieth a very good Hauen called Cochinochy or Cochinâ—quyn and then the Hauen of Arima whereof the Straight receiueth the name and lyeth halfe a mile Northward from Cochinochy beeing a Creeke which is open for an East wind and without any defence for foule weather Somewhat further lyeth the Hauen of Simonbaia that hath thrée Islandes which make a harbour against the North wind but at low water the shippes lie drie In this Straight there are no other Hauens that are safe and good for All windes but onely Xiquy and Cochinochy as I said before From this Straight to the Island of Firando along the coast there are many
by the Island of Firando which is on your West side and is a verie great and long Island and sheweth on that side whereunto you saile with a great high Houell in the middle way vpon a point sticking out of the same Island when you are close by the same Island you shall runne along by it where you shall find an opening stretching inwards like a riuer you shall passe about a mile beyond it where you shall haue a small Créeke or Bay called Cochyn wherein you shall enter vntill you finde twelue fadome deepe and there anker and although there you lie open to the South winde yet the water goeth whole beeing there you shall send either by water or by lande to the towne where the Hauen is for certaine Foists or Barkes that may bring you into the Hauen which Hauen lyeth somewhat further for the entrie thereof is something dangerous because of the great streames that haue their Current therein If you desire to saile into this Hauen when it is almost high water haue care for the wind is strong at your entring and when the water beginneth to ebbe then it helpeth to bring you in then you shall runne in such maner along by the Island as I said before and being past the créeke of Cochyn to the first point of lande that you shall come vnto that sticketh out from the same Island from the which point Northward there iutteth two stonie Cliffes you shall goe neare the stonie Cliffes the better to get into the Hauen and you shall presently sée before you on the side of Firando a great and high Island full of trées when you sée it take your course right vpon the West point of the same Island vntill the saide Island lyeth wholly vncouered to Leeward from you whereby presently you shall sée inwarde the point or end of the towne and when you beginne to see the houses then put somewhat neerer to it right ouer against the aforesaid Island on the South side and the left hande and there the Island hath a small loâ— poinâ— of lande comming from a high hâ—uâ—â— and stretcheth into the Sea from the which point there runneth a Sand or Banke therefore you shall put towardes the side of the houses or end of the towne to kâ—pe out of the streame and when you are out being in calme water if the winde be not good then anker and from thence be rowed in either with Foists Barks or your own boat West West Southwest into the Hauen All this description and course of Nauigation is in breefe to conclude that when you come to the coast of Iapon you shall leaue all the Islandes that lie along vpon the coast on the East side and vpon the right hand and runne without them and the Islandes lying to Seaward from thence whereof the first beginneth from the end of the Island of the row called Saquyn and the long Island Caroxyma that lyeth further forwarde which reach North and North and by West from the ende of the rowe and the two small Islandes with two other small Islandes or Cliffes lying further forward and are seuen in all leauing them all on the left hand or the West side with the which course you shall goe directly vpon the Island of Firando as is before mentioned The 33. Chapter A voiage made by a Portingale Pilot with a Soma that is a Chinish shippe from Macau or out of China to the Island of Iapon and the countrey of Bungo with the scituations of the places along the course THe ninetéenth of Iune béeing Saterday we departed from the Island called A Ilha das Outeas lying on the West side of the issue or chanel of Macau running outward to sea putting out at the place where the ships of Malacca doe vsually enter but because we could not get aboue the Island called A Ilha grande dos Ladronis that is the great Island of théeues lying four miles East Southeast to Seaward from the Islande and the Hauen of Macau therefore wée ranne to Leeward thereof About the length of the shot of a base from it there are two Islands lying somewhat distant from each other with a very small channell running betweene them thorough the which they passed with Bankoâ— or Chinish Barkes From thence about halfe a mile Northward lieth another long Island full of trees and bushes and when you put in there on the West Southwest side in the middle of the channell there lieth a stone which is couered with the Sea Sixe miles East Southeastward from these Islandes lyeth the Island of Tonquian which is a high and long Island full of trees and bushes and close by it on the sea side it hath nine or ten Islandes or Cliffes and because wee could not take the height to passe betweene the Islandes and the Cliffes which is a faire good channell wée passed to Leeward between it and another Island about a small mile Northward from thence which is a great Iland and there lie two Ilands or cliffes the greater hard by it and the other further off which we left on the left hande running along by the Island of Tonquian where it is all fair ground Which Island on the point that lyeth East north-Northeast on the land side hath a sandie Bay which is a very good Rode for the Monson of the South windes When wee were out beyond that Island then wee helde our course East Southeast vntill wee were as farre to Seaward as the furthest Island and being in sight thereof wee tooke our course East and east and by North for threescore miles till wee were vnder the height of the Island Lamon which course we helde thereby to shunne Rouers and Theeues who at that time and in those countries were continually risident making warre against the Portingales of Macau and yet wee had the firme Land still in sight I meane the toppes of the Trees and Bushes that stoode vpon the lowe flatte Lande and comming to the coast of Lamon although wee sawe it not wee presently ranne north-Northeast by the which course wee had the sight of the high lande of Chabaquon lying on the coast of China and beeing there wee found much badde water and hard streames and at the last wee espied the Varella or stonie Rocke that standeth aboue the Hauen of China seeing nothing else but high hilles and from thence forwarde wee sawe no more of the coast of China and running in that course of Northeast which from Lamon wee alwaies held wée perceiued the Island of Lequeo Pequeno or Small Lequeo which was at the fourth mealetide after our departure from Macau for wée espied it on Wednesday in the morning and ankered eight miles from it towards the coast of China beeing on the Southwest point thereof This Island Lequeo Pequeno stretcheth Northeast and Southwest and Northeast and by North and Southwest and by South it is a very high Island and about fifteene or sixteene miles long the furthest point
land The seuenth of Iuly being sunday we had a calme and somtimes but not much Southeast and South Southeast winds holding our course East Northeast north-northeast and north-Northeast and by North at 24 and 26 fadome water and as soone as we had past the Island of Lamon we presently had small thinne white sand vpon the ground with some shels being in the morning about seuen miles from the land of Chincheo and saw the Island that is like the Island called Ilha dos Lymoins that is the Island of Lemmons lying by Mallaca and somewhat further wee saw a thinne Lande with a sharpe point standing vpon it which is said to bée a Varella do Chinchon that is the marke or Rocke of Chinchon being vpon the eight day which was munday the next night following wee had a calme wherewith the wind came North being somewhat cold with some shoures of rayne but with a South-east winde we had no raine yet in the night time we had two claps of thunder out of the South-east with lightning out of the Southeast and North parts The ninth being Tuesday wee had the height of the sunne at 23 degrées and ½ in the night hauing had the winde East Southeast with a good gale and all night wée lay driuing without sailes with an East and East Southeast windes and a good gale casting out our Lead and found twenty and foure twenty fadome déep once hauing eightéene fadome where wee found small white Sand with some shels In the morning very earely we had a north wind wherwith we wound eastward hauing nothing but the Foukesaile and the Misen vp vntill euening and at the depths aforesaid wée tooke in our sailes minding to driue the next day we saw land which wee had séene the day before and it lay Northward from vs and halfe a point North and by West The eleuenth being Thursday wée tooke not the height of the Sun because wée lay driuing without sayles with an East and East Southeast windes the waues comming Southeast our Shippe winding Northeast this was by night but by day wée had a Northeast and north Northeast wind in such maner that somtime we kept on the one side and sometimes on the other as wind and weather serued at twenty and foure and twenty fadome deepe small white sand and sometimes eightéene fadome the night before we had much lightening out of the West and South parts being the thirtéene day of the new moone and the day before wée had the heigth of the Sunne at 23 degrées and ½ The land we saw we could hardly discerne but we supposed it to bée the land we had séene the other day The twelfth day being Friday wee tooke not the height of the Sunne because wée lay driuing without sayles with an East South-east wind in the night time and in the day wée had it north-North-east at twentie and foure and twentie fadome déepe and sometimes eightéene fadome with small thinne white sand the ground at foure and twenty fadome being somewhat greater sand with some she is when it began to be day we were as we thought about fiue or sixe myles from the land and the night before wée had much lightening round about vs and in the morning some shoures of raine without wind the skye being thicke and close whereby it seemed the weather would chaunge About euening we had a Southeast wind presentlie changing South South-east wherevpon we let fall our sailes holding our course North-east and North east and by East and also East Northeast but most part Northeast so that the depths began to bée greater and were fiue and thirty fadome with small white sand the Moone as then being at the full and the waues alwayes running out of the South-east and with that winde wée sayled for the space of fiue daies together The thirteenth being Saterday wée tooke the height of the Sunne at foure and twenty degrées that night running East Northeast till morning then sailing East and East and by north and found wâ— had sayled twenty myles being eight myles from the coast of China and in the morning we saw land vpon the other side the ground on that side was white thinne and some blacke sand and about sunne setting we cast out out Lead and found fiue and thirtie fadome déepe with very fine black sand The fouretéenth being sunday we took the heigth of the sun being scarse fiue and twenty degrées hauing a southwest wind with very good weather holding our course Northeast and Northeast and by North all that night at seuen and thirty fadome déepe with very thinne sand some black muddy ground and at the last watch in the morning wee found muddy ground at the same depth of â—7 fadome mixed with blacke sand and when day began to appeare we saw Lande being part of the coast of â—hina being about four fiue or six miles from it and we discouered the Lagarto with the two sisters that is the cockodril Islands so called and so we cast out our Lead and found two and forty fadome déepe muddy ground and somewhat sandy and y e same day also we saw the Island Fermosa lying by Lequeo Pequeno or little Lequeo and then the winde séemed as though it would haue blowne fuller The fiftéenth day being Munday wée tooke the height of the sunne at 25 degrées and 1 â— and in the night we had the winde North with very good weather running about to the northwest and we ran East north-northeast north-Northeast north-Northeast to east wheÌ„ it began to be day we saw land being the end of the Island Fermosa or y e fair Island which is a long and low land broken or rent in the middle which séemeth to be a breach but it is nothing els but as I said before and presently after eastward we saw another higher land which is Iands called Ilhas dos Reâ—s Magos that is the Island of the thrée Kings we passed along by about 7. or 8. miles from them and that night we had 34 fadome déepe and desiring to know what depth wee found being in sight of the land aforesaid wee found aboue 40 fadome the aforesaid land lying east Southeast from vs being muddy ground that day we had a sharpe wind of the Monson but it helde no longer then til euening and then it was calm againe and so held till morning and then we had it Northwest so running about from the West till it came Southwest and continued till night and then it was calme being Tuesday The sixtéenth being in sight of the Islands aforesaid the same day wee had the heigth of the Sunne at 26 degrées lesse ½ degree and the end of the great Island lay east and east and by south from vs and the little Island east southeast This little Island is higher on the south southwest side then on the Southwest side and the point or hooke of y e southwest part hath a breach or rent to the which the néerer you approch
then most certainly you are by the land When you sée the land of Sumbor then in the night time you musâ— runne South Southwest and by day make towardes the land thereby at times to kéepe somewhat to Seaward from the land thereby to shun the cliffes called As duas Irmaas or the two Sisters which lie far inward to sea as also the Island called do Baboxyn which lieth crosse ouer against you being distant from the firme land to Seaward about foure or fiue miles stretching Northwest and Southeast you runne along all the coast of Sumbor Northeast and Southwest and somwhat north-Northeast and by North and Southwest and by South When you are past the aforesaid Island of Baboxyn then runne the course aforesaide for the space of thrée or foure miles and from thence West Southwest whereby you shall come to the Island of Chinchon where you shall finde sand vpon the ground which in all the coast aforesaid you can not find with 18. or 20. fadome water From the Island of Chinchon to the Island of Lamon you shal hold your course Southwest or as you thinke good and when you are right against the Islandes or Cliffes called Os Ilhas de Ruy Lobo you shall find vpon the ground great sand with shelles and from thence to Lamon which is twelue miles you finde the like by the Island of Lamon you find shelles and blacke sand with oyster shels among it if you chance to be in that countrey by night runne not vnder 22. fadome water for that along by the riffes it hath 21. and 22. fadome with shels and blacke sand vpon the ground and runne still Southwest without leauing that course and if it chance before day or by day to be close aire running Southwest and that you haue small thin white sand then you are by Lamon and then hold your course west Southwest and so you shall goe right vpon the middle of the Island called Ilha Branco and from thence runne West vnto the Channell whereby you goe vp to Macau The 40. Chapter Another voiage made from the Hauen of Langasaque to Macau which is from Iapon to China with certaine descriptions and accidents which happened by the Island Guâ—to with the description of the Hauens thereof accomplished in the yeere of our Lord 1584. by a Portingale Pilot. DEparting out of the Hauen of Langasaque the 25. of Februarie Anno 1584. and passing along by the Island of Facunda wee had a West Northwest wind so that wée ankered the 26. day it began to blowe so stiffe that wee were constrained to put for harbour into Tomache The 27. wée hoised anker with an East Northeast and an East winde and cleare weather and comming to the Island dos Cauallos we had a South wind againe wherewith we made back againe to Facunda from whence we set out The eight and twentie being Friday wée set saile againe from Facunda it beeing thrée dayes before the newe Moone with a cold East Northeast wind And beeing within thrée miles of the Island dos Cauallos we had a Southeast wind running on the Southwest bough all that day and the winde began to bee somewhat coole and then we gessed it to be thrée or foure miles beyond the Island of Guoto but in the morning watch wee first espied the point of Guoto being a houell lying on the Northwest part thereof there we had a sharpe wind and it began to rise high out of the South Southeast as much as the ship with all his Sayles might heare wee let the maine saile vp the better to make way and not long after the winde came about to the Southwest and West Southwest with two thunder claps and much lightning wherwith wee hoped it would haue beene still weather but it was not so whereat wee woondered On Saterday by day light wee were right ouer against the point of Guoto almost vpon the end of the Island that lyeth Northwest being about two myles from the lande hauing with the West Northwest winde a crosse storme with the waues of the sea out of the southwest which were verie hollowe and mightie high which tossed the shippe monsâ—rouâ—ly although the winde was ouer much but onely the force and power of the waues troubled vs most which fell behind at our sterne for there wee found a very strong streame and because the wind was slack we doubted we should not get aboue the point of the Island neither from the one side nor from the other for wee had the crosse vpon the Island At the end of this Island we saw another Island of low land being about two miles long and was about a mile and a halfe distant from Guoto some of our ship affirmed that there was a verie good Hauen running in on the one side and comming out againe at the other wherefore we determined to put in there for our better securitie as we did and we ranne in West Northwest At the entry there of it hath a verie great houell with two cliffes lying on the Southeast side of the point The Island that lieth without is on the left hand till you be about a mile from it betweene which and the lande it is all faire you may boldly goe as néere the Island of Guoto as you will and néed feare nothing but what you see before you The entry of the Hauen reacheth Northwest and Southeast hauing within it a great Bay which is all ouer verie déepe from twentie to thirtie fadome water and nothing therein to be feared From this Island to the land you haue all ouer the depthes of thirtie and fortie fadome and yet I haue tried it from the halfe way to Guoto and found eightéene to thirtie fadome with sand and shels on the ground in some places hauing good ground inward in some places you haue Sand and in some places muddie ground froÌ„ thence wée were brought out againe by Scutes about halfe a mile forward so that after that the North wind serued well to saue vs and to driue vs forward from the point lying on the South side which hath certaine stonie Cliffes wée ranne along the land Northeastward and it fell out well for vs for therby we had twentie or thirtie Scutes of the Island that for 20. taes Chiâ—â— money holpe vs well and pulled out our beat we likewise gaue them 50. taes and about 20. depesas to haue our shippe ankered and stayed but they asked vs 30â— whereupon we sent one of our Portingales on land whome they helde for a pâ—wâ—e although by certaine practise we got him out of their hands againe and when after that wee séemed to complaine they cried vs mercie and sent him backe againe although wee vnderstoode verie well that they were our friends by force as perceiuing they had no meanes to hurt vs because wee coulde helpe our selues without them but we marked so much in them that if they coulde haue hindered vs they would not haue failed to doe it or else wée must
Lequeo Pequeno also y e time and the weather will shew you what you should doe when you are past Lequeo Pequeno or before if it so fall out you must seeke to know the land for it is necessary for you to see it because of the Island Lamon as also not to kéepe too farre to Seaward You runne along by the coast from Sumbor to Chinchon Northeast and Southwest and somewhat north-northeast and by North and Southwest and by South but not much And when you are right ouer against Chinchon and that by marking the land or by the heigth of the sunne you know it being foure miles from the land you must hold your course southwest so to go without the Island of Lamon and if you desire to passe within the Islands you may well do it for it is faire ynough and you néede feare nothing But if you feare to mâ—e Lamon then it is better to runne as aforesaid for then you shall be farre inough from the Riffe of Lamon which is very dangerous There you must haue great foresight for when you are past Lamon then you must holde your course to the Island of Lanton The Islandes you sée before you come to Lamon are called Os Ilhas de Ruy Lobo that is the Islands of Ruy Lobo from the which that which lyeth Northeast is the smallest the other being somewhat greater Vpon the greatest are séene certaine Bushes from thence to Lamon are seuen or eight miles on the Sea side it is twentie fadome déepe with shels on y e ground from thence you shal run southwest and holde a little southwest and by South and if it be in the day time you shall presently see the Islands lying at the end of the Riffe of Lamon from whence the said Riffe hath his issue reaching a myle and a halfe or two miles with this course you shal make good way but if it be night you must looke well to your selfe And running the aforesaid course of Southwest you must keepe to Sea-ward from the stones of Lamon and doe 〈◊〉 best to passe by in the day time and 〈◊〉 you are past the Island of 〈…〉 â—sently make towards the 〈…〉 passe along by it From 〈…〉 15 miles from thence the coâ— of 〈…〉 land reacheth Northeast and Southwest and from thence East Northeast and West South-west to the Island 〈◊〉 Branco which lyeth distant from the coâ—st about fiue miles vnder 22 degrees and â— right ouer against the creeke of Fuâ—â—da de Bona Ventura that is the creeke of good fortune you may passe close by the Island Branco both on the sea side as you thinke best and being past that Island 〈◊〉 the Islands of Canton lye on a rawe From this Island Branco to the Island De Sanchoan are fifty miles When you are past Ilha Branco then you must runne west Southwest from Branco to Macau are foure and twentie miles that is twelue miles before you enter into the chanell that runneth betwéen the Ilands and twelue miles from thence to Macau you shall séeke to enter by the first channel you find by the which lyeth certaine high round Islands which will be on the Northeast side of you and on the Southside it hath two Islands whereof one is very high and plaine stéepe ground on the sea side therof hauing a stony cliffe and being ouer against those high bare Islands on the Northside thereof you shall see a channell which I neuer passed but leauing the aforesaid Islandes on your starboord and so running Southwest you shall presently sée the mouth of the chanell which you must passe through although it sheweth narrow notwithstanding it is very good for I haue run into it by night you must as I saied before leaue the great Island to seaward from you and runne in with the flood west west and by north and west Northwest and so you shall go right to Macau also the wind and weather will shew you what you shall doe And when you come from Iapon right ouer against the cape De Sumbor being fiftéen miles to seaward from it then cast out your lead and you shall find fortie and fiue fortie fadome water muddy ground with many streames of foule water and when you sée the land then you must run along by it to the last Island of Chinchon which lie eight miles into the sea whereby you shal find boies of nets and fuycken with whings and Flags which the fishermen of that Countrey haue set vp for markes From thence to Chincheon are twelue miles Right ouer against those boyes with whings and flags vpon them lieth a town called Guara from that Towne forward you must hold towards the land and to know the Somes which are Chinish carnels and Barkes vsed in those countries they beare but one saile Now to make toward the Lande as you would you must runne West you must likewise knowe that the Varella of Chinchon that is the banke or marke of Chinchon is a high Lande lying along by the entry of Chinchon on the Southeast side hauing a high land reaching southwest stéeping downeward reaching ouer towards an Island lying thrée or foure miles inward to Sea along by the point of the Varella lyeth an Island about a mile distant from it from the which runneth a riffe of sand at lowe water being two fadome déepe reaching about the length of the shotte of a great Péece towards y e other Islands abouesaid lying right ouer against the entry which in length reacheth East and West in the middle hauing a sharpe Hill and Southwestward the aforesaid land of Laylo runneth very lowe being there then you are close by it and you haue nothing els to do but passe about the point and anker at four fadome muddy ground on the north-Northeast side lie certain Islands close by the Point of Laylo and two miles to Seaward from it you haue twenty fadome water y e water of that country being very blew from thence to Lamon 3. or 4. miles from the land you passe not aboue the depth of 18. or 20 fadome and being past Chinchon towards Lamon You shal find thin smal sand vpon the ground with some shels being right ouer against Chinchon or towards the northeast pou shal find muddy ground with the same depth of 18 and 20 fadome and right ouer against Lamon you haue some blacke sand vpon the ground The 43. Chapter How you shall runne in out and through the channell betweene the Islands and cliffes of Macau with all the markes signes and tokens thereof so to saile into the Hauen of Macau IF you desire to saile out of Macau you must vnderstand y t as soone as you hoise anker in the road where the ships lie which is right ouer against the Bulwarke of Gaspar Borgies you shal presently sée in the Northeast a white vlacke standing vpon the hil and presently after towards the East you haue two houels which with the Hill of the white vlacke
in great danger The 45. Chapter Of the tides and increasing of the waters of Malacca IN the entry of the Hauen of Patane lying on the East side of the country and coast of Mallacca to the Island of Bintao which lyeth by the straight of Singa Pura vnder the Equinoctiall line the streames doe alwaies runne Southward in the months of Nouember and December From the Island Pulo Condor lying right against the hauen and land of Camboia to the Island Pulo Timao lying on the East side of the coast of Malacca at such time as you come froÌ„ China holding your course halfe a strike from the south the streams run towards the Island Borneo and being halfe a strike Southwestward then the streames run towards the coast of Pan which lyeth on the coast of the East side of Mallacca From Pulo Condor to the Island Pulo Sesir lying right against the coast of Camboia the streames run Eastward and by Pulo Sesir in the way towards China the streames runne to the coast of Champa and from the Falce Varella which is distant from the right Varella fiftéen miles lying on the coast of Camboia y e streames runne Eastward about fiue or sixe myles from the coast which is at the end of Iuly and in the month of August In the Monson of the South windes when you saile from Mallacca to China the streames from the Gulfe of Pulo Catao and the Island Aynao runne to the créeke of Enseada da Cauchinchina vntill the last of December and from Ianuary forward then the streams in that Gulfe and countrey runne towards the Sands that lie ouer against the coast of Champa in Camboia from the other side and the later it is in the yeare from the Month of Ianuary forward the stronger they run towards the sands In the Monson of China when you saile from China to Mallacca then the streams run very strong from the Island Pulo Catao to y e Island Puto Cambir both lying on the coast of Camboia or Champa It happeneth oftentimes that from the eight and twenty of Iuly to the fourth of August from the Varella to Pulo Catao you haue calme sea and then you haue the Terreinhos which are Windes blowing from the land out of the West and northwest and the Viracoins which are winds that come from the Sea out of the East Southeast and east Northeast being in the North they presently change into the south whervpon it becommeth calme till the Terreinhos or land winds doe come again and thus they hold about two miles from the coast and not further for they are winds that do only blow vpon y e coast as in other places it is already sufficiently declared in speaking of the Terreinhos and Viracoins When you saile by the Island of Lequeo Pequeno or small Lequeo towards the land of Bungo in the Island of Iapon the streames in that country do run eastward to the Island of Tanaxuma From 30 degrées Northward a little further theÌ„ to the middle way to Iapon the streames from that country to the coast of China run northward towards the créeke A Enseada de Nanguyn in the monson of the south and southwest winds In this monson of South and Southwest winds the streams from the Island Pulo Tayo lying by the Island Aynao in the coast of China run Southwestward to the Islands of Sanchoan and Cantao The 46. Chapter Of the tides both for ebbe and flood by the daies and houres of the Moone in the haueÌ„ of Macau in China with the height of the same Hauen found by experience of an expert Pilot. THe 19. of September I marked the course of the Tides of China within the hauen of Macau it being Full Moone and I found it to be full sea about halfe an houre and somewhat more after eight of the clocke in the morning which I tryed at the Full moone to sée if it would agrée with the New Moone The 3. of Februarie An. 1585. I tooke the height of the Sunne which as then was about 13. degrées from the line and I found that the Hauen of Macau lieth full vndec 22. degrées 1 â— and as then I likewise tried the tides of the same hauen and found it to be full Sea a little after 12. of the clock the moone being thrée daies old in such sort that by the same account with a new Moone it is full sea in that hauen at ten a clocke and 2 â— in the morning which I also tried by the new Moone The 16. of Februarie Anno 1585. I marked the Tides within the Hauen of Macau it being then full moone and found the first day of the full moone that it was high water at eleuen of the clocke and a halfe before noone The 2. of Iune Ann. 1585. I marked the tides in the Hauen of Macau found it to be full Sea iust at 12. of the clocke at noâ—ne the moone being foure dayes old so that after the same account it is full sea at nine of the clocke in the morning béeing new moone but these Tides of China fall not out iustly vnlesse it be foure daies before and fiue daies after the changing of the Moone for then there is as much water as vpon the third day which I affirme to be most true because I haue often and many times tryed it to be so The cause is for that before it it is all Islands and Channels so that when the waters beginne to fall they ebbe not aboue thrée houres but with an East wind they ebbe with a greater course The 47. Chapter Of the signes and tokens of the tides waters and windes vpon the coast of China and in the way to Iapon IN the time of the monson of the South and Southwest windes it is most certaine in the whole coast of China and the way to Iapon that when the winds of the monson blow and from thence run into the East that they turne not againe out of the East into the south but from thence into the North and hauing continued there for a certaine time they turne againe into the east and from thence into the South if it be a Northeast wind then it turneth often times into the Southwest and not into the East but not often but the surest is as aforesaid It changeth also often times from North to South and not into the East which is very common and when the Sunne setteth and hath some red carnation cloudes about it and that many beames issueth from the Sunne in such manner that it séemeth to blaze then it is a signe of great stormes and tempests Likewise in the rising and going downe of the Moone if it sheweth in the like maner it is a signe of stormes and tempests When the Sunne riseth so faire and cléere that you may in a manner sée into it and perfectly discerne the compasse thereof then it signifieth good weather The like doth it signifie in the setting of
way to know the land which you shall alwaâ—â— find at Macau if you find them noâ— in â—â—dia For other necessaries concerning to shippe you shall finde of all things sufficient in China The gaines and profits of all sortes of wares of China are verie great except rawe silke whereby they haue verie little gaine for there they rather desire it readie spunne and although there should bee much solde there yet that were no reason or cause why they should carrie much thither because it should not hinder the voiage and trafficke of them of Iapon into the East Indies for there are many other kindes of wares great store to carrie thither wherein there is much more profit then in silke Of the common wares and merchandises that the Spaniards in the Islands of Lucones or Phillippinas doe buy and yet they buy them much dâ—â—er there then they should buy them in China in newe Spaine they gaine but sixe for one and in Peru ten for one whereof they are sure for that the Portingales that haue gone from hence thither in the ship that came hither haue gained so much by the wares they carried with them that the time that they stayed for their returne séemed to them a thousand yéeres and as they repoâ—t the Viceroy of Noua Spaigna and all the other gouernours and gentlemen of the countrie haue a great desire to vse the trade and doe much looke after it Many are of opinion that to saile that way to Peru it would be a longer voiage for that when you are at Acapulco you must take another way and hold another course of 700. miles long from Acapulco to the Hauen of Callande Lyma which is the Metropolitane Cittie of Peru lying vnder ten degrées on the South side of the Equinoctiall and you should make your voiage in the same yeere and further it is a countrey of great charges and expences whereby you should loose and spend all that you should gaine more in that countrey then in new Spaine because the countrey of newe Spaine is more aboundant in all kinde of necessaries victuals then Peru and therefore your charges is lesse The 52. Chapter The true and perfect description of a voiage performed and done by Franciscus de Gualle a Spanish Captaine and Pilot for the Viceroy of new Spaine from the Hauen of Acapulco in new Spaine to the Islands of Iuâ—ones or Phillippinas in the Hauen of Manilla and from thence to the Hauen of Macau in China and from Macau backe againe to Acapulco accomplished in the yeere of our Lorde 1584. THe tenth of March in the yéere of our Lord 1582. wée set saile out of the Hauen of Acapulco lying in the country of new Spaine directing our course to the Islands of Lucones or Philippinas West Southwest running in that manner for the space of 25. miles till wee came vnder 16. degrees that so wée might shun the calmes by sailing close by the shore From thence forward we held our course West for the space of 30. miles and being there we ranne West West and by South for the space of 1800. miles to the Island called Ilha d'Engano which is the furthest Island lying in the South partes of the Islands called de los Ladrones that is the Islands of Rouers or Islas de las Vellas vnder 13. degrées and ½ in latitude Septentrional and 164. degrées in longitude Oriental vpon the fixed Meridional line which lieth right with the Island of Tercera From thence wée held our course westward for the space of 280. miles till we came to the point called El capo de Espirito Santo that is the point of the Holy Ghost lying in the Island Tandaya the first IslaÌ„d of those that are called Philippinas Lucones or Manillas which is a cuntry with few hils with some mines of brimstone in the middle thereof From the point aforesaid we sailed West for the space of eighteene miles to the point or entrie of the channell which runneth in betwéene that Island and the Island of Lucon This point or entrie lieth scarse vnder 12. degrées All the coast that stretcheth from the entry of the chanell to the point El capo del Spirito Santo is not very faire Eight miles from the said point lyeth a Hauen of indifferent greatnes called Bahya de Louos that is the Baye of Wolues hauing a small Island in the mouth thereof and within the Channell about halfe a mile from the end of the said Island lyeth an Island or Cliffe when you passe by the point in the middle of the channell then you haue 25. fadome déepe with browne Sand there we found so great a streame running westward that it made the water cast a skum as if it had béene a sand whereby it put vs in feare but casting out our Lead we found 25. fadome déepe From the aforesaid entrie of the channell North and North and by East about ten miles lyeth the Island of Catanduanes about a mile distant from the land of Lucon on the furthest point Eastward and from the same entrie of the channell towards the West and Southwest lyeth the Island Capuli about sixe miles from thence stretching West Southwest and East Northeast beeing fiue miles long and foure miles broad and as wée past by it it lay Northward from vs vnder 12. degrées and ¼ and somewhat high lande Foure miles from the aforesaid Island of Capuli Northwestward lyeth the thrée Islands of the Hauen of Bollon in the Island of Lucones stretching North and South about foure miles distant from the firme land about halfe a mile whereof the furthest Southward lyeth vnder 13. degrées In this channell it is twentie fadome deepe with white Sand and a great streame running Southeast wee passed through the middle of the channell From this Channell wée held our course Southwest and Southwest and by West for the space of twentie miles vntill wee came to the West end of the Island of Tycao which reacheth East and West 13. miles This point or hooke lieth vnder 12. degrees and 3 â— In the middle betweene this Island and the Island Capuli there lyeth three Islands called the Faranias and we ranne in the same course on the North side of all the Islands at the depth of 22. fadome with white sand From the aforesaid West point of the Island Tycao to the point of Baryaâ— it is East and West to saile about the length of a mile or a mile and a halfe we put into that channell helding our course south and south and by west about three miles vntill we were out of the channell at sixteene fadome deepe with halfe white and reâ—â—sh sande in the Channell and at the month thereof whereof the middle lyeth vnder 12. degrees and â— and there the sâ—reames runne Northward The Island of Bayas stretcheth northwest and Southeast and is lowe land whereof the Northwest point is about three miâ—es from the coast of Lucon but you can not passe between
a great number of whale fishes and other fish by the Spaniards Atun whereof many are found in the coast of Gibraltar in Spaigne as also Albacoras and Bonitos which are all Fishes which commonly kéepe in Channels straights and running waters there to disperse their séed when they bréed which maketh me more assuredly beléeue that thereabouts is a Channell or Straight to passe through Being by the same course vpon y e coast of new Spaigne vnder seuen and thirty degrées and ½ wee passed by a very high and faire land with many Trées wholy without Snow and foure miles from the land you find thereabouts many drifts of roots leaues of Trées Réedes and other leaues like Figge leaues the like whereof wee found in great abundance in the countrey of Iapon which they eat and some of those that wée found I caused to be sodden with flesh and being sodden they eat like Colewortes there likewise wee found great store of Sea wolues which wee call Sea dogges whereby it is to bée presumed and certainly to bee beléeued that there are manye Riuers Bayes and Hauens along by those coasts to the Hauen of Acapulco From thence wee ranne South-east Southeast and by South and South-east and by East as we found the wind to the point called El Cabo de Saint Lucas which is the beginning of the land of Califfornia on the Northwest side lying vnder two and twenty degrées being fiue hundred myles distant from the Cape De mendosino In this way of the aforesaied fiue hundred myles along by the coast are manye Islands and although they bee but small yet without doubt there are in them some good Hauens as also in the Firme Land where you haue these Hauens following nowe lately found out as that of the Island of Saint Augustine lying vnder thirtye degrées and ¾ and the Island called Ilha de Sedros scarce vnder eight and twentie degrées and ¼ and the Island lying beneath the Saint Martyn vnder thrée and twentie degrées and ½ all this coast and Country as I thinke is inhabited and sheweth to bee a verye good Countrey for there by night wee sawe fire and by day smoake which is a most sure token that they are inhabited From the Point or hooke of Saint Lucas to the South-east side of Calliffornia wee helde our course East Southeast for the space of eightye myles to the point called El cabo de las corrientes that is the point of the streames lying vnder ninteene degrées â…” and running this course Northward about a mile from vs we sawe thrée Islands called las tres Marias that is the thrée Maries running the same course About foure miles from the other Islandes there are other Islands reaching about 2. or thrée miles All this way from the mouth or Créeke of California aforesaid for the space of the said 80. miles there are great streames that runne Westward From the point or Cape de las Corrientes wée ranne Southeast and sometimes Southeast and by East for the space of an hundred and thirtie miles to the hauen of Acapulco In this way of an hundred and thirty miles being 20. miles on the way we had the Hauen of the Naâ—iuidade that is the birth of the Virgine Mary and other eight miles further the Hauen of Saint Iago or Saint Iames and sixe miles further the sea Strand called la Playa de Culyma that is the Strand of Culyma All this coast from California to the Hauen of Acapulco is inhabited by people that haue peace and traffique with the Spaniards and are of condition and qualities like the people of the other places of new Spaine The Conclusion of the Author of this last Voyage ALl this Description and Nauigation haue I my selfe séene prooued and well noted in my Voiage made and ended in the yéere of our Lord 1584. from great China out of the Hauen and riuer of Canton as I will more at large set it downe vnto your honour with the Paralell and Meridian thereof as God shall permit me time and leysour whome I beséech to send you long and happy daies and the same haue I truly translated out of Spanish into low Dutch verbatim out of the Originall coppie that was sent vnto the Viceroy of the Portingall Indies The 55. Chapter The Description of a Voyage made by a Pilot called Nuno da Silua for the Viceroy of new Spaine the 20. of May in the yeere of our Lorde 1579. to the towne of Mexico from whence it was sent to the Viceroy of the Portingall Indies wherein is set downe the course and actions passed in the Voyage of Sir Francis Drake that tooke the aforesaid Nuno da Silua by the Islands of Cabo Verde and carried him along with him thorough the Straightes of Magellanes to the Hauen of Guatulco in newe Spaine where he let him goe againe NVno da Silua borne in Porto a Citizen and inhabitant of Guaia saith that hée departed out of his house in the beginning of Nouember in the yéere of our Lorde 1577. taking his course to Cabo Verde or the gréene point where hée ankered with his shippe close by the Hauen of the Island of Saint Iames one of the Islands of Cabo Verde aforesaid béeing the nintéenth of Ianuarie in the yéere of our Lorde 1578. and lying there there came sixe shippes which seemed to be English men whereof the Admirall boorded his shippe and by force with his men hée tooke him out of his shippe bringing him in the boat aboord the Admirals shippe leauing some of his best men aboord his shippe and although the fortresse of the Island shot foure or fiue times at them yet they hurt not the English men who hauing done seâ— saile from thence to the Island of Braua that is the wild Island taking with them the shippe of the saide Nuno da Silua béeing there they filled certaine vessels with fresh water from thence holding their course inwarde to Sea hauing first with a boat set the men of Nuno da Siluas shippe on lande onley kéeping Nuno da Silua in his shippe as also his shippe with the wines that were therein and Nuno da Silua saith the cause why they kept him on boorde was because they knewe him to be a Pilot for the coast of Brasilia that hée might bring them to such places in those countries as had fresh water Béeing put off from the Island of Braua they helde their course to the lande of Brasilia which they descried vpon the first of Aprill vnder the height of 30. degrées and without landing or taking in fresh water they held on their course to the riuer Rio de la Plata that is the riuer of Siluer lying vnder fiue and thirtie degrées little more or lesse where they went on lande and prouided themselues of fresh water From thence they helde on their course till they came vnder nine and thirtie degrées where they ankered and béeing there they left two of their sixe shippes
much different and from the matter taken in hand Touching the orientall parts neuerthelesse because it is vnknowne to our countrimen as also commonly sailed by the Portingales and Spaniards whose voyages and trauels I haue herein onely set downe it will not bee out of the matter but rather very necessary to be ioyned therevnto and as I thinke will bee wel accepted and esteemed off insomuch as that at this time our countrey men doe vse to Trafficke and trauell into those countries hoping it will bee an occasion of further increasing and augmenting of their trauels to the honour praise and glory of the Gospell of Christ and all Christian Princes and to the entiching and welfare of the Low countries The 65. Chapter The Nauigation from the Point of Cabo Verde to Brasilia with the right course and knowledge of the Land and Hauens of Brasilia to the Riuer called Rio de la Plata with the situation thereof SAyling from Cabo Verde that is the greene point to Brasilia you must saile south southeast Southeast and Southeast by South and being vnder fiue or sixe degrées or wheresoeuer you bee you shall take your degrées on the Southside and lessen them as much as you can and you must remember that as soone as you haue the generall winde blowing from the South-east then you shall runne Southwest and West Southwest and if the winde bee South and Southwest you must runne South-east but not too farre for it helpeth you not for that the more you kéepe that course the more way you loose and you shall vse all the meanes you can not to runne vnder the coast of Guinea nearer then sixtie or seuentye fadome from the Sandes called Os Baixos de Sant Anna for the winde will helpe you in such manner that you may sayle towards the Point of Brasilia And if with this course you will sayle to Pernanbuco It being from the Moneth of October forward and that you fall to Loofeward of the Island of Fernan de Noronha being vnder eight eight degrées and ½ You must runne West towards the Lande and if you sée Lande vnder eight degrées they will bee white downes and then you are on the North-side from whence you shall put to the South that is from October forward for as then the Northeast and east Northeast winds doe blowe and if you bee vnder the degrées aforesaid you shall see the said downes and when you see the end of them on the South-side and from thence not séeing any more then you are by Capigâ—aramirini and from thence to Pernanbuco are fiue or sixe myles And so if you bee vnder eight degrées and a halfe then you shall sée a flat Lande till you bee at tenne and twelue fadome déepe and the Lande on the Sea side will bee euen bare which is called Capiragua when you are East and West with this Lande being the Countrey whereof I speake at twelue fadome déepe it beeing in the Moneths of October or after Februarye then you néede not feare any thing but take héed you put not southwards for you must take héede of the Cape of S. Augustine and Northward you shal sée another point called A Punta d Olynda where the Towne of Olynda lieth and the coast of the same North Point is sailed North and South If you be east and West with the cape S. Augustine then you shall sée a Hill inward to the land which sheweth like the backe of a Cammell on the Southside hauing thrée Houels along by the Sea side and the coast will stretch north-North-east and Southwest From this point of S. Augustine to the towne of Olynda Northward are twelue miles This point lyeth vnder 8 degrées and ½ and Olynda lyeth vnder 8. degrées and â…“ Pernanbuco vnder eight degrées this voyage is thus to bee sayled when you set sayle from Lisbon in the Moneths of October and Nouember But when you saile from Lisbon in February or March then you shall looke for land vnder nine degrées for from y e month of March forward then the Southeast and south Southeast winds do blow and if you chance to bee by the land vnder the height aforesaid you néede not feare any thing but shall hold your course at seuentéene and eightéene fadome for it is faire and cléere and you haue nothing daungerous but the riffes lying close by the land whereon you sée the water breake running Northward if you finde certaine downes along by the sea side then feare not to run northward for therby you shal sée the point of S. Augustine This point lieth on the sea side being euen stéepe land shewing like the muzzell of a Whale in the toppe hauing a round Hill compassed with Trées and being at the depth aforesaid close by the Land you shall sée a small Island called Ilha de S. Alexus From this Island to Cape S. Augustine are fiue or sixe miles and lyeth vnder 8 degrées ¾ The 57. chapter The course and Nauigation to the Hauen called A Bahia de todos os Santos or of all Saints in the coast of Brasilia IF you desire to sayle to the Bahia de todos os Santos that is the bay of all Saints then obserue the course aforesaied taking the times of the yeare From the Month of March forward and from October as I said before This Bay of all Saints lyeth vnder thirteene degrées and being from October forward then you shall looke for Land at 12 and 12 degrees and ½ and being in sight thereof which will bee white sandy strands which shew like linnen that lieth too white then you shall hold your course Southward along by the coast vntill you be at the end of the said strands where you shall sée an Island lying on the Northside within the mouth of the Bay or Hauen called Tapoon From thence you runne along the coast West and West and South And comming to this Bay from the Month of March forward then you must not passe aboue 13 degrées and 1 â— Southward and when you are in sight of Land if it be not the aforesaid white strand then you shall vse all the means you can to run Northward and when you sée the sandye strand at 12 degrées and ½ Then you shall sée a hill standing along by the seaside and if you chance to be so néere the lande that you can find no meanes to get off from it then you shall know the Land well for on the sea side you shall sée a round houel called O Morro de san Paulo from the which houell to the bay are twelue myles along by this houell on the northwest side there is a very great riuer called Tinhare which is very good to put into if néed be and is six and seuen fadome déep and when you are at the aforesaid Point vnder 13 degrées ½ then put not to the Lande for it hath a créeke that is very dangerous And if you desire to saile from the Bay of
not knowe it but when you see this Island then you may knowe where you are From this Island to S. Vincents are twelue miles which is a pleasant way and in that countrey there are three small Islands called As Ilhas de Boa Sicanga From these Islandes to the Hauen called A Berra de Birtioga are sixe miles which is a verie good a deepe Hauen Between the Islandes aforesaid this Hauen lieth another rouÌ„d Island called Monte de Trigo that is the hill or heape of wheate which is a verie good marke for such as desire to put into the Hauen of Bertioga From this Hauen to the Hauen called A Berra d'Esteuao da Costa that is the hauen of Steuen da Costa are fiue miles this is a good Hauen for great shippes it hath a very good Bay for shippes to lie in and if you will not put into it outwarde close by the land you haue an Island called A Ilha da Moela that is the Island of Chéese where you may anker From this Hauen Southwestward lieth an Island called A Ilha Queimada that is the burnt Island which is a flat Island all stonie but along by it it is faire ground like South southeastward From the Hauen lyeth a Cliffe which of many men is not knowne it lyeth aboue the water and is in the middle way betwéen the Island Dos Alcatrases and Ilha Queimada From thence to the Island called Canaueas that is the Island of Réedes are thrée miles you run North Northeast and South Southwest along by the coast Canaueia is an Island that hath a verie good Hauen and fresh water and lieth vnder 23. degrées and ½ on the south side it hath two Rockie Islands whereof the one is somewhat long and round and right ouer against it lyeth the riuer called Rio de Canauea where you may put in with small ships From Canauea to the Island called A Ilha de Santa Caterina are 48. miles and you run along the coast North South This is a long Island full of trées it lieth by the coast which reacheth North and South On the North side at the entry of the Hauen it hath two Islands and on the South side another Island called A Galle that is the Island of the Gally on the North side thereof you can not enter but onely with small Barkes and ships but on the South side it hath a very good entrie for great ships it hath much fresh water and great store of fish and wilde Deere This Island lyeth vnder 28. degrees and ½ From thence to the Hauen called O Porto de Don Rodrygo are fiue myles and fiue miles further forward lyeth the Hauen called dos Patos that is the Hauen of Géese by some called La Laguna that is the Lake This Hauen serueth for Barkes and small ships that traffique in those countries From thence to the riuer of Rio de Plata there is not one hauen where you may put in the coast reaching North Northeast and South Southweast Sayling from the aforesaid Island of S. Caterina to Rio de Plata you must holde your course southward to the height of 34. degrees â…” Then you must put to the land when you sée it which at the first sheweth like an Island called los Castillos then you shall run along the coast which will lie Southwestward Southwest and by West and west southwest from you and make not your account to sée the Cape de Sancta Maria for the land there is so flat that there you can not discerne any signe or token of a point but there you shall sée certaine riffes but you néed not feare any thing more then that you sée before your eies and if you chance not to sée any land running towardes it then cast out your Lead and there you shall find 10.14 and 18. fadome déepe therfore feare not for it is all one kind of ground and you are in a good way Being there as aforesaid then run as long as you can well discerne the land then you shall sée an Island called A Ilha dos Lobos that is the Island of Wolues for there you sée many wolues it is a flat Island all full of stones on the south side it hath an Island and on the east a Riffe but you néede not feare any other then that you sée before your eies This Island is distant from the Firme land about two miles and ½ towards the northwest from this Island of Wolues there lieth a small flat Island with a low wood close by the land which hath a good hauen to anker in if you haue any tempest out of the Southwest If you passe along by this Island on the East Southeast side then goe néere the point or hooke of the firme lande which is a lowe stony point and betwéene this point and the Island lyeth a sand which you shall presently sée by the water that breaketh vpon it and if you enter on the north-Northeast side you néede not feare any thing and to anker kéepe close by the Island for there you haue fresh water and great store of fish vpon the ground Béeing there you must bée carefull for there beginneth the first high Lande and from it about eight or ten myles further lyeth a sand that is verie dangerous and is about foure miles from the Firme Lande being two myles in length you must runne betwéene it and the Firme lande and when you sayle from the high land aforesaide for the space of a mile and a halfe or two myles you must kéepe harde by the shoare because of the sande aforesaide and from thence with your Leade in your hande with good watch and foresight and if it bee not seasonable weather to saile by night then your best way were to anker and to stay till it bee day the better to make your voiage And when you thinke you are past this sand then you shal sée a hill called O monte de Santo Seredâ—o which is a rounde high hill the like whereof is not in those countries to bee founde betwéene the which hill and the sandes aforesaid lyeth an Island called A Ilha das Flores that is the Island of Flowers which you may passe about without danger And when you come into the salt or fresh water which floweth fiue and twentie miles beneath the riuer called Rio de Buenos Aires that is the Riuer of good aire where the water is verie fresh then hold your course West and then you shal be eight or ten miles beneath the Riuer of good aire which is the best course you can holde but I aduise you still to haue your Lead in hand and when you are at thrée or foure fadome water then saile no further if it bée by night but in the day time you may sée whither you saile which must be in sight of land and so neere that you may easily discerne the trées holding two miles from the land for you can not passe by the Riuer of
which lye by the Hauen of Charthagena you must runne along by the first Cliffe betwéene it and the Lande alwaies with your Lead in hand and you must not goe néerer then ten fadome to the Land there you shall find white sandy ground and being at fiftéene or sixtéene fadome muddye ground then kéepe aloofe to the Southeast and South and so runne in for you shall sée the hole open before you Sayling from Carthagena to Nombre de Dios that is the name of God with the winds called Brisas which are windes blowing from the East and North parts generally called Brisas then you must hold your course West and somewhat West and by South till you be vnder 9. degrées and ½ vnder the which heigth lyeth the point called Cantina which are seuen Islands whereof fiue stretch east and west the other two north-Northeast and Southwest Being somewhat past these Islandes you shall sée a low point of Land reaching into the Sea called A Punta de Lambras which lyeth on the West side and Westward from it it hath a Hill which is somewhat higher then the Point which you may well discerne when you make to Sea-warde from it and that the Point lyeth South-west-warde from you the said Hill hauing on the Southeast side certaine lowe Lande and somewhat more Westward the Lande beginneth to bee higher which endeth at the Riuer of Francisco At the mouth of this Riuer to Sea-ward from it lyeth a stony cliffe and from this Riuer to Nombre de Dios it is all ouer a flat and red shining Lande to the houell called Niquea which is about a myle from Nombre de Dios you shall likewise sée the edifices or buildings of Capira and if a man should ask you when those buildings lye north-Northeast from you where you are then you may answere him that you are vpon the coast of the lande North-east and Southwest beneath Nombre de Dios. Sayling from Nombre de Dios to Carthagena you shall holde your course East Northeast to the point from thence you must runne East whereby you shall discouer the Islands of Saint Barnard which are low and yet Hill Islandes with very faire ground along by them and if you should be in a Frigate then you may passe betweene them and the land Fiue or sixe miles further you shall see the Islands called Braua which are foure small Islands whereof the furthest outward is the greatest they are all lowe and bare Lande hauing by them faire and cleare ground and with a Frigate you may passe inward but with a shippe you must not goe neerer then sixe fadome From thence east Southeastward you shall sée the Gally of Carthagena with the markes aforesaied in the East and East Northeast bough you shall see the Land Cariscos which is a high and hill land From thence you must runne along by the coast vntill you begin to sée the Hauen then you must put in alwaies shunning the sands of Carys running along by the east point being there if night falleth vpon you then you may anker betweene Carys and Baru in the surest place you can finde to defend you from the windes called Brisas by the high Lande of Carys and if you put out of the Hauen of Nombre de Dios you shall lauere till you sée the buildings that are beyond it and sayling into the Hauen you shall doe as wind serueth Sayling from Carthagena to the Island of Hauana you shall hold your course North-west till you come to thirtéene degrées and 1 â— and when you are vnder thirteene degrées then you shall let your selfe driue South South-east and South as the manner is vntill you bee past the heigth or bee out thereof or in the depth and when you are vpon the ground of the Serrana then you shall sleepe towardes it as much as you can and if it bee possible you shall hold Northward for so you shall the sooner be there From the point of Cabo de Camaron to Cabo de Roncador with the Sea strand that stretcheth from the one to the other as also from Serrana and Serranilla being Islands and Cliffes so called on the west side of all these sands is great sande with Fish sâ—ales vpon the ground and the least depth you find there is fiftéene fadome waâ—r being all faire and in this depth you shall runne till you bee ouer it and being ouer you shall presently begin to multiply or rise till you bee at fiftie fadome deep and somewhat more Serrana lieth vnder foureteen degrees and ½ and Serranilla vnder sixteene degrees If you sée Serranilla on the West side on that side it is a lowe sandye Island stretching Northwest and Southeast Sayling from Serranilla or Cabo de Roncador to y e point of S. Anton lying in the Island Cuba yuâ— shall holde your course Northwest and Northwest and by north wherewith you shall discouer the Cape aforesaied or the Cape de coryentes that is the Point of the streames which is a clouen Point towards the sea side being lowe Land on it hauing some Palme Trees From thence to Cabo de S. Aâ—n the Land beginneth to bée lower the coast stretcheth Northwest and south-east The cape de S. Anton is a low sandy Point vpon it hauing two or three houels and lieth vnder 22. degrees If in this course you chaunce to see the Island called Cayman Grande that is the great Cayman You must vnderstand that it lieth vnder nineteene degrees and is low land ful of Trees stretching east and west on the south-side hauing some white sandy strands Sailing from the Point of S. Anton with the windes called Vendaval which are West and South windes generally called Vendauaâ—es as the East and North windes are called Bâ—sas to the Hauana then you must runne Northeast to shunne the droughtes that runne out from this Point which reach to the beginning of the hils called Los Organos that is the Organs and when you are past the sands you shall hold your course along by the coast for there you neede feare nothing more then that you see before you The Organs are certaine high Trées which make manye openings and rents whereof those on the South-side are called the point of Guanico these Organs or hils reach to the Riuer called Rio de Porâ— that is the riuer of hogs from thence begin the Hils called the Cabinas which are high and doubled on the highest of theÌ„ hauing a playne or flat Lande there you haue a Hauen called El Puerto de Cabanas Eastward from this point to the field of Mariam it is low flat land ful of Trees where there is another Hauen From thence to Hauana it is all lowe land without any risings except one Houell lying right ouer against the Hauana which is a clouen hill vpon it hauing a sharpe point called Atalaya that is a guard and beeing North and South with the Hauen within the Lande you shal see two Hils which shew like two
S. German which are very high but not so high as those of Loquillo From this point of Cabo Roxo you must hold your course west and west and by North whereby you shal discouer the Island called De la mona that is the Island of the ape and you must run along by the southside thereof The Island La Mona is a low land and reacheth East and West on the sea side being a plaine land descending downward on the north-side it hath a Cliffe or small Island called Monica or the little ape Betwéene it and the Island you may passe On the West side of Mona there is a Roade of faire and good ground hauing likewise such another Roade by the Point that lyeth Southwest From the Island De la Mona to the Island De la Sahona if that it be by day you shall hold your course Southwest and by night West and West and by South and you must vnderstand that the Point called Cabo de Enganno that is the deceitfull Point is altogether like the Point of Sahona hauing a clouen houell on the vpper part of the Island being betweene the lowest Lande thereof that lieth on the Sea side Betwéene Cabo del Enganno and Sahona lyeth a small Island called the little S. Catalyna the reason why you must there runne West and South is because the Streames runne towards the Créeke The markes of the Island Sahona are these It is a lowe Island full of Trees so that as you come towardes it you first sée the Trées before you perceaue the land thereof it stretcheth East Northeast and West Southwest on the South side it hath certaine Riffes which run halfe a mile into the Sea if you fall vpon this lande comming out of the Sea and that ouer the Islandes you sée certaine hilles then they are the hils of Niquea which you shall likewise sée betwéen great Sancta Catalina and La Sahona this Island Sahona on the West side hath a Rode of eight or ten fadome deep to saile from Sahona to Santo Domingos it beeing thrée miles to seaward from Sahona you shall hold your course Northwest and Northwest and by West From thence to Santo Domingos it is altogither low land on the sea side descending downward and is the land which in that place reacheth furthest East and West The markes of Santo Domingos are these that when you are Northwest and Southeast with the old mines then you are North and South with the riuer of Santo Domingos and ouer the riuer you shall see two houels which shewe like the teates of a womans breastes when those houels are North and North and by west from you then you are to loofeward from the riuer so that by those teates you shall knowe whether you be past or to Loofeward from it On the East point of the entrie of the Riuer standeth a Tower which serueth for a guarde or beakon for the shippes that come out of the sea From this point aforesaide runneth a hidden cliffe which you must shunne and so you must runne in but go not to neere the Al Matadero that is the Slaughter house for there it is shallow and being within the aforesaid hidden cliffe you haue foure fadome déepe and so you shall holde your course to the Sandie strand lying on the East side shunning the Cliffes of the fortresse and going from the Fortresse inward then you must let fall your ankers right against the Admiraltie in the middle of the riuer where the best place and Rode is From Santo Domingo being 4. miles to Seaward you shall holde your course Southwest and Southwest and by west vntill you be North and South with the Island of Niqueo and to goe from thence to the hauen of Oquoa leaue not the coast but run close by it with all your sailes till you be past the riuer for if you get off frō it without touching the Palma which is a certaine banke so called where the ships vse to anker then you must not anker being in the riuer you must looke wel before you that when you anker to make your ship fast with an anker both out to Landward and to Seaward and then you are safe Sayling from this Hauen and Bay of Oquoa you shall runne outwarde to the South vntill you be about the point and thrée miles into the sea and then you shall hold your course Southwest and Southwest and by South wherby you shall discouer an Island called De la Beata that is the blessed Island which is a lowe Island stretching East and west Two miles Westwarde from Beata lieth an Island or cliffe called Altobello which by night sheweth like a ship when you are past Beata and Altobello then you must runne West and West and by North to the point called Cabo de Tubaron that is the point of the hedge In this créeke are thrée or foure Islands or rocks which are called Los Frayles that is the Friers Before you come to Cabo de Tubaron there is a Créeke wherein lieth an Island called Iabaque with more cliffes and Riffes lying about it being foule ground Behind this Island you see certaine hilles called Las Sierras de dona Maria otherwise Las Sierras de Sabana when you are right against Iabaque then you must run West Northwest The Cabo de Tubaron is a blacke shining Houell on the sea side being clouen vpon it hauing certaine white places like water beakes Within this point or Cape lieth a riuer of fresh water where you haue stones for Ballast as you haue in the Riuer of Mynijcka From thence to the point of Cabo de Crus you must hold your course Northwest vntill you are past the Island of Nabassa running on the North side thereof and if the streames chaunce to driue you on the south side then you must obserue certain times if you be in a great ship holding a good way into the Northwest from it to shun the sands that sticke out from the point de Morante and reach betweene this point and Nabassa there in some places you haue aboue foure fadome déepe and at the end thereof you may run from 15. to 20. fadome déepe Nabassa is a round and lowe Island on the Sea side being all flat and plain land running on the North side of this Island you shall hold your course Northwest and Northwest and by West and if you desire to passe along by the Cape De Crus it is a point sticking out which as you come toward it out of the sea sheweth as if on the top it were full of Trées but it is inward to Lande On the East side of this Point lyeth the hauen of Cabo de Crus Now to sayle to the Island De Pinos you must runne West Northwest wherby you shall discouer the Island This Island De Pinos is a low land ful of Trées so that as you come out of the Sea you sée the Trées before you sée the land it stretcheth East and West and
likewise many Carpets called Alcatiffas but they are neyther so fine nor so good as those that are brought to Ormus out of Persia and an other sort of course Carpets that are called Banquays which are much like the striped Couerlits that are made in Scotland seruing to lay vpon chestes cubbords They make also faire couerlits which they call Godoriins Colchas which are very fair and pleasant to the eye stitched with silke and also of Cotton of all colours and stitchinges pauilions of diuers sorts and colours Persintos that are stringes or bands wherewith the Indians bind and make fast their bedsheddes thereon to lay their beds all kind of bedsteds stooles for Indian women and other such like stuffes costly wrought and couered with stuffes of all colours also fine playing tables and Chessebordes of Iuory and shields of Torteux shelles wrought and inlaide very workemanlike many fayre signets ringes and other curious worke of Iuorie and sea horse téeth as also of Amber whereof there is great quantitie They haue likewise a kind of mountain Christall wherof they make many signets buttons beades and diuers other deuises They haue diuers sorts of precious stones as Espinellē Rubies Granadis Iasnites Amatistes Chrysolites Olhos de gato which are Cattes eyes or Agats much Iasper stone which is called bloud and milke stone and other kindes of stones also many kindes of Drognes as Amfion or Opium Camfora Bangue and Sandale wood whereof when time serueth I will particularly discourse in setting down the spices and fruites of India Alluijn Cane Sugar and other merchandises which I cannot remember and it would be ouer long and tedious to rehearse them all Annell or Indigo groweth onely in Cambaia and is there prepared and made ready and from thence carried throughout the whole world whereof hereafter I will say more but this shall suffice for the description of Cambaia and now I will procéede At the ende of the countrey of Cambaia beginneth India the lands of Decam and Cuncam the coast that is the inwarde part thereof on the Indian side stretcheth from Cambaia to the coast of India where the said inward part hath the beginning which coast stretcheth Westwardes Southwest and by South to the Islande lying on the coast or entry of the said place called Insula das Vaquas being vnder 20. degrées vpon the which corner and countrey on the firme land standeth the towne and fortresse of Daman which is inhabited by the Portingalles and vnder their subiection distant from the Towne of Diu East and by South fortie miles The 10. Chapter Of the coast of India and the hauens and places lying vpon the same THe coast of India hath the beginning at the entry or turning of the lande of Cambaia from the Islande called Das Vaguas as it is saide before which is the right coast that in all the East Countries is called India but they haue other particular names as Mosambique Melinde Ormus Cambaia Choramandel Bengala Pegu Malacca c. as when time serueth shall be shewed whereof a part hath already béene described Now you must vnderstande that this coast of India beginneth at Daman or the Island Das Vaguas and stretcheth South and by East to the Cape of Comoriin where it endeth and is in all 180. miles vppon the which coast lie the towns and hauens hereafter following which the Portingals haue vnder their subiections and strong fortes therein first Daman from thence fiftéene miles vpwardes vnder 19. degrées and a halfe the towne of Basaiin from Basaiin ten miles vpwardes vnder 19. degrées the Towne and fort of Chaul from Chaul to Dabul are tenne miles and lyeth vnder 18. degrées from Dabul to the town and Island of Goa are 30. miles which lyeth vnder 15. degrées and a halfe all these Townes and fortes aforesaide are inhabited by the Portingalles except Dabul which they had and long since lost it againe The coast from Goa to Daman or the turning into Cambaia is called by those of Goa the Northerne coast and from Goa to the Cape de Comoriin it is called the southern coast but commonly the coast of Malabar Concerning the towne of Goa and the situation thereof as also the description of Decam Cuncam as touching their kings and progenies we will in another place particularly declare with many other memorable thinges as well of the Portingalles as of the naturall countrimen Wherefore for this time we will passe them ouer and speak of the other principal towns and hauens following along the coast You must vnderstand that all the townes aforesaid Daman Basaiin and Chaul haue good hauens where great traffique is done throughout all India all these townes and countries are very fruitfull of Ryce Pease and other graines Butter and oyle of Indian Nuttes but oyle of Oliues is not to be found in all the East Indies onely what is brought out of Portingall and other such like prouisions is there very plentifull they make also some Cotton linnen but very little The towne of Chaul hath great traffique to Ormus Cambaia to the redde sea to Sinde Masquate Bengala c. hath many rich Marchants and shippes there is a place by Chaul which is the old towne of the naturall borne countrymen where diuers kindes of silkes are wouen of all sortes and colours as Grogeran Sattin Taffata Sarscenet and such like stuffes in so great aboundance that India and all other places bordering the same are serued therewith whereby the inhabitantes of Chaul haue a great commoditie by bringing the raw silke out of China spinning and weauing it there and againe being wouen to carrie and distribute it throughout all India There are likewise made many and excellent faire deskes bedsteds stooles for women couered with stuffes of all colours and such like marchandises whereby they haue great traffique There is likewise great store of Ginger as also all the coast along but little estéemed there This land called the North part hath a very holesome and temperate ayre and is thought to be y e soundest healthsomest part of all India for the towne of Diu and the coast of Malabar is very vnholesome These Indians as also those of Cambaia which are called Benianen and Gusarrates and those of the lande that lyeth inwardes from Decam which dwell vpon the hill called Ballagatte which are named Decaniins and Canaras are altogether of yellowe colour and some of them somewhat whiter others somewhat browner but those that dwel on the sea coast are different and much blacker their statures visages and limmes are altogether like men of Europa and those of the coast of Malabar which stretcheth and beginneth 12. miles from Goa Southward and reacheth to the cape de Comoriin whose naturall borne people are called Malabaren which are those that dwell vpon the sea coast are as blacke as pitch with verie blacke and smoth haire yet of bodies lims and visages in all thinges proportioned like men of Europa These are the best soldiers
their daylie liuing occupations as it shal be shewed at large and yet there are continuall pyracies committed on the sea what order soeuer they take wherby poore marchaÌ„ts are taken prisoners robbed of all they haue The land throughout is very fruitfull gréene and pleasant to beholde but hath a very noysome and pestiferous ayre for such as are not borne in the countrie and yet pepper doth onely growe on this coast although some groweth by Mallacca in certaÌ„e parts of the land but not so much for from hence is it laden and conueyed throughout the whole world The 13. Chapter Of the Ilands called Maldyua otherwise Maldyua RIght ouer against the cape of Comoriin 60. miles into the sea westward the Ilands called Maldyua doe begin and from this cape on the North syde they lie vnder 7. degrées so reach south south east till they come vnder 3. degrées on the south side which is 140. myles Some say there are 11000. Ilands but it is not certainely knowne yet it is most true they are so many that they can not be numbred The Inhabitants are like the Malabares some of these Ilands are inhabited and some not inhabited for they are very lowe ground like the countrie of Cochin Cranganor c. and some of them are so lowe that they are commonlie couered with the sea the Malabares say that those Ilandes in time past did ioyne fast vnto the firme land of Malabar were part of the same land and that the Sea in processe of tyme hath eaten them away so separated them from the firme land There is no merchandize to be had in them but only coquen which are Indian nuttes and cayro which are the shelles of the same nuts that is the Indian hemp wherof they mak ropes cables and other such like commodities those are there to be found in so great aboundance that with them they serue the whole country of India and al the oriental coast of the wood of the same trées they make themselues boats after their manner with all things to them belonging of the leaues they make sayles sowed together with strings made of the nutshelles without any iron nayles and so being laden with the nuttes and other parts of the said trées they come and trafficke with those of the firme land their victuals in the ship being the fruite of the same trée so that to conclude the boate with all her furnitures their marchandises and their victuals is all of this palme trée and that maintaineth all the inhabitants of the Ilands of Maldyua and therewith they trafficke throughout India there are some of these nuttes in the said Iland that are more estéemed then all the nuttes in India for that they are good against all poyson which are verie faire and great and blackish I saw some that were preseÌ„ted vnto the vice roy of India as great as a vessell of 2. tuÌ„nes Indian measure and cost aboue 300. Pardawen which were to send vnto the King of Spaine Of this trée and her fruites together with the vsage thereof I will discourse more at large in the declaring of the Indian trées fruites meane time I will returne to the description of the coasts with their situations From the cape of Comoriin the coast beginneth North east to turne inwards again till you come to the Cape of Negapatan which lyes vnder 11. degrées and is 60. myles distant from the cape of Comoriin From the cape of Comoriin South east by South about 40 miles into the sea lieth the furthest corner of the great Iland of Seylon and so reacheth North and by east vntill you come right ouer against the cape of Negapatan being distant from the firme land the same cape 10. miles and betwéene the firme land and that Iland there lyeth some drie groundes or lytle Ilands whereby it is manie times dangerous for the Shippes that sayle vnto Bengala and the coast of Choâ—amandel which commonly passe through that way The Iland of Seylon is in length 60. miles and in breadth 40. miles from the first and vttermost corner North by east about 18. miles vnder 7. degrées and an halfe lyeth a fort belonging to the Portingals called Columbo which by méere force great charges is holden and maintained for that they haue no other place or péece of ground no not one foot but that in all the Iland it is but a small fort yet very strong and well guarded The soldiers that are therein are commonly such as are banished for some offence by them coÌ„mitted or such as haue deserued death and some dishonest women for some euill fact are put in there to beare them company They fetch al their necessaries out of India and are often times assailed by their enemies the Inhabitants of the Iland and often times besieged but alwaies valiantly defend themselues The 14. Chapter Of the Iland of Seylon THe Iland of Seylon is said to be one of the best Ilands that in our time hath béene discouered and the fruitfullest vnder the heauens well built with houses and inhabited with people called Cingalas and are almost of shape and manners like to those of Malabar with long wyde eares but not so blacke of colour they goe naked onely their members couered they were wont to haue but one King but hauing murdered their king they deuided their countrie into manie kingdomes and not long since a simple barber murthered their chief king with great tyrannie brought the kingdome vnder his subiection driuing the other kings out of the countrie whereof one that was a Christian fled into India and dwelleth at Goa where he is kept maintained at the kings charge This barber as it is said hath made himselfe king and the whole Iland vnder his subiection his name was Raju he liueth verie warily and is verie subtill a good soldier but trusting no man the Chingalans are not his good friends yet they liue in obedieÌ„ce vnder him more through force and feare then for loue or good wil for that he causeth them with great tyrannie to be executed so that no man dareth stirre against him he is likewise a deadly enemie to the Portingall and about a yeare before I came from India he had besieged the fort of Columbo with a great nuÌ„ber of Elephants and men but by meanes of y e Portingals that came thither out of India he was constrayned to breake vp his siege before the fortresse The Iland is full of hils and there is one hill so high that it is reported to be the highest hill in all India and is called Picode Adam The Indians hold for certane that Paradice was in that place and that Adam was created therein saying that yet vntill this daye there are some of his footsteps fouÌ„d vpon that hill which are within the stones as if they were ingrauen and neuer goe out The Iland is full of all sorts of Indian fruites and of al kind of wild beasts as
the Portingals and other countreymen can better brooke it then other places in India From these coastes they vse great traffique vnto Bengala Pegu Sian Malacca and also to India there is excellent faire linnen of Cotton made in Negapatan Saint Thomas and Musulepatan of all colours and wouen with diuers sorts of loome workes and figures verie fine and cunningly wrought which is much worne in India and better estéemed then silke for that it is higher prised then silke because of the finenes cuÌ„ning workmaÌ„ship they are called Rechatas Cheylas wherof the Christians Portingals in India do commoÌ„ly make bréeches They likewise make clothes thereof for women to put about them from their nauelles downeward bound about their bodies which they weare within the house very finely made the best sort are named clothes of Sarasso some being mingled with thréedes of golde and siluer and such like stuffe of a thousand sortes very beautifull to behold wherewith they cloath themselues in very comely manner In this coast growe the great and thicke réeds which are vsed in India to make the Pallankins wherein they carry the women as in the Indian figures you shall sée which are so thicke that a man can hardly gripe them with both his handes very faire to looke vpon and very high being of diuers colours as blacke redde c. Whereof in an other place I will say more The 16. Chapter Of the Kingdome of Bengalen and the riuer Ganges AT the ende of the Kingdome of Orixa and the â—ast of â—horamandel beginneth the Riuer Ganges in the kingdom of Bengalen This is one of the most famous Riuers in all the world and it is not knowne from whence it springeth Some are of opinion that it commeth out of the earthly paradise because of an old speech of the Bengalers which is that in time past a certaine King of Bengalen was desirous to know froÌ„ whence the riuer Ganges hath her beginning to the which ende hee caused certaine people to bee brought vp and nourished with nothing but rawe fish and such like foode thereby to make them the apter to accomplish his desire which people hauing made boats fitte for the purpose he sent vp the riuer who were certain monthes vpon the water so long til they came where they felt a most pleasant and swéete sauour and founde a very cleare and most temperate skie with still and pleasant water that it séemed vnto them to bee an earthly paradise and being desirous to rowe further vpwardes they could not so that they were compelled séeing no remedie to returne againe the same way that they came and being returned certified the King what they had séene They that will not credit this are hard of beliefe for my parte I leaue it to the readers iudgement This Riuer hath Crocodiles in it like the riuer of Nilus in Aegipt the mouth or entry thereof lyeth vnder 22. degrées and the coast runneth East and by South to the Kingdome of Aracan which is about 80. miles it is an vneuen coast full of Islandes sholes hookes and créekes for the lande of Bengalen lyeth inwards of the gulf which is called Bengala for that froÌ„ Aracan the coast beginneth againe to runne South and East outwardes towardes Malacca and to the vttermost hooke which is called Singapura But returning to Bengala and the Riuer Ganges you must vnderstand that this riuer is holden and accounted of all the Indians to be a holy and a blessed water and they do certainely belieue that such as wash and bath themselues therein bee they neuer so great sinners all their sinnes are cleane forgiuen them and that from thenceforth they are so cleane and pure from sinne as if they were newe borne againe and also that hee which washeth not himself therein cannot be saued for the which cause there is a most great and incredible resorte vnto the same from all the partes of India the East countries in great troupes where they vse diuers strange ceremonies and superstitions most horrible to heare for they doe most stedfastly beléeue that they shall thereby merit eternall life From thâ— Riuer Eastward 50. miles lyeth the towne of Chatigan which is the chief towne of Bengala The naturall borne people of Bengala are in a manner like those of Seylon but somewhat whiter then y e Chingalas they are a most subtill and wicked people and are estéemed the worst slaues of all India for that they are all théeues and the women whores although this fault is common throughout all India no place excepted They haue a custome that they neuer dresse or séeth meat twice in one pot but haue euery time a new pot Whensoeuer they are found in adulterie they haue their noses cut off and from that time forwarde they must leaue ech others company which is most narrowly looked vnto by their law The countrey is most plentiful of necessary victuails specially Rice for that there is more of it in that countrey then in al the cast countries for they do yearly lade diuers shippes therewith which come thether from all places and there is neuer any want thereof and all other things in like sort and so good cheape that it were incredible to declare for that an Oâ—e or a Cowe is there to be bought for one Lariâ—n which is as much as halfe a Gilderne Shéepe Hens and other things after the like rate a Candit of Ryce which is as much little more or lesse as fourteene bushelles of Flemmish measure is sold there for halfe a Gilderne and for halfe a Doller Sugar and other ware accordingly whereby you may wel conceiue what plentie they haue The Portingalles deale traffique thether and some places are inhabited by them as the hauens which they call Porto grande and Porto pequeno that is the great hauen and the little hauen but there they haue no Fortes nor any gouernement nor policie as in India they haue but liue in a manner like wild men and vntamed horses for that euery man doth there what hee will and euery man is Lord and maister neyther estéeme they any thing of iustice whether there be any or none and in this manner doe certayne Portingalles dwell among them some here some there scattered abroade and are for the most part such as dare not stay in India for some wickednesse by them committed notwithstanding there is great trafficke vsed in those partes by diuers ships and marchants which all y e year diuers times both go come to and from all the Orientall parts Besides their Ryce much Cotton linnen is made there which is very fine and much estéemed in India and not only spread abroad and carryed into India and al the East parts but also into Portingal and other places this linnen is of diuers sorts and is called Sarampuras Cassas Comsas Beatillias Satopassas and a thousande such like names They haue likewise other linnen excellently wrought of a hearbe which
they spinne like yearne this yearne is to be sâ—ene at the house of Paludanus it is yealowish and is called the hearbe of Bengalen wherewith they do most cunningly stitch their couerlits pauilions pillowes carpets and mantles therein to christen children as women in childbed with vs vse to doe and make them with flowers and branches and personages that it is wonderfull to sée and so finely done with cunning workemanshippe that it cannot be mended throughout Europe likewise they make whole péeces or webbes of this hearbe sometimes mixed and wouen with silke although those of the hearbe it selfe are dearer and more estéemed and is much fayrer theÌ„ the silke These webs are named Sarrijn and it is much vsed and worne in India as well for mens bréeches as dublets and it may be washed like linnen and being washt it sheweth and continueth as faire as if it were new From Bengala commeth much Algallia or Ciuet but by the subtiltie and villany of the Bengalians it is falsifyed mixed with filth as salt oyle and such like stuffe whereby it is not much estéemed Also in Bengala are found great numbers of the beasts which in Latine are called Rhinocerotes and of the Portingalles Abadas whose horne téeth flesh blood clawes and whatsoeuer he hath both without and within his bodie is good against poyson and is much accounted of throughout all India as in an other place shall be shewed more at large There groweth likewise marble coloured Réedes whereof you may sée many sortes in the custodie of Paludanus which the Portingalles call Canas de Bengala that is Réedes of Bengala within they are full of pith and are about the thicknesse of Spanish réedes but somewhat thinner and when they are gréene they bowe and bend like Willow twigges they are outwardly of diuers colours and speckled as if they were painted They vse them in Portingall for olde women to beare in their handes when they goe abroad or vppon the stones There is another sorte of the same réeds which they call Rota these are thinne like twigges of Willow for baskets whereof Paludanus can shewe you great numbers with the which in India they make many faire baskets and a thousande other curious deuises Sugar Butter and such like ware they haue in great quantitie as I said before but this shall suffice for Bengala whereof we leaue to speake and returne to the description of the coast as it lyeth along the shore The 17. Chapter Of the coasts and lands of Aracan Pegu and Sian to the Cape of Singapura the towne and fortresse of Malacca BEyond the kingdome of Bengala beginneth the kingdomes of Aracan Pegu which coast stretcheth from Bengala south and by East to the town and hauen of Martauan in the land of Pegu and is 70. miles Martauan lyeth vnder 16. degrées from whence beginneth the kingdome or land of Sian these kingdomes of Aracan and Pegu are very rich fruitfull of all things besides Gold and precious stones as Rubies Espinels Saffires Iacinthes Emeraldes Granates and such like as it is well knowne by the great numbers that are dayly brought out of those countries into all places Likewise they make harde ware which is carried throughout the world There are greater number of Elephantes in those countries then in any other place of India or the Orientall countries the Portingalles that traffique there affirme that the king of Pegu hath a white Elephant which hee prayeth vnto and holdeth it to bée holy The Peguans haue a custome that when any stranger commeth into their land to deale and traffique with them of what nation soeuer he bee they aske him how long he meaneth to stay there and hauing tolde them they bring him many maides that of them he may take his choice and make contract and agrée with the parentes of the maid that liketh him best for the vse of her during his continuance there which done he bringeth her to his lodging and she scrueth him about all his affaires both by day by night like his slaue or his wife but hee must take heede that in the meane time hee keepeth not company with other women for thereby hee may incurre great daunger and stand in perill of his life When the time of his residence is ended he payeth the friendes or parents of the maid as much as he agreed for with theÌ„ which done he departeth quietly away and the maid returneth with credite home againe vnto her friendes and is as well estéemed of as euer she was before and if after that the same maide chance to marrie were it with the principallest of the Countrey and that the aforesaid stranger shold come to traffique in the same place againe hee may againe demand his woman and he shall haue her without resistance of her husband or any shame vnto him and she remaineth by the stranger as long as he abideth there and he trauelling from thence she goeth home againe vnto her husband which among them is holden for a most sure and inuiolable law Likewise when any gentleman or noble man will marrie with a maide hee goeth to séeke one of his friendes or a straunger and intreateth him to lie with his bride the first night of their mariage and to take her maydenhead from her which he esteemeth as a great pleasure honour done vnto him that another man wold take vpon him to ease him of so much payne This custome is not onely vsed among the Gentlemen and chiefe nobilitie of the lande but by the King himselfe Also diuers of the Peguans weare a bell vpon their yarde and some two as bigge as an Acorne which is made fast betweene the flesh and the skinne Of the like Belles Paludanus can shew you one which I brought out of India and gaue it him which bels haue a very sweet sounde This custome of wearing Belles was ordained by them because the Peguans in time past were great Sodomites and vsing this custome of belles it would be a meane to let them from the same The women go altogether naked onely with a cloth before their priuie members which as they go openeth vncouereth shewing all they haue which is by them ordayned to the ende that by such meanes it should tempt men to lust after women and to auoid that most abhominable accursed sinne of Sodomie There are likewise some among them that doe sowe vp the priuie member of their female children as soone as they are borne leauing them but a little hole to auoid their water and when she marrieth the husband cutteth it open and maketh it as great or as little as hee will which they with a certaine oyntment or salue can quickly heale I saw one of those women in Goa whom the Surgeon of my Mayster the Archbishops house did cut open men would iudge all these thinges to be fables yet they are most true for I doe not onely knowe it by the dayly trafficking of the Portingalles out of
Caixa of the bignes of a HollaÌ„des doite but not half so thicke in the middle whereof is a hole to hang it on a string for that commonlie they put two hundreth or a thowsand vpon one string wherewith they knowe how to make their accounts which is as followeth 200 Caixas is a Sata and â— Satas are 1000 Caixas which is as much as a Crusado Portingale money or 3 Keysars guilders Netherlandish money Pepper of Sunda is solde by the sacke and each sacke wayeth 45 Catten waight of China euerie Catte is as much as 20 Portingale ounces and euerie sacke is worth as it is solde there 5000 Caixas and when it is at the highest 6 or 7 thowsand Caixas Mace Cloues nutmegges white and blaâ—k Beniamin Camphora are solde by the Bhar each Bhar of Sunda weigheth 330 Catten of China Mace that is good is commonlie worthe 100 or 120 thowsand Caixas and good Cloues after the rate but bad or foule Cloues of Baston are worth 70 or 80 thowsand Caixas the Bhar Nutmegges are commonly worth 20 or 25 thowsand Caixas the Bhar white and black Benioin is worthe 150 and 180 thowsand Caixas 200 thousand the Bhar The wares that are there by them desired in barter for their spices are as hereafter followeth diuers and different sorts and colours of cotton lynnen which come out of Cambaia Choramandel and Bengala as Sarasles de Gâ—baâ—es and painted Tapen from S. Thomas of fyue elles the péece they are clothes so called out of Bengala white Cotton lynnen viz Sarampuras Cassas Sateposas blacke Satopasen and some browne vnbleached lynnen out of Cambaia black Cannequiins red Turiaes which are all clothes of cotton lynnen red Beyramen great and litle which is verie like vnto Cambricke and I am perswaded if Clothe of Holland were there to be soulde it would be more estéemed then Cotton lynnen out of India These Iauens are of a verie fretfull and obstinate Nature of colour much like the Malayers brown and not much vnlike the men of Brasilla strong and well set big limmed flatte faces broad thicke chéekes great eyebrowes smal eyes little beard not past 3 or 4 hayres vpon the vpper lippe the chinne the hayre on their heades very thyn and short yet as blacke as pitche whose picture is to be séen by the picture of the Mâ—layen of Malacca because they dwell trafficke much together Returning againe vnto the coast East by south about 25 miles beyond Iaua Maior beginneth the IlaÌ„d of Iaua Minor or litle Iaua and somewhat further the Iland Tâ—or wher sanders groweth in great abundance and a thousand other Ilands bordering all about which I can not particularly set down yet are they all inhabited and full of people and are like the Iauer From Malacca they trauell to the Ilandes of Molucca Banda Amboyna where the Portingales haue both sorts captaines and trafficke with them their way is from Malacca south east and by south aboue 100 miles betwéene many Ilands and thâ—â—ugh many shallowes so that they must anker euerie night to auoyd danger of sandes which continueth almost all the waye to Molâ—cca and hauing in that sort passed those hundreth miles they set their course eastward and east and by north 250 miles to the Iland called Banda which lyeth vnder 5 degrées on the south side In this Iland the Portingales doe trafficke for in it are the best Nutmegges Flowers There likewise they doe preserue nutmegges and make oyle thereof which is brought to Malacca and from thence into all other places the trafficke there consisteth most in bartering as it doth in SuÌ„da Iaua but they are not to be trusted you must kéep good watch and goe not on land but stay abord the shippe whether the Ilanders bring their marchandises and deale with men as I said before for it happeneth diuers times that they deceaue the Portingales which trust them ouer much for that one of my acquaintance and my friend being there for captaine in a shippe the shippe being cast away vpon that coast was with all his men taken put in prison where for the space of two yeares he indured a most miserable life and in the end was ransomed All these voyages to Banda Moluca those Ilands and also any other way whatsoeuer in India may no man make without licence and speciall fauour of the King of Portingall and their offices are giuen them in recompence of their seruice in the Indies as also all other offices as in an other place shall be declared About 20 miles beyond Banda North west lieth the Iland called Amboyna where the Portingales haue a small for t this Iland hath not much spice but the shippes that sayle from Malacca to Maluco doe stay there and take in fresh water From this Iland Northwarde 70 miles lyeth the Iland Tydor vnder one degrée â—th and iâ— the first Iland of the Molucaâ— â—xe miles northward lyeth Malaco not farre thence Tarnate and the Ilands of Cloues The 21. Chapter Of the Iland of Malucâ— THe Ilandes of Maluco are fiue viz. Maluco Tarnate Tydor Geloulo and an other where the Portingales haue 2 forts that is in Tarnate and Tydor which long since were discouered and wonne where they trafficke from Malacca out of India The Spaniards haue sought diuers meanes to haue traffique there and came from thence out of Noua Spaigne into the Iland called Tarnate where in a storme they lost their shippe and so could not get from thence againe whereby they were by the Portingales most of them slayne and the rest taken and sent prisoners into Portingale whereupon the King of Spaine and Portingale had a long quarrell and contention touching the diuision of their Conquests and discouery of the seas which by the Popes meanes at the last was ended in such sort that at this present onely the Portingale trafickes to those Ilands These Ilands haue no other spice then cloues but in so great abundance that as it appeareth by them the whole world is filled therewith In this Iland are found â—ie hilles they are very dry burnt land they haue nothing els but victuals of flesh and fish but for Rice Corne Onyons Garlicke and such like and all other necessaries some are brought from Portingale and some from other places thereabout which they take and barter for cloues The bread which they haue there of their owne baking is of wood or rootes like the men of Brasillia and their cloathes are of wouen strawe or herbes faire to the eye in these Ilands onlie is found the bird which the Portingales call passaros de Sol that is Fowle of the Sunne the Italians call it Manu codiatas the Latinists Paradiseas by vs called Paradice birdes for y e beauty of their feathers which passe al other birds these birds are neuer séene aliue but being dead they are found vpon the Iland they flie as it is said alwaies into the Sunne and kéepe themselues
with great deuotion promise of other wonderfull things when they came to land at the last God comforted vs and sent vs better weather for that the 19 of Aâ—â—ill the wether began to cleéere vp and therewith we were in better comfort The 20. of Aprill we tooke the hight of the Sunne and found it to be â—6 degrées and againe we saw greene water and some birds which they call Alcatraces and many Sea-wolues which they hold for certain signes of the cape de Bona SperaÌ„za as we thought were hard by the land but yet saw none the same day we had the wind somewhat fuller and were in great hope to passe the Cape so that the men began to be in better comfort by reason of the signes we haue seene All that day we saw greene water till the 22 of Apr. vpon which day twice and in the night following we cast out the Lead and found no ground which is a good signe that wee had passed the Cape called das Agulhas or the cape of needles which lieth vnder 35 degrees and is about 20 miles from the Cape de bona Speranza which lieth vnder 34 degrées a half And because that about this cape Das Agulhas there is ground found at the least 30 or 40 miles from the land we knew wee were past it as also by the colour of the water and the birds which are alwaies found in those countries and the better to assure vs thereof the great high sea left vs that had so long tormented vs and then we found a smoother water much differing from the former so that as theÌ„ we seemed to be come out of hell into Paradice with so great ioy that we thought we were within the sight of some hauen and withall had a good winde though somewhat cold The 23 of Aprill we passed the Cape de Bona Speranza with a great and generall gladnes it being as then 3 months and three dayes after we set sayle from Cochiin not once seeing any land or sand at all but onelie these assured tokens of the said Cape which happened very seldome for that the pilots doe alwaies vse what meanes they can to see the cape and to know the land thereby to know certainlie that they are past it for then their degrees must lessen and there they may as soone make towards Mosambique as to the Iland of S. Helena for although they can well perceiue it by y e water yet is it necessary for them to see the land the better to set their course vnto S. Helena wherein they must alwaies kéepe on the left hand otherwise it were impossible for them to come at it if they leaue that course for if they once passe it they can not come to it again because there bloweth continually but one kind of wind which is South east and thus hauing passed the Cape we got before the wind The 24 of Aprill the Pilot willed vs to giue the Bona viagen vnto the Cape de Bona Speranza according to the custome with great ioy and gladnes of all that were in the shippe for that as theÌ„ they assure themselues that they sayl to Portingal and not to turne againe into India for so long as they are not past the Cape they are alwaies in doubt and as then we were about 50. miles beyond the Cape The signes and tokens whereby they know themselues certainly to haue passed the Cape are great heapes and péeces of thicke réedes that alwaies thereabouts driue vppon the water at least 15 or â—â— miles from the land as also certaine birds by the Portingals called Feyâ—oins somewhat greater then sea mâ—wâ—s being white full of blacke spots ouer al their bodies very easie to be known from al other birds These are certain signes whereby the Pilotes doe certainly perswade themselues that they are past the Cape and hauing passed it they set their course for S. Helena Northwest Northwest by west The 27 of Apr. we were right in the wind and so continued till the next day and theÌ„ we had a calm being vnder 3â— degrees on Portingal side The â—9 of Apr. wâ— gâ—t before the wind which is the generall wind y t alwaies bloweth in those countries al the whole yere vntill y â— come to the Equinoctial line and is a Southeast wind so y t they may wel let their sayles stand lay them down to slâ—ep for in y e greatest wind y t bloweth there they need not strike their maine yard aboue half the mast The 12 of May in the morning betimes we discouered the IlaÌ„d of S. Helena whereat there was so great ioy in the ship as if we had bene in heauen as then we were about 2 miles from y e land the Iland lying from vs West south west whereunto we sayled so close that with a caliuer shot we might reach vnto the shore being hard by it we sayled about a corner of the land that from vs lay Northwest which hauing compassed wee sayled close by the land West North west the land on that side beeing so high and still that it séemed to be a wall that reached vnto the skyes And in that sort we sayled about a mile and a half and compassed about y e other corner that lay westward from vs which corner béeing compassed we presentlie perceiued the shippes that lay in the road which were those ships that set sayle before vs out of India lying about a small half mile from the foresaid corner close vnder the land so that the land as then lieth South east from them and by reason of the high land the shippes lie there as safe as if they were in a hauen for they may well heare the wind whistle on the top of their maine yards but lower it can not come and they lie so close vnder the land that they may almost cast a stone vpon the shore There is good ground there at 25 and 30 fadomes deep but if they chance to put further out or to passe beyond it they must goe forward for they can get no more vnto y e land and for this cause we kept so close to the shore that the height of the laÌ„d took the wind froÌ„ vs the ship wold not steer without wind so that it draue vpon the land wherby our horesprit touched y e shore therwith we thought that shippe goods had all beene cast away but by reason of the great depth being 1â— fadomes water and with the help of the Boats and men off the other ships that came vnto vs we put off from the land without any hurt and by those Boates wee were brought to a place wher the other ships lay at Anker which is right against a valley that lyeth betwéene two high hilles wherein there standeth a little Church called Saint Helena There we found fiue shippes which were the ship that came from Malacca and the S. Mary that had béene there about 15. daies
the rest and Bahama which lie al north from Câ—ba and saint Doâ—inicâ— The common opinion is that these Islandes were all one land and ioyned to the great Island and by the force of the sea seperated one from the other as it is thought of Iâ—aly and Ciciâ—ia They lie vnder seuenteene and eighteene degrees the people of those Islands are whiter and better proportioned then those of Cuba and Spaignuola specially the women that are verie faire for the which cause many of the firme land went thither to dwel as from Florida Cachora and Iucatan because there they founde more pleasure among the people then in other Islands and great difference in their speech whereupon hath risen the common opinion that in those Islands the Amazons did dwell beeing women that burnt their right breasts the better to shoote in bowes when they went to fight against their enemies and that there was a fountaine that made olde women yong The men go naked onely when they go to wars and when they keepe any feastes or vse to dance then they put on a certaine cotten garment and other garments of diuers coloured feathers finely wrought with a great plume of feathers on their heades Touching the women they haue verie strange customes for the married women or such as haue had the company of a man they couer their priuie members from the Nauel downe to the knees with certaine mantils of cotten made in manner of nets wherein they sticke certaine leaues otherwise they go naked vntil such time as they first perceiue their flowers and then they inuite al their friendes and make a great feast or banket as if they were married with great signes of ioy and then they beginne to hang that kinde of mantle before them wearing the same as long as they are vnmarried They are in great subiection to their maisters in such maner as that if they should command them to throw themselues headlong from off a hil or to do any other thing whatsoeuer they wil not refuse to do it what danger soeuer consisteth therin not once asking wherefore they should doo it but only because the master commandeth it Here also you must note wherein their kings gouernment consisteth which reacheth no further then only concerning sowing or planting the ground hunting fishing for that whatsoeuer is sowed or planted hunted or fished in any respect is onelie in the kings power and done by his commandement which diuideth those kindes of labours among the people directing euerie man what he should do The fruit that is reaped and gathered is brought all into a place appointed and from thence it is yearely deliuered vnto euerie man according as his houshold and necessarie vse requireth so that their Lords are nothing else but kings of Bees stuards distributers of the common goods of the countrey thinke then I beseech you what a golden time those people had where neither this is mine or this is thine was euer heard among them The only wel spring of strife contentioÌ„ Those in the east parts vsing nothing els but playing at the ball fishing and hunting where neither law nor processe was vsed nor decided where onely the kings will was a lawe and in all things were content to obey it They found certaine red stones in shels of fishes much esteemed and accounted of among theÌ„ which they weare at their cares and others more esteemed of which they took out of snakes Hersenen or snailes whereof the flesh is very good to eate of a fire red colour cleare and so like rubies that they could hardly be discerned from them whereof the Snakes in their speech are called Cohoâ—o and the stones Cohibici They gather likewise in the sande vppon the sea side certaine cleare shining stones yellow blacke and other colours whereof they make necklaces and such like Iewels to weare about their necks armes and legs in many places of those Islands they haue no flesh nor eate it not their meate is fish breda of wheate rootes and some fruites The people of these Islands being carried to saint Dominico or Cuba died there with eating flesh it beeing giuen them by the Spaniards In some of those Islands there are so many pigeons other birues which build their nestes in the Trees that many out of the firme land and also from the other Islands come thither and load whole scutes ful and take them with them the trees wherein they breed are like Youngarnet trees the barke hauing a certaine taste like Cinamon and somwhat better and hot like ginger smelling like cloues yet are they not accounted for spices among other fruites they haue a certaine kind by them called Iaâ—â—ma both sauorie and holsome about a span and a halfe long like a fig when it is greene the leafe likewise not much differing from the fig leafe and of the bignesse of a willow tree not close like other trees nor hollow like reedes but fast like Elders the leaues beeing excellent good to heale wounds as the Spaniards haue wel tryed To speake more hereof is needelesse those Islandes of Lucaya are more desolate and not inhabited for because they haue no gold The Spaniards carried many thousandes of them into other places and in seeking for Golde spoyled and destroyed them Hereafter followeth other Islands lying about that coast and first Cuba being one of the principal Islands vnder the Antillas CVba another verie great Islande accounted among the Antillas was by Columbus first foundout and discouered in An. 1492. which he called Fernandinam and Iâ—hannam as also Alpha and Omega as Peter Martin saith and by others the Island is called saint Iacob after the name of the cheefest towne therein which by reason of the great hauen as also the situation therof hath a verie great traffike as hauing on the East side the Islande of Saint Domingo on the West Iucatan on the North the great Cape of Florida and on the South the Island Iamaica all set downe in this Carde It is in forme like vnto a willow leafe because it is longer theÌ„ broad being in length from east to west three hundred miles and from north to south seuenty miles in breadth in some places but fifteene and in some nineteene miles The middle of the Island lieth in longitude 19. degrees and in latitude or height twentie degrees It was long time accounted for firme land because of the greatnesse which is no maruaile for the inhabitants themselues knew no other but that it had no ende and also long after the Spaniards comming thither because the people are poore and naked contented with a little and with their own not seeking any further neither caring what their neighbours did and therefore knew not if there were any other lande vnder the heauens then that wherein they dwelt The ground is high rough and sharpe of hils the sea in many places being white and the riuers small and good water rich of golde and good copper the aire temperate
yet somewhat colde therein is found much Mather seruing to die wooll cloath and leather it is also ful of thicke woods fishponds and faire Riuers of fresh water also of ponds that naturally are salt water In the woods are many hogges and oxen the riuers do oftentimes cast foorth gold in this Island are sixe townes inhabited by Spaniards whereof the first principal is Saint Iacobs the residence and sea of the Bishop but Hauana is the cheefe towne of marchandize and where all their Shippes are made Twoo principal and notable things are by Gonsalo Onetano written of this Island the first that therein is a valley situate betweene two hils in length about two or three Spanish miles wherein nature of it selfe bringeth foorth certaine round balles such as by art cannot possibly bee made rounder and in so great aboundance that they may ballist or loade whole Shippes therewith and are vsed in the shippes in steede of Iron or Leaden bulltes The other is a certaine hil not farre from the sea from whence there floweth pitch in great aboundance and runneth unto the sea where it driueth vppon the shore from place to place as the winde and weather serueth This pitch is vsed by the inhabitants and Spaniards to pitch their shippes The people of the Island are like those of Hispaniola onely differing in speech both men and women go naked and kéepe their bridalles in verie strange manner for that he which is married lieth not the first night with his wife be if it be a Lord he biddeth all the Lordes and one of them doth it for him and if it be a Marchant then Marchants take the paines to helpe him but if it be a countreyman either one of the Lordes or the priest doth ease him of a labour They leaue their wiues for verie smal occasions but the women may not forsake their husbands for any cause whatsoeuer The men are very vnchaste and wicked liuers there are great wormes and snakes in the Island and not venimous but easie to be taken the flesh whereof they eate and are neuer hurt therwith which snakes do liue by eating certaine beastes called Guabiniquinazes whereof many times there are seauen or eight found within their mawes they are in greatnesse like Hares in form like fores onely that their feete are like Conies feete the head like a Wesell a Fores taile long haire like a Badger of colour somwhat red the flesh sauorie and holsome This Islande was verie populous but nowe hath verie few onely certain Spaniards the rest beeing almost cleane rooted out and dead for want of meate Iamaica RIght against Cuba lyeth another Island which stil holdeth the name it alwaies had and is called Iamaica and of the Spaniards saint Iacob it lieth betwéene seuentéene and eightéene degrées on this side the Equinoctiall line on the East side it hath Saint Dominico about fiue and twentie miles distant on the West side the Cape or corner of Iucatana on the north Cubam also fiue and twentie miles distant and somewhat more and on the South another smal Island called Lacerana of fiue and twentie miles distant as the rest This Islande was discouered by Christopherus Columbus in his seconde nauigation into those countreyes and was taken by his son Don Diego gouerning the Island Saint Dominico by one Iohan de Squibel a captaine The breadth of the Islande surpasseth the length for it is from East to West about fiftie miles and from north to south twentie miles it is most inhabited by Spaniards the inhabitants also being burnt and destroyed by them like those of Lucaya The middle of the Island hath the longitude of 191. degrees and latitude or height eighteene degrees and is distant from the line seuenteene degrees on the north side It hath a hill that raiseth it on al sides inward to the middle of the land and so proportionably and euen that it can hardly bee descerned it is verie fruitfull both on the sea side and within the land and in times past verie populous such as were very wittie and subtile more then other of the Islanders thereabouts both in wars and other labours There is likewise gold and verie fine cotten wooll and at this present it is ful of beasts brought thither by the Spaniards and there haue increased The swines flesh is better in that Island then in any other place The cheefe towne in this Island is called Hispalis of Siuilia because of the abby which therein is erected the first abbot being Peter Marti◠borne in Milan an excellent learned man and hee that wrote most concerning this Hystorie Hispaniola or Haiti THe seconde great Islande accounted among the Antillas was by the first inhabitants called Quisqueia or Quisquesia and after that Haiti and then Cipanga Haiti is as much to say as roughnesse or sharpnesse and Quisqueia great land Christopherus Columbus called it Hispaniola and now it is called Saint Dominico after the cheefe Towne in the same Island it was discouered in Anno 1493. on the east side thereof lyeth the Island of Saint Iohn and many others on the West Cuba and Iamaica on the north the Island of the Canibals and on the south the firme land which is the Cape of Vela by Venezuela or little Venice The cōpasse of this Island is 350. miles Benzo saith 400. French miles which is in a manner al one and it is broader then long for in length it is from East to west 150. miles and from north to south 40. miles the middle of the Island lyeth in the longitude of 300. degrees in latitude 19 in it there are verie many and great hauens as Hatibanico Iuua Ozoma Neyua Nizao Nigua Hayna and Iaques which do al runne into the sea There are others that are smaller as Macorix Ciba◠Cotui wherof Macorix is verie ful of fish the other two abounding in gold In this Island are two very strange lakes the one because of the goodnes and profitablenes therof the other by reason of the strangenesse the one comming out of the hilles from whence the Riuer Puizao hath her issue it profiteth no man onely it giueth a feare and a little sinder sulkes The other of Xaragua is salt although many sweete riuers runne into it and hath many fishes among the which are verie great Tortuxes and Tiburones or Hayen it is hard by the sea and is eleuen miles in compasse the riuer sides and shores were much inhabted except the Saline a verie faire hauen and the Riuer Iaques where there is a great salt hil There groweth in this Island great store of very fine blew colour and much brasill wood cotten wooll but they know not how to make any thing of it amber rich mines of gold and is also fished out of lakes and riuers and likewise siluer and other mettals great abundance of sugar it is verie fruitful ground Reddish Lettice and Coleworts beeing sowed therein are within sixteene dayes after ripe and to bee eaten Melons
two streames like Englâ—nâ— and 〈…〉 so that it seemeth almost to be two Islands it hath many goodly hauens the naâ—◠〈◊〉 giuen it of our Lady of Guadalupe it is â—ul of villages each of twentie or thirtie houses all wood and rounde made of certaine great okes which they thrust into the earth and those serue for the doores of their houses then they place smaller which hold the rest from falling Their branches on the toppe being bound together like tents which they couer with Palme tree leaues to keep them from the raine within they fasten ropes made of cotten wool or of Bâ—esen wherupon they lay cotten mattresses and hanging beddes therein to sleepe This Island hath seuen faire riuers the inhabitants were called Caâ—ucâ—erum it hath verie great Parrots much differing from others being red both before and behind with long feathers the wings speckled with red some yellow some blew al mixed together whereof there are as great abundance as of Spree 〈…〉 er in our countryes there groweth in this Island a certaine gumme called A 〈…〉 m not much vnlike Amber the smoke or aire of this gumme being let vp into the head driueth out the colde the tree bringeth foorth a fruit like dates but of a spanne and a halfe long which beeing opened hath a certaine white and sweete meale This fruit they keepe for winter as we do chesnuts the trees are like figge trees they haue likewise in this Island al kind of orchard fruit and some are of opinion that al kindes of sweete fruites were first brought out of this Islande into the other Islandes round about it for they are hunters of men which hauing taken they eate them and for the same cause they trauaile abroade many hundreth miles both farre and neare and in their trauell whatsoeuer they finde they bring it home and plant it They are not friendly but fierce and cruell They indure no strangers among them both the men and the women are verie subtile and expert in shooting with their bowes and their arrowes being poysoned when the men are gone abroad the women keepe their places and countreyes most stoutly defending them from al inuasion to conclude al parts of that Islande both hils and dales are verie fruitfull and in the hollow trees and clifts of hilles and rocks they find home Desiada or Desiderataâ— ABout eighteene miles from Guadalupa towards the East lieth Desiada another Island being twentie miles great Desiada or Desiderata that is desire so called by reason of the fairenesse of the Island ten miles from Guadalupa towards the south lyeth Galanta being in compasse aboue thirtie miles it is an euen and faire country wherof the Island hath taken the name for Galanta in Spanish betokeneth faire Therein are diuers sweete smelling trees both in barks rootes leaues There are likewise many great Horsleaches Nine miles from Guadalupa towards the East there lieth six smal Ilands called Todos los Sanctos or al Saints and Barbara spokeÌ„ of before Those Islandes are verie full of cliffes stonie and vnfruitful which the Pilots are to looke vnto to auoyde the danger that may ensue A little further lyeth Dominica taking the name from the day because it was discouered vpon a sunday and also an Islande of Caniballes so ful and thicke of Trees that there is scant an elle of free land Thereabouts also is another Island called Madannina or the womens Islande where it is thought that women onely inhabited in maner of Amazons whither the Canibales often times resorted to lie with them and if they had daughters they kept them but boyes they sent vnto their fathers it lyeth fortie miles from Mons Serratu After that lyeth yet thrée Islands besides other little Islands and diuers cliffes called S. Vincent Granada and S. Lucia Comming further towards the coast of Florida where we left right against it there lyeth certaine smal cliffes called Martires and the little Ilands called Tortugas because they are like a Torteauxes From this poynt of Florida to Ancon Baxo are 100. miles and lyeth fiftie miles distant East and West from Rio Secco which is the breadth of Florida from Ancon Baxo 100. miles to Rio di Nieues from thence to the riuer Flores 20. miles and somewhat more from the riuer of Flores to the bay called Bahya del Spirito Sancto which is likewise called La Culata being in the entrance thereof thirtie miles broade from this Bahya which lyeth vnder 29. degrées are 70. miles to the riuer called Rio del Pescadores from Rio del Pescadores which lyeth vnder 28. degrees and halfe there is 100. miles to the Riuer called Rio de las Palmas from whence Tropicus Cancri beginnneth from Rio de las Palmas to the Riuer Panuco are 30. miles and from thence to Villa Rica or Vera Crus are seuentie miles in which space lyeth Almeria from Vera Crus that lyeth vnder 19. degrees to the riuer of Aluarado by the Island called Papa Doapan are thirtie miles from the riuer Aluarado to the riuer Coâ—zâ—coalco are fiftie miles from thence to the riuer Gritalâ—a are fortie miles The said two riuers lying about eighteene degrées from the riuer Gritalua to Cabo Redondo are eightie miles as the coast stretcheth along wherein are contained Champoton and Lazaro from Cabo Redondo to Cabo di Catoche or Iucatan are 90. miles and lyeth about 21. degrées so that there are in al nine hundred miles in the length of the coast of Florida to Iucatan which is another Cape or hooke which stretcheth from off the land northward and the further it reacheth into the sea the more it crooketh or windeth about and is sixtie miles from Cuba The Island whereof we haue alreadie spoken which doth almost inclose the sea that runneth betwéene Florida and Iucatan which sea by some men is called Golfo de Mexico of others Golfo de Florida and of some others Cortes the sea that runneth into this gulfe entreth betwéene Iucatan and Cuba with a mightie streame and runneth out againe betweene Florida and Cuba and hath no other course A breefe description of Noua Hispania or new Spaine THe second part of America is called Noua Spaigna or new Spaine it beginneth towards the North about the Riuer of Panuco vppon the borders of Florida on the South side it reacheth to the prouince Darienâ— where it is diuided from Peru on the East it hath the maine Sea and on the west the South sea called Mare Australe this whole Prouince was in times past by the Inhabitants called Cichemecan Cathuacan or Coâ—acan which peple came out of the land of Culhua which lieth aboue Xalisco made their habitation about the Moores of Tenuchtitlan where at this present lyeth the towne of Mexico which people hauing neither countrey nor dwelling place chose that for the best and most profitable therein building diuers houses and habitations and in that manner placed both their new and old villages vnder the commaundement of Culhuacan giuing the same name
and ninetéene entring vpon the one and twentie day of October and issuing againe in the moneth of December after when as then the dayes were there at the longest and the nights shortest Touching this strait you may reade at large in the histories of India and the nauigations of the EnglishmeÌ„ that also haue passed the same The K. of Spaine in the yeare of our Lorde one thousand fiue hundred eightie and two commaunded a Castle to be made vppon the point or first entry into those straits on the south side towards Peru from whence most part of his treasure commeth thereby to impeach other Nations to enter or passe the same about this strait dwelleth certayne great giantes of tenne or eleuen foote high and higher as some men write Magellanica the sixt part of the worlde MAgellanica is the sixt part of the world which as yet is least knowne but with out al doubt very great and stretcheth farre and wide the prouince in that countrey lying right against the strait of Magellana is called Terra de Fuego Beach another prouince lying in that part of the worlde is esteemed to be rich of golde the furthest Islands thereof are Iaua minor or little Iaua diuided into eight Kingdomes bringing foorth many kindes of spices as yet vnknowen to vs. Iaua maior Timor from whence is brought white and redde sanders wood Banda from whence nutmegges and mace are brought the Islands of Moluco wherin groweth cloues Los Romeros and the Islands Salomonis But hereof I wil leaue to speake vntil a more conuenient time and wil proceede with our description to Peru beginning from Panama right against Nombre de Dios and so containing our description in the briefest maner to Cabo Deleado or the desired Cape lying in the straites of Magellana but before I beginne I wil first make a briefe description of Peru in generall Peru is a common word and signifieth thrée things first a poore small countrey and hauen of the Spaniards discouered by Pizzarro and Almagio lying about Panama vnder two degrées on the north side of the line secondly by this worde is vnderstoode the whole countrey beginning at that hauen and following along the coast within the south seas til you come to Chile containing eight prouinces as Quito Cagnaresia Porto veio de S. Iacomo Cassamalca Cuscoa Cagnasia Calloa and Charcassia Thirdly this word Peru or Peruuia signifieth the sixt parte of the worlde namely that which is diuided southwarde from America which is also seperated from New Spaine by a straight or narrow péece of ground not aboue seuentéene miles in breadth making that Peru which otherwise is wholy coÌ„passed about with the sea is not an Island for that on the south side it hath the sea called the South Sea whereby men passe through the straits of Magelana on the west part lieth the strait it self which diuideth Peru from the land that lieth ouer against it as yet not fully discouered and by some called Terra di Fuegos that is the land of Fire This strait or narrowe passage was found out by Magellanus in the yeere of our lord one thousand fiue hundred and nineteene and as some say in the yeere of our Lord one thousand fiue hundred and twenty one and reacheth right east weast 110. miles and lieth vnder 52. degrees and thirty minutes being in the greatest part but two miles broad the shore on both sides being full of high stone rockes In this part of the worlde are fiue principall great prouinces as Castilia del Orâ— or the Golden Castle Popaiana Brasilia Chile and Peru and is diuided from new Spaine by the prouince of Dariene Beginning from thence and reaching to the straites of Magellana you must then vnderstand Peru to be a whole sixt part of the world which reacheth wide and broade to aboue sixty foure degrees and thirtie minutes namely on the south side of the line to fiftie two degrées and one halfe and on the north side twelue degrees to Saint Martha which is the furthest part of the country northward in the furthest length this part hath fiftie three degrees accounting from the meridian Passing the Cape Saint Augustine which lyeth vnder 8. degrees and thirtie minutes southward to the Meridian and the head of saint Francis lieth vpon the poynt of two parts southward The whole sixt parte of the world is in forme almost like a Hart or a Triangle standing three equall distances or lines being drawne from the three corners or points of the land The first from the Cape Saint Augustine to the straites of Magellana The second from Magellana to saint Martha and the third from saint Maâ—tha again vnto saint Augustine which in this sort may be described for that placing the one corner of the triangle being Cape saint Augustine vnder eight degrees and thirtie minutes southward and the length thrée hundred forty and one degrées the other corner of the triangle being the strait of Magellana vnder fifty two degrees and thirtie minutes southward and the length 303. degrées The line that is betweene these two heades must haue sixtie degrees as the Meridian three hundred sixtie hath so much then or somewhat more hath the line that runneth from Magellana to Saint Marcha which lieth vnder twelue degrees and in length two hundred ninetie foure degrees therefore this land hath almost the forme of a triangle others say it is formed like an egge which on both sides runneth sharpe downewards and is broad in the middle whereof the better to know it I will first beginne with Peru and the course the Portingales helde from Panama to Peru. In tune past by the name of Peru men vnderstoode all the prouinces that lie thereabouts from Pastoa vnto Chile and from the riuer Maulâ— north and south vnto the riuer Anchasmay Nowe the Spaniards by the word Peru mean the land that lieth between the riuer Argiropilis or Villa de la Pâ—atta the prouince Quito which is a fruitful sound populous and wel inhabited countrey being in length from north to south seuen hundred miles and in bredth from east to weast about a hundred miles so that the borders east and south are Argiropolis towards the west sea and towards the north the prouince Pastoa This land is diuided into three partes that is Planitiem Sierras and Andes that is an euen flat land lying on the Sea side with hilles or hilly countrey which passe through the middle of Peru lying eastward ouer the hilles This land is rich with gold and siluer more than any country in al the world which well appeareth by the yeerely quantitie of golde and siluer brought from thence respecting not the boastings brags vsed by the Perunians themselues that say The summes yéerely brought out of that countrey is nothing in respect of the quantitie therein for that it may be esteemed as much as if a man hauing a sack ful of corne should take a few graines out of it it may
Snakes like Eales bigger driuing in the sea you must likewise vnderstand that the streame of the water at the Cape de bona Speranza till the times aforesaid doe alwaies runne from the Cape del Gado or to the cape de bona Speranza southwestward notwithstanding y t some streams runne crosse through them that is along the Islandes as I 〈…〉 Pâ—â—iera runne Westward vpon the bankes of Cabo das correntes to the Riuer called Aguada de Boapaz the streames run likewise Westwardes towardes the creeke that lyeth by the Cape das Agulhas at Agundi de San Bras the streame runneth towardes the land and vpon these coastes you shall find y t the stiffer the wind bloweth out of the West the more the water and streames runne against the wind The 5. Chapter Of the nauigation and course from Lisbone to the East Indies written set down by the Kings Pilot called Rodriges de Lagos a Portingall WHen you put out of the riuer of Lisbone to saile to the Iland called Porto Santo you must run Southwest and setting out of Lisbone you must marke the sunne by the Compasse to proue it that is in the rising and setting of the Sunne and the middle betweene her rising and setting which is North and South and as much as you finde the needle of the compasse to lie northeastward so much you must run southwarde for 〈◊〉 lyeth northeast and southwest with y e riuer of Lisbon wherewith it meeteth full and euen when you perceiue or haue a sight of Porto Santo or the Iland Madeia sayling to the Iland La Palma then you shal giue all that which the Néedle of the Compasse lyeth Northeastward and somewhat more for that it lyeth more Eastwarde then it is set downe in the sea Carde and from thence to the Island de Ferro to the which Island you shall likewise winde a little more Westward then it lyeth in the Carde and hereof fayle not as being negligent to obserue it for although you abate ten miles from your course to the Islande La Palma as it is in the Carde yet you shall go right vpon it and hauing past the Island La Palma then your best way is to run southward 30. miles from the Islands of Capo Verde alwaies giuing all that which the Néedle of the Compasse lyeth Northeastward or that you shall runne betwéene two meale tydes that the one mealetide South and the other South and by East setting your course to the South or the better to vnderstand it all that which the Néedle of the Compasse yeeldeth which may be halfe a strike and rather lesse then more and sayling from vnder 22. to 18. degrées you shall sée gréene water which commeth from the point called Capo Branco and from the créeke where the fortresse of Aâ—guâ—â—n lyeth which gréene water if you see it more then two meale tides then it is a signe y t you are near the coast but if you see but a little gréen water that is lesse then for the space of two mealetides then you are nearer to the Islandes and comming vnder ten degrees as long as you are by the coast of Guinea you shall giue the Needle of the Compasse no abatement or cutting off because the water draweth towardes the land whereby the Northeasterne drawing of the Needle of the Compasse which may bee a thirde parte of a strike agréeth with the drawing of the water and so the shippe runneth southeast and the water and streame commeth alwaies out of the south whereby it is driuen vnto the shore Sayling from 5. to 3. degrées it is good to keepe off the coast from 70. to 100. miles and not more for being more it would not be good for your voyage the reason is for y t being 100 miles or more froÌ„ the coast theÌ„ you haue but few south windes to get the coast againe but rather haue all the thunders and lightnings from the East to the South and southeast which kéepe you from getting to the shore and because those thunders come vpon you on all sides therefore it is good to runne if it be possible from â—0 to 8â— miles that is to 2â— degrees and 1 â— where you shall finde a southeast wind continuing from the 2â— of Aprill to the 15. of May but if you stay till the end of Aprill it may happen that as then you shall not haue the southeast wind before you be vnder one degrée of the Equinoctiall line The signes you haue vppon this coast of Guinea are some of the birds Garagiaus and if the thunders come out of the East being 60. or 70. miles from the shore you shal sée certaine Swallows and Duckers when you haue the southeast wind and that you make towardes the point or bough of Brasilia although in the first day of your nauigation it diminisheth not so much in the height as it should you must not be abashed thereat for that which you find to be lesse diminished is not by reason that the water or streame hindreth you as many and the most parte of men are of opinion for that the degrees hard by the Equinoctiall are greater then others that are higher as you shall well perceyue sayling to India or comming from thence with a fore wind vnder the line then the degrées diminish but a little whereby it may be assured that the small diminution or running forwarde is not by reason of the water or streame that runne to the Antilhas or foure Ilandes of the Spanish Indies comming to the line or a degrée further then in any sorte turne not againe vnto Guinea for it woulde bee against your selfe and thereby you should spende your time in vaine for that some ships that departed out of Lisbone in my company that from vnder the line they would wind towardes Guinea which I did not but contrarily made ouer to Brasilia whereby those shippes came a month later then I did into India In this bough or crossing to Brasilia you shall set your course as the wind serueth and looke well to your Compasse for that as soone as you are past the line then the Néedle of the Compasse lyeth halfe a strike and more to the Northeast and sailing from the 8. of the 18. degrée then the more the Néedle of the Compasse lyeth Northeast the further you are from the coast of Brasilia and saie that you lay East and West with Cape S. Augusten and that the Néedle of the Compasse should yéelde two third partes of a strike Northeastwarde then you are 150. miles from it to seaward in which is thus to be vnderstoode that if the Compasse were made in Portingall there lay halfe a strike Northeastward if it bee good and true it will do the same vpon the coast of Brasilia being East and west with the Abrolhos and about 170 or 200. miles from it then the Néedle of the compasse shal lie a whole strike or somewhat more Northeastward for that the Meridian of
of the Earle Don Luis de Tayde I passed 20. miles and more from the droughts towardes the coast of Soffala and saw not one birde but the day before I had séene ten or twelue of the birdes called Alcatrases and as soone as you perceiue the signes aforesaid then run no further North or North and by East vntill you bee vnder 19. degrées and ¼ vnder the which heights y e Islands As Ylhas Prinneras doe lie and somewhat more to the West for that holding your course Northeast the streame runneth so fast that you should presently fall vppon the bankes of Soffala and if you chance to sée the Ylhas Prinneras trust not vnder that course for although you passe by them East Northeast yet it is false because the first and last of them lie East and West one against the other till you come to a drie sand called A Coroa de Sanguase that is the Crowne of Sangase then you runne by the Islandes of Angoxas East Northeast and West southwest from this Crowne of Sangase to Mosambique you runne along the coast Northeast and Southwest From thence to Mosambique are some rodes or ankering places from 18. to fiue and twentie fadome déepe but my opinion is if it be possible that it were better not to anker because that vppon that coast there are many cliffes and stormes which are oftentimes not séene if the water breake not vpon them The signes that are found within 14 miles from Mosambique is a great thicke land and a mile and a halfe from the coast lyeth a banke where you passe ouer with fifteene fadome water the land aforesaid is called Maginquale and vpon it along by the shore there are some trees like Pine-apple trees from thence to Mosambique are twelue miles and to Mocango 5. miles hauing all that way the aforesaid trees and sometimes the water breaketh about a mile from the shore Now to put into Mosambique you must take your course in the middle way betweene the Iland S. George and the droughtes of Canaciera where you shal find 7.8 and sometimes 9. fadome when it is high water and being as farre as the Iland so that in your sight the Iland of Saint George and that of Saint Iames are all one then you are right against the Islandes and from thence putting in you shall set your course right vpon the strand of S. Anthonio in the Iland of Mosambique vntil you be in a good depth which shal be a channel stretching North and South and comming with the same course to twelue fadome deepe then winde Northwarde alwaies keeping of the point called Noâ—â—a Senhora do Baluarte which is a Church that standeth vppon the highest part of the Iland vppon the water without the fortresse of Mosambique and also from the sandes called Cabaciera which lyeth on the other side right ouer against Mosambique This Bay of Mosambique lyeth scarce vnder 15. degrees in this hauen of Mosambique the Compasse windeth not a strike Northwestward and from thence to the a Ilha do Comoro you must run northeast which Iland lyeth vnder 11. degrees 1 â— that is in the end of Southwest the course from this Island or to the line is Northeast and northeast and by east from hence to the line certaine nightes you shall see shyning or white water till you come to three or foure degrées and shall haue the wind Southeast and from thence forwarde you shall beginne to haue it Southwest and south so you begin to come from India in the winter time from the Equinoctiall line or to the height of Coa that is vnder 15. degrées and 1 â— you must runne East Northeast and in this way the Compasse will lie a strike and a halfe Northwestwarde and as much as it lyeth Northwestwarde must be sayled north-Eastward vnto the afore said height of Goa the signes you alwaies find in this way are alwaies about ten degrées in the night time you haue white and shining water and from those ten degrees to the coast of India sometimes you see many birdes that come from the shore that is from the coast of Arabia as Quartelles and other such like smal birds and 180. or two hundred myles from the coast of India then the Compasse beginneth to lessen in the Northwest for that in the hauen of Goa it lyeth but one strike to the Northwest and 1 â— part and rather lesse then more The 6. Chapter To sayle from Goa to Cochin FRom Goa to Batecola you must saile two or three miles from the land from twentie to fiue and twentie sadom deep for it is deeper there then neerer to Cochin for about halfe a mile from the Islande of Batecola you finde sixe and twentie fadome deepe from thence it is good to runne Southeast and Southeast and by South to the fortresse of Barcelor and to know if you be by Barcelor or in the height thereof you must vnderstand that there are high hils which beginne at Batecola and continue to Barcelor and right aboue Barcelor there is a round houell like darke miste or clowde which standeth in the end of y e high hilles on the South side of Batecola to this hauen it is foure or fiue miles and halfe a mile from the shore it is all stonie By Barcelor you may anker at ten fadome deepe about a mile and a halfe from the shore and desiring to sayle vnto Cochin you must holde your course South southwest and somewhat more into the sea as the winde will permit you for there are other Islandes and cliffes being where you may passe by as I saide before at fourteen fadome water it is a good course to keep at sixteene fadome from those Ilands three or foure miles forwarde there are nothing but Ilandes and cliffes which hauing past you come to see the Fort of Mangalor as you passe by the shore at fifteene fadome deepe from thence you sayle to the Fortresse of Cananor from Cananor to the Islandes as Ilhas Cagidar which is â— miles let your course here be south southeast at 18. fadom deep from the Islands of Cagadas to Chale are 7. miles y e course is south southeast 18 fadome deepe from Chale to Panane are 9. miles in the same course and from Panane to Cochiin are 10. miles the course beeing south southeast and at twelue ten fadome deepe which is a good way The 17. Chapter The course or Nauigation from Cochin to Portingall written by the said Rodriâ— de Ligos THe towne of Cochiin lieth vnder nine degrees and â— â— rather lesse than more and departing out of Cochiin towards Portingall you must hold your course West and as much Frorth till you come â— miles from Cochiin and being there you shall so set your course that as you passe through the Islandes of Maldina and Maâ—ale you may come to the height of 8. or eight degrees and not to fall vppon anie Islands although the sea card in this course hath certaine Islandes yet
to say truth there are none Those Islandes being past it is good to take your course Southwest till you come to foure degrees and from thence south southwest to three degrées on the south side of the Equinoctiall from Cochin all the way aforesaid to this place The compasse lieth northwest a strike and a halfe beeing vnder three degrees on the south side of the line then you begin to haue the thunder out of the west and northwest with a stiffe winde and from thence you shall hold south and south by west to ten or twelue degrees in which you shal haue the wind southeast vnder these twelue degrees the compasse holdeth northwestward a strike and â— parts but shall not therfore be made any abatement in your reckoning for it is often found that the water or streame doth there run to the west which would then be two faults for that as I vnderstand it in this course you must account all that is said the ship hath gone because you shall likewise find streames that draw to the southeast being at 12 degrees as I said before til you be vnder 15. degrees theÌ„ you haue the winde sometime south southeast then you must not lie westward for it is not good but rather runne east and east southeast alwaies keeping good watch to the eightéenth degrée vnder the which lieth the droughtes called 〈◊〉 Baxios dos Garagiaus and hauing a south-East wind then it is good to hold your course southwest vntill you discouer the Island of Diego Rodâ—ges and if it lieth right before you then you shall sée some of the birdes called Alcatrases and some hearbes called Saâ— driuing in the water and there the compasse goeth no higher but beginneth from thence againe to diminish or lessen when you are past this Island or the point thereof then runne southwest and southwest and by west to 26. degrees vnder the which height lieth the first point of the Island of S. Laurence as soone as you are vnder this height then you shall hold your course west southwest to 29. degrees and from thence west and west and by south and to know when you are north and by south with the Island of Saint Laurence that is with the middle of the vttermost land on the south side then marke the compasse well and if you bee by the countrey aforesaid then your compasse will bee a strike and 1 â— one from the other northwestward from thence you shall hold your course as winde and weather serueth for being from about the 15. of Aprill till the last of May it is necessary to haue the Firme land on boarde for that there at those times you haue the winde North and northwest and being in the monthes of Februarie and March then the winde is east and south where you must rule your course as the wind serueth and being right with the land north south then the compasse shall leaue a strike rather more than lesse to the Northwest which is a certaine signe to bee right against it but if it be more then assure your selfe you are not by the land then beeing 30. or 40. miles from thence and though you be but 30 miles from the land you shall see gréene water but you finde no ground The compasse that I speake of shall be sixe and euen at the Cape das Agulhas with those that make them leane northeastward in Portingall a halfe strike rather lesse then more and when you come to the Cape das Agulhas and hetherwards as long as you haue not muddie ground you are not at the Cape das Agulhas wherefore spare not often to cast your lead for it will be for your owne good Passing the Cape das Agulhas to the cape de Bona Speranza it is not good to saile northwest as long as you haue ground for that therewith you should not passe the Cape de Bona Speranza but being past it then runne northwest til you come to 16. degrees vnder the which height the Island of Saint Helena doth lie or to 16. degrees and 1 â— and when you come to that height then run west and somewhat southerlie or the first meale tide west and by south because of the compasse of the sea in some streames for I thinke you shall finde no more heights although you should sayle west and by south and sayling on that course you shall continue it 50. miles further but no more and when you perceiue the Island and cannot reach it by day then strike all your small sayles holding about 5. miles from thence in such manner that in the night time you hold west and west and by north there the compasse beareth full northeast halfe a strike and as you make your reckinng well in your course from the cape de Bona Speranza to this Island with the aduantage of the compasse as it ought to be you shall find that it lieth aboue seauentie miles more westward then it standeth in the Sea Card departing from this Iland to saile to Portingall and to sée the Iland called Ascention you shall run northwest and northwest and by west for 70. miles then you shal goe somewhat Easternly as some doe then it wil be needful to saile 100. miles northwest and by west and from thence northwest vntill you come by the generall wind but come no nearer vnto the land for then you should not make a good voiage and although the south winde doth continue longer in this course which bringeth you to twelue fourtéene degrées on the north side yet leaue it not for that neyther put close vnder the coast of Guinea when you haue the general wind although you might more westernly neyther leaue off therefore to follow your course for it will be large enough althougl sometimes it scanteth because you are close by the land It is good to kéepe 150. or 200. miles from the coast for although that by the sea cardes you finde your selfe to bee two hundred miles from the land notwithstanding you are a good way nearer the reason whereof is that you sayle from the point of the Island of S. Helena which lieth in the sea carde and not from the Island that lieth 70. miles westward as aforesaid and although the pointes doe assuredly lie towards the Island Flores it therfore maketh no reason that it is not so as I say for that in the course through the sea where you finde the hearbe Sargosso the winde being there alwaies northeast the sea or streame runneth to the Antilhas or fore Iland of the Spanish Ilandes whereby the ships doe so little multiplie in the course of Sargosso if these waters and streames doe chance to meete the ships when they are in the course of Sargosso it happeneth often times that the ships beare too loofeward but very seldome and it happeneth oftentimes that by Guinea the streame runneth northward and being somewhat neere the land then the water draweth you presently to the land also the
halfe it is a small ryuer beeing at high water within the Hauen but thrée Fadome déepe and for a marke hath a high trée standing on the South side and along the shore some Sandie dounes which in sight shew like Ilands without trées on the North side lie certaine shallowes you enter into the Hauen Northwest on that is on the side where the trées stand and there as you are within the point you may Anker at fiue and sixe fadome déepe Quiloan or Quiloane lyeth vnder 20. degrées and a halfe and on the South side hath a high Palme trée and the land on the same side is like a hooke and if you desire to put into Quiloane although it were with a shippe of foure hundred tunnes you may well doe it being high water but you must take heede of a drougth lying thrée myles from the Hauen This Hauen at high water is fiue Fadome déepe and when you are in hard by the point of the ryuer you find fiue or sixe Fadome water with muddie ground you enter therein West Southwest and Southwest and by West and the drougthes aforesaide lie East Southeast and West Southwest like Quiloane From Mataca or Mâ—nemone to Quiloane you shall see land at thirteene or fourteen fadome déepe and beeing vnder 21 degrees and 60 fadome deepe then you shall be fifteen myles from the land shall find Corall vpon the ground and from thence inward small sands sayling from Quiloane to Soffala you must runne North and north and by East without the poynt or hooke til you be at 12 or 13 fadome déepe and till you sée Soffala and if you desire to stay there then runne till you be vnder 6. or 7. fadome which is 6. or 7. miles from the land the Hauen of Soffala changeth euerie yeare therefore you can not put into it without one of the countrie Pilots and it hath for a marke a companie of palme trees standing together on the north side sailing froÌ„ thence to Mosambique you must runne East till you come to fourty fadome water and from thence East north east running fiftéene or sixtéene myles from the Ilandes Primeiras you shall alwaies in these countries all along the coast find smal thinne blacke sand mixed with the earth although you sayle close in sight of the land Soffala lieth vnder twentie degrees and the Hauen called Bango vnder nyntéene and ½ and the riuer of Cuama vnder eightéene and â— 4 and you runne along the Coast from Soffala to Cuama North East and South West beeing thirtie myles and if you haue occasion to enter into the Riuer of Cuama to take in fresh water you must enter with a small Boate for within it is all fresh water from Cuama to the Ilandes of Primeiras you runne along the coast east and West and somewhat East and by north and West and by South There are two sights of land and beeing vnder eighteene degrees you finde therne fyue fadome deepe in sight of land for the Bankes in those Countries are verie small the course is fiftie miles The Riuer called Dos Bonis Sinais or of good tokens lyeth vnder seuentéene degrees and ¾ and hath these markes that is vppon the North east syde at the mouth of the Hauen there standeth an heap of trées and on the south syde it hath a sandie strand and vppon the furthest poynt outwardes there is a sand Hill or Downes which farre off sheweth like an Iland the entrie is on the South West syde along by the sand the Hauen at the mouth with lowe water is two fadome and beeing within it you may ly at 6. or 7. fadome water you can not see the entrie as you are without but on the North West syde you see the begynning of the land that hath a heape of trees standing vppon it which a farre off showe like the Maste of a shippe and the neerer you drawe to the land the lesse you see thereof so that beeing in the Riuer you see nothing at all because it is hindered by the other branches The Channell of the Ilandes Primenas and of the Ilandes of Angoxas are all one and you sayle East North east and West south west and it is 30 myles with tenne or twelue fadome deepe and neerer to the Ilandes then to the firme land and if you will stay by one of these Ilandes with a West wind you may freelie inough goe close vnto it for it is deepe and passing good ground The first of y e Ilands of Primeiras lyeth vnder 17 degrees ½ if you desire to run betwéene them then runne Southwest from the Iland and you shall freelie enter the chanell without feare for it is déepe inough for the drougthes lye a myle and a half distant from the Iland and if you desire to put in there with a west wind then goe close to the Iland running to the middle therof towards the south syde where you may anker within the length of a great shot at 6 or 7 fadome déepe and desiring to passe either in or out betwéene the droughtes which lie Northeast you may very well doe it and though you beare all your sayles kéeping alwaies néerer the sand of the Iland then to the droughthes in the middle Iland for it is all one vpoÌ„ what syde of the Iland you sayle for there is no cause of feare but onlie where you sée the water breake and desiring to anker by the middle Iland you may fréely doe it and that close by it for it is 12 fadome déepe at low water with a West wind but not with an East wind in the middle way on that side which lyeth against the firme land there standeth a heape of trees by the which you shall find a lake of fresh water to serue you if necessitie requireth and lyeth a little inward from the strand and if you can not well goe farre inward to the lake doe but digge in the strand and you shall presentie find fresh water but it must be when it is an east wind for with a West wind the water striketh with so great a force vpon the shore that you are not able to stay there with your boate The middle Iland which lyeth North east hath no passage at all to the sea but from thence to the drouthes called Acoroa de S. Antonio are seuen miles and to the first Iland of Angoxa fyue miles and is all one course with the Ilandes you may fréelie passe by the land with what shippe so euer you will for it is déepe inough all the Ilandes of Angoxas haue thorow fares one running through the other al déep and good ground so that there is betwéene the Ilandes and the firme land at the least eight fadome déepe but you must alwaies sayle néerer the firme land then the Ilandes There lyeth a sandie drougth betwéene the Iland of Angoxa which likewise is to bee sayled on both sides These Ilandes of Angoxas are 4 and betwéen the two middle
Ilandes ly the aforesaid sand drougthes wherfore I wish you not to go too néere them for they are dangerous There lieth a sand drougth 4. miles from the first Iland of Angoxa towardes Mosambique which euerie springtide is couered with the sea hauing other sandes round about it that are alwaies couered with the sea therefore I wish you to take héed of them you may from thence runne along the shore where it is déepe water from these drougthes 14 or 15 miles towardes Mosambique there is a haueÌ„ called Os Coaraias that is the Corales from the which hauen about a mile and a half into the sea lieth a clif which is very dangerous and which a man can hardly shunne till he be almost vpon it and with a Springtide the water breaketh not ouer it wherefore you must take héed vnto it for many shippes haue striken vpon it and Don Ioan Periera fell vpon it when you passe it you must put 3 miles from it into y e séa North east northeast by East being by night but by day you may sayl w t more securitie and looke about you yet nothing going neerer to the shore then 25 fadome déepe in this course you shall passe by the drouthes of Musicatte and following your course North east you shall come right vpon the Ilands of Mosambique if you haue occasion to anker before you come to Musicatte then keepe off from the cliffe towards the land til you be at 15 fadome and there you may anker for it is good grouÌ„d yet but in few places only vnder the point of Musicatte at 20 fadome and more you shall haue faire ground the point of Musicatte lieth with the Ilands of Angoxas North east and South west being 18 miles distant from theÌ„ce to Mosambique you runne North east along the coast the East side of the Iland Premeira lyeth with the drongthes north-Northeast South west and some what North east and by East and South west and by West the land of the Ilandes Premeiras on the side of Mosambique lyeth vnder 16 degrees and and ¾ you runne along by those Ilands and sands East and West and East by North and West by south and if there you find your self to bee inwards at 12 or 13 foote and lesse within a length of a great shot of the Ilands yet bee not abashed but beware of the outside which is full of stones and other filth whereby no meanes you can anker as being nothing but wood stonâ— if you chance to be in the middle way betwéene the Ilands the drougths with an East wind then you must passe in out betweene the first Iland the drougth which Iland lyeth in middle way from the Ilands Premieras on the side of Soâ—â—ala as also from the third Iland towardes Mosambique running along the West side at 7.10 12 fadome déepe the other drougthes lie in the middle way vnder the stone cliffes therefore you néed not feare them but betwéene the Iland from the trees that are vpon the East side you can by no meanes passe for it is all ouer nothing but droughthes and shallowes From the South west side of these Ilands Premieras and Northeast and south west with the first Iland 7 miles from it there lyeth a sand drougth of foure fadome déepe hoth in leÌ„gth breadth the cariage of a great shotte in length tenne or twelue myles from the Ilands Premieras lieth the Riuer Quilimani where the Coast reacheth East and West and somewhat East by North and West and by south and you shall find 6 or 7 fadome déepe within three miles of the land where you find no other drougthes then that of Quilimani which you must take héed of for they reach 6. or 7. miles into the sea and if you find your self inwards from Cauo das Correntes you may at all times anker for it is good ground because you are vpon the banks and haue no cause to feare because the wind blowing from the land wil alwaies helpe you whereby you may put into the sea as you thinke good The 11. Chapter The course from India to Porto Piqueno de S. Iago that is the smal hauen of S. Iacob which is the mouth of the Riuer Ganges lying in the kingdome of Bengala HE that desireth to sayle from India to Poâ—to Piqueno or the small hauen lying in BeÌ„gala I mean outward about the Iland of Seylon he must set sayle out of the Hauen of Cochiin betweene the which and the 20. of Aprill holding his course along the shore to a place called Briniao which lieth vpon the Cape or poynt of Comoriin that is the furthest poynt or end of the Indian coast southwestward from thence holding his course south till he be vnder 6 degrées ¾ and from thence South east to 5 degrées and â…” and being ther he must runne East till hee seeth the Iland of Seylon for the point of Seylon called A Ponte de Gualla that is the poynt of the Galley is the farthest land from thence lying in the south vnder 6 degrees therefore if you hold your course East till you be vnder 5 degrees and â…” you can not fayle to see the land of the Iland Seylon this way and course you must alwaies hold setting out of Cochâ—â— from the 10. of Aprill to the 20. of the same as I sayd before for yf you depart later from thence you must stay longer because as then the wind beginneth to blow stifly out of the South at other tymes hauing the wind Southwest and Northwest blowing verie strong and blustering wheÌ„ you sée the Iland Seylon you shall sayle along the coast East and West and somewhat East by North and West and by south to the first drougth lying scarse vnder 6. degrees and the other drougths ly farther vnder 6 degr ½ 7 miles distant one from the other in the same course of East and West and East and by North and West and by south from the point A Punta de Gualla to the first drougth are almost 28 miles Beeing 10 or 15 myles beyond the drougthes you shall sayle north-Northeast till you bee vnder 16 degrees and ½ from thence running North whereby you shall come to the Coast of the firme land about tenne or twelue myles from the land called O pagode de Iorganatte that is the Idole or Idoles Temple of Iorganatte which is a verie good course for this voyage when you perceiue this land which hath certaine high Hilles you shall see some round Houels that are rounder and higher then the Hilles standing vppon them called Palur by the which you shall passe along north-Northeast and Southwest and somewhat north-northeast and by East and Southwest and by south vntill you come to the thinne and low land and passing by it you shall come to a Riuer which hath for a marke a flat high field of sand and an other plaine with a houell hauing on the one side somewhat
to certaine high Beecken or downe falles of water you may haue wood to burne and from those Beeckens you must crosse ouer on the other side of Guijnette where you shall presentlie sée 5. or 6. trées higher then the rest vntill you be close to the other side Those trées stand at the mouth of the riuer Chandequā on the east side the depthes you shall finde vppon those bankes are 2. ½ and thrée fadome déepe till you be on the other side for there you finde manie depthes from this place forward you néede no other aduise for the Fisher men as then will bring you where you should bee you shall passe ouer the water with halfe flood but I aduise you once againe that if you saile in the morning by the aforesaid riuer of Cayegare then runne along the coast till you come to the point das Palmerias and from thence to 17. fadome deepe frō thence holding your course northwest and northwest and by north this way must be folowed with a Compasse that yeeldeth one strike till you come to 12. fadome deepe and then running the same course till you come to 4. and three fadome and ½ wherewith if it bee cleare weather you shall presentlie see the lād of Orixa but if it be darke and mistie weather then runne no more towards the land keeping still at 4. and 3. fadome and ½ runrunning East for the leade and the depthes will bring you well in and take héede you come not into many depthes kéeping still as I saide before at the small depthes and if it bee night being at seuentéene fadome then runne towards the 2. Ilands and see you anker not for it is badde ankering there and passing by the aforesaide Punta das Palmeiras running in by night you shal then not passe aboue 7. or 8. fadome vntill it be day wherewith as then you may go in if you chance to be there with a small shippe then keepe at 2. and 2. fadome and ½ till you be in the sight of the riffe of Orixa and when you begin to be right against it then runne within the length of a great shot neere vnto for it is deepe enough and from the side of Orixa it is all banks and shallow ground The riffe aforesaid shall bee on your right hande that is to seaward from you and from thence you must make right with the Island A Ylha dos Gallos or if you will to the point of the Riuer Angelijn where you may freely sayle for there you shall find two and a halfe and thrée fadome déepe but it must bee with a small ship as I said before The 13. Chapter The course from India to the hauen of Aracan which is the same way that you hold to Porto Grande or the great hauen lying in the countrie of Bengalen SAyling from India or Cochijn to the hauen of Aracan you must holde your course to the Islande of Seylon in manner aforesaid as in the description of the course to Porto Pequeno running so to the pointe or ende of the sandes or droughtes lying full vnder 6. degrées and vppon the point of the lande which runneth East and West comming by this point or hooke you shall from thence put off from the land running 7. or 8. miles Northeastward to come out vnder the Islande and then let your course be north-Northeast and north-Northeast by North till you be vnder 12. degrées and that Manacosta be southwest from you and from thence you shall runne north-Northeast till you be almost vnder 20. degrées which is the height of Aracan and if then you sée no land you shall runne East vnto Aracan vnder the same height of 20. degrées thrée or four miles from the land there lyeth a riffe whervpon the water breaketh and at low water is vncouered it is in greatnesse and length about the length of seuen ships both waies and when you sée it you must take heed of it and goe no nearer then the shotte of a great peece The hauen of Aracan lyeth vnder 20. degrees and being fiue or sixe miles to seawarde from it you shall there find twentie fadome deepe sandie grounde and being at 19. degrees and ½ toward the lande you shall find deepe muddie ground at the least 6 miles from the shore and being but three or four miles from the land thirtie fadome déepe muddy ground you must be careful at 19 degrees and ½ not to runne in with the lande but do as I said before The 14. Chapter The course from India to the hauen of Martauan lying in the kingdome of Pegu with the situation of the coastes SAyling from India to Martauan or to y e kingdome of Pegu you shall hold your course till you be past the Island of Seylon as they doe that saile to Bengalen and being about the Island you shal make to the Ilands called As Ylhas d' Andemaon whereof the first Iland lyeth south vnder 11. degrées and the furthest land in the North vnder 14. degrées you runne on the East side of them north-Northeast and Southwest from the Ilands d' Andemaon to the firme lande are aboue 60. miles and running to Andemaon you shall vse all the meanes you can to passe by them vpon the North side and being past you must as I said before make towardes Martauan which lyeth vnder 16. degrees and when you are at 14. degrées you shall make with the lande but better at 13. degrees because of the creeke or winding in of Martauan where you finde a very strong streame alwayes drawing Northwest and if you make with the lande being at 14. degrees you shall sée many Islands which you may freely passe close by for it is all ouer very deepe for there it is 12. and 13. déepe muddie ground close by the shore besides the Island Pulo Comudo which is about 6. or 7. miles from the hauen of Martauan betweene this Island and the firme lande there lyeth many riffes notwithstanding if you chance to fall betwéene those Islandes you shall make towardes the side of the Islande but not too close where you shall find a channell of thrée fadome deep and on the side of the firme land you haue many sands and shallowes passing from thence to the hauen of Martauan being past that Iland you shall passe along the shore where you shall see certaine cliffes lying towards the sea which shew like Almadias which are Indian Scutes by them vsed in y e riuers which cliffes lie about 2 miles from Pulo Comudo towardes Martauan and right ouer against these cliffes you haue on the firme lande a point or hooke of high land and on the North side of this point there lyeth a sandie strand vpon the low land this land belongeth to Xemiin Vegarum that is in Pegu spéech the Lord of Vegarum for Xemiin is Lord and Vegarum the name of the land from thence Northward the land is high in some places hauing créekes cliffes and Islandes before you come to the
southward and thē againe come Eastward out making the forme of an arme from the said point of Taniamburo to the mouth or entrie of this straight the course is 5. miles East West at 7. and 8. fadome déepe Hee that will passe through Sincapura to China passing by Pulo Picon in the beginning of y e month of Iuly he must go néere to the side of the great Iland Carymon because y e winds of the Monson of Iaua which are at y e time doe alwaies blow from the south side of Sumatra likewise when you keepe by the side of Carimon and being past it you presently haue the mouth or entrie of the straight open vnto you with y e marks aforesaid in this way you find manie depths passing along by Taniamburo thē the land of y e entrie to the straightes sheweth as if the one ran through the other which is a common and certaine marke but hold you to loofeward the better to enter at your plesure This first straight at y e entry hath two riffs on each side one which come from the point or hooke of the land the land on the south side from the entry thereof is altogether Ilands reaching a whole line eastward which make the straight to enter therin you must kéepe neerer the south side then the other at your first entrie you shall finde 12.10 9. fadom deepe and being so far in that the land on the South side which are Ilands make but one point then on the other side before you you shall see a hooke or point whereon there standeth a small red Houell which when you see then you shall turne from the right hand towards that smal Houell because it is the first Iland which you then haue past from that Iland forward there beginneth an other Iland between these two Ilands lieth a Riffe or Sand which with a low water is part vncouered reacheth into the middle of y e chanell where you must run with the Lead continually in your hand which will shew you where you are comming to the point aforesaid of the small Houell then put to the land on the right side which is Ilands as I saide before for it hath only betweene the Iland aforesaid the said Riffe and then you shall run Eastward about halfe a mile with the saide depth of 8. and 9. Fadome from thence forward y e row of Ilands whereby you sayle reach South Eastward and presently somewhat further on the right hand of the same Iland you shall see a round Iland running a little out from the other which will bee vpon your right hand by the which you shall passe along with good watch there you shal finde 8. and 10. fadome deepe muddie ground The land on the left hand which is the North side is Creeks and open ground and hath a great Creeke which turneth towards the South on the which side lyeth an other round Iland that is on the same side from you you shall kéepe from this North side which is nothing but Creekes for they are all full of Riffes and shallowes running as I said before along by the Ilands on the right hand comming by the aforesaid round Iland on the right hand at the end of the row of Ilands whereby you passe you shal sée a smal flat Iland with afew trées hauing a white sandystrand which lieth east and west with the mouth of y e straight of Sincapura which you shal make towards when you beginne to come néere it then the straight beginneth to open discouer it selfe you may sayle neere it and wind about like a bow so to auoid the riffes shallowes of the North side as also not to fal towards y e south side of the mouth of the straight with the ride that runneth ther for you haue many depths and foule ground you must alwaies hold on y e North side where there is a sandie strand of the length of the shotte of a great péece at the end thereof making the forme of a sandy Bay where you find fresh water as farre as that strand runneth it is all along faire ground to Anker in if need be and cōming to this strand you haue the streame that driueth you along by the land towards the mouth of y e straight which you haue not passing further frō then◠for then they driue you towards the déepe and foule ground lying on the South side thereof as aforesaid once againe I aduise you not to passe frō the end of the strand to the north side for it is altogether Riffes and shallowes as aforesaide The mouth or entrie of this straight entreth betwéene two high hils being as broad as a man may cast a stone and reacheth Eastward is in length about the shot of a great péece y e chanel of this straight hath in length 4. fadome and ½ déepe in the entrie at the foote of the hil on the North side there lyeth a stone Cliffe which sheweth like a Piller this is cōmonly called of all nations that passe by it the Varella of China on the South side a good way from the mouth therof it maketh a créeke in the midle wherof lyeth a Cliffe vnder water from the which there runneth a banke towards the middle of the chanel somwhat further on the same side the length of a small shot it hath an opening which runneth through on the other side into the Sea making an Iland this opening is shallow all ouer seruing only for smal Foists to passe through in the middle of this Créeke where this opening is lieth a Cliffe or stonie place two fadome vnder water which stonie place commeth so far without the Créeke as the point of the land reacheth and somewhat more towards the midle of the chanell being past this Creek the land hath a hooke of a houell faling downward where the straight endeth in passing about this there is a rounde Houel by the which you haue déepe and faire ground when you haue past about it y e land from thence reacheth southeast on the North side of this straight from the beginning to the end there are thrée Créeks whereof the two first are small the third great it is situate right ouer against the hooke or point of y e red Houel where the straight endeth this thirde Creeke hath a stonie banke which at a lowe water after a spring tide is vncouered reacheth frō the one point to the other you must be carefull not to fall vpon it all that which lieth on the North side and without y e Créeke all ouer the chanell from the one point to the other is faire ground without danger In y e issuing of the straight beeing without it you haue two Riffes whereof the one lieth right ouer against the issuing of the straight about the shot of a great péece towards y e East cōming from the land on the north side
stretching southward the other lieth in the South the shot of a gret péece from the issuing of the land of the straight reaching Eastward so y t they make a crosse one throgh the other and betwéen those two Riffes the chanel runneth and with the ebbe of a spring tide you may sée them the chanel y t runneth betwene thē both hath scarce 4. fadome deepe the ground within y e chanel is muddie without sand This I haue particularly noted vnto you for their instructions y t hereafter shal passe through that way for that the discriptions of the Nauigation or course thereof heretofore written set downe are very short and obscure for such as haue not past through that way wherby many ships haue run on grounde stricken passed many dangers some cast away but returning to our matter and folowing y e course aforesaid whē you are as far as the mouth of the entrie of the straight then you shall passe right throgh the middle of the way somwhat towards the North side because of the sands aforesaid that lie within y e straights alwaies with your Lead in your hand looking rounde about you for y t at the shalowest place in the middle of the chanel it is 4. fadom and ½ also because it is so narrow y t you can hardly cast out your Lead me thinketh it is your surest way vpon each Sand to set a Scute or other mark that may serue you for Beakens so to auoide them and going a little further by the Creeke which hath the opening that commeth out of y e other side of the Sea wher the Cliffe lieth two fadome vnder the water then kéepe presently towards the houel on y e right hand that maketh the point of the Creeke aforesaid wher also runing along by your Cōpasse as before by the land on the left hand somwhat neerer to it thē on the other side til you be out of y e straight alwaies taking héede of the land and creeke lying on the North side right against this Houel for it is ful of stones and Cliffs as I said before likewise you must shun the east side right against the issuing of the straight for that the shot of a great peece from thence it is altogether cliffes as aforesaid whē you are out of the straight desire to Anker then make towards the South side along by the land that you may get out of the streame you must Anker at 6. fadome for if you stay in the streame of the straight you may chance to lose an anker by the drawing and shaking of y e ship or that you shuld driue and runne vpon the sand at this road you are right ouer against a strand where you finde fresh water whē néed requireth being out of the straight in manner as aforesaid you shal take your course along by the land vpon the right hand alwaies casting out the lead and not putting lower thē scarce 4 fadom neither to the land nor towards the sea and whē you are past half way to the strand comming out of the straight you shal haue no more but ful 4. fadom déep and being past this first strand with a houell and cliffes that stand at the end thereof and a sandie bay lying against the houel being half way frō the other houel which standeth on the end of the aforesaid sandy bay behind the which that opening which is in y e straight commeth out again then hold your course eastward at 4. fadome not turning to the one nor the other side for you should presentlie find both drougthes sands the channel is muddy ground and you must still haue the Leade in your hand vntill you finde other depth which wil not continue long and for more securitie it is best to run before with a scute to try the channel for it will shew you both the channels whē you are at 12. or 15. fadome thē beware of the south side vntil you be aboue a mile beyond the straight for from 15. you shal come to 10. fadome frō thence to dry lād for it is al riffes sand this straight hath 6. Ilands lying at the end of the land of Iantana which is the North syde and you run along east west it is in distance about 8 miles but you must not passe betwéen it the land the sea by it about halfe a myle Southward is al faire good ground at 15. fadom sandy groūd in the middle of this way from the straight to the Ilands or litle more or lesse lieth the riuer of Iantana which hath a great mouth the entry thereof being along the land on the east side where great shippes haue many times entred on the West side where there standeth a houell of red earth it hath a Banke of hard sand ouer the mouth of the riuer reaching about half a mile into the sea vpon the which many ships haue fallen wherfore take héed of it from the point of the Iland abouesaid lying at the end of the land of Iantana there rūneth a riffe eastnortheast into the sea well 2. great miles and whē it is calme wether you cannot sée the water break vpon it only that it hath a certain white skin ouer it which is presently séen and discerned and when it is rough wether then the water breaketh all ouer betwéene this riffe and the Iland runneth a great Channell all stonie groūd and the shallowest place that I found therein was 5. fadome ½ and then to 7. fadome 1 ◠and then againe I found 6. or 8. fadome ½ and is in breadth about the shot of a great péece right ouer if you will passe this Channell you must runne half a myle of from the Iland come no néerer to it for if you should you would run on ground it were good that great ships shuld not passe through it vnlesse they were compelled thereunto as it happened to Francisco Dagmar that there ranne on ground and was in danger to haue cast away his shippe because he ranne to néer the Riffes and that the wind scanted two myles from these Ilandes Southsoutheast lyeth Pedra Branca that is White stone which is an Iland of white stone rockes and cliffes and hard by it there are other rockes and cliffes on the South side thereof on the which side likewise lyeth the Iland of Binton which is verie long in the middle whereof there is a high houel wherevpon there is déepe ground but not good to anker for such as come from China round about Pedra Branca and close by it there are 6. fadome déepe good ground but you must take heed of the cliffes and riffes lying by it I haue alreadie told you that in passing through the straight when you are ouer the sandes at 15 fadome in manner as aforesaid you must sayle Eastward towardes the Ilandes which you shall presentlie see as soone as you are past the Riuer of Iantana
not runne betwéen them for that without them and close by you finde good ground I haue layne there at anker with a calme about a mile from the Iland which lieth néerest the land there the streames run strong with the tyde Northeast and Southwest From this Iland Pulo CoÌ„dor to y e IlaÌ„d Pulo Secir the course is Northeast and Southwest north-northeast and by east and Southwest by West 45 miles This Iland is low and long land reaching North and south and on the North poynt it hath a stonie Iland lying halfe a myle from the land you may passe betwéene it and the Iland on the East syde it hath a Sandie Baye where once a Iunco that is to say an Indian or Chinish great ship was laid on the shore to bee new dressed belonging to a Rouer of Patane a countrey lying vpon the coast on the East side of Malacca towardes the kingdome of Syon I haue passed within halfe a mile to seaward by this sandie bay it is all good ground this Iland is distant from the coast of Camboia or Champa nine miles if you put to seaward from Pulo Condor without seeing it vnder 8. degrees you shall find 25. and 26. fadom deep with black muddy ground much of the skin or Sasbeene driuing vpon the water and being 12. miles past it at the height of eight degrées and ½ then you shall see certaine sea Snakes swimming in the water at 28. and thirtie fadome déepe and ten miles further much of the Herbe called Sargosso vnder the water at the same depth which depth you shall find to be 9. degrées â— to this place you shall holde your course Northeast for wee could run no higher because the West wind bloweth very stiffe but from thence runne southeast towardes Pulo Cain thinking to get the coast of Champa when you come within two miles of the Ilandes lying nine miles Southward from Pulo Secir you shal find muddie thick water comming by this Iland you shall find no grounde those two Ilandes aforesaid were by the Chinars called Tomsitom three miles distant from each other you runne along East Southeast and West Northwest the East Ilande is high and round on the sea side being calme in the vpper part therof it hath the fashioÌ„ of a Cap such as y e Mandorijus which are the Lords of China doe weare halfe a mile from it lyeth a Cliffe like an Ilande and hath on the West side reddish cliffes and on the north side an other Iland round about all these Ilandes and cliffes there is no grounde I set this down for that I haue sailed all this countrie and noted the way as also all whatsoeuer I haue declared in this discourse we took this course aforesaid for want of mastes for wee durst not beare our seales because of the stiffe West windes and if any man chaunce to fall in the like neede and troubles let him not hope to finde the coast on the borde side from those Ilands you shall holde your course northerly to discouer Pulo Secir and from thence to the coast of Champa for you must know that the streames from Pulo Condor and from the coast of Champa to Pulo Secir and those Ilandes runne Eastward by which meanes you runne presently to the coast as hereafter I will shew and as you passe by these Ilandes of Pulo Secir Northwestwarde thâ—n the streame runneth to the coast of Champa which wil driue you ouerthwart from the aforesaid Ilandes of Pulo Secir there are no sands nor shallows as many men suppose the worst you find is that there is no ground these Ilands lye 18 miles distant from the coast from Pulo Condor you shall presently run to the coast of Champa and if you passe by it on the south side then hold your course halfe a strike North northeast till you be in sight of the coast and halfe way in this course you shall find eight and twentie fadome deepe and if you passe by it on the North side you must runne north-Northeast and north-Northeast and by North and not higher to loofewarde to shun the drougthes whereon Mathias de Brito was cast away and if in the night time you passe by any land then cast out your lead and finding fifteene fadome water then put no neerer to the land but presently runne East Northeast as the coast lyeth for the sands in those countries lieth at 13. fadome along the coast 4. mile from it The coast of Champa along the sea side is low land and great sandy strandes you run along by them East north east and West Southwest to a point lying vnder 10. degrees and â— and before you come within two or three miles thereof the sandie strand and high way endeth for this point is a verie high land reaching Southwarde in so that it maketh a Cape from thence forward it is altogether verie high land to Varella with great hils within this point towards the West Southwest lyeth a creeke and two miles on this side before you come at it There lyeth close by the land a smal long and low Iland all of harde stony cliffes and rockes which a farre off shew like a towne from this Iland to Pulo Secir there runneth a banke of 10. and 12. fadome deepe vpon the aforesaid coast of sandie strands 15. miles before you come to the point aforesaid there is a riuer called Sidraon where you may enter with shippes of 6â—â— Barhes on this riuer lyeth the fairest and best towne in all the kingdome of Champa it hath for a marke a long houell w t 2. tops I haue passed within the shotte of a great peece neere to the stony Iland aforesaid and found 8. fadome deep altogether euen stonie ground with much of the hearbe Sargaslo whereby I could hardly make the lead to sinke downe and along by the aforesaid high point or hooke there is 20. fadome déepe When you are by the coast of Champa then you shal runne East Northeast within two or thrée miles at the furthest it is altogether faire and good anker ground to the point or hooke aforesaid you shal leaue the Island of stones on the land side not passing betweene it and the land from this point to another point are 12. miles you runne Northeast and from this second point yet 12 miles further there is another point this course is runne halfe a strike to the North Northeast betweene this second and thirde point there lyeth two creekes the first wherof is the hauen where you lade blacke woode which is called Deâ—raon from this thirde point to the Varella the coast runneth North and seuen miles before you come to y e Varella there is a creeke where there lyeth a town and two miles further there is an Iland of stonie cliffes close to the land which a farre off sheweth like a man that fisheth or angleth whereby the Portingalles call it Opescador or the fisher and if you desire to runne to
inward with that course you shall come to sée the two Ilandes aforesaid lying on the north point of the aforesaid créeke it is in crossing ouer twelue miles as you begin to see the coast on the other side lying before the créeke northwarde the Iland stretching in that sort as I said before being past the point of the créeke you shall run thether being by it you shall sayle without it about halfe a mile from the shore these Ilands end about 10. miles before you come to the hauen of Sian as aforesaid and the last of them are 4. or 5. small Ilands one running through the other along the coast these Ilands haue no trees are of red earth and comming to the end of these Ilands then put to the shore vntill the Ilandes bee right south from you then take your course right North wherewith you shall see the hauen of Sian which lyeth froÌ„ these Ilands 10. miles distant The hauen of Sian lyeth in a low land ful of trees without any sandy strands but altogether of soft muddie ground dirte hath likewise a banke of muddie ground reaching two miles and a halfe southward wheÌ„ you enter first vpon this bank it is hard muddie ground you cannot enter into this hauen with any great ships but with a spring tide and although you shold fall vpon this muddie ground ther is no danger for you must come vpon drie land to put out or in with the tides comming from the Ilandes aforesaid to the hauen of Sian in manner as I said before sailing northward as they ly southward from you being in the night time you may boldly anker vpon the muddie grounde for the next morning you shal find your selfe right ouer against the hauen so that you shall plainly sée it for it is the mouth or entry of a great riuer you shall sayle therein passing ouer muddy ground all with the tides and south winds which will bring you vpwards at pleasure The 23. Chapter Of the course from the hauen of Camboia to the Island of Pulo Tymon Pedra Branqâ—â— DEparting from the point of y e haueÌ„ of Camboia being about halfe a mile or thereabouts in the sea you shal hold your course Southwest whereby you shall see two Ilandes lying betweene Pulo Coâ—dor and Pulo Wy from the which you shal saile about halfe a mile stil running southwest not once putting Southward because of y e strong streams y t run to y e Iland of Bornon and if the wind begin to be calme and that you desire to Anker in the middle of the gulfe you may well doe it for it is at the least 38. or 40. fadome déepe therfore leaue not sayling Southwest ward for with that course you shall come right vppon Pulo Tymon the Iland of Pulo Tymon is great high and full of trées and hath verie good fresh water and if you néede there you may haue it right ouer against it in an Iland lying in a Créeke of the same Iland when you put to this Iland of Pulo Tymon on the north-Northeast point you shall sée a round Iland and desiring to runne betwéen it and the Iland or betwéen it and the Firme land you may wel do it for you may passe fréely round about in euerie place and comming to Pulo Tymon you shall hold your course South and somwhat South and by West towards Pulo Tynge which is a verie high rounde Iland much like a Doune or a sheafe of Corne it hath some small Ilands lying by it in the same course of South and South and by West you shall come to Pedra Branqua or the white stonie Cliffe from thence you begin the course to Sincapura running about thrée or foure miles Westward The 24. Chapter Of the course out of the Hauen of Macau in China to the Iland of Pulo Tymon the straight of Sincapura WHen you depart from Macau to y e other coast you must put out at the East chanel if the wind bee Northwest if not then you cannot passe that way but you must sayle thorough the south west chanel which is a good way to passe out running from the point of Varella right vnto the land on the other side of Macau to shunne the cliffe of Belchior Dalmeida and when you are about a Harquebush shot from the other side then you shall runne along to a point of land which is the end thereof where the Iland of Castro lyeth from this point the banke hangeth off for the which cause you shall runne neerer to the land of Castro then to the point of land that you runne not on ground for in those countries you haue most of the shallowes in the land that lyeth on the left hand and the depthes on the right hand with a spring tide at this banke you find 4. fadome and a halfe and being without the banke you shall sayle vnto the mouth or hole running as then to the point of the banke to shunne the Cliffes which will presently bee seen for that the water breaketh vpon them vntill they be on your right hand being out of the mouth of this entrie you shall sayle the course hereafter following and hauing also departed from Varella being a Harquebush shot from thence you must run to the Iland called Do Bugio that of the Meercatte and being ouer against it passe close by it for it is a good way for the north winds which you find there abouts and because the wind on the other side is verie scarce the aforesaide Cliffe lyeth in the middle way of the chanell and you must runne on that side from the north along the coast to the Iland of Castro and when you are out of the chanell you shal keepe Southwest along by the Ilands if it bee cleare weather till you see the Iland of Sanchon and when you are within eight miles of it being to Seaward from it then you haue good sayling for I doe alwaies hold this course and passe well with it being 8. miles to Seaward from Sanchon you shall runne Southwest for the space of two miles or that you bee 12. miles as you gesse from the furthest hooke of the Iland of the Sands and being there you shal then runne Southwest so long as that you thinke that you are inward from the furthest point of the Sands towards Pulo Calon and then againe running South southwest and South South and by West by which course you shal come to see the Ilands of Ieronimo Pretto which course I haue holden in this manner with a good and spéedie wind being in sight of the Ilands of Ieronimo Pretto and sometimes without to Pulo Cambir and hauing a bad wind not being North then the time will shew you what you haue to doe when you see those Ilands you may goe neere them if you will for it is faire cleare sandie ground at fifteene Fadome from thence to Pulo Cambir the coast runneth
North South and somewhat North and by West South and by East this Iland Pulo Cambir is long and flat and on the sea side it hath some red spots or veines the bushes thereof being euen and alike right ouer against the points thereof Northward vppon the Firme land there lyeth a ryuer which is the ryuer of Pulo Cambir if you come thether in the Monson of South winds you may haue therein fresh water for it is verie good You shal likewise vnderstand that being eight miles to Seaward from the Iland Sanchoan you wil take your course from thence South Southwest and then you shall likewise sée the Ilands of Ieronimo Pretto but it must bee w t a Compasse y t is fix I aduertise you once more that when you are in sight of Pulo Cambir about thrée or foure miles from it there lyeth certaine Ilands and halfe a mile to Seaward from the South point there lyeth certaine stonie Cliffes aboue the water that show like Bucks hornes you may fréely passe betwéene all the Ilands and that Iland for it is faire and good ground From thence to the Varella you runne along the coast North and South somewhat North and by West and South and by East it is twelue miles distant this Varella is a verie high tower standing vppon a point of land that commeth out from the land and reacheth into the Sea by this Varella there is a Hauen which you cannot sée as you come outward towardes it because the one land runneth through the other also vppon this point sticking out on the south side there is a place of verie good fresh water in the sandie strand and on the North side of the same point is an other place of fresh water vpon an other sandie Strand the land there hath some Cliffes and smal Ilands and when you come thether to fetch water it must be with a good tide for there you haue no Anker ground but verie close to the shore the best way is to put into the Bay for it is a good Hauen I haue béene in it and it hath good Harber for North and South winds with 14.15 and 16. fadome déepe sandie ground and if you desire to goe any néerer to the land you shall finde eight and seuen fadome déepe good ground this hauen of Varella lyeth vnder 13. degrées in this way from Varella to Pulo Sesir there are some Ilands lying about 9. or 10. miles from Varella from the point of Varella to these Ilands the coast runneth North and south and from these Ilands to Pulo Sesir you begin to runne along by the land North Northeast and South Southwest this Iland Pulo Sesir taking the name of the land because it lyeth on the coast for there is an other of the same name lying to Seaward is a stonie Iland without bushes hauing in the middle a pointed hill like a Varella it is a flat Iland of yellow colour like the Sea water to know Pulo Sesir being a mile or two from it vpon the Firme land you shall sée an opening this countrie is good to passe along by it for the space of two miles where you shal haue ground at seuen fadome great sand but put not off into the Sea from Pulo Sesir for it is an euill way because you haue but 4 fadome déepe with stonie ground Pulo Sesir lieth from the land vnder 10. and 13 degrees and the course from Varella to Pulo Sesir is about 50 miles from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor you shall hold your course South south west and southwest by south at 18. and 20. fadome deepe whereby you shall see the Iland Pulo Condor but I aduise you when you come ouer this crosse way from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor to holde your course from the sandy point Southsouthwest at 18. or 20. fadome deepe and when you find 15. fadome thē you are right by the coast of Cambaia and shall not sée Pulo Condor but on the land side but for your better way you shall still hold at 18 and 20. fadome and by this course you shall goe full vpon Pulo Condor which is a great Iland hauing many Ilands roūd about it and in euery place much anker ground there likewise you haue fresh water on the west side it lieth vnder 8 degrees ⅔ from Pulo Sesir to Pulo Condor are 50. miles and from Pulo Condor to Pulo Tymon you shal hold your course southsouthwest to 30. and 35 fadome muddy ground in this course and depth you shal sée an Iland being right ouer against the 7. points of the coast it sheweth like 3. hilles which stand in the space of two openings which are in the middle of the land and on the Northwest side it hath a cliffe Iland From thence to Pulo Tymon you shall take your course south and south by west at 28. and 30. fadome being from the one to the other 115. miles and you shall alwaies runne as I said before to the Iland of the 7. points called Pulo Tingaron southsouthwest because of the the streames that runne to the Iland of Bornon leaue not that course at any hand til you see it for it is 20. miles distant from Pulo Tymon this is a good course and I aduertise you againe that when you are in the way from Pulo Condor to Pulo Tymon in the middle betweene them both you shall find 25. fadome deepe in the middle way to Pulo Tymon you shall haue 35. fadome Pulo Tymon lieth vnder two degr and ½ on the North side it is a great Iland hauing other Ilands lying by it on the North syde it hath fresh water in a sandy strand where the ships that come from Sunda to goe for China take in water being in sight of Pulo Tymon you shall passe on the out side therof till you passe by the south poynt along through the channell that runneth betwéen this point and an other Iland which Iland shall bee to sea ward from you and as soone as you are in the channell on the southwest syde you shall see an other high Iland called Pulo Tinge to the which you shall goe within a mile and a half or two miles thereof and being there you shall take your course southward to Pedra Branca or the white Cliffe at 18. or 20. fadome deepe alwaies with the lead in hand if in this course you come to lesse groūd thē put to sea ward till you be at 18 fadome about 4 miles distant from the coast to auoyd the riffe that commeth from the point or hook of Iantana where the Ilands lie which you shal presently sée hauing good regard that you passe not by Pedra Branca but when you sée you shall make towardes it which you must keepe on the lee side for y t being with a flood the streames runne very strongly to the Iland of Binton wherby you shuld not passe by Pedra Branca for there I was forced to cast out 2. ankers and
aforesaid point lyeth a riuer called Rio do Sal that is the riuer of Salt from whence the salt is carried to Canton it is a great hauen and entrie being past this riuer of Salt foure miles forward there is an other riuer lying by an other point or hooke which riuer by the Chinaes is called Chaochen and by the Portingales Porâ—o de Pecas that is the hauen of Peces for there are made the good peeces of Chinish silkes and other costlie wares This riuer is verie great and hath manye places and villages to land ware that are inhabited lying along by the water it lyeth with the southwest point of this Iland Lamon east southwest and west northwest the land of Lamon lyeth vnder 23 degrees and ¼ it is great and verie high couered with bushes trees it reacheth as the coast doth about a mile from the firme land as you come from Macau sayling along on the west southwest side it sheweth like 2 IlaÌ„ds although it is but one it hath on the southwest or the land side some stony cliffes close by it which at low water are vncouered and at high water the sea breaketh vpon theÌ„ but all the rest of the channell betweene the Iland and the firme land is faire and deepe inough yet you may not passe through for it is full of bushes and other stuffe that driueth although I haue past through it by coÌ„pulsion but with great paine therefore I counsell no man to passe through it vnlesse it be with a Soma that is a Chinish Caruell wherewith they sayle along the coast for the traffick on this aforesaid southwest point of the Iland to seaward there lyeth certaine small flat Ilandes and other rockes betweene the which and the Iland you may not passe and on the north-northeast point on the land side a verie great creeke where there is a verie good harbor and low road for all windes where likewise our shippes may enter if occasion serueth it is three fadom and ½ deep ground muddy and to enter in you goe nere on the southwest side for I haue beene in it From this southwest point of the Iland aforesaid a mile and a halfe inward to sea there is a riffe that sheweth aboue the water being of some black stones that reach all on a rowe Eastward about three myles and on the syde thereof three flat long Cliffes also in a row whereof that outward is the greatest you may by no meanes passe ouer nor betwéene this riffe and cliffes but betweene the riffe and the Iland there is a verie good channel for I haue past through it it is 20 fadome deepe smal thinne flat sandy ground and you haue nothing there to care for then onlie to keepe by the Iland and the aforesaid Riffe it is good for those that come from Iapon to passe through it for if you passe outward by the sea to auoyde the Riffe it happeneth oft tymes that there you finde the winde sharpe and therefore can hardlie reache the Coast whereby if it chance you must indure great payne before you can get it From this Iland Lamon 6. or 7. myles Eastnortheast lyeth the Hauen of Chabaquon which is an arme of the sea that runneth north-northeast very déepé to laÌ„dward at the entrie thereof on the southeast side there lyeth a thicke and great poynt of land which from thence ryseth very high and on the Northwest syde it is a low land of sandie strandes From the aforesaid point of land in the same course about the length of the shot of a great peece lyeth a Ryffe of sand wherevpon the water breaketh if you desire to enter into this hauen you must put to the Southeast syde running along by the poynt of the entrie where it is two fadome and ½ deepe half a mile aboue the aforesayd poynt of land on the Southeast part of the land there lyeth a small Créeke or bay of muddie ground which is a good harber in foule wether and for more security you may run so close to the land that you may runne into the mud so leap on shore on the northwest side which is by an Iland where there lieth a town or village where you finde much prouision of victuails other thinges This course is done with Iuncos Somas which are Chinish ships boates this hauen lieth vnder 23. deg ½ behind this créek on the sea side lieth another créek by y t which forward about the leÌ„gth of the shot of a great péece lieth 4 or 5 IlaÌ„ds betwéen the which the laÌ„d you may passe this créeke of the Iland is a barber for the Monson of Malacca that is for the windes that blow when you saile from Malacca to China within it is very good and faire ground the land lying betwéene these two aforesaid créekes is a high and greene cuntrey without bushes or trées the aforesaid islands are round and high stretching along all in a rowe FroÌ„ this Hauen of Chambaqueo to Chinchon the coast runneth north-Northeast and north-Northeast and by East and is in distance 22. miles it is all high land and close by the land it is sixtéene fadome déepe and there runneth many hard and great streames From Chabaqueo six or seuen miles forward lyeth Enseada Pretta that is the Blacke créeke by the country people called Lauho aboue the which there lyeth a high land with very black shining bushes and in the mouth of the entry it hath two Islands within it is very good and faire ground béeing a harbour or defence against certaine windes wherein Ruij Lobo with his ship another Iunco or Chinish ship did winter Two miles to seaward from it lye two Islands of white stonie cliffes close togither betwéene the which the Firme land it is all faire good ground From this Enseada Pretta or Blaâ—ke creeke seuen myles forward there lyeth two high and small Islands some what longer than round without either bushes or trees close by each other reaching Northwest southeast betwéen both hauing thrée or foure stone cliffes These Ilands and cliffes lie distant from the Firme land about halfe a mile right ouer against them lyeth a small Créeke from a verie lowe hooke or point of land along by the sea and on the Island that lyeth nearest to the lande on the Southwest side lyeth a Sand baye which is a good Hauen or Rode of seuen or eight fadome déepe where the Cliffes lying to Sea-ward on you make a defence you may goe close to the lande of the Sand bay for I haue laine in it because I put into it with a storme as I came from Iapon the Iaponers haue many times wintered therein with their shippes The entry thereof lyeth on the north-Northeast side close along by the point of the Iland that lyeth towardes the land and when you enter in you shall holde towards the Island not to misse the Hauen and you may alwayes goe out and in as
well on the Northeast as on the Southwest side in this Island you haue fresh water These Islands are called Chiocon it is all ouer very faire cléere ground only one stonie Cliffe whereupon you sée the water breake lying a shot of a great péece Westward from the rowe From these Islands of Chiocon thrée miles forward lyeth the Hauen of Chinchon and two myles from the land lyeth two Ilandes of white stonie Cliffes betweene the which and the land as also outward to Seaward it is all faire ground from these Islandes two myles forward and halfe a mile from the land there lyeth a high round island from whence there runneth a risse about halfe a myle into the Sea whereon you sée the water breake which you must shun Betweene the land and this island it is altogither shallowes and betwéene this island and the hooke of the mouth of Chinchon lyeth a small Créeke where the shippes in the monson of China do anker All this coast from Chabaquon to Chinchon is high land with deepe and faire ground onely the aforesaid riffe of the island The Hauen of Chinchon on the Southwest side hath lying aboue it a very high land with a stonie rocke vpon it like a pillar as the Varella in the coast of Champa hath This high land or hill descendeth downewardes to a hooke or point of land and comming to the north-Northeast side from the sea it hath a great opening with certaine islands in the mouth thereof from the aforesaide point the lande reacheth North about a myle and a halfe and from thence it runneth West Northwest hauing an arme of the sea that runneth a great way inwarde to the lande in the same course on this land that reacheth from the point of the sea where the land lyeth West Northwest there is a long high island without trées or bushes stretching like the same land and is a small halfe mile distant from the land and on the land side it hath a good Sandie bay in the middle way from the same island the shot of a great péece Westward lyeth a hidden Cliffe or stonie place of eightéene spannes water going a little way all the rest is faire and good ground to anker in In this island is good fresh water herein Diego Pereira wintered with his shippe you runne not on the South side of this island but about by the East side comming into the Hauen on the North side From this island a quarter of a mile further on there lyeth thrée islands stretching East and West one with the other from thence to the West part of the land there is a channell of about halfe a mile broad faire and deepe you may likewise if you will easily passe betwéene the first and the other two Islands The Island that lyeth Eastward is the longest and greatest of all the thrée these Islands are distant from the Northland about a great mile which land is very high ground The shot of a great péece from the East Island Northward lyeth a great and high Island reaching North and South which on the West side hath a sandy bay and vnder this sandy Bay close by the land there is a good Road to anker in with very good ground where oftentimes the Portingales ships haue laine to lade their wares and marchandises such as are there to bée had The shot of a great péece from this créeke Southwestward and the like shot of a great péece from the aforesaid Islands lyeth a flat sand of twelue Spannes of Water all the rest is faire and good ground by the Road and along by the Islands there runneth a great streame the best place to anker and to lie safest is close by the South point to lye out of the streame you must not passe by the point of the strand by the Créeke that lyeth Northward for it is shallowe Those that come from Liampo and Iapon put into this Hauen by the channell that is betweene this Island and the thrée Islands which is faire at fiue or sixe fadome water which you likewise find along by the Islands as well on the land side as the Sea side onely at the sandy place aforesaid This Island by the Câ—mais is called Tantaa Two miles to seaward from this Island lyeth a small clouen Island called Tantheaa from the Island Tantaa to the Northland it is about a mile which is altogither shallowe ground so that you can by no meanes passe nor a great way from thence to Sea ward From this Island Tantaa a myle Westward lyeth the Mouths or entery of the arme of the Sea which may bée halfe a myle broad on the South part it hath a point of land against the which on the other land Northward lyeth a Créeke or Bay with a great harbour thereabouts the King of Chinaes Shippes doe lye and a myle from the aforesayd point of land inwards of the Riuer there lyeth an Island by the South side with certaine redde downes In the middle way from this Island on the South side of the land there reacheth a point and somewhat beyond this point Westward there lyeth a Bay in the same Island wherein the Shippes anker and there you lye out of all the streames vnder the defence of the aforesayed point of land It happeneth oftentimes that the Shippes by negligence lye drie because they runne close to the land yet it hurteth them not for it is soft muddy ground From this point aforesayd to the East point of the same Island there is a very good place to lay the Shippes on land to newe rigge them where the Portingales haue often dressed their Shippes Likewise there you haue great store of victuals and other prouisions and the ships that lye by the Island Tantaa doe not stay there if it bée foule weather but as soone as they perceiue any hard weather comming they presently hoise vp anker and come to anker by this Island in the mouth of the aforesaid small Bay close by the South land all this way is fayre This Hauen of Chinchon lyeth vnder foure and twenty degrées and ¼ from the Island Tantaa and the Island of this hauen of Chinchon fiue miles East Northeast lyeth a point of land in the which there is a good Créeke against foule weather and the Monson of China called Lialoo The Road of this Créeke is close by the aforesaid point of land for all the land from this Créeke to the Island Tantaa is altogether there along of a bankey and shallow ground and so continueth to the Island for that betwéene the said Island and the land it is altogether drie and shallow as aforesaid From this Créeke of Lialoo forward the land beginneth to bée lower without any high hils as the aforesaid land and hath but few bushes in many places none at all It is a very faire coast so that you néed feare nothing there but that you sée before your eies From Chinchon to the Hauen of Foquyen are forty myles and you runne
Northeast and north-Northeast and by East From the point of Lialoo two miles forward lyeth a flat Island about halfe a mile distant from the land and another halfe mile further forward lyeth two Islands by each other somewhat closer to the land and hard by them is a Riuer at the mouth thereof hauing a sandie strand with low land into this Riuer runneth the Somas or Chinish Shippes that goe to the Towne of Enon which lyeth within the same where you haue much Marchandises of China on the coast seuen or eight miles further There lyeth the point of Chencheu which is a high and bare land of white and reddish colour reaching somewhat inward to sea on the north-Northeast side it hath a small Bay and aboue it a verie high steepe land in this Créeke lyeth a great Island betwéene the which and the point of land you may put in from this Island a harquebush shot in length northeastward lyeth a stonie place of ground halfe a fadome déepe vnder the Water and Northwestward from the said Island betwéene it and the land lyeth another stone and on the land side by this Island you haue a good harber to anker in I haue laine in this Hauen somewhat neerer to the Island then to the land with two Iuncos which are great Chinish Shippes each of them being of fiue hundred or sixe hundred Bhares Indian waight which is aboue a hundred and eightie tunnes and ranne in along by the point Beyond this point of land at y e vpper part lyeth a great Towne and North Northeast from this Island there lyeth two long clouen Islands of redde colour but they haue no faire ground nor anie harber two miles before you come to this point of Chencheu inward to land towards Chencheu there is a hill like to Monte Fermoso or the faire hill this Hill lyeth distant from Chencheu thirtéene miles in this countrey sixe or seuen miles from the land you haue certaine boyes lying with coloured feathers and flagges which serue for the countrey fishermen where they cast their Nets and the Somâ—s of that Countrey which are the Chinish Caruels haue â—un ouer it with one saile onely without any other furniture From the point of Chencheu seuen miles further on the Southwest end of the Island by the Portingales called Ilha dos cauallos that is the Island of Horses and by the Chinares called Tachoo hauing the name of a great Towne so called not farre from thence about two miles along the riuer within the land this Island lieth in the coast coÌ„passed about with an arme of the Sea like the Island of Goa in India which arme of the Sea issueth out againe about fiue miles further in the same coast which issue or mouth is called Puysu The first mouth from the Southwest may be about halfe a mile broad and from the point of the Island inward about halfe a mile there is good anker ground against the windes of the Monson of China at ten and eleuen fadome faire ground you must shunne the Southwest land which is low and sandy strands and is all ouer blackish and shallow ground for I haue run inward round about this Island it hath many shallowes and there is a channell the déepest part whereof is but two fadome if you desire to put in there it were good to haue one of the Country-men for a Pilote I entered the mouth thereof from the Northeast which is the narrowest and shallowest place and hath a hidden stony cliffe lying vnder the water close by the side of the Island about the shot of a great peece inward towards the point From this stony cliffe to the point many Shippes may anker and both these Hauens are without droughts or shallowes and the coast betwéene them both from the one mouth vnto the other hath some redde downes and bare land but is all along faire ground A mile from this mouth Northeastward to Seaward lyeth a small Island and from the moneth of Aprill to September there are many beastes pastured in this Island as horses and such like wherevpon the Portingales called it the Island of Horses as aforesaid from the mouth of Puysu of the saied Island of Horses eight miles forward by the coast there is a great thicke point of land with manie bushes vpon it Close by this point lyeth a great round Island whereof the chanell betwéene them is small yet very cleare where if néede bee you may passe through from the point aforesaied to the Southwest it is a high land with bushes and from thence to the Sea it hath a great gréene field or plaine and along by this gréene field it is very good ankering against the winds of the monson of China another ground vpon the aforesayed point of land there is a great Towne called Pinhay From this point of Pinhay fiue miles along the coast lyeth the Hauen of Foquyen which hath a great Rode and is all thicke land with bushes and inward on the Southwest part it hath a great round Island with blacke shining bushes and beyond this Iland inward lieth the mouth of the riuer on the which lieth a verie great towne compassed with mightie walles and towers and hath a Bridge running out from the land whereunto the shippes that stay there are commonly tyed the entrie is faire and cleare From this Hauen of Foqueyen fiue miles lyeth a Créeke by the Portingales called Enseada dos camoroyns that is the Créeke of Gannaet and by the Chinars called Cayto in this way lyeth certaine small and high Islandes without any trées or bushes about three great miles from the land inward to the Sea and betwéene it and them it is all ouer full of Riffes and stonie Cliffes and in some places it sémeth to haue Channels or throughfares for I went through it with a Pilot of the countrey you must shunne this Island and from the end of this Island two miles forward there is a point of great thicke land wholly without any bushes or trées and at the end of each mile West Northwestward there lyeth two Islands and on the Southwest side of this point there is a good harbour for the windes of the monson of China hauing faire sandie ground but it hath the winde verie scant to runne about without the Ilandes for the which cause wée ranne betweene them but it is not good for our shippes On the other side Northeastward from this point aforesaid close by the lande lyeth a small high Island stretching Northwest and Southeast the Channell betweene this Island and the Firme land being the shot of a great péece in breadth at thrée fadome deepe most part stonie ground in such manner that as soone as you let fall anker the ropes and Cables are presently cut in péeces by the sharpe stones This channell can not bée séene farre off and this Island hath on the land side a small créeke or Bay and if you come thither by hard fortune as I did you shall put in there
close by the Island and so néere it that you shall touch the strand with the kéele of your shippe to anker in the depthes of the hard ground for if you anker in the Sea your Cables will presently be cut in péeces as mine were This point lyeth hidden vnder a point from thence north-Northeast and north-Northeast and by East the land hath another point lying about a mile and a halfe distant from the other aforesaide making betwéene them both a certaine Gitte From this Island and point about halfe a mile East Northeast lieth a Riffe whereon you see the water breake reaching Northwest and Southeast and about halfe a myle long from this Riffe to the Northeast point of the aforesaid Créeke it is about a mile all the rest of the Créeke is faire and cléere This is the Créeke called Enseada dos Camarouis the Rode thereof is vnder the harbour of the north-Northeast point aforesaid for it is good for the time of the windes of the Monson of China for such shippes as come from Liampon Iapon to put in there you must goe néere the land before you come at the point and runne along by it till you haue gotten about the point and are ankered within it there it is verie good muddie ground by this north-Northeast point so that the Riffe will be Southwestward from you therefore you shall put neare the point of the lande not to fall vpon the Riffe from this Créeke forward to the point of Sumbor lying vnder 28 degrées and ¼ you runne along the coast Northeast and north-Northeast and by North without the aforesaid Island and the point of the saide Créeke and from the créeke twelue and thirtéene miles the land hath a point and from thence it runneth inwards North Northwest and somewhat further north-Northeast and north-Northeast and by North out againe Two myles from thence lyeth thrée Ilands by each other two great and high and one small béeing all faire ground round about but wholly without any Rode or succour to defend the shippes in foule weather These Islands are called Canton Sion all this coast of Enseada dos camarouis to these Islands and Hooke aforesaide is altogither lowe land with houels and valleyes with euen bushes and along by it it is both faire and calme Sea and pleasant ground In this Countrey in the middle way from Enseada dos Camarouis to the Ilands of Canton Sion about thrée myles to Sea-warde there lyeth two Islandes by each other and the Island lying nearest the land hath a great high hill in the middle which runneth stéepe downe to the endes of the Island they haue neither Trées nor Bushes within them being faire and cleare round about them From the Islandes of Canton Sion forward the Lande and Coast reacheth inwards ten miles from thence that is to say two miles from the land lyeth 2. high and great Islands nigh adioyning each to other without Trees or bushes reaching as the coast doth whereof the first lying on the Southwest side is very long and that on the North side is in manner of a triangle and the Channell separating them is little more in breadth than a man can cast a stone but déepe and faire for I haue passed through it and harde by the Northeast point of the first long Island which commeth out by the other there is a sandie Bay close by the which there is a verie good Rode for this Sandie baye hath defence for all windes and because it is like a Hauen it is by the Chinars called Pudeon that is a Sacke From this Sandie Bay about the shot of a great Peece Northwest lyeth a well of verie great depth therefore you must be carefull in entring the Créeke where you haue verie good ground at fiue and sixe fadome déepe In this Créeke or sandie Bay there is very good fresh water as also right ouer against it on the other side of the Island there is a great place of fresh water The channell betwéene these Islandes and the Firme land is all faire and deepe as also to Seaward from thence on the Northwest part of the land of this Hauen aforesaid there is another Hauen called Fuychon which is a riuer but with a small entry béeing in breadth about halfe the length of the shotte of a great peece with cleare and déep ground from the mouth inwardes there is good water running a great way into the land and all faire If you desire to goe in there and to anker you must gouerne your course by the Lead and the depthes This Baye hath many townes and villages lying along by the riuer From the aforesaid first Island fiue or sixe myles Southward to Seaward lieth two small Islandes halfe a myle distant each from other they are both without trées or any bushes the Island on the Land side is flat and that to Sea-ward is very high and hath a Créeke but verie small and onely with a Northwest wind it is harbourlesse the entrie is verie straight being round within with good and pleasant ground This Island in forme is like a Horse shooe for from the inner side of the Creeke towards the outside to Seaward it may be the length of a bow shot in the breadth of the Island both these Islands are small From this Hauen of Pudeon fiue miles along the coast there lyeth two Ilands whereof the first is long reaching like the coast the other reacheth from off the land towards the Sea for betwéen it and the land you can not passe The point of this Island reacheth beyond the north-Northeast point of the aforesaid long Iland that lyeth to Sea-ward betwéene them both is a small Channell but faire and déepe all along and round about this Iland as well inward as outward From this Island to the land it is good muddie ground at foure fadome and is a good Hauen for the Monson of China but wholly open for a Southwest wind with the which wind I there lost two Iuncos which are Chinish shippes This Hauen is called Guotimony Before you come within two myles of this Hauen vpon the coast there lyeth two Créekes close togither which runne about a myle into the land and are aboue the shot of a great Péece in breadth but are not fit for our ships The ground therabout is faire and inward it hath a village From this Hauen of Guotimony seuen or eight myles Eastward lieth a verie great and high Island on the South side hauing thrée or foure smal Ilands close to it it lieth about seuen or eight miles from the land and a good way from the other Ilands on the Northwest side it hath two Créekes hard by each other whereof that in the Northeast is the safest with good and faire ground reaching about halfe a mile inwards within it hauing good fresh water with a Sandie Bay where they draw vp their ships to mend and dresse them when néed requireth it is all faire round about onely you must not run betwéene
a mile from the land it is but a fadome and a halfe déepe being hard stones The people of y e country passe ouer it with nailed barkes with pitched or loopes two péeces sailes of réeds or mats an yron dreg with sharpe téeth This coast reacheth north-Northeast to foure and thirtie degrées where there lieth a great riuer that commeth from Nanquyn within the mouth or entry hath an Island that is inhabited by many people both horse and footemen This Island maketh the Riuer to haue two mouths or entries from thence forward the land reacheth North Northeast and by East and comming to that part which lieth Southeast there the land hath an end or point and by that meanes it maketh a great Créeke From this point forward the coast runneth North again after turning again Northwestward Into the which coast those of Iapon doe ordinarily come to Trafficke with the Countrey people called Cooray and there you haue Hauens and harbors hauing a kind of small open péeces of wouen worke which the Iapons fetch from thence whereof I am certainely informed as also touching the nauigation vnto that land by Pilots that haue sailed and searched cleane through it as followeth From this point of the Creeke of Nanquyn twenty miles Southeastward there lyeth certaine Islands at the end whereof on the East side there lyeth a very great and high Island much inhabited as well by horse as footemen These Islands by the Portingales are called As Ilhas de core but the great Island Core is called Chausien on the Northwest side it hath a small Créeke wherein there lyeth an Island which is the Hauen but it is not very déepe There the lord of the country hath his pallace and is continually resident Fiue and twenty miles Southeast from this Island lieth the Island of Goto one of the Islands of Iapon which lyeth from the point of the Créeke of Nanquyn East and by North to Seaward sixtie miles or somewhat more This instruction I had from a Nobleman of Portingale called Pero da cunha that hath séene and trauelled through all the Countrey hauing by him all aduise seruing for the purpose as being of great experience hauing arriued and stayed in the Countrey aforesaid by tempest and stormy weather against their wils minding to sayle to Iapon and from thence againe to the aforesaide Island of Goto the Islands lying from this Island towards the land betwéene them and close about them all ouer are many riffes and stones The instruction of the Créeke of Nanquyn I had from an expert Pilote borne in the lande of Algaine in Spaigne that lost his Shippe vpon the Sands that sticke out from the Riuer of Nanquyn hauing runne round about all this Créeke with a Barke and hée saide that being within when the Sunne rose it came from ouer the land and that from the riuer of Nanquyn there ranne some sands and droughts reaching southward to two and thirty degrées and to the middle way of the Goulfe of Iapon Here endeth the description of the furthest parts that the Portingales haue sailed along by the Coasts lands and Islands of the Kingdome of China being that part thereof which at this day is knowne and discouered The 31. Chapter The description of a voiage made by a Portingale Pilote from Liampo to Iapon in a Chinchea Soma that is a Chinchon ship with the description of the coast of Bungo Miaco Cacay the Island Toca all countries of Iapon ON Wednesday the thirty of Iune being the third day of the new moone in the morning we set sayle out of the northeast chanell of the Island Siongicam with a southeast wind and being without the Island we had the wind South Southeast and ran east and somewhat East and by North about euening we had a South Southwest wind running East East and by South and East southeast with very great billowes out of the south whereby we could hardly kéepe on our course sayling with our sayles but halfe vp and in the morning we ran halfe a strike east and by south and east southeast because the wind came some what ful to the South west with shoures of raine and great billowes that rose very high by which means the waters and streames in these countries run Northward we made our account to haue sailed in the course of East and East and by North 26 miles in one meale tide which was til thursday at noone being the first of Iuly We had alwaies great and mighty waues because it was a Spring tyde all the night hauing great lightnings out of the East and in all the points of the Compasse from North to South On thursday the first of Iuly from noone to night we had a southwest wind running East and East and by South and somwhat East Southeast with great showres of raine without any high wind and being two houres within night the skie closed round about and became close with a great raine wherwith the wind beganne to be calme turning Northward which the officers of the Soma perceiuing being men of China they began to be in great feare for the Chinais doe hold for certaine that in the Moone of the moneth of Iuly vntill it bee 12. dayes old all along the coast of China there will follow great stormes and as I thinke it is till S. Iames day till when they alwaies looke for stormes and foule weather for that I my selfe vpon the same day haue passed two great stormes And touching our North wind y e began still to encrease they perceiuing it put presently Westward againe towardes the Islands and had sayled from noone to that time about ten miles in such manner that as wee gessed we were 36. miles from the land of China and so wée held our course in that manner West and West and by North after that hauing a close skie with little wind whereby we made very litle way On Friday the North wind beganne to blowe higher wee running so till noone and in that Westerly course wée sayled about sixe miles From Friday at noone we sailed with this North wind all that euening and by night til Saterday in the morning then the wind came Northeast then East and so West till noone whereby wee made our account to haue sailed eightéene miles letting the shippe goe West and West and by North and in all that time wée had neither Sunne nor Starre to take the height On Saterday two or thrée houres after noone the wind fell South the weather beginning to cleare vp and so wée ranne one glasse and perceiuing the weather to settle we turned againe towards Iapon being as then in mine opinion about 12. myles from the coast of China and so we held our course that euening and all the next night East and East and by South with a small wind and calme Sea The next day being Sonday at noone we tooke the height of the Sunne at 30. degrées 1 ◠part lesse wée set out
after ranne very stiffe into it made vs get in and with the glimsing of the euening and the light Moone wée entred into a verie great goulfe wherein lay the aforesaide Créeke on the North side and within on the East side it hath a small Island full of trées lying about the shot of a base from the land Eastward from this Island the land hath a high houell and on the South side of the said houell there lyeth a great opening which on the other side hath a point of low land and white sand strands with trées There is the Hauen called Minatto which is a riuer better than that of Batecola lying in the coast of Malabar On the North side of this houell about a small myle there is another opening béeing in a land that is somewhat lower as the houell with some trées This opening right in the middle hath an Island wherein is the place of Xibuxij which is a great village full of people and is a riuer of fresh water but it is shallowe for you can not put into it without a spring tide From Xibuxij forward the Créeke runneth West all lowe land and sandie strandes for the space of two miles from thence it runneth Southward againe till it butteth vpon a high hill which is that which wée sawe comming from the Island Tanaxuma to the foote of the hill there lyeth a small riuer very shallow From this riuer the land runneth East againe to the mouth thereof which may bée about halfe a myle broad The ground of all this Créeke and entrie is sand and bad anker ground All this high land aforesaid is called Quimonsiquy From this Créeke of Xibuxij seuen myles East Northeast lyeth the Créeke of Tanora which is one of the best Hauens of Iapon you runne the coast East and East by North in the middle way from Xibuxij to Tanora there is a small Créeke or Bay which at the first shewe séemeth to haue a good harbor but when you are right against it then you may verie well perceiue it for it hath many stonie Cliffes and Rockes and runneth somewhat to landward I heare set downe the description of this Créeke that no man should deceiue himselfe therby that desireth to goe vnto Tanora as wée should haue done Béeing past this small Créeke you shall presently sée that the land maketh an end or point of high lande from the which point forward the coast windeth inward where you shall sée a sandie strand with two Ilandes full of trées lying along by it At the end of these Islands you shall sée other smaller Islands that lye off from the land inward to the Sea with other great stones and rockes Within these Ilands and Stones lyeth the Hauen of Tanora and to put into this Hauen you must run to the point and the end of these Islands and Stones that reach into the Sea and béeing past them then on the north-Northeast side to Seaward there will lie a stonie Cliffe with an Island without bushes or trées béeing stéepe land reaching North and South betwéene this Island and the land there is a great Créeke where you may anker for right ouer against it it is 25 fadome déepe but there is not the right Hauen but when you are about the point and the end of the aforesaid Islands and Stones that sticke outward to Sea then you shall presently passe along thereby inward towards the land which you may freely doe without danger for it is faire and cléere holding your course Westward and a point of land will be vpon your right hand and béeing past this point you shall passe close by shunning the land on the West side and being there you are within the Hauen which is a long Créeke or Bay reaching North till you be in you may ancre in the middle thereof at foure fadome déepe and then you are inclosed with a round bowe it is there altogither muddy ground Departing from Tanora to Fyunga the coast runneth North to a point of land lying about fiue myles from Tanora betwéene this point of land and Tanora there lyeth two Hauens the one called Gico not farre from Tanora the other further forward by some stonie Cliffes and Islands called Vmbra These two Hauens are good harbors for East winds that blowe much on this coast from the aforesaid point of land to Fyunga may be fiue miles more from whence the coast land doe turne in againe like a Créeke comming somewhat further Northward out this Créeke is a low land along by the Sea coast with sandy strands and a mile beyond y e aforesaid point of land the coast hath an opening and on the South side of this opening there standeth a great round trée close by the Sea side here is a good Hauen which is called Vndo and further forward there lyeth another Hauen called Toconosuchy this land is higher then the other hauen on the Southside it hath some high and great Trées and on the Northside a low land the which farre off outward sheweth like small Islands with trees This hauen is not good to put in A mile beyond this hauen there is another Hauen called Myme which is a good hauen for small shippes to enter and hath two enteries which you presently sée béeing without and may well discerne them in the middle hauing a flat Island full of Trees these Trees make two openings and you may see ouer the Island on the land which is higher a great gréene trée the land on the South side hath a high land with a valey From this Hauen about two myles and a halfe lieth another small Island called Tomxyma beyond this Riuer a myle and a halfe endeth the low land and then again it beginneth to be high from thence two myles further the land maketh a point or hooke of high land and a farre off seemeth to be the point called Cabo de Ramos lying on y e coast of India by Goa Sailing about this point hard by there is a Riuer Northward called Camyco which is two fadome deepe in the Hauen this is the furthest land of the kingdome of Fiunga From y e point of land aforesaid fiue miles distant from Tanora to this point of Camico the lande is like a Créeke or breech the water therein making a crosse streame for along by the land the Water runneth alwaies Southward you runne this point with the aforesaid point of land North and South and North and by east and South and by West and are about eight miles distant along by this Bréech you may anker at twelue and fiftéene fadome deepe faire sandy ground From this point called Cabo de Camico forward the coast runneth north northwest and when you are right against this point then you shall presently sée Northeastward and north-Northeast and by East the land of Toca which is an island and is about fortie myles long and reacheth East and West and East and by North and West and by South it hath
From thence to Xynaco are fiue myles From Xynaco to the Hauen of Vxymando are fiue myles From Vxymando to the Hauen of Muroo are fiue myles And this Hauen is about fiue myles more from the Hauen aforesaid Beyond the aforesaid point thrée or foure myles Eastward lyeth the Hauen of Fyongo and from thence sixe or seuen myles further is the Hauen and Bay of Sacay All this coast aforesaid is faire and cleare hauing all ouer anker ground These are as I said before all Portingale myles and two Iapon myles make iust a Portingall myle which is found to bée true by the Portingall Pilotes that haue therein taken the height of the Sunne and made their account after the Iapon myles The 32. Chapter The Nauigation from Lampaecon which lyeth by Macon in the coast of China to the Island of Iapon and from thence to the Island Firando with the description thereof by another Pilote SAyling from Lampacon to the Island of Iapon you must passe through the first issue or Channell of the South Island which reacheth South-eastward hauing a Cliffe or Island in the middle thereof betwéene the which and the point of the Island you must passe because of the scant winde making as neare as possiblie you can to the end of the Island alwayes with your Leade in hande And comming to the middle way of the Channell of the Island lying vnto Sea-warde you shall finde a sandie banke that in the middle hath not thrée fadome deepe You shall vse all the meanes you can to passe aboue a great and high Island which lyeth East Southeast from you Being about this Island with the other that lyeth to Sea-ward in the same rowe you shall passe along by the Island that lyeth to Seaward Six miles further from this Island you shall sée a row of Islands small Islands Cliffes and are nine reaching further out to seaward then all the rest that you passe by and lye North Northeast and South Southwest you cannot passe on the outside of them neither is it necessary but you must runne betwéene them and a great high Island full of Trées that lyeth to landward from you which Island as you come néere it sheweth as if it were round because you goe right vpon the point Notwithstanding it is long reaching as the coast doth Hauing past somwhat beyond it there is a channell that passeth betwéene it and another Island lying close by it Behind this last Island East Northeast there is a Hauen where some Ships come to lade certain Chinish wares and is not farre from the mouth or entry of Canton This Island aforesaid is by the Chinars called Tonquion From thence you shal runne East Northeast to sée the country that lyeth betwéene Chinchon and Chabaquon which is faire and cleare ground running two myles from it to shunne a Riffe that lyeth close by Chinchon which hath a round high Island lying close by the land you must runne the coast of Chaboqueo to Chinchon Northeast and Southwest and north-northeast and by East and Southwest and by west and whē you are right against Chinchon then about two miles into the Sea you haue a high round Island and within the land a high hill with a stony rocke on the top thereof like Pulo Varella in the coast of Champa and the entry is through some Islands this round Island afore is by the Chinars called Toanthea When you are right against Chincheo as aforesaid then runne East Northeast vntill you are eight or ten myles from the coast to kéepe without all the Islands and being there then runne Northeast in which course you shall see the Island of Lequeo Pequeno that little Lequeo lying vnder fiue and twenty degrées it is a very high and long island about eightéen miles distant from the coast of China when you are past Lequeo Pequeno comming into fiue and twenty degrees and ½ If you desire to make to the land of Bungo then runne Northeast and Northeast and by East in which course you shall fall vpon the Islands lying on the South side of the Island Tanaxuma which Islands begin at 29 degrées and ½ and reach to thirtie degrées and ½ and are in all seuen high and small Islands which reach one with the other that is the thrée first Islands Northeast and southwest and north-Northeast and by North and Southwest and by South the other thrée East north-Northeast and West Southwest and one at the end of them North and South These seuen Ilands being past six miles further North northeast you shal sée two other ilands lying east and west with each other wherof the East island is the smallest the East end thereof hauing a high houell which descendeth eastward making a low point You may well passe betwéene these two islands for there is a good channell The greatest of these two islands which is high and long is called Icoo from the east point whereof foure or fiue miles Northward lyeth the island of Tanaxuma which is a long island reaching North and south of seuen or eight miles long In the middle way of the same island on the East side lieth the Hauen which is a small Créeke within certaine stony cliffes but it is not best to put into it West Northwestward from this Hauen about a mile and a halfe there lyeth a smal flat land that hath a houell in the middle seuen or eight myles Northward from Tanaxuma you shall sée a great high land which reacheth tenne miles east and West which is the land of Iapon and at the end or point of this coast on the West side lieth the Creeke of Cangoxuma and the hauen of Amango aboue it hauing a high pointed top and right against the island of Tanaxuma North and North and by East lyeth the Créeke of Xebuxy that is very great hauing within it the Hauens of Minato Eoxima and Xaboxy all thrée Riuers for small Ships And lying on the East side on the right hand as you come West-ward into the Créeke sixe or seuen myles further North Northeast along the coast lyeth the Hauen of Tanora which is the least Hauen of Iapon If you desire to put to the said hauen of Tanora then you shall holde close to the shoare sayling néere vnto it for it is faire ouer all but you haue no anker ground nor Roades because it is déepe and when you passe by it being beyond the Créeke of Xebury then you shall come to a small Créeke which at the first sight séemeth to haue good harbour but being right against it it sheweth what it hath that is many stones and rockes reaching somewhat inward to land I note it here because thereby no man should deceiue himselfe Being past this small Créeke you presently see a great thicke and high point of land From this point y e land windeth inward where you shall see a sandie strand and two Islands with Trées lying there along At the end of the which Islands there are other smaller
or end Northeastward of the same Island lyeth full vnder 29. degrees ½ for there I tooke the height of the Sunne with calme weather being about fiue or sixe myles from it and from this Northeast point the coast of the Island runneth Southeast at the end thereoâ— hauing another great and high Island making a small Channell that runneth betweene them both and it seemeth that on the Norâ—heast side there is a good Rode for the Monson of South and Southwest windes and along by this coast of Lequeo for the space of three daies we had calme weather and after that wee had a good gale of winde of the Monson and I thinke wee had so great a calme because wee kept so close vnto the shoare About fiue and twentie degrées and â— from the point of Lequeo wee helde our course Northeast and Northeast and by East till wee came vnder nine and twentie degrees Ten miles from Lequeo forwarde wée sawe great store of Cuttle bones driuing on the water and many other shelles that were verie white shewing farre off much like vnto Cotton but it was not long that they draue any thing thicke for in short space after wee might perceiue them scattered abroad verie thinne and but verie few vntill wée came vnder 26. degrées Comming vnder 29. degrées wée held our course halfe a strike East Northeast for the space of eight or nine miles till the Sunne-setting and then wée perceiued right before vs a round and high Island being about sixe miles from it which was the first and furthest Island Westward of the seuen Islandes which at this present are called As Sete Irmaas that is the seuen sisters which lie vnder 29. degrées and ½ This first Island hath a sharpe point on the West side in the middle at the foot thereof hauing a stone in forme of a Pillar like the Varella in the straight of Singapura by Malacca and on the Northeast side about halfe a mile from thence there lieth a round blacke Cliffe Béeing in the sight of this Island wée presently ranne North and by East as before all that night and in the morning béeing right against it wee sawe all the rest of the seuen Islands and still held our course Northeast vntill we were before the last of the said seuen Islands From whence about sixe miles Northward lyeth two Islands stretching East West whereof that in the East is verie long and high full of blacke shining trées and that in the West much lesse and lower at the East end or point of the lesser Iland there is a high houell that descendeth Westward making a long and lowe point These islands are about a mile distant from each other Westward from this Island about two miles and a halfe there is another island as great and high as the other aforesaid the first great high Island aforesaid is called Icoo and the aforesaid seuen Islands shall all lie on the Southeast side from you and from the first to the last they may be about seuen or eight miles when wee were at the end of the seuen Islands we held our course Northeast towardes the channell that runneth betwéene the great high Island and the Iland that hath the long low point where we passed through comming out againe on the North side This channell is faire and deepe without any cliffes or stones Foure miles Northwestward from this Channell lyeth a verie high and round Island which on the West side seemeth to be full of Cliffes This Iland hath a Mine of Brimstone which lyeth in the middle thereof A mile Northward from this fiery Island lyeth another small and lowe Island and from the aforesaide fiery Islande about eight miles Eastward lyeth the Island of Tanaxuma aforesaid the great high Island of Icoo aforesaide lying on the East side of the Channell on the North side thereof hath a lowe Lande and all along by it is verie good harbour béeing faire and good ground reaching foure or fiue miles East and West Thrée miles Northward from the East end of this Island of Icoo lyeth the aforesaide Island of Tanaxuma as it is also declared in the Description of the Course and Nauigation to the Island of Ferando This Island of Tanaxuma stretcheth North and South béeing altogither low Land and full of Houels and Valleyes with Pine trées that stand farre distant one from the other and is about seuen or eight miles long and in the middle thereof on the West side lyeth a Hauen within certaine Cliffes and Rockes and a mile and a halfe West Northwestward from this Hauen lyeth a very small and lowe Island with a little Houell in the middle On the North end of this smal Iland there are some stones rocks sticking out about the length of the shotte of a great péece all the rest is faire Likewise betwéene this Island and Tanaxuma it is all ouer faire and cleere Seuen or eight miles Northward from the Island of Tanaxuma lyeth the great and high Land of Iapon which coast on the South side stretcheth East and West for the space of ten myles from the channell aforesaid that runneth betweene the Islandes you can not see Tanaxuma vnlesse it bée faire and cleere weather wee ranne East Northeast and were about three miles distant from the aforesaide Channell before wee discouered Tanaxuma as likewise the great land of Iapon which as I saide before is verie high stretching East and West about tenne miles and because Tanaxuma stretcheth North and South being lowe land and the land of Iapon high therefore in that place where wée were they seemed vnto vs like one Lande because they reach each through other Wherevpon the Chinish Pilote which wee had at that time aboord our shippe thought then to be all one land but when we put nearer to it then wée began to sée the Channell that runneth betwéene them beeing distant one from the other crosse ouer about seuen or eight miles and in that manner wée ranne halfe a strike East Northeast towardes the land of Iapon it being flood where the tide ranne Eastward towards the small Island that lyeth by Tanaxuma driuing vs thither whereby we had much labour and paine to get aboue it passing about the length of the shot of a great péece from it wherefore it is necessarie for a man to runne Noâ—theast vntill hée be past that small Iland aforesaid When we had passed about the Island of Tanaxuma wée ranne North Northeast towards the coast being three myles distant from it and right against the creeke of Xebuxij we had a calme beeing the last of Iune hauing departed from the Island called A Ilha das Outeas lying on the West side of the mouth or channell of Macau the nintéenth of the same moneth hauing Sailed toward Iapon about eleuen dayes whereof we had thrée daies calme so that our Sailes lay flat to the Mastes being vnder the Island of Lequeo as aforesaid The 34. Chapter Another description of the course from
the greater it séemeth This Island is very high in the middle and descendeth downeward towards the end The Northeast point is lower then the southeast so that it maketh as it were a tongue sticking out which is very lowe From thence East Northeastward are certaine Islands shewing like cliffes The depth in that place is fiue and twenty fadome muddy ground Wednesday being the seuentéenth we had a North Northeast wind and then it came North-east and began to blowe so stiffe that we were forced to strike all our sailes letting the shippe driue all that day Southeastward and by night wee willed the man at the helme to steere northwest and about morning the winde began to blowe so stiffe with so great waues that we were forced to go with half our foukesaile with all our cords wel bound made fast and the storm or Tuffon was so great that wee were forced to bind all that wee had on boord els it was presently stricken in péeces This Tempest began first North Northeast and so ranne about till it was North Northwest At the departure whereof it was so boysterous that the waues séemed to touch the clowdes This was vpon Thursday being the two and twentith day of the new Moone the next night following the wind came west but because as then the Sea ranne verie high we let not our sailes fall but in the morning we had the wind southwest and then we let fall our sailes minding to follow on our course with great ioy throughout our ship thinking certainely wee had the windes of the Monson but towards night it was calme againe and then wee had a North wind holding our course eastward but not long after it was altogither calme notwithstanding the waues ranne out of the South so that about two of the clocke we had the wind southeast wherewith we hoised sailes running northeast and Northeast and by North and when it began to be day we saw the Island called Dos Reys Magos that is the thrée kings lying South about tenne or twelue miles from vs and there I found the heigth of the sunne to be 26 degrées and ⅔ being the one and twenty day of the Moone The day before wee sawe the Island Fermosa which is a very high Land and séemeth to reach vnto the cloudes there wee had fiue and fortie and fiftie fadome water muddy ground On friday at sunne rising we cast out our lead and found one and twentie fadome with blacke sande The first token that we had of the aforesaid Tempest was a small Raine-bowe close by the Horizon on the Sea side being a faire russet colour with two other greater Rainebowes whereof the point or end shewed almost like the cloud called Olhos de Bois that is Cats eyes which are small clouds which at the first shewe seeme no greater then a mans fist about the Cape De bona Speranza which by the sailors that saile in the East Indian Seas are much marked for they are tokens of suddaine falling Tempestes and cruell stormes as in the voyage from India to Portingale is alreadie partly declared wherefore it is good to bée aduertised thereof the better to looke vnto it and to watch for them to y e which end I thought it not from the matter to speake of them in this place But returning vnto our matter I aduertise you that when you are come into those countries as long as the winde commeth out of the North and so Southwest you are to make no account thereof for it will presently bée North Northeast and East but when it is calme then you shall haue a Southeast winde and then South and Southwest which are the monson and windes of that time but if it beginne againe to be calme it may so fall out that it will bée East Southeast but it will presently be southeast againe with faire weather which wée also found in this Monson of Iuly Anno 1585. Monday the two and twentie day wée tooke the height of the Sunne at 27. degrées and 1 ◠hauing a Southeast Southsoutheast winde with good weather and helde our course north-Northeast and as I gessed wée had runne after wée had faire weather and wind about two and twentie miles béeing from the lande of China from the Cape called Sumbor about 12. myles being yet about an hundred miles from the Island of Meaxuma and that day wée cast out the Lead and found 55. and 57. fadome water and sawe many blacke and white Sea foules that helde thereabout the blacke birdes by the Portingales being called Alcatrases The thrée and twentie beeing Tuesday wée had verie good weather in such manner that at that mealetide wée sailed about fiftéene miles béeing about twelue miles from the firme land of China In the morning we cast out the Lead and found one and fiftie fadome with white and blacke sand Wednesday being the four and twentie day wee had the height of the Sunne at 29. degrées with an East Southeast and Southeast winde and good weather holding our course Northeast and Northeast and by North and sometimes but not much Northeast and by East I made my account to haue holden Northeast and by North and so to haue sailed 16. miles being yet from the Island of Meaxuma about 70. miles lying Northeast from vs and there we cast out our Lead and found 49. fadome déepe sandie muddy ground Thursday the 25. of Iuly wee tooke not the height of the Sunne because wee lay driuing without sayles with an East wind winding Southward and so helde till the 26. day and draue Westward finding two fadome lesse in our depth The 26. we wound Northward without sailes yet not long after wee let our foresaile fall but wholly against my mind but onely at the importunate desire of the Chinish Pilat saying that the same day wee should haue the winde larger which was not so but cleane contrarie so that all the way wee made in that sort was more troublesome vnto bs wherefore it is better for such as finde themselues in those countries of 29. degrées to stay for Southeast windes and then to runne North Northeast Northeast and Northeast and by North because the waters and streames runne verie strong towards Liampo and when you are vnder 30. and 31. degrées hauing a South Southeast winde then you shall haue great labour and much paine to get the Island Meaxuma for so it happened vnto vs because the wind was so strong that we could beare but our foresaile and halfe the maine top-saile as also because the Sea ranne very high and hollow and put our shippe out of course and that the streames ranne Southeast This is about 25. or 30. miles from the Island Meaxuma But as soone as the winde came full whereby wee ranne East East and by North and East Northeast at 40. and 34. fadome water the ground being verie smal sand holding as much Eastward as possibly we might and sometimes east and by South wherby we
better assured you may send a boat in before you which shall lie there where y e riuer is narrowest thereby to serue you for a Baye or Sea-marke The 38. Chapter The right course to saile from the Island Meaxuma to the Hauen of Cochinochy and to Facunda with the scituation of the Places WHen you sée the Island Meaxuma go within a mile and a halfe or two miles néere it or somewhat closer if you will for there you néed feare nothing but what you sée before you and desiring to saile from thence to Cochinochy then you shall hold your course East and East and by North stil kéeping Eastward whereby you shall come to the Créeke of Arima and if it bée by night and that you desire to knowe when you are by the land then cast your Lead continually out and béeing at fortie fadome then you are about two miles and a halfe or thrée miles from the lande and béeing in the mouth of the Créeke you shall finde hard and great Sand and when you are at fortie fadome you may anker if the weather be faire if you thinke it bée falling water and so stay till it bée daye for there the streame runneth verie strong into the Sea your Lead will direct you what you shall doe If it bée day you shall presently sée the Lande of Cabexuma to Seawarde from you lyeth a Cliffe which sheweth like a Saile This Cliffe you can not sée but when you are close by the point to Léewarde from this point Northward lyeth certaine stonie cliffes but it is not best for you that you sée them when you goe to Cochinochy because they lie to Lée-warde as I saide before And wen you sée lande which is at fortie fadome water then you shall presently discouer the Créeke of Arima as also the point of Cabexuma on the one side and the lande of Amacusa and Xiquy on the other side which is very high This lande lyeth on the South side and Cabexuma on the North side when you sée the point of Cabexuma goe within a mile of it because of a stonie cliffe which lyeth in the mouth of the Creeke holding your course close by Cabexuma about a mile and a halfe from it or along by the land of Amacusa If the winde within this Créeke bée sharpe then stay vntill the floode commeth which shall bring you where you desire to be and being there you haue Cochinochy right before you where you shall haue Barks and Scutes great store to bring you in Hée that desireth to goe to Facunda must hold his course East Northeast and north-Northeast and by east and when you are close by the land you shall find the depths aforesaid and beeing to Léewarde from Cabexuma you shall there finde harde ground and if it be right ouer against the mouth of the creeke you shall haue sandie ground as aforesaid and when you see the point of Cabexuma then make towards the lande and by the lande about a mile distant you shall sée certaine stonie cliffes by the which you shall holde your course to Seaward from them by these first stonie cliffes lyeth a round Island with a trée in it and somewhat beyond this Island with one Trée there is another Island stretching Northwest and Southeast called Ilha dos Cauallos that is the Island of Horses you must make towards the Island to a point of land that lyeth out on the North side of the same Island This Island on the Northwest side hath for a marke certaine Pine trées when you are close by the aforesaid Northerly point then from thence hold East Northeast till you put in where you shall find a Creeke and right ouer against this Island North Northeast lieth a sharpe pointed Houell reaching to Seawarde which you must shun for half a mile from thence forward lieth two stones which you shall presently see when you enter into the creeke going within an Island or cliffe which will be East north-Northeast from you you must put towards it about the length of the shot of a great péece and so runne along by it till you be in and within on the right hand vpon the lande you shall sée certaine downes and on the left hand a groue hauing on the sea side as you passe along many stones like Kefell stones Right ouer against this Island on the left hand lie the two stones aforesaid which you can not see then with an ebbe of a spring tide and running in after this manner you shall see a crosse standing vpon a point of land and right ouer against this crosse is the Rode and from this crosse Eastward there is a verie good Hauen where you must make your ship fast and sure from the South side that is the Hauen of Facunda The 39. Chapter An instruction of the course out of the Hauen of Langasaque or Nangasache to the cape de Sumber in the coast of China where the Portingales are resident SAiling out of the hauen of Langâ—saque to China hauing a North wind if you haue cause to anker below by the thrée Islands or cliffes béeing right ouer against the Island dos Cauallos on the side of Facunda then anker there along for it is déepe enough all ouer as I with my lead haue prooued there you shall stay the first night that in the morning very early you may haue the winde from off the lande wherewith you shall set saile loosing as much as you can vntill you be gotten about the Island dos Cauallos for because we did it not being in the ship of Tristan Vaas da Veiga we were in danger not to haue béene able to get about the Island Béeing past the Island dos Cauallos you must hold your course West West and by South and West Southwest and if the wind be bigge then put not towards the Island Guoto for that there at that time you haue certaine South windes which I knowe for certaine because I haue béen there at other times in the ship of Manoel Trauassos in great trouble because it is crosse wind right vpoÌ„ the coast and there you haue no ground as also by night not to fall by the Pannellas which are called Pottes and by some Cliffes wherefore your best course is to runne to Loofeward from the Island Meaxuma Along by the Southwest side of the Island of Meaxuma lieth a cliffe from thence forwarde you shall holde your course West Southwest although you haue the wind scant yet you may hold that course for that being halfe way from the gulfe to the coast you shall without doubt finde the wind large enough In this way kéeping well to Loofewarde about 35. or 40. miles from the Cape de Sumbor you shall find a Banke of 35.37 and 38. fadome déepe which by such as knewe it not might bee taken for the ground of the land of China Being past this Banke you find more depthes but when after that the depthes begin to lessen then looke to your selfe for
behinde them and sailed but foure in companie that of Nuno da Silua béeing one till they came to the Baye called Baya de las Islas that is the Baye of the Islands lying vnder nine and fortie degrées where it is said that Magellanes lay and wintered there with his Shippe when hée first discouered the Straight which now holdeth his name In this Bay being the twentie of Iune they entred and there ankered so close to the land that they might send to it with a Harquebush shot and there they saw the land to be inhabited with Indians that were apparelled with skinnes with their legges from the knées downwarde and their armes from the elbows downward couered all the rest of their bodies béeing naked with bowes and arrowes in their handes being subtill great and well formed people and strong and high of stature where sixe of the English men went on land to fetch fresh water and before they leapt on land foure of the Indians came vnto their boate to whome the English men gaue bread and wine and when the Indians had well eaten and drunke they departed thence and going somwhat farre from them one of the Indians cryed to them and saide Magallanes Esta heminha Terra that is Magallanes this is my countrey and because the English men followed them it séemed the Indians fledde-vpward into the lande and béeing somewhat farre off they turned backe againe and with their arrowes slewe two of the English Shippers one being an English man the other a Netherlander the rest came backe againe and saued themselues in the boate wherewith they presently put off from the shoare and there they stayed till the seuentéenth of August vpon the which day they set saile running along by the coast about a mile and a halfe from the lande for there it is all faire and good ground at twentie and fiue and twentie fadome déepe and were about foure or fiue dayes before they came to the mouth or entrie of the Straightes but because the winde was contrarie they stayed till the foure and twentie of August before they entred The entrie or mouth of the Straight is about a myle broad on both sides béeing bare and flat land on the North side they sawe Indians making great fires but on the South side they saw no people stirring The foure and twentie day aforesaide they beganne to enter into the straights with an East Northeast wind This Straight may be about an hundred and ten miles long and in breadth a mile about the entry of the Straight and halfe way into it it runneth right forth without any windings or turnings and from thence about eight or ten miles towardes the end it hath some boughes and windings among the which there is one so great a hooke or running in that it séemeth to runne into the other land and there it is lesse then a mile broad from one lande to the other and from thence forwarde it runneth straight out againe And although you finde some crookings yet they are nothing to speake of The issue of the Straight lieth westward and about eight or ten miles before you come to the end then the Straight beginneth to be broader and it is all high lande to the end thereof after you are eight miles within the Straight for the first eight myles after you enter is low flat land as I saide before and in the entrie of the Straight you finde the streame to runne from the South sea to the North sea and after they began to saile in with the East Northeast winde being entred they passed along without any let or hinderance either of wind or weather and because the high land on both sides lay couered with snow and that all the Straight is faire and cleare they held their course a Harquebush shot in length from off the North side hauing nine and ten fadome déepe with good ground as I said before where if neede require a man may anker the hilles on both sides béeing full of trées some of the hilles and trées reaching downe to the sea side in some places hauing plaine and euen land and there they saw not any great riueâ—s but some small riuers that issued out of the Riffes and Breaches of the lande and in the country where the great Bough or crooking is on the South side they saw certaine Indian Fishermen in their Canoas or Scutes being such as they sawe first on the North side but more people they saw not on the South side Beeing out of the Straight on the other side béeing vpon the sixt of September of the aforesaide yeere they held their course Northwest for the space of thrée dayes and the third day they had a northeast winde that by force draue them West Southwest which course they helde for the space of ten or twelue dayes with fewe sailes vp and because the winde began to be verie great they tooke in all their sailes and lay driuing till the last of September The foure and twentie day of the same moneth hauing lost the sight of their pinnace which was about an hundred tunne then againe they hoised saile because they came better holding their course Northeast for the space of seuen dayes and at the end of the said seuen dayes they had the sight of certaine Islands which they made towards for to anker but the weather would not permit them and béeing there the winde fell Northwest whereby they sailed West Southwest The next day they lost the sight of another of their companie which ship was about three hundred and sixtie tunnes for it was very foule weather so that in the end the Admirals shippe was left alone for the Ship of Nuno da Silua was left in the Baye where they wintered before they entred into the Straights and with this foule weather they ranne till they were vnder seuen fiftie degrees where they entred into a Hauen of an Island and ankered about the length of the shot of a great peece from the land at twentie fadome deepe where they staied thrée or foure dayes and the winde comming Southward they hoysed anker holding their course Northward for the space of two dayes and then they espied a small vnhabited Island where béeing arriued they stroke sayles and hoised out their boat and there they tooke many birds and Sea wolues The next day they set saile againe holding their course North Northeast and North to â—nother Island lying fiue or six myles from the firme lande on the North side of the Straight where they ankered about a quarter of a mile from the lande at twelue fadome water This Island is small and lowe lande and full of Indians the Island being altogither built and inhabited by them where they hoysed out their boate wherein the Admirall and twelue English men were entred going to fetch fresh water and to séeke for victuals and beeing landed vpon the Island the Indians in exchange of other things brought two Spanish shéepe and a little Mais
good aire without séeing the houses that stand vpon the same The most part of the land of the Riuer of good aire is a thicke land like a downe about thrée miles along by the sea side as soone as you sée this lande then you must make right towards the houses yet somwhat more towards the south side where there is a place where the shippes anker but if you desire to runne on the North side then you shall take your course from the Island las Flores or from Santa Horodio about a mile and a halfe from the land at three and ½ or foure fadome to the Islands of Saint Gabriel which are thrée smal Islands but they haue no good Rode and if you chance to anker there goe not a shore but verie warily because the inhabitants haue warres with the Spaniards and Portingales all along the riuer but the best course is on the South side from the fresh water inwards The 63. Chapter How to saile from the Island La Gomera one of the Islands of Canaria to the Antillas or sore Islandes of the Spanish Indies and from thence to the coast of the Firme land to Cartagena and Nombre de Dios as also the course from thence to the Hauana and the channell thereof and so to the Flemiâ—h Islands and from thence to Spaiâ—ne with the scituation of the places SAyling from the Island La Gomera to the Island called La Desseada that is the Desired Island being one of the Islandes of the Spanish Indies then you must holde your course South for the space of a mealetide so to get out of the calme from thence you must runne West Southwest till you be vnder 20. or 22. degrées and beeing there you must runne West and West and by South till you come vnder fifteene degrées and 1 â— which is the height of the Island La Desseada If when you are there you haue a West winde then run Southwest as farre as you thinke good thereby to get againe vnder fifteene degrées and ½ running on the wether side West Northwest to bring all to one point whereby you shall find helpe from North and South East and West because you are close by the lande holding your course West and west and by north because the compasse windeth a strike into the Northwest with the which course you shall see the Island la Desseada This Island lieth East and West and sheweth like a Gallie with her tilt vp on the east side it is a low land in forme like a bore-sprit of a shippe or galley from the West side it is high land shewing like the sterne of a gally and on the South side it sheweth like halfe an Island the hinder part thereof being like a horse shoe The Island called Maâ—galante is a low and flat land and reacheth East West being full of trées on the East side beeing highest and on the South side hauing certaine white downes on the West side about halfe a mile from the Island it hath a blacke shining cliffe This Island lyeth full vnder fifteene degrees The Island la Dominica is a great Island and reacheth Northwest and southeast when you sée it first beeing on the outside therof it sheweth like 2. Islands by reason of a great opening it hath in the middle but when you are close by it then you perceiue it to be all one Island it is full of hils on the Southeast side a lowe land hauing a small or thin point of land with a houell vpon it on the North-west side it is thicke high Land hauing a Hill that seemeth to bee seperated and to stand alone by it selfe although it is not alone Vpon this hil there is a rock which sheweth like a clock house without the aforesaid thicke high Land there is a Rocke or cliffe which runneth off froÌ„ y e thick point This Island lyeth vnder 15. degrées ½ The Islands called Los Santos are four Islands which are not very high lying in Triangle Betweene these Islands and the Island La Dominica there runneth a good channell to passe through Sayling from the Island La Dominica to the Point of Coquibocoa lying from the Firme Lande you shall holde your course West and West and by South vntill you bee by the point and if you sée it not then runne southwestward towards it or Southward vntill you sée it This Point of Coquibocoa is a low Land running into Seaward and within the lande it hath a rowe of Hilles which are called the Oile Hils which stretch along by Veuansuela where they end which vpon the coast of the Firme land From this Point you runne along the coast to the Point called Cabo de Vela and betwéene these two Points there are two hauens wherof one is called Bahya Honda that is the deepe Bay This lieth on the East side and on both sides where the Sea beateth it hath downes The other Hauen lying on the West side within it hath a high Land or Hill which reacheth North and South In both these Hauens you may enter with Ships of two hundred tunnes All this coast to Cabo de la Vela is cleare and safe The point Cabo de la Vela is a high land like a suger loafe and about half a mile from it there is a cliffe which sheweth like a ship vnder saile and therefore this Point is called Cabo de la Vela that is the point of the saile This Cliffe lieth north-Northeast and Southwest with y e Point aforesaid it is said you may well passe betwéene it and the lande and if you depart from the saied Point to saile to the Cliffe and Point called Cabo de la aguia that is the Point of the Néedle then you shall runne West South-west by the which course you shall see it They are foure Cliffes together which shewe in forme like a Horse shooe and the Lande that is right against it is a high Land Beeing inward to the Lande some what higher which is called Las Sierras Neuadas that is the Snowe Hils when these hils are Southward from you then you are right against the foure cliffes And comming to the beginning of the foure Cliffes hauing past the Riuer De Palomina lying by the last Cliffe then you shall see the Cabo de La aguia This Cape is a still Lande descending downeward to the Sea side but not very high on the toppe hauing a Dale which sheweth like a saddle It hath likewise on the out side close by it thrée blacke shining Cliffes which the water dooth almost flowe ouer they lye with the Cape aforesaid North and South The saied Cape is bare sheweth blackish and shining All this coast reacheth almost East and West From Cabo de Sancta Marta forward you must runne along by the coast alwaies looking to your course because of the Billowes and streames that come from the Lande which oftentimes fal vpon you When you discouer the land of Charthagena you shall sée two Cliffes
teates of a womans dugs and to put into it you must keepe your course along by the houell If you depart from the Point aforesaid with the winds called Brisas then you shall hold your course to the Cliffes called â—ortugas that is the Torteaux as winde serueth and you must see what depth you find for if there you finde fortie fadome water then you are on the South-side thereof and finding 30. fadome then you are East and West right against it and being at any of these depths you shal hold your course South South-west vntil you see the land which you shall discouer from the field or Hauen thereof and if you see a Land that is somewhat high hauing some Hils and Dales that shewe like the fingers of a mans hand then it is the land â—aâ—â—d Narugo from thence you shal runne to Hâ—eaâ—a holding your course along by the coast Sayling out of Hauana to the Martirs you shall hold your course Northeast by the which course you shall see the Point which is three small Islandes whereof that in the middle is the greatest the vttermost being the East coast and the inwardest the north-North-east and South-west coast From thence North-east-ward to the Cape De Canauerales that is y e point of Reedes the coast stretcheth North and South and North-east-ward you shall see no land and being vnder fiue and twentie degrees then you are in the mouth of the channel which to passe through you must hold your course Northeast and if you see not the Cape de Canauerales being vnder 28. degrees and â— 2. then you are without the channell Sayling out of the Hauana with the windes called Brisas to the channell you must runne outwards till it be noone and after noone you shall make to Landward that towards euening you may bee by it and to vse the Windes called Terreinhos which are Windes that blowe by night from off the land running in this manner along by the coast vntill you bee North and South with the Houell called El Pan de Matancas that is the loafe of Matancas being North and South with y e same loafe you must runne north-Northeast if the winde will permit if not you must put to the coast of Florida where the winde will driue you doing your best in that way to goe out of your course as little as you may for the streames runne with great force towards that Lande and when you thinke it time then you shall put to the other side as the winde will leade you till you see the Lande and when you sée it then winde in this sort running through and being vnder 28. degrées and ½ then you are out of the Channell hereof I aduise that the strikes you make in lauering towards the land of Florida must be short and those towardes the Coast of Minare long for the streames driue you to the Lande of Florida The Hils of Chupiona come out by the loafe of Matancas and are certaine not too high and euen Hils flat on the toppe with certaine white shining houels The loafe of Matancas is a high Houell flat aboue stretching north-northeast and South-west and on both sides as well North-eastward as southwestward it hath two low Points lower then y e said loafe which shew like the heads of Torteaux On the north-North-east side the Lande stretcheth lowe and from thence Northward it maketh a small Point Behinde this Point lyeth the Hauen of Matancas and to enter therein you must run north-Northeast and Southwest right against the said loafe and then the Hauen will bee South from you and you must runne southward to it it is a great Bay and there you haue no Road but close by the Land comming out you leaue the loafe on the South-side and you must hold your course north-east till you be out And being out of the Channell if it bée in Winter you shall run East wherwith you shall holde East and by North by the winding or declining of the compasse By the which course you shall passe on the South-side of the Islands and Cliffes of Bermuda and this course you shall holde till you bee vnder the heigth of the Island Fayael one of the Flemish Islands which is a great Island stretching North-west and Southeast on the Southeast side hauing a thicke Land and on the north-northeast side somewhat lower land To saile from thence to the Island of Tercera you shall hold your course outward of the Island of S. George east and east by North. The Island of S. George is a high Lande stretching East and West as also Tercera which on the Southside hath a clouen hill called O Brasil and a little eastward from thence there lieth thrée cliffes The Iland of S. Michael is a great high Island stretching East and West on the West side being lowe and on the East side high It hath likewise a clouen hil lying at the end on the East side This Island lyeth vnder 38. degrées The 64. Chapter The course and right markes from the Island La Desseada to the lande and coast of Carthagena Nombre de Dios new Spain and from the channell of Hauana IF you desire to sayle through the Channell that runneth betwéene the Island La Antigua La Desleada towards the coast you must holde your course West to the Island of Montecerratte running along by the Island of Guadalupe which is an Island clouen through the middle higher on the West then on the East side The Island La Antigua that is the old Island you shal find on the Northside of Guadalupe stretching in length East and West and hath Hils with outward shew like Ilands and lieth vnder 16. degrées and 1 â— The markes of the Island Montecerratte are these It is round and high like the Island La Gomera in the Canaries and hath some Hilles with certaine Water beakes Sailing from this Island Montecerratte you must runne West Northwest whereby you shall discouer the Island Sancta Crus but you must not runne too close by it for there it is foule and no cleare ground it stretcheth East and West and is Hilly but not verie high beeing higher on the West then on the East side in the middlest hath a rent or partition and on the East side there is a Roade where you may anker for there it is faire sandye ground To sayle from Sancta Crus to the Island of Puerto Riquo that is the Iland of the rich Hauen on the Southside you must runne West Northwest whereby you shall discouer the hill called Sierta de Loquillo and from thence to Cabo Roxo you shall sayle West and West and by North keeping along by the land vntill you be by the cape aforesaide which is the vttermost part of the same Island This point called Cabo Roxo that is the red point is a thin and lowe lande on the sea side hauing certaine redde shining downes and on the North-west side you sée the hils called I as Sierras de
in the middle it hath thrée houels whereof that in y e middle is the greatest From this Island De Pinos to Cabo de Corrientes you must runne West Northwest by the which course you shall sée it This point on the sea side is a Lande running downeward vpon it hauing some palme Trées and on the West side a sandy strand where there is a Roade where you may lye Vpon this Point of Cabo de Correntes standeth a picked Hill which stretcheth further out theÌ„ all other points when from thence you put in you shall sée on the Lande righter ouer you a Lake of fresh water where if néede bee you may supply your want To saile from thence to the Point of S. Anton. Beeing two or thrée miles to Sea-ward you must runne West Northwest From the Island De Pinos to Cabo de S. Anton there are two great créekes one lying from the Island De pinos to the cape De Corrientes and the other from the Cape De Corrientes to Cape de S. Anton and before you come to the Point of Cape de Corrientes there is a point called La Punta de Guaniguanico behind the Land inward you shall sée certaine Hils called Las Sierras Guaniguanico Cape de S. Anton is a long Point full of trées with some bushes with sandye strandes and from it there runneth a bank or sand for the space of 4. miles northwestward Sayling from the Point of S. Anton to new Spaigne in winter time y t is from August to March then you must hold your course without y e Islands and Cliffes called Las Alactanes west northwestward with y t which course hauing sailed 60. or 70. miles you shall find ground which shal be of shels or great saÌ„d This you shal find til you be vnder 24. degrées if you find ground at lesse then 40. fadome sailing with the same course then hold your course north northwest northwest by west when therewith you begin to increase in depth then turn againe to your first course of northwest and wheÌ„ you begin to lose land then for the space of 20. miles you must saile West wherwith you shall be north south with the Island Bermeia FroÌ„ thence you must saile southwest till you be vnder 20. degrées if you sée not land you shall run west for at that time it is not good to goe beneath y e heigth Vnder this height course you shal sée La torre Blanca y t is the white tower if you chance to discouer y e Riuer of S. Petro S. Paulo then beyond y e riuer you shal sée certaine gréene hils but not very high If you finde 35. fadome déepe with muddie ground with shelles in some places then from thence you shall hold your course South and South and by East vntill you bée right against the fieldes of Almeria if you come out of the Sea you shall séeke ground lower and finding 30. or 40. fadome with some muddy ground then you are East and West with the riuer of Almeria about seuen miles from the land and if in the Southwest you sée the hilles called las Sierras del Papalo and that they run one within the other then you are Northeast and Southwest from them From thence you shall bolde your course South and South and by West whereby the hilles of Papalo will begin to shew themselues which wil make two round hilles you shall likewise see Las Sierras de Calaquote which are certaine reddish hilles This rowe of Hilles commeth out to the sea side If you desire to take the ground by the point of Villa Risa that is the rich towne thrée miles from the land you shall finde 80. and 90. fadome deepe muddy ground The riuer of S. Peter and S. Paul lyeth vnder 21. degrées and los Campos d'Almeria that is the fields of Almeria vnder 20. degrées Villa Risa la Vieya that is olde Villa Risa lyeth vnder 19. degrees and 2 â— Villa Risa la Vieya is certaine hils whereof the one end reach vnto the Sea side they are not very high but make many openings or rents like the hilles of Abano called Organs stretching North and South if you chaunce to come out of the Sea and should see the Hilles of Villa Risa then you shoulde see that they stretch North and South and the hils of S. Martyn stretch East and West you may know them another way which is that if you make Westward towards them comming close to them they will shew to be lower then the Hils of S. Martyn which are greater and higher as you passe along the Sea coast by them and béeing thrée myles to Sea-ward from Villa Risa you shall find ground which by S. Martins you shall not find although you were but halfe a myle from them Lastly although you should haue no knowledge of Lande yet you might knowe it by the markes aforesaid To Léeward from Villa Risa lieth a Cliffe called N. Bernards which is in forme like a suger loafe From Villa Risa la Vieya or out of Villa Risa to S. Iohn de Luz you shall hold your course South and South and by East and you shal find ground of shels muddy ground at thirty fadome towards the Land By the Riuer of Vera Crus you shall find sandye ground and in some places muddye ground If you were without then you must knowe that from S. Christopher to S. Iohn de Luz it is all sandye strandes and being East and west with the point called Punta Gordâ— then you are North and South with the Island of S. Iohn de Luz and being north-North-east and South-west with the Island at lesse then forty fadome déepe towards the Land then you shall haue reddish ground and in some places shels and from forty fadomes forward white muddy ground If you come out of the sea and desire to know if you bee East and West with the Island then you must marke a high houell that runneth out from the hils of Vera Crus And when you are East and west with this Houell so are you likewise East and West with the Island you must likewise vnderstande that when the Hill of Sierra Neuada y t is the snowy hill lieth West west and by south from you then are you likewise east and west with the Island aforesaid then you shall presently sée the point called AntoÌ„ Niquardo as also Mendano Montuoso or the high Houell aforesaid and you shal likewise sée the sea-coast Medelâ—n and on the North-west side the Point of Punta Gorda if you desire with a North wind to be in the hauen then run at 18 20 fadome déepe whereby you shal passe to loofeward through the chanell going close to the bulwark yet shunning it you shall anker on the loofe side for to Léeward it hath no great depth If you depart from the Point of S. Anton in summer time towards new Spain then you must hold your course westward for
The 67. Chapter The course right marke of the nauigatioÌ„ from the point called Cabo de Lopo Gonsalues to the riuer of Coâ—go in Angola southwards in the coasts of Guinea and Ethiopia with the situation of the countries SAyling from the point called Cabo de Lopo Gonsalues which lyeth full vnder 1. deg on the south side of the Equinoctial line in the Coast of Guinea or Ethiopia the coast froÌ„ thence forward stretcheth northwest southeast being a flat long land you haue the depthes of 10. and 9. fadome déepe water towards the land being all ground like sand of sand lopers all through the country except it be by the point Cabo de Catarina where you haue great sand some stones if you will make any hast being vpon this coast and voyage then euery night you must anker till you haue the Terreintios which are the winds blowing from off the land holding your course in that manner till you haue the Viracoins which are y e winds out of the sea therwith again to make towards the land vntil it be calme or that y e are at 10. fadom déep theÌ„ you must anker til the comming of the land winds which come dayly at their times as aforesaid if the streames run w t the wind theÌ„ you may wind from the one bough to the other holding to léeward as aforesaid the coniunction or time wheÌ„ the streames run with the winds is with a new Moone about 2. dayes before or after and 3. dayes before it is ful if you desire to run from one bough to the other y t must rule your selfe in such maÌ„ner that you be euery morning by the coast to get before the winds that as then blow off the land the marks of the long land are these it hath certain great thicke houels called As Sierras de santo Espirito that is the hils of the holy Ghost and somwhat further you haue 2 other houels which are very easy to be knowne in this country you haue muddy ground further forward you shal sée a high hill within the créek called Palmella for that it is like to Palmela the which lyeth betweene Lisbon and Setuval you shal likewise sée somewhat further in the créeke a land which stretcheth North south as you passe along by it close by the strand it hath a thicke flat houel which is called Cascars because it is like Cascais by Lisbon you must vnderstand that before you hoyse vp anker in that countrie you must let fal your sayles to see if the shippe may get out and if it cannot get out then lie still till you haue the Viracoins that blow out of the sea for in those countries the streames runne very stronglie out of the riuer of Congo into the sea wherby the shippe can hardlie get out when you are so far as the place called a Palmeirinâ—a that is the woods of Palme trees then let your best anker fall for the groundes in this crosse way is stiffe muddy ground whereby the ankers oftentimes will hardly holde fast but ship out againe And when you are in the riuer of Congo being at the depth of 30. or 40 fadome then you shall loofe the ground then you shall turne your howreglasse and when it is runne out then cast out your lead and you shall find 10 or 12 fadome water on the other side of the riuer of Congo and you shal sayle about the length of a stone cast from the land and the best course is close by the land for otherwise you could not get into the riuer by meanes of the great force of the streames wherby many men are much troubled as being the greatest stroÌ„gest streams that are found in any place and run aboue 12. miles into the sea Sayling from Congo to Angola in maner aforesaid and being 35. miles on your way you shal sée a high hill by the which ther lieth an IlaÌ„d called A Ilha de Loanda but if you be not very close by y e laÌ„d you shal not sée the Iland for it is very low flat if you chance to be by the land at 6. 7. deg then you shal be at the mouth of the riuer of Congo and 10. myles to seaward from it you shal sée many tokens signes thereof as great streames thicke réeds herbs with many cutle bones and wheÌ„ you are by the land at 7. 8. degr ½ then you shall sée a flat land with trées al ouer it and in this country in euery place at 18. 20. fadome you shal haue good ground from 2. to two miles and a halfe from the land on the sea side you haue white downes which shew like sandy strandes the ground by it is sandy with some stones that is from 7. to 8. deg and you must vnderstand that the land from 5 deg southwarde is altogether high all the ground being muddy and a mile from it it is 30. and 35 fadom deepe good ground being a cleare and faire coast with cause of feare of more then is séen before your dayes that is from 7 to 9 deg and the land from 8. degrees southward is verie high if you come out of the sea to the land vnder 7. degr and ½ then you shal sée 7. hils or Houels which stretch Northwest and southeast called As sete serras that is the 7. hils if you come to the land vnder 8. degr ¼ then you shall see a hie land lying eastwarde from you this point in shew hath the forme of cape S. Vincent in the coast of Spaine comming to the land not full vnder 9 degrées then north or north-northeast you shal sée the aforesaid point hauing vnder it some whit downs that strike somewhat out into the sea but you need not feare them for it is faire and cleare and therefore you may fréely go neere the land theÌ„ better to know it being vnder the hight aforesaid of scarce 9 deg then eastwarde to land you shal see a round hil called monte Pasqual when the point aforesaid is north-northeast from you then the other land shall stretch southwest which is the furthest land lying without the Iland of Loanda the land that lyeth southwarde from you is a greate thicke land at the foot thereof hauing some red and white downes with certaine small trees vppon it which show like figge trees of Algaruen in Spaine now to runne within y e land of Loâ—ndâ— you must hold your course right vpon the land that lyeth southward so you may go close coâ—t about half a mile froÌ„ it being there southwestward from the Iland you shal discouer the Iland which is very flat and of white sand whereby you can hardlie see it but when you are close by it that is the hauen of Angola This Iland of Loanda is like an Iland called A Ilha das Caruns lying by the cape called Cabo de santa Maria in the land of Algaruen vpon the coast
vnder 16 â…” The vttermost South point of the Island Aynon vnder 18. ½ The north-Northeast end of the same Iland vnder 19. ½ The Ilands of Sanchoan vnder 21. â…“ The towne Iland of Macau vnder 22. â…“ The towne of Canton vnder 24. ½ Ilha Branco or white Iland vnder 22. ½ Ilha Fermosa or faire Iland vnder 21. ¼ Ilha de Lamon vnder 23. ¼ The hauen of Chabaquea vnder 23. ½ The hauen of Chincheo vnder 24. ½ Enseada dos Camaroins or Créeke of Granaet otherwise called Cayto vnder 25. ½ The Iland Lequeo Pequeno vnder 25. A Ilha dos Cauallos or Iland of horses vnder 25. â…“ Ponto or Cabo de Sumbor vnder 28. ¼ The Ilands as Sere Irmaas or seauen fifte as lying in the way to Iapan vnder 29. â…“ The Ilandes of Sionglean lying on the coast vnder 29. â…” The Ilandes called Liampo lying on the coast vnder 31. The middle of the Iland Meaxuma vnder 30. â— 2. The Iland of Tanaxuma vnder 31 â…” The riuer of Nanquiyn vnder 34. The Ilands of Iapan in all hauing in Longitude 130. miles and the furthest eastward lieth vnder 32. From the Ilandes of Phillippinas otherwise the Lusons or Manillas on the North side of the Equinoctial line THe entrie of the channell betweene the Iland Luson and the Iland Tandaia vnder 12. The Iland Capuly and the Iland Ticao vnder 12. ¼ The Iland Masbate vnder 12. ¼ The Iland of Banton vnder 12. â…” The Iland Rebuian on the north side vnder 12. ½ The Iland de Vireies vnder 12. ¾ The Iland Marinduque vnder 12. ¼ Cabo de Dumarijn in the Iland Mindoro and the Ilandes of Luban vnder 13. The mouth or entry of the bay of Manilla the chiefe towne of the Iland of Lucon vnder 14. ¼ The towne of Manilla vnder 14 ½ The cape of Samballes in the Iland Lucon vnder 14. â…” The Cape Bullinao in the same Iland vnder 16. â…” The Cape de Boiador which is the furthest point on the north-side of the Island Luson vnder 19. The furthest Iland east and north from the Iland Lequeos vnder 29. The Iland a Illas de las Velas otherwise de los Ladrones vnder 13. The countrie of new Spaine lying ouer against the Islands of Iapon THe Iland of Saint Agustine lying on the coast vnder degrées 30. ¼ The Iland de Sedros or of Ceaders vnder 28. ¼ Cabo de saint Lucas the beginning of the land of California vnder 22. Cabo de las Corrientes or point of streams vnder 19. â…” The hauen of Acapulco vnder 17. From the straightes of Magellanes along the coast of Brasilia to the Equinoctiall line on the south side The degrees of the south side of the Equinoctiall THe straight or passage of Magellanes vnder 15. â…› degrées Basyâ— de las Islas or the bay of the Ilandes vnder 49. Rio de la Plata or riuer of Siluer vnder 34. â…” Arreciffe or the Cliffe vnder 34. Bahia Aparcellada or the bankie bay vnder 33. Cabo da Ponta vnder 32. Rio dos Negros or the riuer of the Mores vnder 31. Angra Onde Seuio o Battel that is the hauen where the boate was séene vnder 30 Ilha da Bahya or Iland of the bay vnder 29. Ilha de Santa Caterina vnder 28. ½ Bahia do Repairo or bay of defence vnder 28. Rio do Estremo or riuer beyond measure vnder 27. Rio dos Dragos or riuer of Dragons vnder 26. Ilha de Cananea or Ilands of Réedes vnder 25. ½ Ilha Doropica vnder 25. Bay of Saint Vincent vnder 24. The riuer of Canane vnder 24 The Rio or riuer dâ— Ianero vnder 23. â…“ Cabo Frio or cold point vnder 23. Bahia do Saluador or bay of our Sauiour vnder 22. The sands called os Baixos dos Pargos vnder 21. A Bahia do Espirito Santo or the Bay of the holy Ghost vnder 120. The Iland of saint Barbara vnder the same height of 20. The riuer of S. Luciâ— vnder 19. The riuer of Saint George vnder 18. Porto Sâ—guro or the safe hauen vnder 17. Rio das Santos Cosmos the riuer of Saint Cosmos and Daâ—ian vnder 16. The Iland of S. Helena also vnder 16. Rio da Praia vnder 15. Rio dos Ilhas the riuer of small IlaÌ„ds vnder 14. ½ Porto Real or kingly hauen vnder 14. Bahya de Todos os Santos vnder 13. Rio Real or kingly riuer vnder 12. The riuer of Saint â—â—ancis vnder 11. The riuer of Saint Michael vnder 10. Santo Alexo vnder 9. Cabo or point of S. Augustine vnder 8. ¾ The towne of Olinda vnder 8. 3 â— Pernanbuco and the Iland of the Ascention vnder 8. Saint Domingo vnder 7. Artapica vnder 6. Santo Roque Santa Maria d' Arribada vnder 5. The bay of Saint Lucas vnder 4. The bay of das Tartarugas vnder 3. Rio de Arreciffe vnder 2. From the Antillas or sore Islands of the Spanish Indies some places lying in the Firme Land al vpon the north side of the Equinoctiall line Isla la deceada or desired Iland vnder 15. 1 â— The Iland Marigalante vnder 15 The Iland la Dominica vnder 15. ½ The Iland la Antigua or old Iland vnder 16. ¼ Cabo de Cantina vpon the Firme land vnder 9. ½ The Iland la Serrana vnder 14. ½ The Serranilla or little Serrana vnder 16. Cayman Grande or the great Crocodile vnder 19. Cabo de S. Anton in the Iland of Cuba vnder 22. The riuer of S. Peter S. Paul vnder 21. Los Cambos d'Almeria vnder 20. Villa Rica la vicia or olde rich towne vnder 19. â…” The hauens and places lying vppon the coast called India with the distance situation of the same beginning from the North side along the coast southwestward as the countrie stretcheth And first you must vnderstand that the coast called India hath his beginning from the creeke called a Enseada de Iaquetta at a place called Espero c. FRom Espero to Mangalor are 8. miles From Mangalor to Patana are 8 From Patana to the point called Punta de Diu are 12. FroÌ„ Diu to the Iland a Ilha do Bette are 9. From the Ilha do Bette to Goa a towne lying in the creeke of Cambaia are 20. From Ilha do Bette to the towne of Daman are 26. From Daman to Surratte a towne lying in the creeke of Cambaia are â— From Daman to Danu on the outward part of the coast are 7. From Danu to as Ilhas das Vacas are 7. From as Ilhas das Vacas to the towne of Baccain are 3. FroÌ„ Baccain to the towne of Chaul are 12 From Chaul to Danda are 5. From Danda to the creeke called a Enserda de Pero Soares are 3. From Enseada de Pero Soares to Siffardao are 3. From Siffardao to Dabul are 10. From Dabul to Sanguiserra are 6. FroÌ„ Sanguiserra to the riuer Beâ—cele are From the riuer of Bettele to Seyta Por are 3. From Seyta Por to Carapam are 11. From Carapam to the chiefe towne of Goa are 14. From Goa to Angediua are
of the Portingales into the East Indies from thence to Malacca China Iapon Iaua and Sunda And from China to the Westerne or Spanish Indies and all the Coast of Brasilia c. The Fourth and last Treatise is A most true exact Summarie of all the Rents Demaynes Tolles Taxes Imposts Tributes Tenths Third-pennies and generally all the Reuenues of the King of Spayne arising out of all his Kingdomes Lands Prouinces and Lordships as well of Portugall as of Spayne collected out of the Originall Registers of his seuerall Chambers of Accompts together with a briefe description of the gouernment and Pedegree of the Kinges of Portugall I doo not doubt but yet I doo most hartely pray and wish that this poore Translation may worke in our English Nation a further desire and increase of Honour ouer all Countreys of the World and as it hath hitherto mightily aduanced the Credite of the Realme by defending the same with our Wodden Walles as Themistocles called the Ships of Athens· So it would employ the same in forraine partes aswell for the dispersing and planting true Religion and Ciuill Conuersation therein As also for the further benefite and commodity of this Land by exportation of such thinges wherein we doe abound and importation of those Necessities whereof we stand in Neede as Hercules did when hee fetched away the Golden Apples out of the Garden of the Hesperides Iason when with his lustie troupe of couragious Argonautes hee atchieued the Golden Fleece in Colchos Farewell THE FIRST BOOKE CHAPTER I. The Voyage and trauailes of Iohn Hugen van Linschoten into the East or Portingales Indies Setting downe a briefe discourse of the said Landes and sea coastes with the principall Hauens Riuers Creekes and other places of the same as yet not knowne nor discouered by the Portingales Describing withall not onely the manner of apparrell of the Portingales inhabiting therin but also of the naturall borne Indians their Temples Idols houses trees Fruites Hearbes Spices and such like Together with the customes of those countries as well for their manner of Idolatrous religion and worshipping of Images as also for their policie and gouernment of their houses their trade and traffique in Marchandise how and from whence their wares are sold brought thether With a collection of the most memorable and worthiest thinges happened in the time of his beeing in the same countries very profitable and pleasant to all such as are welwillers or desirous to heare and read of strange thinges BEeing young and liuing idlelye in my natiue Countrie sometimes applying my selfe to the reading of Histories and straunge aduentures wherein I tooke no small delight I found my minde so much addicted to sée trauaile into strange Countries thereby to séeke some aduenture that in the end to satisfie my selfe I determined was fully resolued for a time to leaue my Natiue Countrie and my friendes although it gréeued me yet the hope I had to accomplish my desire together with the resolution taken in the end ouercame my affection and put me in good comfort to take the matter vpon me trusting in God that he would further my intent Which done being resolued thereupon I tooke leaue of my Parents who as then dwelt at Enckhuysen and beeing ready to imbarke my selfe I went to a Fléet of ships that as then lay before the Tassell staying the winde to sayle for Spaine and Portingale where I imbarked my selfe in a ship that was bound for S. Lucas de Barameda beeing determined to trauaile vnto Siuill where as then I had two bretheren that had continued there certaine yeares before so to helpe my selfe the better by their meanes to know the manner and custome of those Countries as also to learne the Spanish tongue And the 6. of December in the yere of our Lord 1576 we put out of y e Tassel being in all about 80. ships set our course for Spain and the ninth of the same month wee passed betwéene Douer and Callis within thrée dayes after wee had the sight of the Cape of Finisterra and the fiftéene of the same moneth we saw the land of Sintra otherwise called the Cape Roexent from whence the riuer Tegio or Tagus runneth into the maine Sea vppon the which riuer lieth the famous citie of Lisbone where some of our Fleet put in and left vs. The 17. day wee saw the Cape S. Vincent vppon Christmas day after we entred into the riuer of S. Lucas de Barameda where I stayed two or thrée dayes and then trauailed to Siuill the first day of Ianuarie following I entred into the citie where I found one of my brethren but the other was newly ridden to the Court lying as then in Madrill And although I had a speciall desire presently to trauaile further yet for want of the Spanish tongue without the which men can hardlie passe the countrie I was constrained to stay there to learne some part of their language meane time it chanced that Don Henry the last King of Portingale died by which meanes a great contention and debate hapned as then in Portingale by reason that the said King by his Will and Testament made Phillip King of Spaine his Sisters Sonne lawfull Heire vnto the Crowne of Portingal Notwithstanding y e Portingals alwaies deadly enemies to the Spaniards were wholly against it and elected for their king Don Antonio Prior de Ocrato brothers Son to the King that died before Don Henry which the King of Spaine hearing presently prepared himselfe in person to goe into Portingale to receaue the Crowne sending before him the Duke of Alua with a troupe of men to cease their strife and pacifie the matter so that in the end partly by force and partly by mony hee brought the Countrie vnder his subiection Whereupon diuers men went out of Siuill and other places into Portingale as it is commonlie séene that men are often addicted to changes and new alterations among the which my Brother by other mens counsels was one First trauelling to the borders of Spaine being a cittie called Badaios standing in the frontiers of Portingale where they hoped to finde some better meanes and they were no sooner ariued there but they heard news that all was quiet in Portingale and that Don Antonio was driuen out of the countrie and Phillip by consent of the Land receyued for King Wherevpon my Brother presently changed his minde of trauelling for Portingale and entred into seruice with an Ambassador that on the Kings behalfe was to goe into Italie with whome he rode and ariuing in Salamanca hee fell sicke of a disease called Tauardilha which at that time raigned throughout the whole Countrie of Spaine whereof many thousands died and among the rest my Brother was one This sicknesse being very contagious raigned not onely in Spaine but also in Italie Germany and almost throughout all Christendome whereof I my selfe was sicke being as then in Italie and by them it
some after towards Portingall with whom my brother went because of his office in the shippe and I stayed with my maister in India certaine yeares to sée and learne the maners and customes of the said lands people fruites wares and merchandises with other thinges which when time serueth I wil in truth set downe as I my selfe for the most parte haue séene it with mine eyes and of credible persons both Indians and other inhabiters in those Countries learned and required to know as also the report and fame thereof is nowe sufficiently spread abroade throughout the world by diuers of our neighbour countries and landes which traffique and deale with them namely our countrey the East Countries England Fraunce c. which likewise are founde and knowne by the Portingalles themselues which dayly trafficke thither But before I beginne to describe Goa and the Indies concerning their manners traffiques fruites wares and other thinges the better to vnderstande the situation of the Countrey and of the coasts lying on the East side to the last and highest part of the borders of China which the Portingales haue trauelled and discouered together with their Ilandes I will first set downe a briefe note of the Orientall coastes beginning at the redde or the Arabian sea from the towne of Aden to Chinae and then the description of the coastes before named Chapter 5. The description of the coast of Arabia Felix or the red Sea to the Iland and fortresse of Ormus ADen is the strongest and fairest towne of Arabia Felix situate in a valley compassed about vpon the one side with strong mines on the other side with high mountaines there are in it fiue Castles laden with Ordinance and a continuall Garrison kept therein because of the great number of shippes that sayle before it the Towne hath about 6000. houses in it where the Indians Persians Aethiopians and Turkes doe trafique and because the Sunne is so extreame hotte in the daye time they make most of their bargaines by night About a stones cast from the towne there is a hill with a great Castle standing thereon wherein the Gouernor dwelleth In times past this towne stoode vpon the firme land but nowe by the labour industrie of man they haue made it an Iland Aden lieth on the North side at the entrie of the red Sea on the coast of Arabia Felix or fruitfull Arabia and reacheth 60. miles more inwards then the corner or Cape de Guardafum the farthest part or corner of Abex or Melinde as I said before but the coast of Arabia which taketh the beginning from Aden is much more inwarde Aden lieth vnder 13. degrées on the North side and from thence the coast lyeth north-Northeast and by East till you come to Cape de Rosalgate which lyeth vnder 22. degrées and is the further corner of the lande of Arabia Felix lying on the Indian Sea which is distant from Aden 240. miles the towne of Aden standeth by the hill called Darsira which men affirme to bee onely Cliffes of hard stones and red Marble where it neuer rayneth The people of this coast of Arabia are tawnie of colour almost like those of the coast of Abex or Melinde frō that Countrie they bring great numbers of good horses into India and also Frankensence Mirhe Balsam Balsam woode and fruite and some Manna with other swéete wares and Spices they hold the law of Mahomet after the Persians manner From the Cape of Rosalgate inwardes following the coast North-west to the Cape de Moncado in times past named Albora are 70. miles This point lyeth right against the Iland Ormus vnder 26. degrées There beginneth the entrance of the straights of Persia called Sinus Persicus and the Iland Ormus lyeth betwéene them both hauing on the one side Arabia and on the other side Northward the Countrie of Persia and is in breadth 20. miles From the Cape de Moncadon coasting the Arabian shore inwardes to the Iland of Barem are 80. miles and lyeth vnder 26. degrées a halfe There the Captaine of Ormus being a Portingal hath a factor for the King and there they fish for the best Pearles in all the East Indies and are the right orientall Pearle Coasting along this shore from Barem inwardes to the farthest and outermost corner of Persia or Sinus Persicus lyeth the towne of Balsora which are 60. miles this Towne lyeth vnder 30. degrées and a little about it the two ryuers Tigris and Euphrates do méete and ioyne in one and runne by Bassora into the aforesaide Sinus Persicus Thereabout do◠yet appeare the decayed buildings and auncient Ruines of old Babylon and as many learned men are of opinion thereabout stoode the earthly Paradice From the towne of Balsora the coast runneth againe Northward towards Ormus which is vnder the Dominion of the Persian this Sinus Persicus is about 40. miles broad not much more nor much lesse and hath diuers Ilands and in the mouth therof lyeth the rich Iland Ormus where the Portingales haue a Forte and dwell altogether in the I le among the naturall borne countrimen and haue a Captaine and other officers euery thrée yeares as they of Mossambique Chapter 6. Of the Iland and Towne of Ormus ORmus lyeth vpon the Iland Geru in times past called Ogyris and it is an Iland and a kingdom which the Portingales haue brought vnder their subiection whereas yet their King hath his residence that is to saye without the towne where the Portingales inhabite These people obserue Mahomets law and are white like the Persians And there they haue a common custome that he which is King doth presently cause al his brethren and his kinsmen of the Male kinde to haue their eyes put forth which done they are all richly kept and maintained during their liues for that there is a law in Ormus that no blinde man may bee their King nor Gouernour ouer them Therefore the King causeth them all to haue their eyes put out so to be more secure in their gouernmentes as also to auoide all strife and contention that might arise and to hold and maintaine their countrey in peace The Island is about thrée miles great very full of cliffes and rockes and altogether vnfruitfull It hath neyther gréene leafe nor hearbe in it nor any swéete water but onely rockes of salte stones whereof the walles of their houses are made it hath nothing of it selfe but only what it fetcheth from the firme lande on both sides as well out of Persia as from Arabia and from the Towne of Bassora but because of the situation and pleasantnes of the Iland there is al things therein to bee had in great abundance and greate traffique for that in it is the staple for all India Persia Arabia and Turkie and of all the places and Countries about the same commonly it is full of Persians Armenians Turkes and all nations as also Venetians which lie there to buy Spices and precious stones that in great abundance are brought
them withall which they call Catâ—auentos Cayrus hath very high houses with broad peint-houses to yeelde shadowe therby to auoide the heate of the Sunne in the middle of these houses are greate Pipes of ten cubites longe at the least which stand Northward to conuaye and spread the colde ayre into their houses specially to coole the lowest romes In winter time it is as colde with them as it is in Portingale the water that they drinke is brought from the firme land which they kéepe in great pots as the Tinaios in Spaine and in Cesternes whereof they haue verie great ones within the fortresse which water for a yeare or a yeare and a halfe against they shall neede like those of Mossambique They fetch water by the Iland of Barein in the Sea from vnder the salt water with instruments foure or fiue fadome déepe which is verie good and excellent sweete water as good as any fountaine water There is in Ormus a sickenesse or common Plague of Wormes which growe in their legges it is thought that they procéede of the water that they drink These wormes are like vnto Lute strings and about two or thrée fadomes longe which they must plucke out and winde them aboute a Straw or a Pin euerie day some part therof as longe as they féele them creepe and when they hold still letting it rest in that sort till the next daye they binde it fast and annoynt the hole and the swelling from whence it commeth foorth with fresh Butter and so in ten or twelue dayes they winde them out without any let in the meane time they must sit still with their legges for if it should breake they should not without great paine get it out of their legge as I haue séen some men doe Of these wormes Alsaharanius in his practise in the 11. Chapter writeth thus In some places there grow certaine Wormes betweene the skinne and the flesh which sicknesse is named the Oxen paine because the Oxen are manye times grieued therewith which stretch themselues in great length creepe vnder the skin so long till that they pearce it the healing thereof consisteth in purging the body of corrup fleame c. Reade further In my master the Archbishops house we had one of his seruants borne in Ormus newly come from thence which drewe thrée or The 8. Chapter Of the towne fortresse and Island of Diu in times past called Alambater THe Towne and Ilande of Diu lyeth distant from the ryuer Indo 70. miles vnder 21. degrées close to the firme land in times past it belonged to y e King of Cambaia in whose land and coast it lyeth where the Portingals by negligence of the Kinge haue built a fortresse in processe of time haue brought the Towne and the whole Iland vnder their subiection and haue made it very strong in a manner inuincible which fortresse hath béene twice besieged by souldiers of Cambaia and their assistants first in Anno 1539. and secondly in Anno 1546. and hath alwaies béene valiantly defended by the Portingals as their Chronicles rehearse This Towne hath a very great Hauen and great traffique although it hath verye little or nothing at all of it selfe more then the situation of the place for that it lyeth betwéen Sinde and Cambaia which Countries are abundant in all kind of things wherby Diu is alwaies ful of strange nations as Turks Persians Arabians Armenians and other countrie people and it is the best the most profitable reuenue the King hath throughout all India for that the Banianen Gusaratten Rumos and Persians which traffique in Cambaia from thence to Mecca or the red Sea doe commonly discharge their wares and take in their lading in Diu by reason of the situation thereof for that it lyeth in the entrance of Cambaia and from Diu it is shipped and sent to Cambaia and so brought backe againe to Diu. The Towne of Diu is inhabited by Portingals together with the natural borne Countrimen like Ormus and al the townes places holden by the Portingals in India yet they kéepe their fortresse strong vnto themselues This Iland aboundeth and is very fruitfull of all kind of victuals as Oxen Kine Hogges Shéepe Hennes Butter Milke Onions Garlicke Pease Beanes and such like whereof there is great plentie and that very good and such as better cannot be made in all these Low-countries but that the Fuell is not so well drest they haue likewise Chéeses but they are very drie and sault much Fish which they sault and it is almost like vnto salt Ling or Codde and of other sortes they make hanged flesh which is very good and will continue for a whole Viage of all these victuals and necessarie prouisions they haue so great quantity that they supply the want of all the places round about them especially Goa and Cochin for they haue neither Butter Onyons Garlicke Pease Oyle nor graine as Beanes Wheat or any séede they must all bee brought from other places thether as in the orderly description of the coast as it lyeth I will shew you what wares goods marchandises victuals fruites and other things each lande Prouince or Countrie yéeldeth and affordeth From Diu sayling along by the coast about fiftéene or sixtéene miles beginneth the mouth of the water that runneth to Cambaia which is at the entrie and all along the said water about 18. miles broade and 40. miles long and runneth in north-North-east and by North and at the farther ende of the water is the Towne of Cambaia whereof the whole Countrie beareth the name and lyeth vnder twentie thrée degrées there the King or Solden holdeth his Court. The 9. Chapter Of the kingdome and land of Cambaia THe land of Cambaia is the fruitfullest Countrie in all India and from thence prouision of necessaries is made for all places round about it whereby there is a greate traffique in the Towne as well of the inhabitants as other Indians and neighbors as also of Portingals Persians Arabians Armenians c. The King obserueth the law of Mahomet but most parte of the people that are dwellers and naturall borne Countrimen called Gusarates and Baneanem obserue Pythagoras law are the subtilest and pollitiquest Marchauntes of all India whose counterfets and shapes are placed in this booke by those of India with a description of their liuing ceremonies customes as in time and place shall be shewed This lande of Cambaia aboundeth in all kinde of victuals as Corne Rice and such like grain also of Butter and Oyle wherewith they furnish all the Countries round about them There is made great store of Cotton Linnen of diuers sorts which are called Cannequins Boffetas Iorims Chauâ—ares and Cotonias which are like Canuas thereof do make sayles and such like things and many other sortes that are very good and cheape They make some therof so fine that you can not perceyue the thréedes so that for finenesse it surpasseth any Holland cloth they make
harts hindes wild bores hayres coneys and such like in great abundance of all sorts of foules as peacoks hennes doues and such like and for oringes lemons and citrons it hath not onely the best in al India but better then any are found either in Spaine or Portingal to conclude it hath many and almost all things that are found in India through all the seuerall prouinces and places thereof it hath also manie Indian palme trees or nut trees which are called cocken and certane credible persons doe affirme which told it mée that in the same Iland are nutmegges Cloues and Pepper trées although there is no certaintie thereof for that as yet they haue not béene brought or vttered to sell among the Christians but the best Cinamon in all the east countries is there to be had where it groweth in whole woodes and from thence is dispersed into all places of the world The Captaine that kéepeth the fort is forced by stealth in the night time to issue forth fetch this Cinamon into his fort whereof he maketh his principal profite for much more profite hath he not This Iland hath likewise al kindes of precious stones except Diamonds but Saphires Rubies Topasâ—es Spâ—nelen â—ranaden Robâ—ssen c. the best in all the East it hath likewise a fishing for Pearles but yet they are not so good as those that are at Bareiin by Ormus it hath likewise mynes of Gold siluer and other metals The Kings of the Iland will not digge it forth but kéepe it for a great state honor I thinke rather it is but Latteâ— because no man ventureth for it it hath also yron Flaxe Brimstone and such like ware also many Iuorie banes and diuers Elephantes which are accounted for the best in all India and it is by daylie experience found to be true that the Elephantes of all other places and couÌ„tries being brought before them they honour and reuerence those Elephantes the natural borne people or Chingalas are very cunning workmen in Gold Siluer Iuory Yron and all kindes of metal that it is wonderful they are much estéemed for the same through al India and beare the name and prayse aboue all the rest of the Indians they make the fairest barrels for péeces that may be fouÌ„d in any place which shine as bright as if they were Siluer My maister the Archbishop had a crucifixe of Iuorie of an elle long presented vnto him by one of the inhabitants of the I le made by him so cunningly â—rkmanly wrought that in the hayre beard and face it séemed to be aliue in al other parts so neatly wrought and proportioned in limmes that the like can not be done in all Europe Whereupon my maister caused it to be put into a case and sent vnto the king of Spaine as a thing to be woÌ„dered at and worthy of so great a Lord to be kept among his costliest Iewels In such things they are very expert and wonderful and maruelous nimble and expert in iugling as well men as women and trauell throughout the countrie of India to get money carying hobbyhorses with theÌ„ very strange to behold And this shall suffice at this present for the description of the I le of Seylon now I will procéede to shewe you of the coast of Choramandel where wée left before being at the cape of Negapatan The 15. Chapter Of the coast of Choramandel and the kingdome of Narsinga or Bisnagar THe coast of Choramandel beginneth from the cape of Negapatan and so stretcheth North by East vnto a place called Musulepatan which is 90. miles and lieth vnder 16. degrées and a half Betwéene these two places vpon the same coast lyeth a place called S. Thomas vnder 13. degrées an halfe and is 40. miles distant from Negapatan This place and Negapatan are inhabited by the Portingales and in al the other places along the coast they haue traffique and dealiâ— The aforesaid place called S. Thomas was in time past a towne of great traffique and as then called by the name of Meliapor and belonged to the kingdome of Narsinga whose king is now commonly called king of Bisnagar which is the name of his chief Citie where he kéepeth his court This Towne lieth within the land and is nowe the chiefâ— cittie of Narsinga and of the coast of Choramandel The naturall countrimen are for manners customes ceremonies like those of Ballagate decaminâ— Canaras for they are al one people but only separate by seueral places kingdoms and y e better to vnderstand wherefore this place was named S. Thomas the Indians say that in the time when the Apostles were sent spread abroad to preach the Gospell of our sauiour Christ throughout the whole world that S. Thomas the apostle came into that kingdome of Narsinga after he had bene in diuers places of India teaching preaching the word of God vnto those Indians and vnbeleuing people but litle profited therein for so say the Christians that are come of those same Countriemen which S. Thomas conuerted and baptised in the faith of Christ whom the Portingals found there at such time as they entered into the country and yet find many of them obseruing the ceremonies of the Gréek Church in the Chaldean tong that by no meanes will ioine with the Portingales in their ceremonies but not long sithence at the time of my béeing in India there was one of their Bishops that by land trauelled to Rome and there submitted himself to the Romish Church yet obseruing and holding their ancient ceremonies and customes which by the Pope was still permitted vnto them and when my Lord the Archbishop held a prouinciall counsell within the citie of Goa where his suffraganes were assembled that is to say y e bishops of Cochin Malacca and China to authorize the same the aforesayd Bishop was likewise called thether who as then was newlie come from Rome being made an Archbishop and was personally in the counsell but would not in any sort consent vnto the altering or changing of anie points of his Religion or ceremonies from the suffraganes from his Christians which were commonly called S. Thomas Christians But returning to our matter they say that when S. Thomas had long preached and taught in the kingdome of Narsinga From Musulepatan the coast runneth again north-Northeast and by East to the kingdom of Bengalen which is 120. miles and it is the lande and kingdome of Orixa which stretcheth along the same coast vnto the Riuer of Ganges the beginning of the kingdom of Bengalen This coast of Narsinga Bisnagar and Orixa are by the Portingalles commonly called as also the coast of Negapatan and Saint Thomas Choramandel vntil you come to Bengalen where the Portingalles haue great traffique for that it is a very rich and plentiful Country of all things as Ryce and all manner of fowles and beasts in great abundance It is also a holesome countrey and a good ayre for strange nations for that
continually in the ayre without lighting on the earth for they haue neither féet nor wings but onely head and body and the most part tayle as appeareth by the birdes that are brought from thence into India and some from thence hether but not many for they are costlie I brought two of them with me for Doctor Paludanus which were male and female which I gaue vnto him for his chamber These Ilands lie among diuers other Ilands and because there is no speciall notice of them by reason of the small conuersation with them I let them passe and turne again vnto the coast of Malacca which I left at the Cape of Singapura and so will shewe the Coast along The 22. Chapter From the Cape Singapura to the towne of Sian and the coast of Cambaia and Cauchinchina and the Iles of Borneo Lusons Manillios or Philippinas FRom the Cape of Singapura to the hooke named Sinosura eastward are 18 miles 6 or 7 miles from thence lyeth a cliffe in y e sea called Pedra bianque or white Rock where the shippes that come and goe to and from China doe oftentymes passe in great danger and some are left vpon it whereby the Pylots when they come thether are in great feare for that other way then this they haue not From this hook Sinosura East by South 40. miles beginneth the first corner of the Island Borneo vnder one degrée in y e North and stretcheth 120. myles North east till you be vnder 7. degrées the breadth as yet is not knowne nor discouered This Isle is full of trées from whence Camfora is taken and is the best in all the East countries From Sinosura the coast reacheth North 30. miles to the towne of Pan which lyeth vnder thrée degrées and a halfe ten miles further by the same câ—urse the coast runneth againe North Northwest for 50. miles where the towne of Patane lyeth vnder 7. degrees and a halfe These two towns Pan and Patane are kingdomes but contributarie to Sian From these places comes the wood called Pala Dagula and the costly swéet woode called Calamba which being good is waid against Siluer and Gold they also haue Camphora but not so good as that of the Island Borneo There is founde some gold and the stone called Bezars stone which is very costly and proued to be good against poyson There are likewise some Diamants and also Nutmegs and flowers and the wood Sapon whereof also much is brought from Sian it is like Brasill to die withall From Patane 120. myles North the coast runneth backe againe vnto Sian which lyeth vnder 14. degrées and a halfe from Sian from the turning in South west 15. myles The coast runneth again south east 70. miles to the towne of Cambaia this towne lyeth vnder 10. degrées From thence the coast runneth againe north-Northeast 60. miles and 60. miles Northwest froÌ„ whence it runneth West North west to the furthest parte inwarde of the créeke of Cuchinchina This coast of Cambaia is also called the coast of ChaÌ„paa this land hath much of y e swéet wood Calamba Through this kingdome runneth the riuer Mecom into the sea which the Indians name Captaine of all the Riuers for it hath so much water in the Summer that it couereth and watereth all the countrey as the riuer Nilus doth the countrey of Aegypt The people of Cambaia beléeue that all creatures both men and beastes of what sort soeuer they be do here receyue reward for their worke whether it be good or bad Vpwards in the land behind Cambaia and Sian are many seuerall nations as Laos which are a great and a mightie people others named Auas and Bramas which dwel by the hilles others that dwell vpon the hils called Gueos which liue like wild men and eat mans flesh and marke all their bodies with hote iron which they estéeme a fréedome These countreymen are such as are knowne besides diuers others that are vnknowne From the coast of Cambaia or Champaa East or to seaward about 100. myles little more or lesse lie y e Islands called the Lussons or Lussones which were first discouered by the Spaniardes out of newe Spaigne in an 1564. and were called also las Manillas or Philippinas because the principallest Hauen and Towne is called Manillia and of others Lusson whereof also they are named the Lâ—ssons and the Spaniardes gaue them the name of the King of Spaine calling them y e Philippinas This towne of Lusson or Manillia lyeth vnder 14 degrées by this towne and Iland of Lusson lie a great number of Ilands which are all called the Manillians Lussons or Philippinas and are all at the commandement of the Spaniardes whose Gouernour or Captaine lyeth in the towne of Manillia or Lusson who was sent thether out of Noua Spaigne in the behalfe of the king of Spaine and also a Bishop as head ouer all the rest All these Ilands haue in time past béene vnder the crown of China and vpon some occasion left it whereby there was no policie nor gouernment among the Inhabitants of the same for that he that was the richest and of most power amongst them was maister and liued together like beastes whereby the Spaniardes had 〈◊〉 small labor to subdue them whereof manie they baptised and made them Christians which euerie day increased it is a very fruitful land and hath much corne and al sorts of wilde beastes as harts hyndâ— such like also cattle as buffels oxen kyne hogges goates c. they haue manie muske cattes all kinde of fruites as in China abundance of hony and fish it is said also that there is all kindes of spices but as yet there is no certaintie thereof but onely that the Spaniardes giue it forth so but you must thinke they doe it because they wil extol and set forth their things aboue all others as their maÌ„ner is Those of China trafficke with these IlaÌ„ds and bring thether all sortes of commodities out of their country as al silkes cottons porselynes powder for shot sulphur brimstone yron stéele quicke siluer and other metals coper meal nuttes chasnuttes bisquit dates al sorts of lynnen cloth deskes and such like and of all curious things that may be found there cometh froÌ„ China thether euery year at least 20 shippes and from thence is their marchandise by the Spaniardes shipped and sent into newe Spaine to Mexico which countrie of Spaine The land by meanes of y e good ayre and temperatenes therof is fo fruitfull that al things are there to be had in great abundance as Corne Rice and other such like graine or séedes and is both sowen and mowed continually al the yeare long Within the land ther are some Elephants Lyons Tygers and such cruell beastes There are also many beasts of Moseliaet that is to say Muske Cattes which are of the bignesse and likenesse of a little Dogge which they kill and burie for certaine daies and being rotten and well brused with blowes whereby the
Caetes so that â— Picos which is a Bhar are 200. Caetes as well great as small waight a Bhar of China is 300. Caetes which waigh as much as 200. Caetes at Malacca small waight for that three Caetes of China are in Malacca two Caetes small waight a Caete of China is 16. Taeys Chinish waight which are 14. Taeys in Malacca which is as much as 20. Ounces â— Portingall waight They vse likewise a waight which they cal a Hant euery Hant is twelue Caetes smal waight and euery Caete is 22. Taeyes and 16. Hantes and 8. Caetes are iust 200. Caetes which is a Bhar of small waight so likewise a Tael of Malacca is 16. Mases and 10. Mases and ¼ is an Ounce of Portingall waight and an Ounce and a halfe is iust 16. Mases and the eight part of a Mase by these Mases they sel the Bezars stones for euery Mase two or thrée Ducats according to their greatnesse and goodnesse In Malacca are two sortes of waights great and small which heereafter follow A Bhar great waight is 200. Cates and one Cates 26. Taeys and one Taey is one Ounce ½ hard waight of Portingall the small waight is a Bhar which is also 200. Caetes and one Caetes is 22. Taeys and a â—ael is a full Ounce and a halfe Portingal waight With their great waight they weigh Pâ—per Cloues Nutmegs Folio red white Sanders Indico Alum Sanguis draconis Palo Dauguila Siet and Sapon With the small waight they waigh Quicksiluer Vermilion Coper Blie Iuorie bones Silk Muske Amber Calamba or Lignum Aloes Tin Lead Lancua Oyle of Nutmegs and of flowers Verdette Rosamallia Besoun and Camphora c. The marchandises that the Portingals carrie to China whereof they make most profite is Ryals of eight which in China are worth aboue six testones not for that they had rather haue it then other Siluer but for that it is all Siluer for it is presently cut in péeces to pay it out after their manner as it is shewed before they carrie likewise some Wines both Portingal and Indian Wine and some Oyles of Oliues which are there desired Veluet Cloth of Scarlet whereof they haue none nor yet can make any although they haue both sheepe and wooll enough Looking glasses Iuorie bones and all kinde of Christall and Glasse are well solde there But this shall suffice for that which concerneth the land of China now I will procéede to the description of the Iland of Iapan which is the farthest Viage and last Orientall place by the Portingals discouered or at this day knowne The 26. Chapter Of the Iland of Iapan THe Iland or the land of Iapan is many Ilands one by the other and are seperated and deuided only by certaine small Créekes and riuers it is a great land although as yet the circuite thereof is not knowne because as yet it is not discouered nor by the Portingalles sought into it beginneth vnder 30. degrées and runneth till you come to 38 degrées it lyeth East from the firme land of China about 80. miles and from Maccau by the waye that the Portingalles trauaile north-Northeast warde is about 300. miles and the Hauen where commonly the Portingals vse to traffique is called Nangasache They haue likewise other places where they traffique and deale The countrie is cold procéeding of much rayne Snow and Ice that falleth therein it hath some Corne lande but their common Corne is Ryce In some places the land is verie hillie and vnfruitfull they eate no flesh but the flesh of wilde beasts and such as is hunted wherein they are verie expert although there are Oxen Cowes Sheepe and such like Cattell good store yet they vse them to other things about their labours and because it is tame flesh which they cannot brooke they refuse it as wee doe horse flesh they doe likewise refuse to eate Milke as wee doe bloud saying that Milke although it is white yet it is verie bloude They haue much Fish whereof they are verie desirous as also all kinds of fruites as in China Their houses are commonly couered with wood and with strawe they are 〈◊〉 and workmanlike builte specially the rich mens houses they haue their Chambers hanged and flowred with Mattes which is their best hangings The Iapens are not so curious nor so cleanly as the men of China but are contente with a meane yet for the most part they goe verie well apparelled in Silke almost like the Chinos The countrie hath some mines of siluer which from thence is by the Portingals yearely brought vnto China and there bartered for Silke and other Chinish wares which the Iapeans haue néede of The countriemen are verie skilfull to search for Siluer and to sell their wares They haue among them verie good handicrafts men and cunning workemen in all kind of handie workes they are sharpe witted and quickly learne any thing they sée as by experience it is found in those parts which the Portingales haue discouered The common people of the lande are much different froÌ„ other nations for that they haue among them as great curtesie and good policie as if they had liued continually in the Court they are verie expert in their weapons as néed requireth although they haue little cause to vse them for that if anye of them beginneth to brawle or to drawe his sworde hee is put to death they haue not any prisons for that who soeuer deserueth to be imprisoned is presently punished or banished the countrie When they meane to lay holde vpon a man they must doe it by stealth and by deceipt for otherwise he would resist and doe much mischiefe If it bee any Gentleman or man of great authoritie they beset his house about with men and whether hee chaunce to slay himselfe or not they enter the house by force and kill al they find therin Which to auoid he suffereth himself often times to be killed by his seruantes And it is often séene that they rip their own bellies open which often times is likewise done by their seruants for the loue of their Masters therein to shew their Masters the loue they beare vnto them so little estéeming their owne liues to pleasure and serue them The like doe young Boyes in presence of their parents onely for griefe or some small anger They are in all their actions very patient and humble for that in their youthes they learne to indure hunger colde and all manner of labour to goe bare headed with few cloathes as well in Winter as in Summer and not onely the common people but the principall Gentlemen and Nobles of the countrie They account it for great beautie to haue no haire which with great care they doe plucke out onely keepe a bunch of haire on the crowne of their heades which they tie together Touching their traffique manners speach and all their ceremonies concerning life and curtesie they are cleane contrarie vnto all other nations speciallie from those of China and till this day obserue
they know full well howe to bring to passe for that there is not any thing from whence they will not sucke or draw out some profit or aduantage or else they haue the slight and cunning how to get it as well from the King and from other Noblemen and estates as also from the common people it séemeth in a manner that they bewitch men with their subtill practises and deuises and are so wel practised and experimented in trade of marchandises that they surpasse all worldly men To conclude there is not any commoditie to be had or reaped thoroughout all India but they haue their part therein so that the other orders and Religious persons as also the common people doe much murmur thereat and séeme to dislike of their couetous humors A little beyond Iapon vnder 34. and 35. degrées not farre from the coast of China lyeth an other great Iland called Insula de Core whereof as yet there is no certaine knowledge neither of the greatnesse of the countrie people nor wares that are there to be found From Makau East Northeast distant aboue 90. miles lye certaine Ilandes called Lequeo Pequeno or little Lequeo and lye about 20. miles distant from the firme land of China and 90. miles farther in the same course lye other Ilands called Lequeo Maior or great Lequeo All these Ilandes are trauelled vnto and inhabited by those of China whereof we will now cease to speake till an other time hauing particularly made a briefe discourse in an other place of all their manners customes wares and marchandises according to the truest instructions I could find and so will returne againe to the description of Goa together with the places bordering about the same The 27. Chapter A short relation of the land lying behind Goa in the iurisdiction whereof lyeth the said towne of Goa and of the Originall of their Kings and Gouernours with their names by true information giuen by the inhabitants themselues together with their Histories BEfore I begin to write of the towne and Ilande of Goa with the coastes superstitions and other customes of the countrie lying behinde and rounde about Goa as well where the Portingales inhabit as where the natiue countrie men are resident I thought it conuenient to begin with the same somwhat further off then at the present time the better to vnderstand the originall of the people together with the principall causes of the diuisions of the same countries and nations as also their Kings names and surnames Then you must vnderstand that about 300. yeares past there was a mightie King of the countrie of Deli which lyeth within the land behind Goa on the Northside and bordereth vpon the land of Coracone belonging to the King of Persia wherein are made the rich Couerlets and hangings by the Portingales called Alcatyffas which land of Deli is verie colde and hath Snow and Ice in it like the Netherlands This king of Deli brought vnder his subiection all the countries bordering about him among the which were Decam Cuncam Ballagate and the lande of Goa At the same time the countrie of Cambaia which is distant from Goa about 100. miles Northward was ouerrunne and taken fâ—rcibly by the Moores Mahometans and brought the naturall countrimen called Reysbutos being heathens with great tyranie vnder their subiection The land of Ballagate and Decam was before inhabited by heathens that were verie mightie and of great power whose successors are now called Venesares and others that yet dwell within the countrie called Colles which Colles Venesares and Reysbutos of Cambaia doe yet liue by robbing and stealing and those of Cambaia pay tribute to the saide Reysbutos because they should not robbe and spoyle them but suffer them to liue in peace The Colles and Venesares also receiue tribute of the men of Decam and Ballagate for that the Kings could neuer as yet ouercome them although they make no shew thereof but still dissemble with them for that of what soeuer they robbe and steale they haue their parts After this King of Deli had brought all these kingdomes and countries vnder his subiection then came the Tartarians which the Indians call Mogoren and ouercame most part of the countrie of Deli. At the same time there dwelt in the kingdome of Bengalen a Noble Gentleman whose brother the King of Bengallen had wrongfully put to death whereby this Gentleman sought and deuised all the meanes hee could to bee reuenged and did not onely bring it to passe by bereauing the King of his life but also tooke the whole kingdome from him and brought it vnder his subiection and being in this sorte become absolute Lord and King of Bengalla was not therewith content but desiring to augment his kingdome and thereby to win great fame did inuade the countrie of Deli bordering vpon him with a great armie of men and by force draue the Tartarians or Mogoros out of the countrie and so conquered both that lande and all the countries bordering thereabouts as Decam Ballagate and Cuncam as farre as to the kingdome of Cambaia and for a time was the greatest Prince in all those quarters For the Indians affirme that hee had in Compasse vnder his subiection aboue 800. miles of land This King raigning for a time ouer al these lands and countries in the end desiring to liue quietly and to returne vnto his kingdom of Bengala thinking it too troublesome for him to rule so great a countrie did inuest one of his cosins with the countries of Decam Ballagate and Cuncam with the land of Goa and the countries bordering about the same which done he returned into his land of Bengala leauing his saide cosin King and commander of the aforesaid countries This man was alwaies a great friende and wel-willer to strange nations as Arabians Turkes Ruynes and Corasones parted his countries among Gouernours and Captaines to on whereof beeing called Idalham whome the Portingales call Hidalcam he gaue the Gouernment of Angedina which lyeth 12. miles from Goa Southwards stretching towards the North till you come to a place called Siffardan which are 60. miles wherein is contained the towne and Iland of Goa to an other Captaine called Nisa Maluco hee gaue the coast of Siffardan stretching Northwards to Negotana which are 20. miles and lyeth inwards to the land of Cambaia so that those two Captaines had their gouernments in the countrie of Cuncam which lyeth on the Sea coast and seperateth it selfe from the land of Decam by great and high hils called Guate These hils are verie high and haue many corners and hookes of land and doe stretch towardes Cambaia to the Cape de Comorin and from thence backe againe to the coast of Choramandel The hill of Guate is so high that men may easily sée it within Goa and all the coast along though commonly it is couered with clouds and it is the more to bee wondred at for this respect because all other hils are vneuen high and low
and Salsette are by the Kings of Portingale let out to farme and the rents therof are imployed to the payment of the Archbishop Cloysters Priests Viceroy other the Kings Officers yearely stipends which is graunted them by speciall Priueledges and Patents from the King The Iland is verie hillie and in some places so desert and rough that on some sides men can hardly trauell ouer land but with great labour to the towne of Goa the Iland euen to the Sea side is full of Villages and inhabited by the Canarijus which are the naturall borne people of the land and doe altogether liue by working vpon the land and by their Palme trees The villages and dwellings of these Canarijus are most rounde about the Iland and on the water sides or by small Lakes whereof there are some fewe within the Iland and the cause why they dwell thus is for that the Palme trées will not grow in any other place but vpon low ground by the waters specially in sandie ground so that there are no Palme trées to be found on the high land within the countrie vnlesse it bee vpon sandie groundes on the Sea coast or ryuers sides On the East side of the towne of Goa vpwardes into the ryuer about thrée miles from the towne of Bardes lyeth a place wher the Portingals ships doe Anker the ryuer hath some créekes and a ship of 200. Tunnes or there abouts may easily discharge before the Towne but the Portingales great ships must discharge them selues at Bardes which being done they may i◠they will fréely goe and lie before the town The towne is well builte with faire houses and stréetes after the Portingall manner but because of the heate they are somewhat lower They commonly haue their Gardens and Orchards at the backe side of their houses full of all kinde of Indian fruites as also the whole Iland through they haue many pleasant Gardens and farmes with houses to play in and trées of Indian fruites whether they goe to sport themselues and wherein the Indian women take great delight The towne hath in it all sortes of Cloysters and Churches as Lisbone hath onely it wanteth Nunnes for the men cannot get the women to trauell so farre where they should be shut vp and forsake Venus with whome so that they may enioy and fulfill their lustes they had rather loose their liues whereof they make small account The Iland is both winter and Summer all alike gréene and hath alwaies some kinde of fruite in season which is a great pleasure the towne lyeth vppon some hils and dales like Lisbone it hath in times past béene verie small and walled with a drie Ditch round about it wherein there is no water but when it rayneth the walles are yet standing but no Gates remaining and the towne is now built round about with houses so that it is at the least twice as big without the walles as it is within and lyeth open without walles or closures sauing onely that the Iland hath a wal on the East side which beginneth ouer against the land of Salsette and so runneth along vntill you come at Bardes and is onely to defend them from the firme land where the Portingales haue no commaundement The whole Iland hath no other defence but onely vpon the corner of the land of Bardes at the mouth of the ryuer where there standeth an olde ruinous Castle wherein lyeth two or thrée Iron péeces and one man that in the night time kéepeth the watch the Iland on the Sea side is verie high full of stonie Cliffes but the land of Bardes hath on the Sea side a verie faire white Sand about halfe a mile long and somewhat more the defence of the Ilande consisteth herein that on the East side there are thrée or foure passages or Gates that stand vpon the water side on the vttermost part of the Iland right against the firme land Salsette and Bardes euerie gate or passage hath a Captaine and a clarke which kéepe watch that no man may passe into the other side but by their licence And the Indians Decanijus and other Moores and heathens that are resident in Goa and therein haue their habitation when they goe into the firme land to fetch their necessarie prouisions comming to those places which are called Passos they must euerye man haue a marke which is Printed on their naked armes and so they passe ouer to the other side and at their returne againe they must shew the same marke whereby they may fréely enter for the which they pay two Basarukes which is as much as a Hollanders Doit and this is the profit that the Captain and Clarke of the said Passos doe make In the night they haue a Boy that kéepeth watch and hath a small Bell which hangeth ouer the gate which Boylyeth downe and tieth the string of the Bell at his foote and so ringeth it often times to shew that hee watcheth which is all the watch they hold thoroughout the whole Iland There are fiue of these Passos one vpon the South side of the Iland where men passe to the firme lande and to the land of Salsette and is called Benesterijn commonly named Passo de Saint Iago because the Parish of Saint Iacobs standeth ther The Tebe de Passo is on the East side of the Iland where men doe onely passe into The firme land called O Passo Secco which is the drie passage for in that place the ryuer is at the narrowest and shallowest The third Passo on the South side of the Iland ioyneth almost to the Towne called O Passo de Daugijn or of Madre de Deus and so farre goeth the wall beginning at Passo de Benesterijn or S. Iago and from thence the whole Iland is without any wall or closure from this Passo right ouer against it they passe ouer to an Iland which is hard by the firme land where is also a Passo called O Passo de Norwa the fift or last Passo lyeth in the middle way of the Riuer downwards towards Bardes which is the strongest of them all and best looked vnto but no otherwise made then all the rest is called O Passo de Pangijn frō thence they passe to Bardes and also all the boates and ships that passe in and out of the riuer must stay there be searched and this is all their watch and strentgh in the Iland Touching the Portingales iustice and ordinances as well in worldly as spirituall causes they are al one as they are in Portingale They dwell in the towne among all sorts of nations as Indians Heathens Moores Iewes Armenians Gusarates Benianes Bramenes and of all Indian nations and people which doe all dwell and traficke therein euerie man holding his owne religion without constrayning any man to doe against his conscience onely touching their ceremonies of burning the dead and the liuing of marrying other superstitious deuelish inuentions they are forbidden by the Archbishop to vse them openly or in the
verie cunning and naturally subtill There are in the same steéet on the other side that haue all kindes of linnen and shirts with other clothes ready made for all sortes of persons as well slaues as Portingales and of all other linnen worke that may bee desired There are Heathens that sell all kindes of womens clothes and such like wares with a thousand sorts of clothes and cottons which are like Canuas for sayles and sackes There is also another street where the Benianes of Cambaia dwell that haue all kinds of wares out of Cambaia and all sortes of precious stones and are verie subtill and cunning to bore and make holes in all kinds of stones pearles and corrals on the other side of the same street dwell other heathens which sell all sortes of bedstéedes stooles and such like stuffe very cunningly couered ouer with Lacke most pleasant to behold and they can turne the Lacke into any colour that you wil desire There is also a stréet full of gold and Siluer Smithes that are Heathens which make all kinde of workes also diuers other handicrafts men as Coppersmithes Carpenters and such like occupations which are all heathens and euery one a stréet by themselues There are likewise other Marchantes that deale all by great with Corne Rice and other Indian wares and Marchandises as wood and such like Some of them farme the kinges rents and reuenewes so that they are skilfull euery way to make their profites There are also many Heathen Brokers very cunning and subtill in buying and selling and with their tongues to pleade on both sides The Heathens haue likewise their shops with all kinde of spices which they sell by retaile both by waight and measure as Grocers and Potticaries doe with vs and this is onely vsed among them They haue likewise of al sorts of wares whatsoeuer but yet with lesse curiositie then with vs for it is mingled with dust and garbish These are commonlie the Brainenes which serue likewise for Priestes and Idolatrous Ministers haue their shops throughout the Cittie In euerie place and corner and vnder pentises whereby euery man may haue to serue him at his néed There are likewise many barbers which in euery end of the streetes doe call to those that haue cause to vse them They kéepe no shoppes but for a small peece of money come In the Month of September when winter endeth the bankes of sand doe fléete and vade away out of the Riuer so that not onely smal shippes may come in and go out but also the great Portingall ships of 1600. tunnes may fréely enter without a Pilot for it is déepe enough and without daunger In winter it is a heauie and melancholike being there for there is no other exercise to be vsed but onely to sitte in their shirtes with a paire of linâ—en bréeches and goe passe the time away with their neighbours in playing and such exercises for that throughout the whole town there is no other doing The women and Mesticos take great pleasure in the winter time when it rayneth with their husbandes and slaues to go into the fieldes or some garden whether they carry good store of victuailes there in their gardens haue many Cesternes or pondes of water wherein they take their delightes to swimme and to bath themselues In this time most of their Indian fruit is in season The summer beginneth in September and continueth till the last of Aprill and is alwaies clear sky fair weather without once or very little raining Then all the ships are rigged and made ready to saile for all places as also the Kinges armie to kéepe the coast and to conuoy Marchantes and then the East winds beginne to blow from off the lande into the seas whereby they are called Terreinhos that is to say the land windes They blow very pleasantly coolly although at the first by chaunging of the weather they are very dangerous cause many great diseases which do commonly fall in India by y e chaunging of the time These winds blow alwaies in summer beginning at midnight and continue till noone but they neuer blowe aboue tenne miles into the sea from off the coast and presently after one of the clocke vntill midnight the west winde bloweth which commeth out of the sea into the lande and is called Vâ—rason These winds are so sure and certaine at their times as though men helde them in their handes whereby they make the land very temperate otherwise the heate would bee vnmeasurable It is likewise a strange thing that when it is winter vpon the coast of India that is from Diâ— to the Cape de Comorin on the other side of the Cape de Comorin on the coast called Choramandel it is cleane contrarie so that there it is summer and yet they lye all vnder one height or degrées and there is but 70. miles by land betwéene both the coasts and in some places but 2â— miles and which is more as men trauel ouer land from Cochin to S. Thomas which lyeth on the same coast of Choramandel and comming by the hill of Ballagatte where men must passe ouer to goe from the one coast vnto the other on the one side of the hil to the top thereof it is pleasant clear sunne shining weather and going downe on the other side there is rayne winde thunder and lightning as if the worlde should end and be consumed which is to be vnderstood that it chaungeth from the one side to the other as the time falleth out so that on the one side of the hilles it is Winter and on the other side Summer and it is not onely so in that place and countrey but also at Ormus on the coast of Arabia Felix by the Cape of Rosalgatte where the shippes lie it is very still cleare and pleasant water and faire summer time and turning about the Cape on the other side it is raine and wind with great stormes and tempests which with the times of the yeare doe likewise change on the other side and so it is in many places of the Orientall countries The sicknesses and diseases in Goa and throughout India which are common come most with the changing of the times and the weather as it is said before there raigneth a sicknesse called Mordexim which stealeth vppon men and handleth them in such sorte that it weakeneth a man and maketh him cast out all that he hath in his bodie and many times his life withall This sicknesse is very common killeth many a man whereof they hardly or neuer escape The bloody Flixe is there likewise very common and daungerous as the plague with vs. They haue many continuall feuers which are burning agues and consume mens bodies with extreame heate whereby within foure or fiue dayes they are eyther whole or dead This sicknes is common and very daungerous hath no remedie for the Portingalles but letting of blood but the Indians and heathens do cure themselues with hearbes Sanders
the South vnder seuen de grées and from that time forwards we saw her no more but onely the tokens of y e casting of her away about the Cape de bona Speranza which after being at the Island of S. Helena was tolde vs more at large The same day we had a great storme of wind and raine so that the Ruther of our great maste by force of the Sea was broken And from the line we had a North and northwest wind with continuall raynes stormes and fowle weather neuer ceasing vntill wee came vnder 20. degrees which was vpon the 25. of Februarie and then wee had a Southeast wind with fayrer weather called by the Portingalles the generall wind which they commonly finde and looke for vnder 12. degrees but we had it not before we were vnder â—0 degrees the cause whereof wee thought to be for that we had put so farre into the sea out of the common way This wind commonly holdeth vnto 27. or 28. degrées little more or lesse and then they must looke for all kindes of windes and weathers vntill they come to the Cape de bona Speranza without any certainty of winds The 5. of March being vnder 25 degrées we had an East winde with a most great storme and exceeding raine so that our Ruther-staffe brake and two more that we had in the shippe one after the other being put vnto it broke likewise with the pinne and y e ioynt wherein the ende of the Ruther hung and we were forced to lie and driue without steering hauing stricken all our sayles and the shippe so toised by the waues on all sides that wee had not one drie place in all the ship In this sort wee lay driuing for the space of two dayes and two nights together with a continuall storme and fowle weather with rayne The same night we saw vppon the maine yarde and in many other places a certaine signe which the Portingalles call Corpo Santo or the holy body of brother Peter Gonsalueâ— but the Spaniards call it S. Elmo and the Greekes as ancient writers rehearse and Ouid among the rest vsed to call it Helle and Phryxus Whensoeuer that signe sheweth vpon the Maste or maine yarde or in any other place it is commonly thought that it is a signe of better weather when they first perceiue it the maister or the chiefe boteswaine whistleth and commaundeth euery man to salute it with a Salue corpo Santo and a misâ—ricordia with a very great cry and exclamation This constellation as Astronomers do write is ingendred of great moysture and vapors and sheweth like a candle that burneth dimly and skippeth from one place to another neuer lying still We saw fiue of them together all like the light of a candle which made mee wonder and I should haue hardly beleeued it but that I saw it and looked verie earnestly vpon it and although it was fowle weather whereby I had no great leasure to think vpon such curious thinges notwithstanding I came purposely from vnder the hatches to note it Those fiue lights the Portingals cal Coroa de nossa Seâ—liora that is deere Ladies Crowne and haue great hope therein when they see it And therewithall our men being all in great feare and heauines and almost out of hope began againe to reuiue and to be glad as if thereby they had beene fully assured of better comfort The seuenth of March wee had better weather and then we tooke counsell how to mend our Ruther some were of opinion we shoulde saile to Mosambique and rule the Ruther with a rope others were of contrary opinion and said we might mend it abord and so performe our voyage so that at the last we pulled certaine péeces out of the ships side for we had not brought one with vs as néede required but being pulled forth they were all too little and woulde not serue In the ende wee sound it conuenient to take one of the bosses in our shippe and thereof to make an Anuile and of two Oâ—e hydes a payre of bellowes wherewith wee went to worke and of a péece of an olde hooke or dragge wee tooke two or three ends whereof but one woulde serue and that halfe broken and the splinters wee bounde with an Iron hoope and so being fitter to the Ruther wee set forwards in the name of God This asked vs two dayes worke before wee could dispatch it theÌ„ we hoysed sayle again with great ioy gaue diuers almes to our Lady and the Saintes wâ—th many promises of better life as being in misery mâ—n commonly do The day after we tooke the height of the Sunne and found our selues to be vnder 28. degrees and two thirdes being in the height of the land called â—erra Dâ—natal although wee were at the least â—â—â— miles to seaward from the lande and there wee had good weather with a Southeast winde In this countrey called â—erra Doâ—â—â—aâ— which reacheth to 3â— degreesâ— and at the Cape de bona Spâ—â—anza and is the hardest passage that is in all the voyage and oftentimes they feare the land of Natal more thâ—n â—he â—ape for there commonly is stormy and fowle weather and many shippes haue â—eene spoyled and cast away as the Portingalles recordes can verie well shew In the same countrey also wee founde the signes of the casting away of the S. Thomas so that to to conclude commonly the shippes doe there pay tribute by casting some lading ouer bord or else leaue body and all behind and therefore it is called Terra Donatal that is to say the lande of Christmasse and for this cause they neuer passe it without great feare but with good watch and great foresight all their ropes being stiffe and well looked vnto the peeces drawne in and all chestes pottes fattes and other roomage that are not stowed vnder hatches being throwne ouer borde into the sea and euery thing setled and made ready in his place for that in this coast they haue one houre fayre weather and another houre stormie weather in such manner as if heauen and earth should waste and be consumed In that place likewise with a cleare and fayre weather there commeth a certayne cloude which in shew séemeth no bigger then a mans fist and therefore by the Portingals it is called Oâ—ho de Boy or Oxe eye and although as then it is cleare and calme weather and that the sailes for want of wind do beate against the mastes yet as soone as they perceyue that cloude they must presently strike all their sayles for that commonly it is vpon the ships before they perceyue it and with such a storme and noyse that without al doubt it would strike a shippe into the water if there be not great care had to looke vnto it as it chaunced to the second fléete after the Portingalles had discouered the Indieâ— there being ten or twelue shippes in company which in such a calme and fayre weather let all their sailes hang and regarded them not and
vsed by them but are rather kept short so that not one soldier dareth goe out of the towne without licence and therefore men may quyetlie trauell throughout the Iland both day and night without any trouble Likewise they will not suffer any stranger to trauel to sée the Country and this order was not brought vp by the Spaniards but by the Portingals themselues before their troubles for they would neuer permit it and which is more all strangers that came thether were vsually appointed a certain street wherin they should sel their wares and might not goe out of that stréet Now it is not so straightlie looked vnto but they may goe in all places of the towne within the Iland but not about it to view the coast which notwithstanding was graunted vnto vs by the Gouernor himself who lent vs his horses to ryde about and gaue vs leaue to sée all the fortes which at this time is not permitted to the naturall borne Ilanders neyther are they so much credited We road twice about the Iland which he granted vs leaue to doe by meanes of certaine particular friendship we had with him neyther could the Portingales hinder vs therein because wee were in the Kinges seruice as Factors for the Kinges Pepper and for that they held and accounted vs as naturall borne Portingalles for the Gouernor would willinglie haue had mee to haue drawne a plot of the whole Iland that hee might haue sent it to the King wherein I excused my self yet I made him the town with the Hauen coming in and Fortes of Angra which he sent vnto the King the like whereof you may in this Booke behold for the which the Gouernor was greatlie affected vnto mee and shewed mee much friendshippe Wee had in our Lodging a French Marchant and a Scot that willinglie would haue gone with vs to sée the Iland but could not be suffered for the Portingalles thinke that they would take the proportion thereof and so seeke to defeate them of their right But returning to our matter the Ilandes are verie good and holesome ayre and the diseases that are most common in those Countries though not verie plentiful but only here there one are one sicknes called O Ax that is a kind of bad ayre y t taketh them maketh them altogether lame or half lame of their limmes or of some one limme and an other sicknes that is called O Sange that is a certaine blood that hastelie cometh vppon a man as a swelling in the eyes or other places of the face or of the bodie is as red as blood for as they say it is nothing els but méere blood these are two diseases like the plague and are commonest sicknesses in those Countries which grow by reason of the great windines of the Ilandes that are subiect to all stormes and foule weathers and are vnreasonable moyst which is one of the principall causes of these diseases for the windes are there so strong and dangerous that they consume both the Iron and the Steele of their houses and bring them into powder for I haue seene Iron grates in the Kings Custome house as thicke as a mans arme and the windowes of hard free stone which were so consumed by the wind that the Iron in some places was become as thynne as a straw and the stone in like sort and therefore in those Countries they vse to make their Rooffes and painthouses of stones which they digge in the water out of sandes vppon the Sea coast of those Illandes whereon the wind hath not so great a power to consume it and yet that Custome house had not bene made aboue 6 or 7 yeares before at the most In this Iland besides the two townes there are diuers great villages as S. Sebastians S. Barboran Altares Gualua Villa noua with manie other parishes and hamlets so that for the most part it is built and inhabited sauing onely the places that are wild and full of woods which can hardlie bee trauelled much lesse inhabited Their most traffique is as I said before the wood that groweth in those countries I meane for such as deale in marchandise and the workemen that make it but the rest waight for the fleets that come and goe to and from the Spanish and Portingall Indies from Brasilia Cabo Verde and Guinea all which countries doe commonly come vnto Tercera to refresh themselues as lying very fitly for that purpose so that all the inhabitants doe thereby richlie maintaine themselues and sell at their wares as well handie works as victuals vnto those shippes and all the Ilandes round about doe as then come vnto Tercera with their wares to sell it there For the which cause the English men and other strangers keepe continually about those Ilandes béeing assured that all shippes for want of refreshing must of force put into those Ilandes although at this time manie shippes doe auoid those Ilandes to the great discommoditie of the Ilands and the shippes From Tercera Southeast about 27. or 28. miles lyeth the Iland of S. Michael which is about 20 myles long and is likewise full of Townes and Villages inhabited by Portingalles for ayre and all other thinges like vnto Tercera The chief Towne is called Punta del Gada where there is great traffique of English Scots and French men onlie as in Tercera because of the woad which is more abundant in that Ilande then in all the rest of them for that euerie yeare there is made aboue two hundreth thousand Quintalles of Woad It hath likewise great abundance of Corne so that they helpe to victuall all the Ilandes that are round about them It hath neither Hauens nor Riuers but onlie the broad sea and haue lesse safegard and defence then those which are of Tercera but there they ly not vnder the commandement of any Fort so that many set sayle with all the windes and put to sea which in the road of Tercera they may not doe and therefore the strangers shippes had rather sayle to S. Michaels for there they can not be constrayned to doe anie thing but what they will themselues to doe There is also a company of Spaniards in a Castle that standeth by the Towne of Punta del Gada which is made by the Spaniards for the defence and maintenance of the same towne From the Iland of S. Michaels Southwardes twelue myles lyeth the Island Santa Maria which is about ten or twelue myles compasse and hath no traffique but onlie of pot earth which the other Ilands fetch from thence It hath no Woad but is full of all victualles like Tercera and inhabited by the Portingales There are no Spaniardes in it because it is a stonie Countrie like Tercera and hard to bord whereby the inhabitantes themselues are sufficient and able enough to defend it While I remained in Tercera the Earle of Comberland came thether to take in fresh water and some other victuals but the inhabitants would not suffer him to haue it but
wounded both himself and diuers of his men whereby they were forced to depart without hauing any thing there From Tercera North northwest about seuen or eight myles lyeth the little Iland called Gratiosa is but 5. or 6. mile in compasse a very pleasaunt and fyne Island full of all fruites and all other victualles so that it not onley feedeth it self but also Tercera and the other Islandes about it and hath no other kinde of merchandise it is well built and inhabited by Portingales and hath no soldiers in it because it is not able to heare the charge The Earle of Comberland while I lay in Tercera came vnto that Iland where himself in person with seuen or eight in his company went on land asking certaine beastes Hennes and other Victuals with wyne and fresh water which they willinglie gaue him and therewith hee departed from thence without doing them anie hurt for the which the inhabitantes thanked him and commended him for his curtesie and keeping of his promise From Tercera West North West eight or nyne miles lyeth the Iland of S. George It is about twelue myles long but not aboue 2. or 3. myles at the furthest in breadth it is wooddie and full of hilles it hath no speciall traffique but onelie some Woad and yet verie little of it The inhabitants liue most by Cattell and tilling of the land and bring much victuals to sell in Tercera it hath likewise many Cedar trees and other kindes of wood that from thence are brought vnto Tercera and sold vnto the Ioyners which for that occasion dwell onlie in Tercera From S. George West Southwest â— miles lyeth the Iland called Fayael which is 17. or 18. miles in compasse it is one of the best Ilands next vnto Tercera and S. Michaels it aboundeth in all sorts of victuailes both flesh and fish so that from this Iland the most part of victuailes and necessaries commeth by whole Caruels vnto Tercera it hath likewise much Woad so that many English shippes doe traffique thether The principall road and place is the towne called Vitta dotta there the ships likewise doe lie in the open sea vnder the land as they do before al y e other IlaÌ„ds by this town there lieth a fortresse but of smal importance because the inhabitants of themselues do offer to defend the Iland against all enemies the soldiers were discharged from thence which which before that time lay in the fort complayning that they were not able to maintaine nor lodge them The same time that the Earle of Cumberland was in the Iland of Gratiosa he came likewise to Fayael where at the first time that he came they beganne to resist him but by reason of some controuersie among them they let him land where he rased the Castle to the ground and sunke all their Ordinance in the Sea taking with him certaine Caruels and ships that lay in the road with prouision of all things that he wanted and therewith departed againe to Sea Whereupon the King caused the principall actors therein to bee punished and sent a companie of Souldiers thether againe which went out of Tercera with all kind of warlike munition and great shotte making the fortresse vp againe the better to defend the Iland trusting no more in the Portingales In that Iland are the most part of the Netherlanders ofspring yet they vse the Portingales language by reason they haue béene so long conuersant among them and those that vsed the Dutch tongue are all dead they are greatly affected to the Netherlanders and strangers From Fayael Southeast thrée miles and from Saint George Southwest foure miles and from Tercera Southwest and by West twelue miles lyeth the Iland called Pico which is more then fiftéene miles in length It is so named of a high mountain that standeth therein called Pico which is so high â—t some thinke it is higher then the Pico of 〈◊〉 When it is cleare weather it may as perfectly beseene in Tercera as if it were not halfe a mile from thence and yet it lyeth aboue twentie fiue miles from it for it is at the furthest end of the Iland towards Fayael The toppe of it is seene cleare and bright but the nether part is couered with cloudes and with the Horizon whereby the Iland is much spoken of It is verie fruitfull of all kinds of victuals like Fayael and hath great store of woode as Cedars all other kinds and also the costly wood Teâ—xo There they build many Caruels and small ships from thence by reason of the abundance of woode they serue the other Ilands with woode It is also inhabited as the rest are their chiefe traffique being Cattle and husbandrie It hath much wine and the best in all those Ilands and it hath the sauorest and pleasantest Oranges that are throughout all Portingal so that they are brought into Tercera for a present as being ther verie much esteemed and in my iudgement they are the best that euer I tasted in any place And because the towne of Angra in the Iland of Tercera is the chiefe towne and ruler ouer al the Flemish Ilands I thought good to set it downe in this place in the full proportion with all the stréetes Forts and Road or open Hauen together with the hilles called Bresil where the sentinell is holden for all shippes that come into those Ilands al liuely described as in my simple skill I could comprehend and deuise it The 98. Chapter Of the Ilands of Coruo and Flores FRom Tercera westwarde to the Iland named Flores are seuentie miles it is aboute seauen miles compasse it is also inhabited by Portingales and hath no speciall marchandise but onely some wood it is full of Cattle and other necessarie prouisions and lyeth open to all the world and to whosoeuer will come thether as well Englishmen as others for that the inhabitants haue not the power to resist them A myle from thence Northward lyeth a little Iland of two or three miles in compasse called De Coruo The inhabitants are of the same people that dwel in Flores Betwéene those two Ilands and round about them the Englishmen doe commonly stay to watch the ships that come out of the West for those are the first Ilands that the shippes looke out for and descrie when they sayle vnto Tercera wherby the inhabitants doe but little prosper because they are at the pleasure and commaundement of all that will come vnto them and take their goods from them as oftentimes it happeneth Yet for all their pouertie not to loose both landes and goods they must content themselues and Sayle with euerie winde The I le of Tercera lyeth vnder thirtie nine degrees in the same height that Lisbone lyeth and is distant from Lisbone lying right East and West two hundred and fiftie Spanish miles This shall suffice for the description of the Flemmish Ilands called the Azores which by dayly traueling vnto them are sufficiently knowne for that at this time many
wee receiue further aduise and order from his Maiestie of Spaine All this being thus past the Farmers of pepper and other Marchants that had their goods in Tercera which were taken out of the lost ship that came from Malacca seeing that the hope of any Armada or any ships in the kinges behalfe to be sent to fetch it was all in daine they made request vnto his Maiestie that he would grant them licence euery mâ—n particularly to ship his goods in what ship he would at his owne aduenture which in the end after long sute was granted vpon condition that euery man should put in suerties to deliuer the goods in the custome house at Liâ—bone to the end the king might be paâ—ed his custome as also that the goods that should bee deliuered vnto them in Tercera should all bee registred wherevpon the Farmers of pepper with other Marchants agreed with a Flushinger to fetch al the Cloues Nutmegs Mace and other spices and goods that belonged vnto them the Pepper onely excepted which as then the King would not graunt to lade The same shippe arriued in Tercera about the last of Nouember and because it was some what dangerous being the latter end of the yeare wee laded her with all the speed we could for as then the coast was cleare of Englishmen To bee short this Flushinger being laden with most part of the goods sauing the Pepper that was left behind we set saile for Liâ—bone passing some small stormes not once meeting with any ship but onely vppon the coast where wee saw ten Hollanders that fayled with corne towards 〈◊〉 and other places in Italie and so by Gods helpe vpon the second of Ianuarie Anno â—5â—â— we arriued in the riuer of Liâ—bone being nine yeares after my departure from thence and there I stayed till the mouth of Iulie to dispatch such things as I had to doe and vpon the seuenteenth of the same month I went to Sentinial where certaine Hollanders lay with whom I went for 〈◊〉 The 2â— of Julie wee set saile being in all twelue ships and because we had a contrarie winde we put out higher into the sea The 2â— of the same month wee had a lasting storme whereby wee ranne against another ship being both in a hundred dangers to bee sunke for we were within a spanne of touching one another but God holp vs and wee parted from each other which almost séemed impossible for that the bore sprite of the ship that came against vs strake vpon our Fankyard and there with brake in peeces and presently thereupon his Fouke-maste fell ouer borde whereby hee was forced to leaue the fléete Another also of our companie had a leake so that he made towardes the coast againe where to saue the men hee ran the ship on shore as afterwards we vnderstood and so we remained but ten in companie The 1. of August being 90. miles in the sea because the wind held contrarie so that we could not keepe our right course we espyed three strange shippes but were not long before we lost the sight of them againe The 4. of August there came three other shippes among our fléete which we perceiued to bee Biscaines whereupon wee made towardes them and shot certaine peeces at them and so they left vs. The 16. of August the winde being yet contrarie and because wee were about 15. passengers aborde our shippe our victuailes specially our drinke beganne to faile so that wee were constrained to keepe an order and to stint euery man to his portion being as then 120. miles from Heâ—ssant inwardes in the sea vnder 46. degrees which is called the half sea The 18. we had a storme whereby three of our fleet were left behind because they could not follow vs. The 24. of August we cast out the lead and found ground wherewith wee were all glad for it was the entrance into the channel betweene England and Fraunce The â—â— of August being in the channel there came two small English shippes to view our floete but presently put in againe to the coast of England The â—â— we descried land being loofeward from vs which was Goutsteâ— and Dâ—rtmouth The next day we passed by the Isle of Wight sayling alonge the coast The 30 of August we put into the head betwene Douer and Calleys where there laye one of the Queenes ships but she hoised anker and sailed to the coast of England without lookinge after vs so wee set fower men on shore and then we had a scant winde wherwith wee entred into the North sea not seeing any bodie The 1 of September being clowdie we had a storme out of the northwest wherby we could not descerne land but in the euening we met with two shippes that came out of the East countries which told vs they had seene land saying it was the Terel willing vs to follow them and so we discouered lande being the Vlie but wee thinking it to bee the Teâ—ell would no longer follow the other ships but put so neare vnto it that wee were in great danger and then we perceiued that we had deceiued our selues and saw the other ships to take another course towards the Terell but we had the wind so scant and were fallen so low that wee could hardly gette from the shore and withall we had a sodaine storme wherewith our Fouke maste brake our maine maste being alreadie crackt wherevppon wee were fully determined to anker there and stand vpon good comfort and hope in God and sodainely the wind came better so that with great paine and labour about Sunne setting wee entred the mouth of the Terel without any Pylot for that by reason of the great winde they durst not come out so that to conclude we got in and there with thankes giuen vnto God we ankered In the morning being the seconde of September our Gunner thinking to charge the Peeces and for ioy to shoote them off before the towne by fortune a ladle full of powder tooke fire and with the force thereof strake off all his right hande and burnt him in many places of his bodie wherewith our ioy was wholly quailed and abated The third of September wee ariued in Enchuisen where I founde my mother brother and sister all liuing and in good health it being twelue yeares nine monethes and a halfe after my departure from thence For the which God Almighty with his sonne Christ Jesus our Sauior be praised and blessed to whom belongeth al power honor and glorie now and for euermore Amen The end of the first booke THE SECOND BOOKE The true and perfect description of the whole coast of Guinea Manicongo Angola Monomotapa and right ouer against them the Cape of S. Augustin in Brasilia with the compasse of the whole Ocean Seas together with the Ilands as S. Thomas S. Helena the Ascention with all their hauens channels depths shallows sands grounds Together also with diuers strange voyages made by the Hollanders also the description of the
about with hils whereof those that lie eastward are called Caâ—ates with rockes of Saltpeeter and of siluer on the one side and on the other side hilles through the which Nylus descendeth about foure hundred miles right north and then runneth into an other lake that is greater which the inhabitantes doe call a Sea or Meere because it is greater than the other being in breadth about twoo hundred and twentie miles lying right vnder the equinoctiall line Of this second lake we are truely aduertised by the people of Arzichâ— the which bordure vppon Congo who traffiking in that country reporte that in that lake there are people that do saile in great shippes that can write vsing weights and measures which they haue not in the bordures of Congo which also build their houses of stone and chalke as it groweth in the earth much like the people of Portingale whereby it may be saide that Prestor Iohns land is not farre from thence Out of this second lake aforesaide the riuer Nylus runneth to the Island of Meroe being distant from the lake 240. Dutch miles whereunto other Riuers haue their course as the riuer of Colues c. lying on the bordures of Melinde and comming to the saide Island of Meroe it diuideth it selfe in two partes compassing about a high land called Meroe on the right side of Meroe towardes the east runneth an other riuer called Abagni springing out of the lake Bracina which riuer runneth through Prestor Iohns land to the saide Island and on the other side towardes the west runneth other riuers among the which is Saraboe This riuer entring into Nilus and running about the Island of Meroe runne together in a broder streame through Ethiopia which is called Ethiopia lying aboue Egypt and reacheth to the descending thereof where the riuer Nylus meeteth againe with both the streames together in a high valley and so with a great fall runs to the Island of Siene with so horrible a noyse that the people thereabouts by that means are most part deafe and thence running through Egypt it watereth al the countrey and maketh it fruitfull and from thence runneth into the Mediterranean sea right ouer against Cipres and that with two notable streames besides others whereof one at Rossetto a dayes iourny from Alexandria runneth into the sea the other at Pelusio now called Damiata so that hereby I conclude that the riuer Nylus in Egypt the riuer Zaire in Congo and the riuer Nigri in Eâ—â—iopia are the causes of the fruitfulnesse of those countries al at one time increasing and ouerflowing by meanes of the exceeding great raines that for the space of fiue moneths do continually fall in the countrie of Congo and the places borduring on the same Touching the coast of Aden the coast of Arabia Felix and the country running along by the gulfe of Persia vntil you come to Goa it is sufficiently already declared in this booke whereunto I refer you The description of America and the seuerall partes thereof as Noua Francia Florida the Islandes called Antillas Iucaya Cuba Iamaica c. with the situations degrees and length how farre they are distant one from the other likewise the fruitfulnes and abâ—undance of beasts birdes fishes and fruits of the same countreyes with the manners fashions apparrels and religions together with the principall actions of the people inhabiting therein When the authour of this booke as also the Printer had bestowed and vsed great labor and charges herein to set forth some perfect Cardes of America because that often times the Indian shippes in their sailing out or returning home do fall vpon those coasts specially Brasilia which herein is most discouered they thought it expedient therewith to place a briefe discription of the same countries thereby to shew the readers the principall places therein whereunto at this day most ships do traffike hoping they wil take it in good part THe fourth parte of the world which at this day we cal America or west India was because of the great distance vnknowne to the ancient Cosmographers til the yeare of our Lord 1492. that Christopherus Columbus a Geneuois discouered the same and fiue yeeres after that one Americus Vespacio by the King of Castilliaes commandement sailed thither and called al the countrey America after his owne name and for the greatnes therof is also called the new world reaching as Postillus is of opinion from the one pole to the other beeing diuided by the straigths of Magellana where it endeth vnder 52. degrees on the south side of the Equinoctial line This countrie by diuers men is diuersly parted some making it a parte of the whole worlde and cal it the fourth part by the name of America others make out of that countrey in generall two other parts of the world diuiding the world in sixe parts as Asia Affrica Europe Mexicana or the new Spaine Peruana and Magellanica as the sixt part which as yet is but litle discouered others diuide it into three parts in Peru newe Spain others Mexico new France They that first found it accounted it but for one part after that the Spaniardes discouering more land diuided it into two parts into Mexico or new Spaine and Peru after that the Frenchmen discouering more countreyes called that which they discouered Noua Frauncia which in time beeing by the Spanniardes woonne from the Frenchmen was accounted for a péece of newe Spaine at the last the straights of Magellana being founde out was by Petrus Plantius a minister of the worde of God added as a sixt parte but because our Card extendeth no further then to certaine limits of Noua Frauncia namely to the prouince or countrey of Florida we wil not speake much of the rest and proceede with the other partes with certaine Ilandes in our Carde called Antillas or foure landes because they lie before the firme lande defending and couering the same as a henne with her wings couereth her chickens The land then which stretcheth towards the pole Arcticum or northward is called new Fraunce for that in Anno 1524. Iohannes Verrazanus of Florence being sent by the King and Queene mother of France into the new world did almost discouer al that coast beginning from Propicus Cancri about 24. degrees til he came to 50. degrees and somewhat further into the north where he erected the French standard so that from thenceforth that countrey was called by the name of Noua Frauncia and Villagagno Frauncia Antarctica The breadth of this countrey is from 24. degrees to 54. degrees towardes the North. The length from 280. to 330. miles whereof the East part by the writers in these dayes is called Norumbega reaching to the gulfe Gamus where it is seperated from Canada About this land which is not lesse in compasse then Europa or whole Christendome lie diuers Islands among the rest Terra di Laborador stretching towards Groenland whether diuers ships both Spaniards French and English do often times resort seeking
some passage through the same to enter into the East Indies but al in vaine for the most part consuming and destroying themselues therein found much ice and snow The people of this Island are wel proportioned of bodie and limbes wel made and fitte to labour they paint their bodyes thereby to seeme faire and weare siluer and Copper rings in their eares their apparrel is speckled furres and marternes and such like in winter they weare the furs inward and in summer outward like the Lapelanders and Vinnen they gird themselues with cotteÌ„ girdles or with fish skins and such like things their cheefe foode is fish specially Salmon although they haue both birdes and fruit inough their houses are made of wâ—od whereof they haue great quantities and couered with the skinnes of beastes or fishes In this land are griffons white beares and birdes There is a countrey vnder 44. degrees and a halfe called Baccalao taking the name of some kind of fishes which thereabouts are so aboundant that they let the shippes from sailing This countrey of Baccalaos reacheth nine hundred miles that is from the Cape de Baccalaâ—â— to Fâ—orida which is accounted in this sort from the point of Baccalao to the bay of the riuer are 70. miles froÌ„ the bay of the Riuer to the bay de los Islos 70. miles from thence to Rio Fundo 70. miles from thence to Cabo Baxo 160. miles and again to the riuer of Saint Anthony 100. miles from thence to the furthest Cape 180. miles and againe to the Cape of saint Elena 110. miles and from Saint Elena to the poynt of Canauerall or the Reedlyooke 100. miles then to Florida 40. miles which is in all nine hundred miles which is the greatnes of this land whereof the least latitude from the Equinoctial line is 48. degrees and a halfe this country both on the sea coast and otherwise is verie populous and like the low countries because it lyeth in a corner This Land hath many Islandes lying about it as Curia Regia Baya Bica Stella the Cape of Hope and the Brittons Cape Before you come to Florida the prouince Cichora lyeth by the Riuer Iordan and another hard by it called Guada Lupa The west side of Noua Frauncia hath diuers prouinces now discouered as Quiui a â—euola Astaclan Tethchichimichi The south side of Florida is called by the Spaniards Floridum Pascha because Iohannes Pontio Legionensi founde it out on Easter day in Anno 1512. and not because of the greennesse and budding of the trees in the same land as Theueâ— writeth The north side of noua Frauncia is as yet not discouered and because our Carde discouereth no further then to Florida we wil begin therwith and describe some part of the situation thereof because it is worthie memorie as beeing a place wherein many Spaniards Frenchmen haue lost their liues as also because it is the first best knowne of al new France whereunto the Frenchmen haue vsed to saile and therein in the time of Charles the ninth had a certaine fort which was called by his name Charles burgâ— but was after taken by the Spaniards and al the Frenchmen slaine contrary to their fayth and promise specially such as yeelded themselues into their hands But because my meaning is not to recite histories I remit the reader to the bookes which make mention thereof Florida hath a Cape lying far into the sea stretching Southward in maner of a tong reaching an hundred miles the measure being taken from the lowest northerne corner to the south poynt This Cape or hooke as I sayde is long and narrow like Italy in length an hundred miles and in breadth twentie or fiftie miles where it is broadest On the East side it hath the Islands of Câ—ehora Banama and Lucaya on the west side towardes Spaine and the gulfe of Mexico it is diuided from new Spaine by the land of Anauaca On the north side it bordureth on the firme land it lieth right against the point towards the south 25. miles into the sea lieth the famous Island Cuba otherwise called Isabellâ— the sea that runneth between this poynt of Florida and Iucâ—tan is called Mare Catayum by other the gulfe of Ferdinando Cortosi or the gulfe of Florida or of Mexico It is a flat lande wherein are many riuers which moysture the land and make it fertile the sea side being sandie whereon there groweth diuers pine trees without nuts or shels also many acornes wild cherries mulberies chesnuts but ranker of taste then oures in these countreyes many Mastike Cedars Cipres Bayes Palme trees Nuls and wild vines which grow vppon the trees that are next them bringing forth grapes that are good to be eaten also a certain fruit of Medlars greater and better then ours there are also plums verie faire to behold but not good of taste there are also Framboisen or Hinnebesien and some verie small round berries of a pleasant taste not much vnlike our Clappe beries there groweth rootes which in their speech they cal Hatle whereof in time of dearth they make bread Fourefooted beasts are there likewise in great aboundance as Harts Hinds rain Deare Goats Beares Leopards Fores many kind of Wolues wild Dogs Hares Conies c. Their birds are Peacocks Partriges Parrats Pigeons ring Doues Turtledoues Meerelens Crowes Hauks FalcoÌ„s Marlens hearns Cranes Storkes wild Geese Ducks water Rauens white red blacke and ash coloured Reighures and many other water foules Crocadiles in so great aboundance that it is incredible which ofteÌ„ times do eat and deuoure men swimming in the water there are likewise many kindes of snakes and a certain kind of beast not much vnlike the lion in Affrica Golde and siluer wherewith they traffike they haue it as they say out of the ships which fal on ground vpon the Cape which is not vnlikely because most of the ships are cast away vpon that Cape so that there is more money thereabout then in the north parts They said likewise that in the hils Apalatcyaeris there is gold to bee found in this countrie also groweth the roote China which by meanes of the Emperour Charles hath gotten a great report and is much vsed by phisitions which some also vse to heale the French pocks Besides al these things aforesaid there are diuers sortes of seedes and hearbes whereof many kindes of collours are made very profitable for painters the inhabitants knowe well how to vse them therewith to die al kindes of leather The people are in a manner a black yellow and euil fauoured yet strong of good proportion of bodie They couer their members with verie faire drest hart skins most part of them paint their bodies and also their armes and thighes with many figures which colour wil not off vnlesse it bee washed it is so printed and sunke into the flesh they haue black haire downe to theyr hippes being long which they verie cunningly bind vp in their dealings they are wholly light and
with the wales but returning again vnto the coast the hauen of â—xillo lyeth vnder seauen degrees â— and from thence you saile to the hauen of Goanape which lyeth full fiue miles from the towne of â—xâ—lo vnder eight degrees and â— and somewhat further southward lyeth the hauen 〈◊〉 or holie where the shippes put in by it there is a great riuer and a very good water all this coast is without hilles and as I saide before sandy and chalkie vallies This hauen of Porto Santa lyeth vnder nine degrees and further southward about foure miles distant lieth another hauen called Ferrol a very good and sure hauen but hath neyther fresh water nor wood to burne and about foure miles and a halfe further there lyeth a hauen called Casina where there is a Riuer of fresh water and much woodde to burne where the shippes doe ordinarilye refresh themselues it lyeth vnder tenne degrees From Casma the coast runneth south to the cliffes called Los Farollones di Guaura A little further lieth Guarmey wherein runneth a riuer and from thence you sayle the same course to the Barranca or Downes which is fifteene miles towardes the south and foure miles and one halfe further lieth the hauen of Guaura where the shippes may take in as much salt as they will for there is so much that all Spaine and Italie might be furnished with salt from thence and yet they woulde haue sufficient for the country three miles further lie the Cliffes or Farrollones From this poynt which â—utteth out of the land with the same northeast and southweast course you saile sixe miles further to the furthest cliffe that lyeth into the sea These Cliffes lie vnder eight degrées and one halfe from thence the coast turneth againe southeast till you come to the Island of Lyma in the middle way and somewhat more towards Lyma lieth a rocke which is called Salmarina and is vnder seuen or seuen degrées and a halfe This land maketh a barre of defence before Callao which is the hauen of the Towne of Kings or of Lyma and by this defence from the Island the hauen is very safe for the shippes to harbour in Callao lieth vnder twelue degrees and a halfe The way by land from Truxillo to Lima. THe towne of Truxillo lyeth distant from Lima sixtie spanish miles which is 48. duch miles or 240. Italian miles all the which way is sandie vnlesse it be when you passe certaine vallies Now when you set out of Truxillo you come first to the valie of Guâ—nape which is full fiue Spanish miles from thence that is 21. Italian miles which in times past was wel known because of the good drinke called Cica that was made ther no lesse then in Italy Mente Frascon and in Spaine S. Martin are esteemed for the good wines that are there to be solde and this vallie is inhabited and watered as the rest are it hath a verie good hauen where the shippes take in all theyr prouision from thence you come to a little valley where no riuer runneth through but it hath a small water where those of Peru and other trauailers vse to drinke and going further you come to the vallie of Santa which in time past was verie populous and had in it many braue souldiours and captaines for commanders which held stoutly against the Kings of Peru so that they were forced to ouercome them more by pollicie then force they were likewise much esteemed of by their kings that caused many houses pallaces to be built therin as being one of the greatest and biggest vallies in those countries and through it there runneth a verie strong and great riuer which is verie full and high when it is winter in the hilles wherein also were manie Spaniards drownde Nowe they haue a drift to set ouer their passengers therein in time past there dwelt many thousand people nowe there are not aboue 400. left They go apparrelled both men and women with certain maÌ„tles and shirts with bands or rolles about their heades all kindes of fruites both of that countrey and such as are brought out of Spaine do grow therein in great aboundance There likewise they take much fish the shippes that saile along the coast do there take in fresh water and other prouisions two daies iourney from thence lieth another vallie called Guambacâ—o for fruitfulnes other things like vnto the rest about a daies iourney and a halfe further lyeth the valley of Guarmey wherin are many beasts cowes hogs and horses from thence you go to Parmongo no lesse pleasant then the former in it are yet seene certaine faire castles built after theyr manner wherein vpon the walles are painted the Images of certaine beastes and birdes and it is to be wondered at howe they make the water runne out of the riuer so farre into the land whereby it moystneth all the countrey a mile and a halfe from the vallie lieth the riuer Guaman which in our speech signifieth the riuer of the fields and is by them called Barranca which vallie is like all the rest and when it raineth much in the hilles this riuer is verie dangerous A dayes iourney from thence lyeth the vallie of Guaura from the which you go to Lima the vallie wherin it lyeth is the greatest and broadest of all that are betweene it and Tumbez and as it is greatest so was it verie populous wherof at this time there are few left for when the towne began to be inhabited the inhabitants of the towne tooke the countrey and land from those that dwelt in the vallie who after that were likewise destroyed and cleane rooted out This towne next vnto Cusco is the greatest in all the countrey of Peru and the principall for that at this present the Viceroyes of Peru the Archbishop the Councell and the Chancerie wherein all processes are sued and the lawes of the whole countrie administred are resident therein whereby there is great traffike and concourse vnto Lyma because many people come thither out of the townes lying about it In this towne are faire houses some built with Towers and costly galleries the Market place is great and the streetes broade and entring into the market place from whence also you may goe into euerie place of the towne and to the fieldes and into most of the houses there runneth certain channels that conuay water a great commoditie and pleasure vnto the townesmen wherewith they may water all their gardens and orchards which are there verie faire and pleasant vpon the riuer likewise are many water milles made after the manner of our countrey wherewith they grinde theyr corne to conclude therein dwelleth manie rich inhabitants some worth 150000. duckets and from this towne oftentimes there saileth shippes that are worth in value at the least 800000. duckets and some a Million on the east side a little aboue the town lyeth a high hill whereon there standeth a Cruâ—â—fix on another side of the towne the townsmen haue certaine places
Cunha wind or lay the needle of the compasse a stryke and a half Northeastward and when it is an hower after twelue of the Clocke by the compasse it is then by the Astrolabium but full twelue of the Clocke and to know when you are hard by the Ilandes you shall find it by this that you shall see certaine Birds flying fiue and fiue in ranks together then you are hard by them and from thence forward certaine birdes will follow you by the Portingales called Feigions full of blacke and white spottes whereby they are easy to bee knowne béeing South and North ouer this Iland you shall see certaine thinges driue in the sea by the Portingalles called Sargoslo and is almost like the weedes that is found by Vieâ—inghen in Holland From these Ilandes of â—rulan de Cunha to the cape de bona Speranza being in this countrie about the eight of Iune you shall see in driuing the sea certaine weedes called Sargollo and Trombas like peeces of thicke reedes those reedes are short and full of branches and are not so long as those that are found by the Cape de bona Speranza here you must kéepe on your course till you finde them to increase and be not abashed thereat for it commeth by this meanes that the more it stormeth and is foule weather in the Ilands the more of those reedes weedes are smitteÌ„ down which w t the water the wind that commeth both from behind and ouer the Iland driue towardes the Cape de bona Speranza wherefore I aduertise you that if you find those réedes and weedes to keepe 150. miles further from the Ilandes of Tristan de Cunha for they are signes of that I told you of before When you come vnder the hight of 35. degrees full or scarse to the Cape de bona Speranza you shall see Trombas or péeces of thicke reedes in the water and when you see them assure your selfe they come from the Cape de bona Speranza and you are then past those of the Ilands when you find those Trombas then you are but 3â— or â—0 miles from the Cape de bona speranza Those peeces of reedes are long almost like Basuynen but when you are vnder 35. degrées and a half then you see them no more but certaine birds as great as Rauens with white and flat billes with blacke feathers those flie not past 20. or 30 miles from the Cape de bona speranza and some gray birdes by the Portingalles called Alcatiases these are the right tokens you finde from the Cape de Bona Speranza to the Cape das Agulhas you must likewise vnderstand that the trauersing or crosse way from Brasilia to the Cape de Bona Speranza is much shorter or lesse theÌ„ is placed in the sea cards but let no man seeke to know the cause thereof as hauing no great matter consisting therein coÌ„cerning the vosage though there were yet it is not coÌ„uenient y t other nations and strangers should vnderstand it you find likewise betwéen the Ilands of Tristan de Cunha and the Cape de bona Speranza certaine sea wolues but being in that couÌ„try about the last of Iune it may be you shal not sée them for then they withdraw themselues from thence because of the cold kéepe vnder the land but if you chaÌ„ce to be by those IlaÌ„ds of Tristan de Cunha about the 10 of May then you shal not passe aboue 35 degrées because at that time the West windes do there blow w t most great fury tempests specially with a new Moone least it happen to you as it did to the shippe called the Bon Iesus which was ouerwhelmed in the sea by the great waues that the windes raised as I my self sayth Diego Afonso haue seene beeing in the shippe called S. Clare of the Cape de bona Speranza y t shall sée certaine birds in the water called Antenas which are great speckled fowle then you are by Cape das Agulhas you shall likewise finde some fish bones or cuttle bones such as the Goldsmithes vse driuing vppon the water and when you haue the sight of land vnder the degrees aforesaid beeing thirtie miles from the Cape de Bona Speranza as also comming vnder the 36. degrées you shall finde those birdes called Antenales and when you are past the Cape de Bona Speranza and haue séene land whether it be y e Cape de Bona Speranza or the cape das Agulhas either beyond or on this side then kéepe aloofe from the land at the least 30. miles into the Sea and if you meane to goe to Mosambique then you must saile North East that is to the Baixos or droughts of India In the course from Brasilia to the Cape de Bona Speranza many birdes follow after you but as soone as you come within y e sight of the cape de bona Speranza they leaue you manie times the blacke Rauens aforesaid that you may be sure to be within the Cape that is on the east side of India you shall perceiue the waues of the sea that follow you from the Cape out of the East into the West doe presentlie leaue you as soone as you are past the Cape das Agulhas inwardes vntill you come to others out of the South West that is inward from the Cape also by this Cape the needle of the compasse is right and euen so that when it is noone by the Astrolobie it is likewise noone by the sunne diall or the compasse both agréeing in one which is a good signe that you are North and South with the Cape das Agulhas or betweene both that is the Cape de Bona Speranza and the Cape das Agulhas and this is a great signe as well from Portingall into India as from India to Portingall but sayling from Portingall to India then the néedle of the compasse turneth Northeastward again 30 miles froÌ„ the Cape das Agulhas towards Mosambique The coast runneth East and West and you must bee carefull being past the Cape das Agulhas sixe or seauen miles into the sea from the land called Auagda de Sanbras not to take the way towardes the Cape but towardes the South West and South West and by West because it is necessarie so to doe to saue a great deale of way by reason of the streames and waters that runne inwardes towardes the land If it chance you passe the Cape a farre off and so see not any of these signes theÌ„ take the height of the sunne and looke on your diall but you must doe it aduisedly and with a straight thread and then if you be 150. miles beyond the cape inward it being noone by the Astrolabie The shadow of the sunne diall will not be vpon noone but wil want a strike and when it is noone by the diall then it will be halfe a degree past the Astrolabe which if you find to be so then assure your selues you are 150. miles inwards beyond the cape de Bona
winde comming most out of the northwest and north which letteth you from sayling northwest and being to Seaward you shal rather haue a northeast wind and although you haue many meanes to kéepe you from going close vnder the coast of Guinea I set this downe here because I haue noted it my selfe for that all the ships in what course soeuer they be which presently winde themselues to kéepe aloofe from the coast of Guinea being in the course of Sargosso they haue no full winde but onelie northeast windes and sometimes calmes which sailing to lee ward you find not where you haue the winde east and east southeast All the shippes that come from the Antilhas or Spanish Ilandes the scarsest windes that they finde are out of the East whereby you may vnderstand that when you hold farre off from Guinea it is no cause of hauing a longer Voyage but you shall the sooner finde a better and fuller winde and so when you come vnder twentie degrees and that the compasse keepeth steedie to twentie fiue degrees then you are not to lee ward there you beginne to sée the hearbe Sargosso whereby that hearbe is called Sargosso and make no reckning of being too loofeward or too léeward for there is no certaintie thereof so when you saile north and north-northeast and that the néedle of the compasse lieth not north westward thē be wel assured that the Iland Flores is right before you continuing so till you come to the Iland of Fayael which is one of the Flemmish Ilands called as Ilhas dos Alcores The compasse that within S. Helena was full halfe a strike Northeastward will be full if you marke it well and when you come vnder thirtie sire or thirtie nine degrees and ⅓ then you shall see the Iland Flores with some Torteaur in the water and being fortie miles from the Iland Flores towardes the coast then you shall sée the birdes Garagiaus and Duckers and the compasse will in a manner be euen and if there be any difference it will bee somewhat northeastward for from the Iland Flores to the Iland Fayael the compasse is full as six as I said before The 8. Chapter The course and Nauigation from India to the Cape de Bona Speranza set downe by another Portingall Pilot. WHEN you depart from Cochiin to sayle for Portingall you must doe your best to get vnder tenne degrees and a halfe till you be 50. miles West south west from it whereby you will bee scarse vnder 10. degrées vnder the which hight lyeth the Ilands Mamales for the streame will alwaies drawe you to the middle of the Channel betwéene these Ilands and the Ilands of Maldiua vnder 9. degrées a halfe you must passe full forward without séeing any of those Ilands and go shoare vnder 9. degrées a quarter although in the Cards they place many false Ilands And if you chaunce to set sayle from Cochin the 20. of Ianuarie little more or lesse then run so that you may passe the Ilands on the southwest and southwest and by south vntill you bee vnder the Equinoctial line because you go late to sayle and it may be that the wind and weather wil not serue you so well to holde to Sea ward from the Iland of Brandaon then you may hold your course betwéene the Ilands called Dos Irmaos lying vnder 4. degrées on the south and from thence you must take your course to the Ilands of Pedro Mascharenhas and so following your way if it chaunce being vnder 4. degrées southward you haue much thunder lightning and rayne because commonly it is found there in the moneth of Februarie as I my selfe haue tryed vntill 14. degrées then doe your best to get vnder 14. or 15. degrées for commonly vnder 15 or 16. degrées you shall find southeast winds and then put no further into the Sea but passe betweene the Iland Brandaon and the Iland of Lopo Soares which is a good course and as soone as you are past the Iland then take your course by the Iland of Ioan de Lisboa betwéene the which Iland and the Iland of Pedro Mascherenhas you haue a good way so that you come to passe 14. or 15 miles from the Iland of Saint Laurence from thence set your course West southwest till you come vnder 29. degrées and then run West and West and by South to 34. degrées or as farre as you will by this course running in this sort comming within 50. or 6◠miles of the land called Terra do Natal you shall see many Birdes and the more it stormeth is foule weather the more Birds you shall see and if you see many then be assured you are farre from the land and when you loose the sight of them then looke well to your selfe for the closer you are by the land you loose the sight of them altogether vnlesse it bee the blacke Rauens with white billes the neerer you are to the land the more you shall see of them although they are likewise seene at the least 20. miles from the shore but feare not when you begin to come to the Iland of S. Laurence but hold the course abouesaid and when you beginne to discouer the mouth of the Chanel betweene Saint Laurence and Mosambique then you presently find the runing of the streame towards the Cape de Bona Speranza and feare not in that country to hold your course southwest for commonly after you haue the wind south and as much as you haue runne west Northwest so much you haue furthered your way but take heede you keepe still from the coast and so you will make a better Viage for the streame will driue you to the Cape although the wind helpeth you not and this is to bee vnderstoode that when you come late from Cochin you shall alwaies thereabout finde great West windes also you must know that in March and Aprill all the way from the furthest point of Saint Laurence to the Cape commonly there bloweth North and Northeast winds and if for a day or two it bloweth out of the Southeast or South it is a great wonder therefore make no account of it for at those times they blowe verie seldome in all the way aforesaide to the Cape and the néerer you come to the Cape you find the more northerly windes but when the North wind commeth mist and fléet then be sure of West windes for it is the nature of them in those countries and you must vnderstand that if you arriue in those countries in a Schrickel yeare for they are much more dangerous then other years because the coniunction of the heauenly Planets and bodies as then are different as also the inferiour bodies that are subiect to the superiour whereby they are gouerned then you shall finde from 30. degrées vpwards that as soone as you haue a northerly winde with a small or miseling rayne that there followeth great and foule weather then looke well to your selfe and take great héede least it fall
further in the shew of an other thicke Houell with trées and kéeping on your course til you come right ouer against y e riuer theÌ„ the houels séem to be right ouer against the other thicke laÌ„d it sheweth thus when you are about a myle ½ to the sea ward from it froÌ„ this riuer to the first Pagode or Idole there is about three or foure myles and from this Pagode forward you finde no more high hils like that you haue past before and passing straight from thence some of them shew as if they had tables or plaines vpoÌ„ them this Pagode lieth ful vnder 20 degr your best way is alwaies to looke out for it as being requisite for you thereby to make a good voiage beyoÌ„d this first Pagode there staÌ„deth an other Pagode as great as the first with 2 or 3 small Pagodes standing somewhat further from y e first Pagode to y e secoÌ„d is about 4 miles and the coast from the one to the other lyeth East and West here you must not kéepe too close to the shore for you shall hardly put off again because it maketh a créeke likewise before you come to the first Pagode you must kéepe off from the land because two miles before you come at it there lyeth a small drougth stretching a mile into the Sea From the first Pagode to the seconde you sée certaine houels and trées and from the second Pagode to Sataguan it is a lower land all waste and wilde ground being altogether bare to the point called a Punta das Palmerias that is the point of the Palme trees and you run West along the coast from the Pagode aforesaid to a point with a Riffe lying 12. miles from the point of Palmerias there lyeth a riuer the point aforesaide reacheth a great halfe mile into the Sea you runne along the coast Northeast and from the aforesaid Riffe point to the Palmerias the coast runneth north-Northeast and north-Northeast and by East and to knowe the Riffe and the lande thereof you must vnderstand that the land of the Riffe is greater and thicker then the other land of the Cliffe and maketh show of an Iland and presently somwhat further you shall see nine or ten trees shewing like round houels from the Pagode to this Riffe are about 12. miles from thence forward you shall runne along the coast at nine ten fadome deepe vntill you come to the said Palmerias whereof the fore part of the land is verie low hauing a bare houel which sheweth it selfe like the Arenas Gordas or redde Downes lying by Saint Lucas de Barameda in the coast of Spaine froÌ„ this donne or houel to the Palmerias it is altogether a low and bare land without any trees or bushes the Palmerias were wont to be ten or twelue Palme trees now there is but one hard by the same Palmerias on the side of Sataguan there stande certaine Houels and from thence forwards you haue no pointes hookes trees nor any more bushes but the land for a mile way is nothing but like a Riffe And when you see the point of Palmerias then you shall holde your course East vntill you bee 12. Fadome deepe and from thence north-Northeast till you find eight Fadome and a halfe and being in the daye time you shall presently see land which shal be beneath all the Riffes and if the land be couered with any dampes or mistes you shall then not see it before you bee at 4. fadome deepe This course you shall hold with a Compasse that faileth not for if it doth you must make your reckening thereafter this land whereby you shall passe is a flat low land without either bush or tree and passing forward along the coast you shall vpon the East side perceiue a long blacke Houel like a Champana without a Mast which is an Indian Caruell and somewhat further from this Houell there are a companie of trées which are about thrée or foure that shew greater then the houell these trees stand somewhat low and a little from these trees beginneth the Riffe of the countrie of Orixa which hauing seene you shal presently see the water to Seaward breake which is vpon the drougthes of Bengalen for there the Chanell is smalest and behind you leaue many Riffes on the side of Bengalen which doe all lie to Sea ward wherefore you cannot see them and passing by them you approach the Riffe of the land of Orixa for although you sayle close by you neede not feare other then that you see before your eyes the depth is three Fadome with small blacke Sand in the bottome On Bengalen side you shall haue foure or fiue fadome water with muddie grounde on the which side you must not goe for that beyond that muddie ground you should come to a banke of Saâ—â— comming from Bengalen when you find this ground you shall if néed be come north-Northeast and by North vntil you be at thrée fadome for this is the right way the aforesaid Riffe of Orixa being past you shall presently find more depth and if you desire to runne along by the land of Orixa then set your course right vpon the first point that you sée before you the least depth you shall find is thrée fadome which is the right way vntill you be close by the land where you shal find 5. or 6. fadome déepe and if you néede any wood to burne then goe on the other side of the land of Bengalen for there the wood is better then on the side of Orixa but hauing done you must again put to the side of Orixa vntill you bee past two ryuers lying on the same side of Orixa whereof the first is liker a Créeke then a ryuer the other lyeth about a mile further in which hath a great mouth or entrie two or thrée miles further beyond that Riuer there are some flowing Beken with trees a mile beyond them there is woode or wildernesse full of thicke trees like Palme trees from the beginning whereof you must crosse ouer to the other side of the land called Guinette right vppon a tree standing on the same side which is higher then all the rest and standeth on the left side of the riuer called Chandecan from thence forwarde it is all shallowes wherefore you must passe further therabouts with a ful sea if you desire to passe through the channell of the land you shall take your course as I said before from Palmieras to the north-Northeast you may runne at fiue fadome and being by day you shall runne at thrée fadomes and running at this depth along by the land although you come sometime to lesse depth yet you néede not feare with the which course you shall sée the Riffe of Orixa and when you sée it you shal make towardes it and make 2 â— parts of the way towards the land and a third part towards the Riffe and so you haue the right way as aforesaid The 12. Chapter An other description of the
same course from India to Porto Piqueno or the small Hauen of Bengalen set downe by an other Pilot large and better described with the whole situation and course thereof SAyling from the coast of India to the hauen called Porto Piqueno in the kingdom of Bengalen outward about the Ilande of Zeylon you shall take your course along the coast of India till you come to sée Briniaon lying by the Cape de Comorin which is the furthest point of the land of India from thence taking your way crosse ouer for from thence forward it is a good countrie and make the shortest crosse you can thereby to goe sure and not to fall inwards or betwéene the Iland of Zeylon and when you sée Barreias which are the Dounes of Briniaon aforesaid then you shal sayle Southward running so at the least fiftéene or twentie myles and from thence forward you shall shorten your way as you thinke best to get vnder fiue degrées and being there you shall sayle Eastwarde as much as you thinke conuenient that you may be assured to passe the point of Gualle which is the furthest point of the Iland of Zeylon on the Southwest side lying vnder sixe degrees when you thinke you are at the point de Gualle to be assured thereof make towards the Iland to know it before you come to the drougths betwéene Tanadare which is fyue myles from Punta de Gualla and the first drouth where commonlie all the shippes know the land such I say as wee sayle to Bengalen or to any of the Hauens thereof as Porto Piqueno or Porto Grande that is the small or the great Hauen where the Portingalles doe traffique and hauing sight of the land of the sayd countrie goe as close vnto it as you will but not passing aboue twelue fadome déepe towards the land because there ly certaine cliffes along the shore whereof we know not certainely the danger besides the sandes betwéene the which and the land you may passe through as hereafter shal be shewed and sayling thus as I haue sayd along the shore you must vnderstand that the land of Tanadare is for the space of fyue myles to the Drougthes on the sea syde altogether lowe land and when you are further to landward in you begin to see certaine hilles that is thrée great hilles right against it and then you shall presently sée the first drougth betwéene the which and the lād you may well passe for that most of the ships that goe and come by the Iland run through that way in the middle way you shall finde betwéene it and the land 11. and 12. fadome déepe of faire in some places stony ground and you néed not feare any thing but onelie that you see before your eyes This first drougth or sand lieth full vnder 6 degrées and ½ and right against it vpon the land you see a houell standing alone and no more in all that country to be séene 6 miles further from that first great drougth there lieth an other small drougth which is distant north-Northeast Southwest and somewhat north-northeast and by East and southwest and by West this small drought lieth vnder 6 degrées and ¼ about 2 miles from the land and if you desire to runne betwéene it and the land you may well doe it for it is ◠or 6 fadome déepe at low water with sandie ground which I know by those that haue passed that way aboue 30. tymes as well going as comming backe again but if your ship be great then it is better to sayle about further into the sea Those drougths or sandes béeing past then runne along by the land and neuer put from it for it is your best course to goe close by it and passing by the Iland of the hilles and the high land you shall see a high sharpe Hill among others from whence there runneth a point that lieth out towardes the Southwest This hill is called O Capello de Frade that is the Fryers coule and lieth full vnder 8 degrées I set not downe the course you must commonlie vse to take along the Coast to the said Capello de Frade because you come vpon no direct line this fryers coule maketh a point of lād frō y e whence there runneth a Riffe about halfe a mile into the sea whereon in some places you may see the water breake from this point to Trinquanamale are 17. miles and you run by the coast north and south which is all low land with a bankie ground and from thence you shall see no land but the land that lieth inward fiue miles Before you come to Trinquanamale you finde a small riuer Trinquanamale is a great hauen beeing in the entrey more then 3. miles in bredth all low land but very déepe round about he that will anker therein may lie vnder certaine Ilands and inward it maketh a riuer that runneth to Seyta vaqua the other to it is all low land to know Trinquanamale a farre off at the mouth thereof on the north side lieth a yellow Sandie Downe and hath vpon one of the hookes or pointes two long hilles rising vp and reaching inwardes to the coūtrie and no other high land neither behinde them nor before thē in all that coast comming by Trinquanamale and hauing knowne it you must then presently crosse ouer for there it is best to follow your course and from thence you must runne North and North and by east alwaies reckning the declining or winding of the compasse and if it be in the monsons of the winds in the month of August then you shall sayle full north because as then the streame runneth very strōg into the sea and this course you shall hold till you come vnder 17. degrees which is the heigth of the point called a Punta de Guado variin lying on the coast of Choramandel which is the beginning of the kingdome of Orixa and being vnder 17. degrees from thence you shall put to the coast of the Firme land to make a good voiage alwaies taking care not to run aboue 19. degrées ½ without séeing land because that vnder 19. degrées there lieth a riuer called Puacota frō the mouth whereof 3. miles into the sea there lieth a rocke or stonie cliffe of the length of a ship which may easily be seene for it lieth aboue the water you may passe betwéene it and the land without danger of any thing but only that which you sée before your eyes all this coast from the point of Guadovariin is altogether great thicke land and hilles which may bee séene far off from the riuer of Puacota to another riuer called Paluor or Palura are 12. miles and you runne by the coast Northeast and Southwest aboue this riuer of Palura there lieth a verie high hill called a Seira de Palura that is the hill of Palura which is the highest hill in all that coast This riuer lieth full vnder 19. degrees and ½ from this riuer to the point called a Derradeira
terra alta that is the last high land you keep the same course along the shore and is in length seauen miles and lieth full vnder ninetéene degrees and ⅔ I set downe this description of the last high land because such as sayle along by the coast may vnderstand that there all the hilles and high landes doe end and from thence forward it is altogether low land and sandie strandes till you come to the place called as Palmerias or Palme trées from the last high land or Derradeira terra alta to the riuer called Rio de Manicapatan the coast runneth north-northeast and southwest and reacheth 5. miles and to know when you are right against the Riuer of Manicapatan you shall sée a high trée standing alone vpon the sea side and is a very flat land on the sea side hauing a bankie and shallow ground the trée standeth on the left hand of the entrey into the riuer from Manicapatan you runne along the coast East Northeast and west southwest to the Pagode de Iorganate that is the Idoll or temple of Iorganate and reacheth thrée miles This Pagode of Iorganate lieth vnder 20. degrées and ¼ from this Pagode of Iorganate to another great blacke Pagode or Idoll the coast runneth east and west somewhat east and by north and west by south and reacheth 7. miles This blacke Pagode lieth not full vnder 20. degrees and ½ from this blacke Pagode to the riuer of Cayegare the coast runneth northeast and southwest and somwhat northeast and by east and south west and by west and reacheth 10 miles the riuer of Cayegare lieth not full vnder 21 degrees and about 4. miles before you come to it there lieth 5. houels which shew like a Hauen of the Sea built with Cottages in the mouth of the riuer aforesaid there lieth two sandes running a good mile southwestward and at the entrey therof lieth a Riffe running along by the coast for halfe a mile into the sea the entrie of the riuer is 4. fadome déep and you goe in and come forth northwest and southeast the sandes aforesaid as you enter lie on your left hand and there the depth runneth along To know Cayegare a farre off you must vnderstand that when you haue passed the houels aforesaid then Cayegare sheweth like an Iland hauing three or foure trées higher then the rest and a little beyond it standeth a small Pagode and somewhat beyond this Pagode there is a little wood verie thicke with trées which séemeth to bée part of Cayegare and other wood there is none beyond it by the saide Pagode there standeth some Sandie Downes of red colour with some water Beecken from the Riuer of Cayegare to the point called a punta das Palmeiras the Coast runneth north-northeast and southwest and somewhat north-northeast and by east and southwest by west and reacheth eleauen miles 2. miles before you come to the point of Palmerias you shall sée certaine blacke houels standing vppon a land that is higher then all the land there abouts and from thence to the point it beginneth againe to be low ground and right ouer against the houels you shall sée some small but not ouer white sandie Downes the markes and tokens which you shall finde being right against the point de Palmerias are that vpon the point there is neyther trée nor bush and although it hath the name of the point of Palmtrees it hath notwithstanding right forth but one Palme trée If you fall vppon it by day being by Caijagate and desire to follow your way then saile at the depth of twelue fadomes northeast northeast and by east alwaies with your lead ready in the hand with good care and diligence and being at 16. fadome you shall presentlie winde northeast vntill againe you finde 12. fadome alwaies keeping at that depth till you finde but 7. fadome and lie thereon by night where you shall anker till it be day and then hoise vp anker running the same course of north-Northeast and north-northeast and by north till you come to foure fadome and comming thether you shall send a man into the top to know the land This coast reacheth East northeast till you come to a houell which sheweth like a Champana without a mast with a boat following it those Champanas are Caruels of India wherewith they sayle in the sea and along the coast this is the best marke you finde vpon the coast of Orixa and alwaies take good héed to your depthes and if they begin to increase that is aboue fiue fadome then you shal presently turne againe to 3. and 3. fadome and ½ scarse and this is the right course for that if you saile still at 5. and 6. fadome you should in the end come on ground when you see the houell called Chāpana as I said before you shal runne along by it till you sée thrée trées standing together yet somewhat distant each from other which trées are called as Aruores da Conhecensa that is the trées of Markes Right against those trées lieth the riffe of Orixa and being to seaward you shall sée the water breake vppon it on Bengalen side and you cannot sée the markes aforesaid but in cleare weather and if it be mistie darke or cloudy weather then haue the lead readie without neglecting it for you must runne at 3. and ½ and 4. fadome déepe and you must vnderstand that on the side of Bengalen you finde hard sandie ground and on the side of Orixa muddie and small blacke sand I set this downe because I my selfe haue passed ouer it with great ships being past the riffe of Orixa and Bengalen you shall sée the Iland called a Ilha dos Gallos that is the Ilands of Cocks you must runne right vpon it without feare for it is deepe inough and on the other side of Orixa it is all banks therfore I counsell you to goe neere to the Iland of Cocks sayling along by it whereby you shall presently come to a riuer called Rio de Chamdequan which hauing past you shall from thence crosse ouer to the side of Orixa where you shall see a hooke or point of the riuer Angellijn this point of land will lie northward and comming thether you shal alwaies haue your lead in hand and the depth that you shall finde in those places are 3.3 ½ and 4. fadome but beeing full sea it is deeper which wil continue till you be right against the riuer of Angelijn for from thence forward you haue many depthes and being right against the riuer of Angelijn you shall runne along the shore till you come to a riuer called Gilingoa being right against that riuer I wish you not put too farre from the shore towards the right hand for there you finde a sand drougth whereon Bartholomeus Rodriges de Moraiis was cast away with a ship full laden as hee put out therefore I aduise you to keepe on the left hand for there it is deepe enough from this riuer
hauen of Martauan there is a white houell or land that serueth for a marke hauing close by it two Palme trees and about two miles further you shall see a thicke top of lande vppon the end whereof towardes the sea lyeth an Iland which cannot be séen nor discerned from the land till you be right against it and that you haue discouered the Riuer within where the hauen of Martauan lyeth and being past this Iland you shall sée a white houel which lyeth likewise on the South side within the Iland there is a lake that hath good fish and before you come to the hauen comming from the Ilande of Comudo about a mile or a mile and a halfe to seawarde from the land you shall see a round Islande full of bushes called A Ilhas de Cebollas that is the Island of Onions by the which Island on the south side thereof there lyeth a cliffe whereon you sée the sea breake from this Island to the hauen of Martauan there are about two miles comming from Pulo Comudo you must put off from it towards the land holding your course as aforesaid as not hauing any cause of feare but onely of that which you sée before your eyes you must likewise vnderstande that from the Islande Das Cebollas forward towards the North there is no other Ilands nor cliffes which is a verie good marke of this creeke for that being on this side thereof you are no sooner past one Iland but you see another but from thence forward you see not any as I said before but you must bee sure not to passe beyond the hauen of Martauan for that being at twelue fadome not long after you should fal vpon the drought This hauen of Martauan is about a mile or a half and a half broad hauing on the North side a low flat land euen with the sea and is an Iland called Momua you may see it as you passe along the shore from Pulo Comuda towardes the hauen you must still keepe at twelue fadome and comming to 8. or 9. fadome then you shall anker for then you are in the hauen and put no neerer to the shore neither runne not further from the creeke to the banke for then you shall find lesse depth this riuer of Martauan runneth Northeast Southwest both out and in but you may not enter therein without a Pilot for that within the Riuer vpon the East side it hath a stone cliffe or rock which draweth the water vnto it therefore you cannot enter without a Pilot also in the entrie of this riuer and hauen on the right hand there lyeth a sandie banke where in the middle way there runneth a channell of sixe or seuen fadome deepe which you shal knowe by this that is in the deepest parte thereof it hath much fish which you may see and this hauen of Martauan lyeth vnder 16. degrees and ◠4 and the towne of Martauan vnder sixteene degrees vpon the furthest end of the Iland of Andeman on the North side there lyeth two Ilands betweene the which and the Iland of Andeman you may safelie passe also on the furthest point of the South side of the Ilande of Andeman lying vnder 11. degrees there lyeth some Ilandes and from thence to the Ilandes of As Ilhas de Nicobar southwarde there reacheth an Iland also as you put off from the Ilandes of Andeman towardes the coast meeting with some gatheringes of water you neede not feare them for it is nothing but the water it selfe without any sands although there lyeth some vpon the coast there lyeth onely in the middle way an Ilande which the inhabitantes call Viacondam which is a small Iland hauing faire ground round about it but very little fresh water and nothing els but Pine trees wherefore you neede not go into it The 15. Chapter The course from Cochiin in India to Malacca HE that will saile to Malacca in the great Monson which is the principall time when the windes serue to go thether in the Month of Aprill then to make a good voyage you must set saile from Cochiin vppon the sixe and twentith of Aprill and being out of the hauen you must hold your course southward till you be vnder 7. degrées and from thence south southeast to 6. degrees and being vnder that height then you shall runne Southeast almost to fiue degrées and from thence East vntill you are past the Ilande of Seylon and being there you shall keepe on your course till you be vnder 5. and ⅓ and 5. degrees and ◠from thence you shall make towardes the Ilands of Gomespola which lie vnder 6. degrées by the point of Achiin in the Ilande Sumatra and comming to the Iland of Gomespola if you feare not the Acherins which are subiects to the kingdom of Acheiin in the Ilande of Sumatra and deadly enemies to the Portingals then take your course along by the Iland of Sumatra to the Cape called Taniamburo lying on the same coast of the Iland almost 30. miles from the Ilandes of Gomespola and from thence you shall take your course towardes the coast of Malacca running as farre to loofewarde as possible you may to discouer Pulo Sambilao which is an Ilande lying close vpon the coast vnder 4. degrées and ⅔ and distant from Malacca 40. miles Northwest and by North for that such as discouer and come to this Iland maketh a quicke voyage to Malacca and those that fall to leeward towardes Pulo Pinan which is an other Iland vnder fiue degrées and ½ lying with Pulo Sambilao North and by West 12. miles neere Pulo Batun there is another Iland lying Northwest and by North from Pulo Pinaio ten miles vnder 6. deg might peraduenture find Southeast windes which blow much on that coast therefore he that goeth late to saile hath a long voyage wherefore it is best to depart earlie from Cochiin to make a better voyage The 16. Chapter An other larger descriptiō of the course to saile from Goa in India to Malacca with the description of the coasts SVch as desire to saile from Goa or out of India to Malacca must put 20. miles into the sea that he may saile without y e Ilande of Seylon vnto the Ilandes called As Ilhas de Nicobar through the middle of the channell which lyeth vnder 7. degrees and ½ and in that countrey you must looke to the streame because with a west wind they run towards the Gulfe of Bengalen and with an East wind into the sea about 20. or 30. miles frō the Ilandes there is such a concourse breaking of water and streames as if there were sands Whē you com to y e middle of y e Ilands of Nicobar ther you find a channel lying vnder 6. degrees and ½ the Ilands being distant one from the other about a mile and a halfe where you may passe through without feare as hauing nothing to fear but y t you sée before you the depth you find there is 12.
be deeper you must cast anker for if you neglect it you should presentlie fall on ground because the streames and waters doe runne verie strong to sea ward from Tanadare to Belliguao are about 6. myles this place of Belliguao is a verie great créek and from the south syde thereof there appeareth certaine great houels of redde earth that lie within the Créeke and can not bee seene till you be full before the Creeke and on the North syde it hath two small Ilandes close to the land from the which Ilandes there commeth a small sand but it lyeth on the south syde towardes the land From Belleguao to Gualla are fyue myles and the way betweene them is altogether on the sea syde ful of Palme trees and betweene them lykewise lieth an Ilande hard by the land all of stonie cliffes and when you make towardes Gualla you shall perceaue a high land full of woods and a playne desert and from the North syde of the bay it hath a great wood of Palme trees and if you haue occasion to anker in the bay you may well enter at fiftéene and fourtéene fadome deepe but such as desire to keepe on their course neede not put in there From Tanadare to this Hauen of Gualla which are twelue myles you runne from the one to the other Northwest and Southeast and somewhat Northwest by West and Southeast and by east and all the way along this Coast to Gualla is not to be sayled but onlie where you may see ground with your Lead From Gualla to the point called Belitote is fyue or sixe miles which point hath a thicke wood of Palme trees and right ouer against it about half a mile there is a great Cliffe and betwéen them both lyeth many stonie cliffes along the shore by the point of Gualla are two sandes whereon the water breaketh the one is before you come at the point which runneth into the sea about ¼ of a myle and the other is right ouer against the bay on the North syde running a small myle into the sea and of this you must take great care you may well passe by it in the night at twentie fadome deepe so that you need not feare vppon this same the sea breaketh verie long speciallie when it is high water From thence you shall take your course vnto Columbo as the Coast reacheth and from the Iland of Verberijn forward the ground is full of Bankes and shallowes and béeing hard by Columbo about three or foure myles towardes Negumbo you may anker at eight or nyne fadome but by Columbo you cannot doe it but if you haue great occasion then you may anker at eightéen fadome towardes the land There you finde stonie ground and the same you finde at the poynt where you haue twentie fyue fadome deepe inwardes to the sea and that in most places therefore you must bee carefull in throwing out your Anker first prouing with a lead the grounde of this Countrie is in some places small and in other places great sand which is the surest and in some places it hath redde sand and lykewise places of white and blacke sand which are tokens of the ground along the Coast vppon all the which ground you may anker The right markes and tokens of Columbo which is the place where the Portingalles holde their fort are these y t is when you are within the Hauen then the Pico of Adam so called which is a high hill higher then any other in al the countrie about it shal be in the East and setting your course to the Hauen of this fortresse then you shall loose the sight of all the hilles and Houels and begin to sayle by thinne flat land which is a marke and a verie good token of the Hauen the winds that you there shall finde for the most part of that time or Monson are North Northeast Northeast and sometime East Northeast and also East the Viracoins which are the winds that blow out of the Sea are many times North and Northwest I write this that men should not wonder to find them so in that place likewise you finde there West Northwest and West Southwest windes according to the coniunctions of the times when men are in that coast the winds that are called Viracoins which commonly blow out of the west throughout all India at such time as men vse to sayle vpon the Sea which is in Summer from noone to twelue of the clocke at night and come out of the Sea towards the land and therefore by the Portingales they are called Viracoins that is wind out of the Sea and from midnight to noone the winds blow out of the East which come ouer the land into the Sea as it is at large declared in my Indian Viage and is onely heere set downe because it should not séeme strange to any man to reade of these winds and their manner of blowing in these countries when you will put to Sea by night with the Terreinhos or land winds if they be not north-Northeast then you shall not set sayle before midnight if they be not full to Sea ward then put not to farre off from the shore because it would not bee good for you to put to farre into the Sea for that you could not well get the land againe because the Viracoins or sea winds that come out of the North and Northwest doe often stay late blow but slowly From Negumbo you shall crosse ouer to Cape de Comorijn to the East side of the Cape towards the land called das Areas Gordas that is of the fat or thicke Dounes which is 12. miles from Cabo de Comorijn on the side of Choramandel for it is good to put on there because of y e streame which runneth verie stiffe outward with a hard wind by these Areas Gordas as also some part of the way to the Cape you finde ground and many times sée the land because it is long at 40. fadome and lesse and if you come inward from the Cape being by night and find ground then you may fréely passe ouer this ground from 12. to 18. fadome déepe for as you come right against the Cape then the ground is ful of white Sand and you shal not find aboue 20. fadome to Seaward from Areas Gordas to the Cape for from Areas Gordas inwards the ground is ful of banks and small blacke Sand and you must runne a mile a mile and a halfe and two miles from the shore vpon the ground and depthes afore saide And when you passe by Cabo de Comorijn to Coulaon you shall holde your course along the coast about a mile from the shore that you may Anker and not going néerer to the sand then 12. fadome but it is good to run from 15. to 18. fadome alwayes taking héede of the stones of Trauancor which lie betwéene the Cape and Coulaon and being in the night time the surest marke to know if you be before Coulaon is to
and Marchandises that come out of the countrie by the Riuer of Sinoha this créeke was called the Enseada or créeke of Saint Don Iorgie it hath much wood verie good to make ships of fiue miles from it along the Ceast lieth the riuer of Sinoha which hath in the Hauen 14. spanne of water all sandie ground in this Hauen is the whole handling and traffique of the goods that come from Cauchinchina and thether and to Champello you runne Northwest This Iland of Champello hath a good road and safe harbour but onely when it bloweth out of the west and southwest and although the wind commeth from the land notwithstanding it troubleth you much by reason of the lownes of the land you must vnderstand that ten miles before you come to Varrella 13. miles within the sea there beginneth certaine Sandes that are verie dangerous which reach as the land doth till you bee vnder 17. degrees and run nearer to the northeast at the end whereof in the way to China there lieth 8. Islandes three great fiue small all full of trées and sandie strandes but without fresh water betwéene them round about it is altogether flat and foule way so that as soone as you let fall the anker the cable is presently fretted in péeces betwéene these Islands there is 4. fadome deepe This information was giuen me by certaine people of Sian that lost their Iunco or shippe in that place by reason of a calme because they ankered and all their cables brake from the ground they saued themselues in the boate run through all those Islandes to find fresh water and could sée none you run from the hooke or point of those sandes to Pulo Caton Northeast and Southwest and Northeast and by east and southwest and by west for they lie like a bow therefore trust not the old description of this Nauigation that saith they haue channels from thence to Pulo Caton running ouerthwart it is thirtie miles but returning againe to the course from Varella to Pulo Caton when you are as farre as where the coast stretcheth Northward then your course shall be two miles off from the land till you come to Pulo Caton for that if you come thether early in the yeare you haue the west windes so strong that if you should be far from the coast they would carrie you by force vpon the sands without any remedie as it happened to the ship called the Santa Crus you shall not passe aboue two or thrée miles at the furthest to seaward from Pulo Caton and if you chance to be on the side of the land you may likewise passe through by the Channell that runneth betwéene the Firme land and the Iland which is two mile and a halfe broad all faire and good ground as I said before Pulo Caton lieth with the south point of the Iland Aynon North and South and North by east and South and by West somewhat more then 50. mile This south point of Aynon lieth scarse vnder 18. degrées and ½ reacheth from the point aforesaid southwestward 12. or 13. miles and from the East side lyeth the way from China which you run Northeast and north east and by north to 19. degrees and ½ and on the side of the Firme land the Island compasseth about to the point or end of 19. degrees and ½ from the north-Northeast side in such manner that the Iland is in forme foure square the channell betwéene it and the Firme land is in the narrowest part 6. miles where there lieth a hauen called Anchio hauing certaine sandes betwéene thē yet with a channell wherein great ships may passe seuen miles eastward From Anchion lieth a créeke with good harbour and a mile further about thrée miles distant from the land there lieth a great Riffe and sandes but returning againe to the aforesaid South point of the Island which is right before a very high land that surpasseth all the rest of the land in the said Iland at the foote thereof on the north side there is a good Hauen called Taalhio at the mouth whereof lyeth a small round Iland and from this high land aforesaid it runneth 12. miles northwestward and from thence it is altogether low land on the sea side and inward hilles and houels from the end of the land Aynon on the north side vnder 19. degrées and ⅓ to the Iland Pulo Gom in the same course of north-northeast and north-northeast and by north are 8. miles and lieth 5. mile from the Firme land it is a high land in forme like a Bell and on the side of the land it hath a road with a good harbour wherein the ship Santa Crus lay from thence you goe to the seauen Ilandes called Pulo Tio in the same course of north-northeast and north-northeast and by north being fiue miles Pulo Tio are 7. Ilands great and small seperated one from the other without any Trees from thence the Coast reacheth north-Northeast and north-Northeast and by North to the Enseada dos Ladroins that is the Creeke of Rouers from Pulo Tio seauen miles lieth a Riffe which reacheth 5. or 6. miles from the land into the sea and vpon the east side therof about halfe a mile from it there is foure fadome water flat sandie ground and a mile further from thence there lieth a great riuer whether many ships doe saile and put in a little further from this Iland lieth another Riuer wherein I haue béene which hath a good harbour against the monsons of China and with a southwest winde is discouered and threre also runneth strong streames the entrie thereof is close on the east side along by a point of land it is faire and good ground and being about this point of land you shall run till you come to a sand bay where you shall anker for within it is shallow and sandie on the coast betwéene these 2. riuers lieth 2. or 3. Ilands close by the land and from these 2. riuers 6 miles forward lieth the Enseada dos Ladroins which is very great it hath on the west southwest side of the mouth certaine stonie cliffes from the which there stretcheth a Riffe towards the sea wherupon one of the Portingall ships did fall from the aforesaide second riuer to this créeke about halfe a mile from the coast there is 7. or 8. fadome déepe faire ground The land of this creeke on the north north-northeast side hath a verie high hooke or point of land passing about this hooke for the space of halfe a mile it is shallow but muddie ground you goe to the Hauen of Comhay whereupon the coast is called the coast of Comhay thether the ships of Sion or Sian vsed to come it is like a créeke that is very great hauing another point or end of high land which reacheth North and South and right ouer against this hauen on y e south side lieth the Iland of Sauchoin about 5 or 6 miles from it and is distant from the aforesaid point
hill or Islande on the South-East side reaching Northeast and southwest in all these channels you neede feare nothing but that which lyeth before your eies The 29. Chapter To saile from Calapa in the Islande Iaua Maior to China with the courses and situations of the coasts particularly set downe SAyling out of the hauen of Calapa you shall runne to an Iland lying by the poynt of Carauon that lyeth néerest to the land wherby you shal presently see two points of sandie downes which reach towardes the Ilands that reach to seaward when they are on your right hande then you must put in betwéene the Ilandes through the channell where the winde giueth you best way for it is all fayre and good ground being past these Ilandes you shall runne along by the coast to the point of Carauon which lyeth Eastward about two and a halfe or thrée myles in length from thence to take your course crosse ouer to the Islande of Lusepara and from this point of Carauon lying on the coast of Iaua you runne North and South to the Iland of Lusepara or Lasapara and somewhat North and by West and South and by East the course being fiftie miles the course is holden in this manner because the East and East Southeast winds as then beginne to blowe in those countries that is as soone as the month of May commeth on and likewise as then the waters and streams beginne to runne with the Monson of the year which is the coniunction and time of the certaine winds towards the straight of Sunda the channell of Lampon which beginneth from the mouth reacheth to a thicke point and créeke with a Riffe lying on the coast of Sumatra about 18. or 19. miles from Lusepara in the Countrey aforesaide by the point Carauon which lyeth thrée myles froÌ„ the hauen of Calapa you shall take your course North Northeast for 8. or 9. miles whereby you shall sée a round Island which will lie on the side of the land of Sunda or Iaua and being past this Island Westwarde from thence you shall sée a rowe of Islandes that do all reach North and south passing by the countrey of the mouth or straight of Sunda by this aforesaid round Ilande you shall find ground at 20. fadom at the which depth you shall take your course North North and by West whereby you shall alwaies be within the sight of the aboue named Ilands to the ende of them with the aforesaid depth of 20. fadome when you beginne to lose the sight of these Ilandes being past them you shall presently come to 14. and 13. fadome and being at 13. fadome you shall runne the same course of North and North and by east vntill as you thinke you are within 15. or 16 miles neere the Iland of Lusepara and being there then run North and there the depthes will begin to lessen to 11. fadome which is a good course for that running at more depth you should go outward at Lusepara thus sayling North and at 1â— fadome as I saide before you are in your right course till you come to 9. fadom and being there then looke about you for you shall not runne long but you shall sée the Island of Lâ—separa which will open like two small houelles lying East and west one from the other y t in the east being greater theÌ„ the other in all this wâ—y in y e Month of May I found East east southeast windes as I said before and according to the times of the waters windes and streames you shall gouerne your selfe in such manner that in your course you alwaies run Northward for it is your right course best way from the point Carauon to the Island Lusepara and if you go later to saile hauing a ful wind without any abatement or cutting off you shall holde your course right North for it is very daungerous to saile without the Iland Lusepara therefore you shall take your course in such manner that the Ilande may ly Eastward from you because Lusepara lyeth twelue myles Eastwarde from the other Ilande which is called Lusepara falsa that is false or wrong Lusepara because many shippes haue been deceyued by it thinking it had béene the right Lusepara when they came from the Iland of Iaua and therefore they haue giuen it the name of Lusepara falsa you must take heede of it for that northward from it it hath a great creek lying in the Island of Banca and such as put into it can hardly gette out againe the right way for there the windes are very scant whereby you might indure great paine and daunger to get into the strayght as it hath happened to some shippes that were deceyued by Lusepara falsa therefore I aduise all men when they sayle to Lusepara that they put not in aboue eleuen fadome letting the Islande of Lusepara lie on the East side so assure them of their way And when you sée Lusepara being within 3. miles thereof you shall take heede you goe not right North and south towardes it for that on the North side as also on the south for more then two miles and a halfe it is altogether bankes and sands that are very dangerous therefore you shall hold on the Southwest side in such manner that you shall keep two miles from it towardes the lande of Sumatra I haue past within lesse then a mile from it whereby I discouered the whole strande and a white strande which banke lyeth on the North side and in this course I founde fiue fadome and ½ muddie ground but as soone as the Island was southeast froÌ„ vs we had but four fadome and ½ and 4. fadom and strake twice on grounde without rother but verie softly wee founde all ouer sandie ground but as soone as wee put to the land of Sumatra wee had presently deepe ground therefore I wish you to keepe two miles from the Ilande towardes Sumatra and when you beginne to come neere it you shall hardly find fiue fadome muddy grounde and when it lyeth Eastward from you then you are right ouer against it and then you shall presently see a point of the lande of Sumatra wherevnto you shall runne and there you shall find more depthes and running towardes the coast you may goe within halfe a myle neere the saide point of lande where you shall finde ten fadome deepe of harde flatte ground vntill you be a good way from the point you runne from the coast of Sumatra from the straight of Sunda to this point North Northeast and South South-West from this first pointe thrée miles further there is another poynt vpon the said coast of Sumatra and you shall make thether kéeping halfe a myle from the coast alwayes with the lead in your hande where you shall find the same depthes of 9. or 10. fadome harde ground as you begin to go néer to the aforesaid 2. point theÌ„ you shal find muddy ground
east west with the south Iland of Lampacon and betwéen it Lampacon there is no other hinderance but onely the great stony cliffe aforesaid you shall run by the southeast point of this Iland leauing it on the Northwest side passing through the channell that runneth betwéene it and another Iland that lieth westward and being through it theÌ„ you are in the channel which comming from the sea runneth to the mouth or entrie called the Hares eares northward and from the channell westward lieth the way to Macau I set not down this course for that I haue shewed it in an other place in the Nauigation from Malacca to China if you passe betwéen these Ilands you must alwaies run with the lead in your hand to find the depthes From Macau â— miles northeastward lieth a very great and high Iland with a very high sharp point which lieth in the greatest mouth or entry of the riuer of CantoÌ„ through the which y e great Iuncoâ— that is the Spanish shippes for marchandise doe passe where our ships I meane the Portingals may likewise passe through and on the West point of this Iland halfe a mile southward lieth certaine stone Cliffes betwéen the which and the Iland it is al déep faire ground as also along by the Iland on the south side beyond these stony cliffes to seaward there lieth certaine smal Ilands and beyond these Ilands somewhat further to seaward there lieth other great Ilands but you must not passe betwéene the aforesaid stony cliffes and the small Ilands but betwéen the smal the great Ilands you may fréelie passe without feare From Macau 4. miles southeastward lieth a great and high Iland being deuided in â— parts by a small running water out of the sea a farre off sheweth like a ship hauing neither trees nor bushes and halfe a mile from thence towardes the land there is an other long Iland with trees in the middle of the channel between these 2. Ilands in the entrie thereof on the side of Macau lyeth a rock or cliffe which the water washeth ouer which you must shunne for all the rest is fair and good way From this great Iland that deuideth it self in 2. parts 6. miles Eastsouth east lyeth an other long high Iland with a very black shining wood of trees called ToÌ„quion and froÌ„ thence half a mile to seaward lieth a row of 10. or 12. Ilands or cliffes you must run betwéene them and the land where it is faire ground or if you will you may passe outward to sea from all the Ilands from this Ilande aforesaid to the land about a myle or thereabouts distant from it lyeth an other low long Iland with trees in the middle of the channell betwéene these 2. Ilands there lieth an Iland or cliffe and an other by the Iland that lieth by the land betwéen this cliffe in the middle of the channell the Iland that lieth to seaward it is déepe faire and on the Eastnortheast point of the Iland to seaward on the land side there is a small créeke or bay where there is a good harbar for the Monson of the south winds and there is likewise good fresh water rouÌ„d about this Iland Tonquion it is all faire ground but turning again to the great Iland with the sharpe pointed top lying in the mouth of the Riuer of Canton from the west point of the same Iland â— or 8 miles eastsoutheast lieth a great high long Iland which reacheth northwest Southeast is altogether without trées or bushes from the Southeast point of the same Iland half a mile to seaward lyeth an other round high Iland and the channel that runneth between them is faire and good on the north-northeast side of this great Iland from the middle thereof to the land there lieth 2. or 3. long cloueÌ„ Ilands or rockes close by of a reddish earth without any trees betwéene the Northwest end of the aforesaid Iland the land runneth a smal channel through the which the small Bancoins which are the Chinish barkes or lighters doe passe From Canton to the aforesaid Ilande the water maketh a gulfe or créeke through this Countrie you passe when you come from Iapon From this round Iland from the mouth that is betwéene both 7. myles Eastnortheast the land hath a point with a high and eueÌ„ land vpon it ful of black shinning bushes hauing on the Westsouthwest side a still stéepe land and on the Eastnortheast side it is all Valleyes From this land there runneth a poynt into the sea and right against this point about the length of a harquebuse shot there lyeth a great long Iland reaching as the coast doth The channell betwéene this point and the Iland aforesaid is scarse 3. fadome déep within the poynt towardes the land on the Westsouthwest syde there are many and good roads to anker for the Monson of China at 7. 8. fadome déepe muddie ground I haue layne there at anker comming from the Iland of Iapon came through the aforesaid smal channel here al the Ilands called As Ilhas de Canton or the Ilands of Canton do end this way from the 2. aforesaid Ilands to this poynt or hooke of land maketh a golfe by meanes of the great Creeke al this crosse way is faire and good and when it is any hard wether then there goeth a verie hollow water speciallie close by the Channel of the two Ilandes From this poynt of the land aforesaid and the poynt of the Iland 6. miles along by the coast lieth a creeke with certaine Ilands and cliffes in the mouth thereof on the eastnortheast side which are good defence against stormes foule wether there you haue victuails other necessaries and being â— miles to seaward there lieth a stony rocke or cliffe y t a farre off sheweth like a shippe vnder sayle lying vnder 22. degr ½ this coast along by the sea is sandie strand inward béeing a high land it reacheth eastnortheastward to a point of land lying fifteene myles from the poynt Lamon you may anker al ouer and is in distance to this point of land 18 miles you must vnderstand that from the countrie lying at the end of the Ilands of Canton to the Iland Lamon 18. miles to seawarde there lyeth certaine sandes and riffes of red saÌ„d which at low water are vncouered in the which place all the fishermen of that country do meete all the aforesaid sandes and riffes are close without any channell or passage from the aforesaid point of land lying fifteene miles from the Iland Lamon to the Enseada dos Camoriins that is the creeke of Garnaet by the Chinaes called Caiâ—to lying full vnder 25 degrees and ½ you run along the coast northeast and southwest and northeast and by north and southwest and by south without all the points and hookes it is in course 86. miles and turning againe to the point from thence to Lamon are 15. miles and 10 miles from the
the small Islands the Island This Island is called Lanquyn From this Island Lanquyn fiue miles North and North and by East there are many Ilandes lying togither both great and small with some Trées but thinne and lowe reaching along the coast about ten myles forward the first lie close by each other to Seaward vpon a row The channels betwéene these ilands are thrée fadome deepe some lesse muddie ground if you haue occasion to séeke for succour in that place with the windes of the monson of China you may anker in the mouthes of those Channels where you may lie safe but in those Monsons or coniunctions of times there is no foule weather in the course of the generall windes you shall not passe from this first rowe of Islands lying to Seaward to the land for it is all bankie ground full of Sandie places for the déepest place is but two fadome On the north-Northeast side inward from these Islands there are two other Islands lying along by the Lande which reach Northeast and Southwest whereof the Southwest Island is greater and higher then that to Landward The Channell betweene them is déepe and faire muddie ground The ground of the issue on the north-Northeast side of this Channell is all Corall and Kesell stone hauing many Ilands and stonie cliffes Here the streams runne strongest with the Monsons of the winde A mile or more Eastward from these two Islands there is a good and faire sea and ground it is verie dangerous to passe with great ships betwéene these Ilands for you can not passe On the Lande right against these Ilands there is a Hauen called Hunchon and the Islandes are called Lyon From this first Island of Lyon to the point of Sumbor are about thirtéene miles and you runne as aforesaid Northeast and Southwest These islands reach within three miles of the point of Sumbor but in the middle way they are lesse and more distant from each other and before you come néere the point of Sumbor by sixe miles there is an Island of Reddish earth with two hilles like two men and in the middle there is a valley which reacheth Northwest and Southeast On the Southeast side it hath a good Hauen for the windes of the Monson of China This Iland is a good marke for them that come from Iapon The point of Sumbor reacheth a great way into the sea it is a thicke land with a high rising backe it hath on the end of the Southwest point close by a long and high Island and from the north-Northeast point of this Island lyeth an Island or Cliffe making betwéene this Island and the aforesaid point a verie narrow channell where the countrey shippes do passe through inwardes from the Southwest side and from the Island the land maketh a great Créeke which in compasse is about foure great miles two miles from the point Southwestward there lieth two or thrée small Islands As you come outward to these Islands there is déepe and faire ground but from thence to the point and all ouer the Créeke it is all shallowe so that at lowe water it is drie and you may sée the muddie ground vpon the plaine of the aforesaid point on the southwest side there is a great towne where they haue many great Barkes that are made with Orloopes and nayled wherof some are 200. Bhares great On the north-Northeast side of this point there is a Créeke running inward to the Land at this point of Sumbor the Land maketh an end or Hooke that lieth vnder 28. degrées and ¼ From this point foure miles to Seaward East Northeast there lieth two great Ilands without any trées or bushes whereof the first reacheth East West and from the East point of this Island the other beginneth which reacheth North and South the Channell betwéen them both may be a shot of a great péece broad déepe and faire This Island which reacheth East and West on the East end hath a point sticking out towardes the North in the which point there is a small Créeke of fiue or sixe fadome déepe faire ground where you may harbour in all weathers except it be with a Northwest wind The North Island on the West point hath two Islands lying on a rowe whereof the one is great the other small and some what long betwéene the which and the Island you may passe with small shippes and round about these Islands it is faire ground In this Island you haue verie good fresh water and they are called Timbasam From these Islands a mile and a halfe or two miles Northward there lieth two other small Islandes which reach East southeast West Northwest wherof the one is greater and longer than the other they lie close togither the channell betwéene them is faire déepe with harbor against North Northeast Southwest windes for I haue laine there at anker with a great storme From this point of Sumbor to Liampo you passe without the Islands North Northeast and South Southwest and the coast all high ground and from this point of Sumbor fiue or sixe miles along by the coast within the land there is a high stony Rocke which sheweth like a Monkies coule in the Island Seylon called O Capello de Frade beyond this Friers coule or stonie rocke other sixe myles forward lyeth the Hauen of Chaposy which is a Riuer of fresh water and inward it hath a great Towne lying vpon it where likewise there is a fléet of the country shippes continually kept for the security and safegard of the coast The knowledge and right tokens of this Hauen are that when you are hard by Chaposy the Sea hath some reddish leaues or Flagges driuing on the water and some péeces of réedes like Cassia Fistola or Spanish Réedes which come out of this Riuer Two miles East Southeast from this hauen to Seaward there lyeth two small and high Islands close by each other wholly without trées or bushes round about them it is twentie fadome déepe muddy ground and from the mouth of the Riuer halfe a mile from the land Southward lyeth a long Island reaching like the coast betweene this and the land it is faire muddy ground of thrée fadome déepe whereof the entry on the South side is the déepest and along by the land it is shallow From Chaposy eightéene myles forward lyeth the Island of Liampo where the Portingales vsed to Trafficke These Islands were called Sinogicam the Firme land Liampo which along by the sea side is a high land The Portingales ships doe not passe along by it but betwéene the Islands At the first you haue but few and small Islands but being past them then vpon the rowe of Islands lying furthest out into the sea you haue a very great Island with high Trées and Creekes along by the Sea coast and it is there all ouer faire and good ground and on the West side it hath a Créeke in the middle whereof there is a great and high Island betwéene
on the North side with the land of Iapon a straight or narrow passage which runneth to the Hauen of Saquay and the land of Miaco and from the side of the Island along by it there are many small Islands The course you must hold through this straight to the Hauen of Saquay or Sacay is altogether along the coast and the land of Iapon which hath many and good Hauens At the end of this straight both these lands haue each of them a point of land sticking out being from the one to the other about a mile by the point of the land of Toca it is banky ground and all the people of this land on the North side are not in any sort to bée trusted Likewise you may passe from the South side of this Island Toca to the land of Myaco where all along it is good sayling and there are very good Hauens The first hauen whereof lyeth on the first point of land on the West side of the Island which close by it hath certaine Islands and Cliffes this Hauen is called Focora it hath a good harbour for all windes but not for Rouers for there they haue many Foistes wherewith they roue and steale At the East end of this Island Toca lying with the land of Iapon right ouer against it there is another straight or passage like that on the West side where you runne to the Hauen and Town of Sacay In the middle way from the aforesaied East side of Toca lyeth a Hauen called Aâ—â— which is inhaâ—â—ted by a very fierce and stout people There is alwaies a great army of Foistes prepared for the warres wherewith they robbe and spoyle all the Coast along The Shippes and Foistes that desire to passe through it asking leaue they may passe without let or hinderance On the East side aforesaid the land of Iapon reacheth much southward making a hooke or end called Cumano and the coast that reacheth thether is called Bandol It hath some Hauens that were inhabited by very rich and mightie people but they are neither secure nor free The Hauen of Sacay lyeth from the booke or end of the Island of Toca Northeast about nine or tenne myles This Hauen of Sacay with a West wind is harborlesse which make many great tides and hath a shallow sandie ground For the which cause the Ships that come laden thether are presentlie vnladen and the people leape on land leauing the Shippe fast bound and sometimes draw it on land From the point O Cabo de Camico fiue myles to a point of land you runne along the coast North Northwest and in the way you haue foure or fiue Islands and cliffes along the coast and right ouer against the aforesaid point there lyeth two other Islands close by the land hauing betwéene them both a smal channel and close by both on the North and south-side sides there are many Islands and Cliffes both great and small These two Islands with the Islands and Cliffes lye East and West with the Hooke and the end of Toca vnder thrée and thirty degrées and 1 â— All this coast is high land with the Islands lying along by it and hath sixtie and seuentie fadome déepe close by the land From thence forward beginneth the straight or passage to be narrow betwéene this Island of Toca and the land of Bungo and if in this countrey you haue néede to anker then put to the land of Toca where you shall finde muddye ground When you are about the aforesaid point of two Islands then the land beginneth Westward to turne in all high land hauing within close on the South-side a small Island you must take héed of this Créeke that the streames drawe you not in being past this Créeke you shall in the middle way of the channell in the straight sée right before you a smal round Island which shall lye on the East side from you and along by the coast fiue miles you shall sée another Island lying hard by the land which to sea ward from it hath many stony cliffes and Rockes By this Island Northeastward about a myle and a halfe there lyeth two other Islands Beyond these two Islands another myle and a halfe lyeth another long Island with a flat plaine or field on the top thereof reaching Northwest and southeast the Southeast and thereof being the highest Within this Island towards the West lyeth the Creeke of Vsquy where the king of Bungo holdeth Court If you desire to put in there you shall runne towards the first Island kéeping from the aforesaid Island and the Islands and Cliffes lying by it holding your course through betweene it and the other two Islands that lye further forward being passed in by this Island and the Islands and stony Cliffes you shall see Westward within the Créeke a great round and a high Island full of Trées wherevnto you shall runne alwaies kéeping néerer the two Islands then the Island of stony Cliffes for by the Iland of Stony Cliffes you haue seuentie fadome déepe and within the two Islands Westward you finde but 25 fadome muddy ground holding your course in that manner to the aforesaid Islands that lye in the Créeke kéeping on the North side for there it is faire and cléere and being right against this Island you shall find twenty fadome déepe where you shall anker that from them you may sée the hauens which are two the one lying a smal mile from this Island towards the Southwest by a point of land whereon there standeth sixe or seuen trées seperated one from y e other with some bushes you must put to this point which within it hath a small Bay or Créeke at the end whereof standeth a riffe of stone reaching from thence into the Sea in the which lyeth the aforesaid small Créeke which hath a very good harbour at thrée fadome déepe good and fair ground where you shall anker but it is not for great shippes The other Hauen is Northwestward on the other side of the Créeke hauing in it some Islands and stones it is a great Bay which runneth inward to the land making a bow with very good harbor This hauen is for great ships From this Créeke of Vsquy somewhat further Northward lyeth another great Creeke which runneth inwards West Northwest The Land and the point betwéene these two Créekes may bee from the one Sea to the other about the length of the shot of a great Péece in breadth and halfe a myle from the end of the point Westward on the South side lyeth a small Island close by the Land betwéene the which and the land runneth a channell of twelue fadome deepe with faire ground of great sand where I haue ankered Right ouer against this Island on the Northwest Land about the length of the shotte of a great Péece lyeth a small Creeke with a village called Sanganaxeque where Don Francesco Mascharenhas lay with his shippe for the monson This hauen with a northwest wind is harbourlesse From this Créeke
about halfe a myle forward you beginne to haue lowe land with sandie strands and Trées all along the Sea coast By all this coast and the low land it is all bankey grounds wherfore you must keepe from it about halfe a myle In the middle way of this lowe land there lyeth two mouths or entries of Riuers that are very shallow whereby you may not enter into them by any meanes and at the end of this low land you haue a riuer of fresh water of twelue Spannes in the Hauen at a Spring tide and within the Riuer at lowe Water the Shippes lie drie being sandy ground Close by the Roade or entry of this Riuer lyeth a Village called Aquina Fama Halfe a myle within the Land vpon the Riuer lyeth the greatest and mightiest Towne in all the Kingdome of Bungo where the Kings in time past held their Courts where now all the Marchaunts of the Countries round about it who are very rich and aboundant in wealth are resident From this Riuer vpon the other side of the Creeke lyeth a very good Hauen with harbour against all windes it is a small Bay for the points or heights therof doe runne through each other wherefore they make a good defence against the South windes The entry of this hauen is faire you need but run in through the middle of the Channell where you haue foure and a halfe and fiue fadome deepe and there you haue great furtherance for you runne in before the winde with the South Monson and you put out againe before the winde with the North Monson to vnderstand it well you must know that all this Countrey as also all China Malacca India and all the orientall places doe sayle with the coniunction of the windes which for certaine months together blowe out of one place as now in the North then in the South and that at certaine times and dayes in the yeare without fayling which coniunction is called as in other places I haue said the Monson as Monson of the South winde that is when the wind bloweth out of the South and monson of the North Windes in like sort wherewith through all India they make their accounts to passe from the one place to the other And because in this description there is oftentimes mention made of some Hauens Creekes Riuers Bayes and Islands where you haue good harbor for the Monson of the North and South Windes when they blowe which is to bée vnderstoode that if they bée against you in the way you should hold you should know which hauen is good to stay in for that time or to winter in for in the East Countries you must Winter when the winde is against you so that you cannot holde on your voyage and of force you must stay for the wind and weather that is the Monson which serueth you and where you haue a good harbour to stay for the Monson that you must haue and then to follow on your voyage Wherefore I thought it necessary to set this downe that you might the better vnderstand the meaning of the Portingall and Indian Pilotes that first set downe noted and obserued these courses and Nauigations vsing here the same manner and description of the countrey not chaunging the word of Monson although that in some places before I haue saied some thing thereof But to the matter you must knowe that the aforesaid Hauen or Bay is called Fingy but it is not free from Rouers and theeues From the aforesaid Riuer to this Hauen there is about three myles crosse-waies In the Roade of the Riuer it is twenty fadome deepe close by the land but it is bad ground and there it is not good to stay for the windes for there you could not saue any thing From this point you may see the East land and at the end where this great Creeke endeth it is low land which is called Mâ—ryee and is all along faire and cleare The aforesaid Riuer and Towne lye vnder 33 degrees and â— From this point or end of Mâ—ryee two myles further there is another point of land which lyeth with this point North and South it is a low land with sandie strands at the end whereof lyeth certaine stones and Rockes from thence forward you runne Northward along the coast and a myle beyond it there is a Village called Tamboca and another myle further lyeth another place called Tambico lying both on the Sea side but they haue no Hauens with harbours also the people of the same places are not to bee trusted Beeing right against this point of Land you shall along the coast see a long Island which a farre off sheweth like two Islands lying distant from the land about two myles it is called Fimexima betwéen this Island and the land it is all shallows from the point of the Créeke of Bungo to this Island aforesaid All this coast along for the space of a great myle is bankey ground Riffes Stones and other filth All this way from the beginning of the Kingdome of Bungo to this Island you must runne on the East side along by the land of Tocaa From this Island of Fimexima aforesaid nine myles Northward there is a very high Lande which reacheth East and West that is the land of Amanguchen a great mighty and rich country for therein is one of the mines of siluer of the countrey of Iapon In this coast are good Hauens as also the Island of Meagima which in times past before the Portingales trauelled to Iapon had great Trafficke for there was the staple of all the countrey of Iapon for all kindes of wares and Marchandises Along by this land of Amaguchen and the country of the Island Fimexima aforesaid beginneth the straight or passage to Facunda of the which as also the other places thereabouts I will speake in another place together with the Nauigation and scituation thereof To sayle from the point of Moryee in the Créeke of Bungo to the Hauen of Caminaxique lying in the country of Amanguchen which is very sure and good for all winds and of great Trafficke you shall holde your course north-Northeast and north-Northeast and by East being about sixtéene myles This Lande which you goe vnto is very great and high and you runne all the aforesaid coast along to a Hooke or point of Lande East and West and East and by North and West and by South and from the Hauen of Caminaxique to the aforesayed Point about fortie Portingale myles whereof seuentéene and ½ make a degrée as all the myles in this description likewise doe in the which coast lyeth the Hauens hereafter following that is from Caminaxique to Toraque are about two myles and â— from Toraque to the Island Meagima are sixe myles and a halfe The Roade of this Island is betwéene it and the Firme Lande from Meagima to Camangary are a myle and a halfe from thence to the Island of Anooxyma are fiue myles From Anooxyma to Toumoo are also fiue miles
Islands and Cliffes and a great Créeke At the issue of the Straight of Arima sixe miles forward lyeth an Island close by the coast called Cambexima which is a great high land hauing on the Sea side close by it foure or fiue Islands or cliffes and betwéene this Island and the Firme land there is a good harbour and in the same Island there is a village with many people with a good small Créeke or Hauen where many Fisher boats Foists doe lie from thence begin the Islands of Firando From this Island Cambexima fiue or sixe miles forward there is a point of land sticking out with many Islands and cliffes that reach from the land into the sea you must run to the same point northwestward This way from Cambexima to the aforesaide point of land is all one créeke because the land windeth inward and because that on this coast of Iapon commonly at such time as you goe thither it is cloudie mistie weather therefore you can hardly discerne the scituation of the land but if it be cléere weather you shall presently see the point sticking out that hath the Island and Cliffes at the end thereof but if it be cloudie and mistie weather then you must not saile along the coast but hold your course half a strike from the Northwest as aforesaid when you are hard by it you shall presently discouer all the Islands and cliffes The furthest to seaward of these Islands cliffes are two Islands separated from each other betwéene high and lowe and longer then round wholly without Trées and that which lyeth furthest to seaward hath two riffes reaching out from it one lying Eastward the other West Northwest about halfe a myle by the East Iland of these aforesaid two Islands as I was tolde if is faire and good ground close to it as it séemeth to be And vpon the North side it hath the harbour for the Monson of the South windes and if you haue occasion you may anker there From these aforesaide two Islandes to the lande there lyeth two Islandes or Cliffes in forme like two Pillars betweene these Cliffes and another Channell which the Islands begin to open before you many Iuncos or Chinish shippes doe passe laden with merchandises to Fâ—rando and the Hauen of Vmbra notwithstanding you shall leaue all these Islands or Cliffes on the East side or your right hand running about halfe a mile to Seaward from them and béeing right ouer-against these Islands then three or foure miles further in the same course of North Northwest there is another point of an Island stretching right Westward from the Land being a high and flat land on the top and in the first appearance it séemeth like three Islands although it is but one for it hath two broken partes and by that meanes maketh a shewe of thrée Ilands From the point of this Island thrée miles Westward to seaward you shall see a round Island hauing close by it a long small Island and if it be cléere weather West Southwest or West you shall see the Island of Goto which is very high and great with many rentes and clouen peeces on the toppe being all euen and flat ground When you sée the Island aforesaid that sheweth like three Islandes then runne straight vpon the point thereof that sticketh outward and if the tide chance to be against you with slatâ—e winde then the water by this point sticking out of the aforesaid Iland maketh a great roaring and hath much scumme so that it séemeth to be shallows which the water breaketh vpon notwithstanding it is all ouer faire and deepe therefore you may fréely put towards it without feare keeping a little from the point and in this manner passing about the point then you must saile along where you haue a great and good creeke where you shall put in till you find ten or eleuen fadome deepe it is hard ground where you may anker at pleasure it hath a good harbour for the winds of the Monson and being there you shall presently haue Barkes and Foâ—stes enough aboord your shippe that will bring you to Firando In the same créeke inward Eastward there is a Rode to anker with good harbour for all winds Likewise the length of the shotte of a great péece Northeastwarde lieth another Hauen that hath a good harbour for all winds wherein there may lie more ships then in the East Rode aforesaid If you chance to come into this country at such time as that you feare any foule weather then you may fréely lie in any of these Hauens where you lie safe from rouers and théeues that may come thither This Iland that seemeth to be thrée is called Faquyn and from thence to the Iland Firando are fiue miles From this Iland Faquyn if it be cléere weather you may well sée the Iland of Firando Northward from it but because for the most part you there find cloudie and mistie weather there is no certaintie but from the hauen where you lie you shall presently see a high and round Iland with some stonie rockes about it about halfe a mile from the rode of the aforesaid coast where you lie which reacheth North Northeast and North by West about two miles and a halfe from you you shall sée another long high and flatte Iland clouen in the middle and so sheweth to be two Ilands stretching East and West About halfe a mile from this iland lieth a great round Cliffe betwéene this Cliffe and the round Ilande that lyeth halfe a mile from the Hauen of the aforesaid Iland there is a great créeke which maketh a chanell through the which you passe to the Hauen of Vmbra and when you sée the Island that sheweth like two Ilands runne right vpon it to the Hooke or end thereof lying in the East to the which you shall go within the shot of an arrow as also by the great Cliffe that lyeth Eastward from you running inward then you shall sée a verie long land which is the coast that maketh the strait or channell betwéene the land and the Iland of Firando you must shunne all the land that lieth on the East side for it is all ouer foule ground as you passe about by the aforesaid Iland which is called Caroxyma leauing it on the West side about the length of the shot of an arrowe from the ende thereof you shall sée two Islandes whereof that Westwarde is long the other lying right before you béeing rounde hauing a stonie Cliffe which you must shunne and then presently you shall sée two other Cliffes which shall all lie Westward from you and béeing there you shall sée the Island of Firando lying before you being about two small miles from you you may fréely make towardes it for it is all ouer faire and passe aboue the coast of the Firme lande that lieth Eastward When you are by the Islands and cliffes then there are certaine small Channels which you shall shunne kéeping close
the Hauen of Macau along by the Island of China to the Island of Fyrando and the Islands lying about it to the Hauen of Vmbra in the coast of Iapon with a description of other Hauens lying thereabout where they ordinarily vse to trafficke IF you desire to Saile out of Macau towardes Iapon in the Monsons of Iune and Iulie and if in setting out you can not kéep to loofeward from a cliffe which you may easily perceiue lying by Macau which sheweth like a saile you neede not feare it for that leauing the Island Lanton on the Lée side you may runne whither you will for it is all faire and you need not feare any thing when yea are without the Island you shall hold your course towardes the Island Branco that is the white Island or the white Stonie Cliffes running East Northeast towardes the Island of Lamon and if you haue a faire winde and that you depart about Euening from the said Island then on the Firme land you shall sée a great high Land on the East side descending somewhat flat and in the middest thereof hauing a round houell like a loofe of bread The depthes all along by that coast about two miles from it is thirtie and fiue and thirtie fadome deepe being muddie ground From Ilha Branco to Lamon there are diuers small Islandes lying by the coast of the Firme Land In this place for twelue miles or thereabouts on this side Lamon and seuen or eight miles from the Firme land there is small black sand with some shels at seuen and twentie and eight and twentie fadomes water and being there you shall stil runne East Northeast although you see no land for that hauing the aforesaid depth and ground you passe fréely and safely from the Riffe of the island Lamon and if it so fall out that you see no land yet by the depthes and ground you may well know where you are for from the island Lamon to Macau the depthes of the aforesaid ground is from 25. to 28. fadome déepe and by Lamon and thereabouts the ground is white small and thinne with some blacke sande and if you chance to passe by it in close and darke weather then you shall hold your course as aforesaide East Northeast for it is the best way and when you make towardes the island of Lamon and finding the depthes of fifteene or sixtéene fadome it is a signe that you are farre to seaward for in that country the streame runneth very strong East Southeastward there as then you must runne Northeastward so to holde your right course And running at the depthes of fiue and twentie or eight and twentie fadome sandie ground it is a good way holding your course East Northeast for in that sort you are in the right way in the middle way from the channell when you are past the Island of Lamon towardes Chinchon then the streame runneth with you and hauing the wind of the Monson the next day you shall sée land on both sides whereof that you find on the Stearebord side is the end or point of the Island Lequeo Pequeno or small Lequeo and the beginning of the Island called Ilha Fermosa that is the faire Island and on the lareboord side the Lande lyeth in forme like a hooke although it is none but it is the Island of A Ilha dos Cauallos of the Island of Horses which is very high lying vnder fiue and twenty degrées and a third part on the one side about foure or fiue miles to Sea-ward from it hauing the Island of Baboxyn and hauing séene this Lande you must holde your course Northeastward which is a good way so to runne outward of all the Islands for that from this Island of Horses forward to the Cape of Sumbor there are many Islands reaching into the Sea wherfore this is your best course to goe to the Cabo de Sembor and as you thinke you are right against y e Cape of Sumbor although you sée it not you need not feare it for that as then you are about eight or ten myles from it Being in this country you shall holde your course Northeast so to sée the Island of Puloma or Meaxuma or the Island Guoto for it is a good course for the winds of the Monson or if you haue any stormes or contrary winde whereby you cannot holde your right course then you must gouerne your selfe in such manner that you may fall againe into your right course and so to sée some of those Islands This aforesaid Island of Puloma lyeth North North-east and South Southwest with the Island Guoto about tenne or twelue miles distant from each other and is deuided into foure or fiue parts with many holes péeces of ground round about it yet you need not feare for close by it there are many other péeces of ground which I knowe as hauing seene them all From this Island aforesaid to the Hauen of Vmbra or the Island of Firando you must runne your course of north-Northeast wherewith you shall sée the land lying beneath Vmbra which is very high hauing along y e coast many small Islands among the which are two Cliffes that sticke out with very hard sharpe Points like Diamonds From thence to Vmbra are sixe or seuen miles and being there about a mile from the Lande you shall holde your course North and so runne along by the coast and being by it you shall kéepe close to it to know the Lande and markes thereof which are these that when you are close by the Land on the right hand there is a Point of Land from whence there lyeth two Islandes to Seaward which is hard by the entry of Vmbra for from this Point inward you runne north-Northeast towards it Vpon this Hooke or point are three Pine Trees and being right against this point to Sea-ward from it on the left hand you shall sée a smal Island with a round cliffe you must runne within this Cliffe whereby right before you shall see the land of Vmbra When you perceiue a great Island or Cliffe which is very plaine and descending downeward lying inward to Sea then on the Lande side you shall sée great store of wéedes driuing vpon the Water This Island you must leaue on the Lareboord or left hand running betweene it and the Land for it is about halfe a myle broad From this Island to the mouth or entry of the channell are two miles with a Northeast course whereby you shall presentlye sée the entry which is very broad From this Island or Cliffe there runneth a stony rocke reaching to the mouth of the Riuer some part of it lying aboue water and part couered yet you may plainely sée it so that you néed not feare any thing but that you sée before your eies Betweene this Rocke and the Lande on the right hand in the middle way there is fiftéene or 18 fadome déep muddy ground when you see the mouth of the Channell you must put right
towards it without feare for it is a very good way And being within this straight or channell whereby you discouer the Riuer then you must holde your course on the right hand whereby you shall presently sée a round Island hauing a Crosse on the toppe thereof and although you sée not the entry yet you must put towards that Island for when you are right against it then you shall preently see the Road wherein the shippes doe lye as also a Portingale Church standing vpon the Lande and béeing within you must runne South-warde about the length of the shot of a great Péece where you may anker at tenne fadome déepe being very good muddye ground and there you shall make your Shippe fast on the North Northeast and South South-west sides and euen as the Winde dooth blowe you shall winde the Béeke heade of the shippe making the ankers fast vnder the stones for there it is very narrowe Notwithstanding you néed not feare although the wind be great Take héed when you come from Cabo de Sumbor from y e coast of China towards the land of Iapon although you see not the Islands aforesaid leaue not your course of Northeast vntill you be vpon the coast of Iapon for although you fall by the Hauen of Arima which is twelue miles from Vmbra you néede not care for in those places you haue very good Hauens By the Hauen of Arima aforesaid there lyeth an Island somewhat néerer the North then the South called Cabexuma which on the inside hath a very good Hauen where you may lye and Trafficke freely And if from thence you desire to runne further inward then holde your course North Northeast and north-Northeast and by North wherewith you shall come to a Hauen called Cochinochy lying in the Kingdome of Arima and departing from Cabexuma you shall runne along by the Northpart of the land about seuen or eight myles whereby you shall come right against Cochinochy which is a better hauen then Vmbra because therein the Shippes may anker at pleasure and before you come néere this Hauen many Shippes and Barkes will come aboord you shippe which wil fréely bring you in and you néed not feare the creeke of Arima for the old Pilotes were in doubt thereof because they knew it not so well as I for that I haue sayled all within and about it with a Foist with trouble ynough Right against Cochinochy lyeth another very good Hauen called Oxy belonging to the King of Bungo where you may freely trafficke You need not feare the entry of Arima for that besides the hauens aforsaid wherin you may lye safely there will many Foystes and Barkes come and boord you Shippe that will bring you whether you will and helpe you to your desire You must likewise vnderstand that along by the coast of China you need not feare any thing for it is all faire and good ground keeping without all the Islands for if you goe betwéene them you should hardly get out againe to your desire therefore it is best for you to keepe without them running along by them and so there is no feare for it is all faire way as well to the Island Firando as to the Hauen of Vmbra onely that Firando lyeth seuen or eight myles North-ward from the Hooke or Point of Trées and being there you shall presently sée Firando and in putting forward to it you find a Varella that is a marke of a sharpe stony hill then you shall gouern your selfe as aforesaid for then you may presently perceaue it being a very high land which stretcheth East Northeast West Southwest in the middle way hauing many small Islands with channels betwéene them thereby to runne from the one side to the other but if you wil go from the Island of Cabexuma to Vmbra you must alwaies kéepe close to the land for in the Island of Diamonds or pointed Island there is another very good hauen where as soone as you are in sight thereof many Barkes and Foists will boord you and so bring in your Shippe The Hauens in those countries are these that follow as well in the Land of Iapon as the Islandes lying about it whereof in this description I haue alreadie made mention First in the Island of Cabexuma there is a very good Hauen also Cochinochy lying in the Kingdome of Arima is a better Hauen The Hauen of Oxy right against Cochinochy is also a better Hauen In the Island called O Ilha do Diamon that is the Island of the Diamond because of the sharpe pointed Rocke there is likewise a very good Hauen which is part of the Lande of Vmbra also the Hauen of Vmbra is a good Hauen The 35. Chapter A short description of the course from Macau in China to Iapon and the Island Cabexuma to the Hauen of Langasaque or Nangasache which at this day is most frequented of the Portingales with all the courses and scituations by an expert Pilote with a declaration of the winds called Tuffon AS soone as you are past y e Island of Ilha do Leme which lyeth as you come out from Macau then hold your course East northeast wherby you shal passe about the Island of Lamon and if it be in the night time you shall cast out your Lead and find two and twenty and thrée and twenty fadome déep with shels and blacke sand on the ground and then you are right against the Riffe and when you are past it you shall finde white and small sand Then holding your course Northeast and Northeast and by East alwaies kéeping from the coast of Chinchon as much as you may for the best way is to runne in the middle of the channell as far from the Island of fishers as from the coast of Chincheo And if you goe néerer the Island of Fishers called A Ilha dos pescadores you shall finde lesse depth and therefore you must look to your course and when you are past the Island Lamao cast out your Lead because of the Island of fishers And if in those countries you haue a storme with the winds called Tuffon and come from the Northeast parts then hold your course to Seaward as much as you may to shunne the coast for the wind without doubt will be southeast which is right vpon the coast whereby it lyeth right against you and if it driueth you not vpon the coast then it were best for you to strike all your sayles and take them in and so lye driuing vntil the wind come South and then to follow on your course againe I giue you this counsell because that for the space of two yeares one after the other I haue béen in those countries with storms of the winds called Tuffon so that one voiage we were almost cast away by séeking to put vnto the coast Nowe to vnderstand the meaning of this word Tuffon it is a Chinish word which the Portingales also doe holde without altering the same and signifieth a storme or Tempest
which you commonly finde in those voyages from China to Iapon If you faile of it at sometime it is not often it commeth and beginneth from one point and so runneth with a continuall storme almost about all the points in compasse blowing most stiffely whereby the poore Sailers haue worke ynough in hande and in such sort that not any stormes throughout all the orientall Indies is comparable vnto it wherefore it is necessary to looke well to it and to chuse your times that by calmes sodainely you bee not vnaduisedly ouertaken as euery man that hath sayled those wayes can sufficiently showe you and euery one or most part of them haue found it to be so When you are right against the Island A Ilha Fermosa then runne Northeast by the which course you shall goe right vpon the straight of Arima which is a good way and as soone as you finde ground on the loofe side and haue seuentie fiue fadome water then you shall goe right vpon the middle of the Island of Meaxuma and hauing lesse depth then your course is not good but of force you must séeke another course to sayle the better but being too loofeward it is good especially when you see the Island Sancta Clare which is a smal Island on the north-Northeast side thereof hauing two or thrée Cliffes and somewhat farther forward the Island Coâ—aquyn which is very great being deuided into thrée parts I haue passed by the land side thereof which is a very good way and there you néede not feare any thing but onely certaine stones that lye along by the Island which you may easily perceiue for the Sea breaketh vpon them You must holde your course along by it leauing the stones on the larboorâ— side about the length of the shot of a Base from you and when you are past them then kéepe aloofe as much as you may inward to Sea thereby to shunne thrée Islandes or Cliffes which lye on the other side right ouer against the thicke and great Lande for betwéene them and it it is all full of Riffes And therefore your best course is to runne to Seaward from the Island of Coiaquyn in the middle way from the aforesaid great thicke Lande that lyeth before the Islandes or Cliffes of the Riffes lyeth the Hauen of Amacusa which is very great where the Créeke of Arima beginneth From thence North North westward from you you shall presently sée the Island of Cabexuma When you are right against Cabexuma somewhat beyond it you shall sée sixe Islands or Cliffes which you shall passe on the Sea side and then East-warde and East and by North you shall sée the Island called Ilha dos Cauallos or of Horses which on the Sea side hath a great houell and on the other side towardes the Island of Firando two Cliffes lying along by the coast which shew like two Ships vnder sayle Also further forward towards Firando there is two flat Islands lying along the coast called the Islands of Resting as that is the Islands of Riffes If when you come out of the Sea you haue cause to anker before you put into the Hauen being by the Islands or Cliffes then put out newe Cables making them fast that you loose not your ankers for there it is very déepe and sharpe Being right against the aforesaid six or seuen Islands or Cliffes then runne right vpon the Island Dos Cauallos and when you are by it that is inward of the point You shall along by the Island sée a Sand aboue the water all the other Islandes and Cliffes that you shall sée shall lye on the lareboord side which is vpon the side of the Island Facunda and so you shall runne till you enter into the Hauen of Langasaque hauing nothing to feare then that you sée before your eyes for there you haue both Sea and ground as it is vpon the coast of Spaine The 36. Chapter A voyage made from Macau in China to the hauen of Langasaque or Nangasache in the Island of Iapon in the shippe called the S. crus the captaine being a Portingall called Francisco Pais and the Gunner Dericke Geritson of Enchuisen in the yeare of our Lord 1585 written by the Pilote of the same shippe THe fift of Iuly Anno 1585 vpon a Friday in the morning wée set sayle from the point that lyeth right against the Cloister of S. Frauncis minding to runne to Loofeward from a round Island or Cliffe lying East Southeast from thence but because the wind was so scant wee could not doe it so that we were forced to driue so to get through the Channell of Lanton as wee did The depth that wee found therein was from fiue to sixe fadome water and that was close by the round Island that lyeth to Seaward from the Island of Lanton and from thence forward it beginneth to bee déeper being eightéene twenty fadome and that depth wee found till wee were without the Island called A Ilha de Leme that is the Island of the Harquebush This Island of Lanton as you make towards it hath a point where the wind fell very scarce in such manner that wee could hardly kéepe of an Island lying on the left hand of the chanell if the streame had not beene so strong that it draue the shippe ouerthwart to Loofeward otherwise we had indured great labor and trouble to passe through the channell because that towards night we were about foure miles from the Island Ilha do Leme the course wee held that night was East and East and by South because wee had a sharpe wind hauing twenty and sixe and twenty fadome déep muddy ground about sunne rising wée sawe right before vs the Island of Branco or the white cliffe and because of the depths aforesaid wée gessed that we were about half a mile beyond it The sixt of Iuly being Saterday we could not take the height of the sunne because it was right ouer our heads hauing a Southeast and South Southeast wind with very hote weather by day but by night it was somewat colder we held our course East Northeast East and east and by North as the winde blewe and about noone we found fiue and twenty and seuen twenty fadome water with small black sandy ground being in sight of lande and at Sunne rising we sawe the Land of Lamon which is a long flat land like a Table or plaine field on the East Northeast side hauing a thin point of Land reaching inward to the Sea and on the West southwest side there runneth out another thinne point of sand into the sea and hard by against the thickest part thereof you sée the forme of a white place which is the Island of Lamon to Seaward whereof lyeth thrée Cliffes Lying at the end of the Riffe of the Island of Lamon there wée call forth our Leade and found 27 fadome water with small white and some blacke sand with small shels among it being about seuen or eight miles from the
began to haue more depth yet very slowly that it would haue wearied vs if the ship had gone hardly forward but because the water ranne very hollow whereby the shippe was not verie well stéered wherein we onely put our trust at the last wee had 50. and 60. fadome deepe muddie ground and then â—0 and 75. fadome with small thin sand and a little after that wée had 80. fadome deep but I beléeue that chanced because the Lead hung somewhat backewarde At that casting the ground was somewhat greater sande and because as wee made account wée were neere vnto the Island Meaxuma I presently tooke in the maine toy and myssen in contrary to the opinion of some Pilots euery quarter or â—atch in the night cast the Lead continually ouâ— and presently in the morning we hoysed the maine top-saile vp againe sailing so for a little time we saw land which was part of the Island Meaxuma although other Pilots that were in the shippe saide it was the Island of Guoto but therein they were as perfect as in all the rest of their iudgements This Island of Meaxuma in the first discouerie had a high slope lande lying lowest to the Southwest and when you are right against it at the end therof you finde a Cliffe which sheweth like a Fortresse it was told vs that not farre from that Cliffe there lieth a Cliffe vnder the water whereupon the water breaketh This Island of Meaxuma sheweth like three or foure Islands whereof the first on the Southwest side sheweth as I said before hauing on the top or vttermost part thereof two round Houels like womens breasts or like a saddle the other two Islandes or likenes thereof in the middle way are like great Cliffes with many rockes and crags sticking out like Organ pipes and the other Island or likenes of an Island lying Northeast sheweth like a verie long but not ouer high cliffe we ranne along by the Island holding our course north-Northeast about two miles beyond it and when we left Meaxuma because the winde ranne Southeast then we ranne north-Northeast Northeast and by East and East Northeast and in the morning they said that we had the length of the land of Amacula and being to Leeward we espied a great thicke land lying close by the Island Cabexuma This Island Cabexâ—ma is long flat land verie smooth on the North side hauing a Cliffe this was the last of Iuly and the same day wée entred into the Hauen of Langasâ—que which is the Hauen place where at this day the Portingales haue their most trafficke The 37. Chapter The right markes of the Island Meaxuma as well by the depthes as by the opening of the land with an aduertisement how you shall put into the Hauen and in the Rode of Langasaque or Nangasache in the land of Iâ—pan FIrst when you are at seuentie fiue fadome water you must go right vpon the middle of the Island and seeing Land at that depth it will be a high plaine steepe land but not verie great on the vppermost part thereof hauing two pâ—ps and when you goe néere it you shall presently sée another long land béeing flat and euen on the toppe betwéene them both hauing two great cliffes with many small lying togither which you saile close by about two miles from them this Island on the Southwest side hath a Cliffe and a little further to Seaward from it there lyeth another stonie Cliffe vnder the water whereon the Sea breaketh and at the north-Northeast end it hath another Island or Cliffe You must vnderstand that comming to Iapon and finding more depthes then aforesaid and séeing land then it is not the Island of Meaxuma but rather the Island called Sancta clara if you find lesse depth then seuentie fadome then it is Meaxuma but then it will bée on the Starrebord side The Island of Meaxuma lyeth vnder 31. degrées and 2 â— Hée that desireth to goe to Langasaque passing from this Island about two miles Eastward from it he must runne Northeast and Northeast and by East hauing a full wind but if you saile by the winde you must rather saile East Northeast with this course you shall get the Island of Cabexuma and you shall likewise sée the hilles of Amacusa as also some small cliffes lying right ouer against Cabexuma which you shall presently sée and if you desire to be put into Langasaque then you must holde along by the cliffes aforesaid to Seaward from them and béeing past those cliffes you shall presently see the end of the Island dos Cauallos or of Horses which on the Northwest ende hath certaine Pine trées you must put towardes that point and when you are right against it you shall not presently fall vpon it because of the billowes that come from ouer the Island Caffury which commonly you find most certainly in that place and when you find those billowes you shall put forwarde as much as you thinke conuenient thereby to put into the middle of the Hauen and when you are in the middle then you may fréely put on for there you haue no cause of feare and when you begin to put in then you shall presently sée the water breake vpon the stonie place which lieth as farre as to the middle way of the Island dos Cauallos so that in the entrie of Langasaque there is nothing els to doe then onely to runne in through the middle thereof till you be in the Rode where you must anker hauing foure fadome and ½ and fiue fadome water which is when a trée that is right against the great and principallest Church is euen with the toppe of the Church and you ouer against it then you are at the right place and it is a very good place to anker in but when you are hard by the point of land that commeth right from the Church you must take care to kéepe on the left hand thereby to shunne a Riffe of sand that commeth from the same point and so anker as aforesaid And if you chance by night to passe by the Cliffes aforesaid and desire to anker by them at fortie fadome as some ancient Pilots aduise you in danger of an East wind then my opinion is that you were better runne betwéene them and the Island Cabexuma and certaine Islands that lie in the ranke of the Islands dos Cauallos which is a verie broad and good channell of twentie fadome déepe and there you may wind and lauere from one bough to the other as he will so that you may anker there at twelue or fiftéene fadome which you will vpon a flat and euen ground hard by the Island Caffury wherby you are safe from the northeast to the Southeast and South béeing in more safetie and better assured in the morning to set faile betwéene the Ilands dos Cauallos and Caffury till you be in which is a verie good channell of ten fadome déepe you néed but passe right thorough the middle and to be the
make thrée The second houell which lyeth in the middle is bare wholly discouered appearing through the rocks cliffes y t lie vpon the top of y e field called Dos Paâ—anas which is in the middle of the chanel being by the last houses of the town and when you are right against y e aforesaid houses then you shal presently discouer the 3. houel so that when you are right against y e sandy point lying close by y e Varella called Dos Mandorins then the said houel is almost wholly vncouered where you shall find four fadome and a halfe déepe with a full sea of a Spring tide and as soone as you are past the sandy Point then you beginne to find more depths that is fiue and fiue fadome and a halfe and running in that sort you shall go right vpon a broken land lying on the other side ouer against the Island called Ilha do Bugio that is the Island of sea Cats When you are at the depths aforesaid then southward from you you shall sée an opening called Enseada de Gonsato vaaz which within it hath a hil on the east side which sheweth like an Island or Cliffe and on the West side it hath two Points sticking out and when those two Points are right ouer against each other theÌ„ you are in the middle of the channell and you must be carefull to sée y t they lye one right against the other for by that marke you shall runne in the déepest and best place which is at 27 Spannes of water with a spring tide as I haue found it in the time of the Monson when you saile to Iapon hauing an East winde for with a North wind you haue lesse water there Now to know when you are as farre as the banke you must vnderstande that Northward towards the Island Do Bugio there lyeth a stony cliffe which sheweth like a houell which lieth most Northward of all the rest along by the strand it hath a clouen Rocke with two Points when you haue the aforesaid stony Cliffe like a houell right ouer against the middle of the aforesaid clouen rocke then you are vpon the aforesaid banke and when the aforesaid marke standeth vneuen on the one or other side then you shall presently find more depths which shall bee thus that as you run Southeast right vpon the thickest and greatest land on the other side vntill you be at foure and fiue fadome water which is the point called Varella and desiring to passe through the east channell then you must runne Southeast and East Southeast vntill you haue discouered the Island Do Lastro wholly by the end of the Island Do Bugio then it is not good for you to runne more southward to shun the stone lying right ouer against the Varella and when you haue discouered the Island Do Lastro as I said before then you must runne along by the aforesaid stone about two cables length from it there you shall haue the depth of 28. and nine and twenty spannes of water with a spring tide and to know when you are néerest the stone it is wheÌ„ you haue wholly discouered the first cliffe of two that lye on the Northside of the Island Do Lastro and then you are about a stones cast from the aforesaid-stone at the depth aforesaid and when you haue wholly discouered the second Cliffe then you are beyond the stone you may likewise know it by another marke which is a white vlacke standing vpon the Hill which you see ouer the Towne and hath a stone which sheweth like a mans head When you bring the aforesaid white vlacke in the middle of the top of the house of Don Ioan d Almeyda then you are right ouer against the aforesaid stone and wheÌ„ you are past it it is good to make towards the land on the Southside in such sort that you leaue the two third parts thereof on the side of the town and one third part on the Southside and running in that sort you shall haue more depths then in the middle way vntill you be vpon the banke which hath no more then sixe and twenty Spannes Water with high Water of a spring tide And desiring to knowe when you begin to be right against it it is when you haue the crosse part or dore of y e great church right against the toppe of a house that standeth on the strand which commeth vpon the same way of the same dore right to the strand so that y e dore is wholly discouered there you haue seuen twenty or eight and twenty Spannes water which shall bee when you sée or discouer the clocke house or top of S. Paules church with a hill that standeth behind the same church and as soone as the said clockhouse is couered then you shall presently finde more depths as two and thirtie spannes water which is foure fadome which is right ouer against the place where you fetch fresh Water and going somewhat further forward you shall finde foure fadome and a halfe fiue fadome at a spring tide this was the Road where the shippe called S. Crus of the burthen of fourteene or sixtéene tunnes did anker and when the said ship did wind with an ebbe then the Island Do Lastro lay vncouered although it was a good way from the Land You haue a very good token or marke to know when the land on the Southside is neerest to you then you must make to the Island Do Lastro and Northward from it there is two cliffes and when those two cliffes are one against the other then you are in the déepest of the channell vntill you bee ouer the banke The 44. Chapter Of the course and streames of the water in the way from Malacca in the time of the Monson when they ordinarily trauell thether FRom the Island Pulo Catao lying on the coast of Champa part of the Land of Camboia to the Varella which is a place lying in the way from Pulo catao towards Malacca in y e same coast of Champa or Camboia y e streames run very strong towards the south from the Island Pulo Catao fiue miles forward y e streams run very strong towards the Island Champello and the créeke called A Enseada de Cauchinchina And in the monson of China when you saile from Mallacca in the months of October Nouember and December theÌ„ the streames in that part run Northwest And from the Month of Ianuary forward they run southwest that is towards the sands therfore such as trauel that way must obserue certain times and that with good aduise and as they begin to goe néere the country where the sands lie that are right against the coast of Champa betwéene them and the entery of the coast the streames run as swiftly into the south as a stone slyeth out of a mans hand But I aduise you not to goe so néere the Island Aynao that you may sée it vnlesse it be with a Northwind for with an East wind you would be
had gone thorough with the voiage The 51. Chapter A true description of the course from the Islands of Los Lucones or to the Hauen of Acapulco in new Spaine and how you should saile thither from Macau in China with a note of the commodities and profits made by the wares and merchandises of China with the scituation course times and miles of the same countries all particularly set downe for such as desire to trauell into those countries YOu shall put out of the Hauen of Manilla lying in the Island of Lucones vnder 14. degrées ½ on the North side of the Equinoctial line the mouth being Southwest in the moneths of Iune and Iuly as wind weather serueth to put out running along the coast of the same Island and betwéene the Island of Mindoro or by the East point vntill you be out of the Channell where you enter when you come out of the sea lying 100. miles from Manilla vnder 13. degrées and 1 â— betwéene the last and the furthest point of the same Island of Lucones and the point of another Island called Tandaya betwéene the which the aforesaid channell doth runne and when you are out of the Channell you must runne Eastward as long as the winde serueth which course you shall alwaies hold vnlesse the wind let you because you depart vnder 13. degrées and â…“ sailing to the hauen of Acapulco lying vnder 17. degrées but because the winde in those countries in Summer which is the time that men set saile as aforesaid is very slacke although it be the monson in such manner that when it beginneth to rise you may not hold your course Eastward as long as the winde is not Southeast you must still runne Northeast as long as you can but when it is East Southeast and East then you must wind Southward till the wind serueth to runne Northeast in this manner you saile 1700. miles to the coast of the countrey of Noua Spaigna still kéeping to seaward from the Island of Iapon as much as possibly you can because that certaine shippes that went late to Saile passing close by Iapon had stormie weather and saw the Island called A Ilha do Fogo that is the fiery Island one of them putting into the Hauen of Xaxuma in the Island of Iapon there to sane it selfe as it did therefore such as kéepe 100. miles to Seaward from it holde a good course for that running farre to Loofeward from those Islandes you fall vpon the coast of new Spaine vnder small heights but wheÌ„ you fall on the coast vnder 35. degrées there you hold a good course but when you come to it vnder 38. and 40. degrées which is the furthest lande that is discouered or knowne called El Cabo de Mendosino you shall haue great labour and paine because that there you begin to haue high and hollowe waues by reason winter is at hand as also because the shippes comming from the Island of Lucones are but easily prouided of their necessaries When you sée the coast and lande of Noua Spaigna then you beginne to haue Northwest winds which from thence is a right fore winde because you runne almost all along that coast although in some places you kéepe somewhat further off because of the créekes that are therein you runne along by the coast which is all faire and cléere till you come to the Hauen of Acapulco which is sixe or seuen hundred miles And if you desire to saile thither from Macau in China you must be ready to set saile as soone as the winde is Southwest to put out with the coniunction of the Moone in the moneths of Iune and Iuly holding your course towards the furthest point or hooke of the Island of Lucones lying vnder 20. degrées called Cabo de Boâ—ador which is nintie miles from the Hauen of Macau From the Islands called Ilhas dos Baboranes lying by the coast of the same land and Cape de Boiadar to the Island of Caâ—agon that is the Island of the Kettle you runne East and West and when you are past those Islands running betwéene them then you must holde your course as you did from the Hauen of Manilla as aforesaide alwaies keeping it as much as wind and weather will permit which is the way the Spaniards doe now meane to saile running to the Islands of Maluco and from thence crosse ouer to Noua Spaigna which is the same course that Franciscus Gualle Captaine and Pilot of the shippe that came out of Noua Spaigna into the Hauen of Macau helde from whence hee departed againe the 25. of Iuly with a Southwest wind in the time and coniunction of a full moone with whome at the same time departed the shippe of Ayres Gonsaluâ—s de Miranda which captaine Gualle is said not to haue beene longer in his voiage then thrée moneths and a halfe to the coast and from thence a moneth and a halfe more to the Hauen of Acapulco and another shippe that the same yéere set saile from Manilla was betweene eight and nine moneths at sea and in the end arriued in the Hauen of Acapulco all then being almost dead aâ— the ships in manner spoiled and another shippe was but fiue moneths on the way but the ordinary voiage is about sixe moneths little more or lesse The reason why it is better sailing from Macau then from Manilla is because there you haue no hinderances nor lets but you may presently hold on your course as you are for the space of 10â— miles froÌ„ Manilla along through the chanell till you be out wherby some shippes haue consumed so much time that it was the cause that some of them were coÌ„strained to put back againe and could not performe their voiage but being in the mouth or issue of the channell aforesaid then it is a better voiage then from Macau because it lieth 150. miles further to Loofewarde if it had not the other hindrance of comming out as I said before When the ships saile from Noua Spaigna to Manilla or Macau then they set saile in Lent alwaies sailing with a forewind with the windes called Brisas which are East and East Northeast winds which doe blowe there with the monson of the time and it chanceth often times that many of them saile 50. or 6â— daies togither without striking any of the sailes still hauing a full wind neuer seeing any land nor till this day euer any ship was cast away in those countries The shippe wherewith you will make this voiage must be very good to saile in a wind as also very well prouided of all necessaries specially a Spanish Pilot and 12. Saylors because that through all the coasts of the Orientall Indies they vse Indian Saylors as Arabians and such like that are not vsed nor can not skill of other voiages and would be verie farre to saâ—â—â— if they should be led a new course among the which it were good to haue some Spaniards such as haue sailed that
them with any Pâ—ppe but with small Foists and Barks of the countrey This shalâ—ow Channell lieth vnder 12. degrees and running thorough the aforesaid channell between the Islands Tycao and Buâ—yas as I said before we sailed Southward about 2. miles from the Island of Masbate which stretcheth East and West eight miles long being in breadth foure miles and lieth vnder 12. degrees and 1 â— in the middle thereof and is somewhat high land From the said channell betwéene Tycao and Buryas we held our course West Northwest for thirteene miles leauing the Island Masbate on the South side and the Island Buryas on the North side at the end of thirteene miles we came by an Island called Banton which is in forme like a Hat vnder 12. degrees and â…” when we had sailed the aforesaid thirtéene miles and eight miles more on the South side we left the Island called Rebuian which stretcheth Northwest and Northwest and by North and Southeast and Southeast and by South for the space of eight miles béeing high and crooked Lande whereof the North point lieth vnder 12. degrees and â— and there you finde 35. fadome deepe with white sand From the aforesaide Island of Banton Southward nine miles there beginneth and followeth three Islandes one called Bantonsilla which is a small Island in forme of a Sugar loofe the second Crymara beeing somewhat great in length reaching East and West about 2. miles the third Iâ—aa or the Isle of Goates hauing certaine Houels By all these Islandes aforesaide you may passe with all sortes of Shippes whereof the foremost lyeth Southward vnder 12. degrees and 1 â— from the Island Bantonsilla or small Bantoâ— we helde our course Northwest for the space of foure miles to the Channell betweene the Islands called de Vereâ—eâ— and the Island Marinduque the Vereâ—es lying on the South side vnder 12. degrées and ¼ which are two small Islands like two Frigâ—â—teâ— and the Island Marinduque on the North side vnder 12. degrees and â— which is a great Island stretching West Northwest and East Southeast hauing in length twelue and in breadth seuen miles On the North side with the Islande Lucon it maketh a long and small channell running somewhat crooked which is altogither full of shallowes and sandes wheâ—y no ships can passe through it The â—urthâ—â—â— point Wesâ—ward of the same Island lyeth vnder 1â— degrees and ¼ it is high lande on the East side hauing the forme of a miâ—e of brimstone or fiery hill and on the west side the land runneth downeward at the point thereof being round like a loafe of bread in the Channell betweene it and the Vereâ—es there are eighteene fadome deepe with small blacke sand From the aforesaide Channell of Vereâ—es and Marinduque we held our course West Northwest twelue miles to the lande of Mindoro to the point or Hooke called Dumaryn lying full vnder thirteene degrees fiue miles forwarde from the said Channell on the South side wee left an Island called Ilha del Maestro del Campo that is the Island of the Coronell lying vnder twelue degrées and ¼ which is a small and flat Island In this course wee had 45. fadome déepe with white sand By this point or end of the Island Marinduque beginneth the Island of Myndoro which hath in length East and west fiue and twentie miles and in breadth twelue miles whether of the furthest point Southward lieth vnder thirtéen degrées and the furthest point Northwarde vnder thirtéene degrées and 1 â— and the furthest point Westwarde vnder thirtéene degrees This Island with the Island of Lucon maketh a Channell of fiue miles broad and ten or twelue fadome déepe with muddie ground of diuers coulers with white sande Fiue miles forward from Marinduque lieth the riuer of the towne of Anagacu which is so shallowe that no shippes may enter into it From thence 2. miles further lieth the Islands called Bacco which are thrée Islands lying in triangle two of them being distant from the land about thrée hundred cubits and betwéene them and the land you may passe with small shippes and from the lande to the other Island are about two hundred cubites where it is altogither shallowes and sandes so that where the shippes may passe outward about 150. cubits from the land you leaue both the Islands on the south side running betwéen the third Island and the riuer called Rio del Bacco somewhat more from the middle of the Channell towards the Island which is about a mile distant from the other the Channell is ten fadome déepe withâ—â—ood and shelles vpon the ground the riuer of Bacco is so shallowe that no shippes may enter into it From this Island with the same course two miles forward you passe by the point called El capo de Rescaseo where wee cast out our Lead and found that a man may passe close by the land and there you shall find great strong streames and halfe a mile forward with the same course lyeth the towne of Myndoro which hath a good hauen for shippes of three hundred tunnes Three miles Northward from the same Hauen lyeth the Island called Cafaa stretching East and West béeing Hill ground From the said towne of Myndoro wée helde our course West Northwest eight myles till wée came to the point or hooke of the Sandes called Tulen lying vpon the Island of Lucon which Sande or Banke reacheth into the sea halfe a mile from the coast you must kéepe about an hundred cubites from it where you finde eight fadome water muddie and shelly ground you runne along by those sands North and North and by West for the space of two myles till you come to the riuer called Rio de Anasebo all the rest of the coast called De los Limbones to the mouth or entrie of the Baye called Manilla which are foure miles is sayled with the same course The Limbones which are Islands so called are high in forme like a paire of Organs with good Hauens for small shippes running along by the Limbones and two miles beyond them on the South side wee leaue the Islands of Fortan and foure Islands more but the thrée Islandes of Lubao which are verie lowe lying vnder thirteene 13. degrées and 1 â— and the Limbones lie in the mouth or entrie of the Baye of Manilla vnder 14. degrées and ¼ From thence wée ranne Northwest for the space of sixe miles to the Hauen of Cabite kéeping along by the land lying on the West side where it is shallowe and is called Los Baixos del Rio de Cannas the shallowes of the riuer of Réedes all along this Baye in the same course there is from ten to foure fadome deepe Beeing by the point or Hooke of Cabite then wee kept but an hundred paces from it running Southwest South Southwest South vntill wee discouered the whole mouth or entrie of the bay where wée might anker at foure fadome about two hundred cubits from the â—and and then the towne of Manilla was two
miles Northward from vs. The 53. Chapter The course and voiage of the aforesaid Franciscus Gualle out of the Hauen or Roade of Manilla to the Hauen of Macau in China with all the courses and scituations of the places SAyling out of the Hauen of Cubite lying in the Bay of Manilla wée helde our course Westward for the space of eightéene myles to the point called El Cabo de Samballes and when wée were eight miles on our way wée left the two Islandes Maribillas on the South side and sailed about a mile from them the point of Samballes aforesaid lyeth vnder fourtéene degrées and â…” being low lande at the end of the same coast of Lucon on the West side FroÌ„ the hooke or point aforesaid we ran North and North and by West for the space of fiue and thirtie miles about a mile from the coast of Lucon to the point called Cabo de Bullinao all this coast and Cape is high and Hill ground which Cape lyeth vnder sixtéene degrées and â…” From this Cape de Bullinao wée helde our course North and North and by east for fiue and fortie miles to the point called El cabo de Boiador which is the furthest lande Northward from the Island Lucon lying vnder 19. degrées The Cape de Bullinao béeing past the land maketh a great Créeke or Bough and from this Créeke the coasts runneth North to the point of Boiador béeing a land full of Cliffes and Rockes that reach into the Sea and the land of the hooke or point is high and hilly ground From the point of Boiador we helde our course West Northwest an hundred and twentie miles vntill wée came to the Island called O Ilha Branco or the white Island which is a small Island lying in the beginning of the coast and Baye of the riuer of Canton vnder two and twentie degrees hauing foure and twentie fadome browne muddie ground From the same Island Ilha Branco wee helde the aforesaide course of West Northwest for the space of sixtéene miles to the Island of Macau lying in the mouth of the riuer of Canton and maketh the riuer two mouths or entries and is a small Island about three miles great The 54. Chapter The Nauigation or course of the aforesaid Francisco Gualle out of the Hauen of Macau to new Spaine with the scituation and stretchings of the same with other notable and memorable things concerning the same voiage WHen we had prepared our selues and taken our leaues of our friends in Macau we set saile vpon the foure and twentie of Iuly holding our course Southeast and Southeast and by East beeing in the wane of the Moone for when the moone increaseth it is hard holding the course betwéene the Islands because as then the water and streames runne verie strong to the Northwest wée sayled through many narrow Channels by night hauing the depth of eight and ten fadome with soft muddie ground vntill we were about the Island Ilha Branco yet we sawe it not but by the height we knew we were past it Being beyond it we ran East southeast an hundred and fiftie miles to get aboue the sands called Os Baixos dos Pescadores and the beginning of the Islands Lequeos on the East side which Islandes are called As Ilhas Fermosas that is the faire Islandes This I vnderstood by a Chinar called Santy of Chinchon and hée said that they lie vnder 21. degrées and ¾ there it is thirtie fadome déepe although we saw them not notwithstanding by the height and depth of the water we knewe we were past them Being past the faire Islands we held our course East and East and by North for two hundred and sixtie miles vntill we were past the length of the Islands Lequeos sayling about fiftie myles from them the said Chinar told me that those Islandes called Lequeos are very many and that they haue many and verie good Hauens and that the people and inhabitants thereof haue their faces and bodies painted like the Bysayas of the Islands of Lucon or Philippinas and are apparelled like the Bysayas and that there also are mines of gold He said likewise that they did often come with small shippes and Barkes ladeâ—â— with Buckes and Hartes bides and with gold in graines or verie small pieces to traffique with them of the coast of China which he assured me to be most true saying that he had béene nine times in the small Island bringing of the same wares with him to China which I beléeued to be true for that afterward I enquired thereof in Macau and vpon the coast of China and found that he said true The furthest or vttermost of these Islands both Northward and Eastward lie vnder 29. degrées Béeing past these Islands then you come to the Islandes of Iapon whereof the first lying West and South is the Island of Firando where the Portingales vse to trafficke they are in length altogether a hundred and thirty miles and the furthest Eastward lyeth vnder two and thirty degrées we ran still East and East and by North vntil we were past the said a hundred and thirty miles All this information I had of the aforesaid Chinar as also that there I should sée some mynes of Brimstone or fiery Hils being seuenty miles beyond them thirty miles further I should finde foure Islands lying together which I likewise found as hee had tolde mee For that being in Iapon hee said hee had there séene certaine men of a very small stature with great roules of Linnen cloth about their heads y t brought gold in small péeces and some white Cangas of Algodon which are péeces of Cotton Linnen so called by the Chinars as also salt fish the Spanish Atun or Haberdine which hee said came out of other Islandes Eastward from Iapon and by y e tokens and markes he shewed me I gessed whereabout those Islands should bee and found them not farre from whence hée said they lay hee said likewise that all the Islands of Iapon haue good hauens and Channels being a country full of Rice Corne Fish and Flesh and that they are an indifferent and reasonable people to Trafficke with and that there they haue much siluer Running thus East and East and by North about three hundred miles from Iapon we found a very hollow water with the streame running out of the North and Northwest with a ful and very broad sea without any hinderance or trouble in the way that we past and what winde soeuer blewe the Sea continued all in one sort with the same hollow water and streame vntill we had past y e seuen hundred miles about two hundred myles from the coast and land of newe Spaigne where wee began to lose the said hollow sea and stream whereby I most assuredly thinke and beleeue that there you shall find a Channell or straight passage betwéene the Firme land and new Spaigne and the Countries of Asia and Tartaria Likewise all this way from the aforesayed seuen hundred miles we found
all Saints to Pernanbuco or to Portingale then hold your course Eastward and if the wind serue you hold East and East and by North for the space of 30 or 40. miles into the sea and look not for the land of Pernanbuco from ten to nine degrées for if you be vnder 11 degrées you wil fall into the Créeke called A Enseada de vaza Barâ—ys that is the Créeke of emptying of vessels and likewise when you come from Portingall hauing sight of land at eleuen degrées then put not towards it to shorten your way but rather holde your course Southward from it From this Bay of all Saints to Pernanbuco is a hundred miles and you runne along the coast northeast and southwest From thence to the Riuer Rio dos Ilhas or the riuer of Islands the coast runneth Southwest and Northeast and Southwest and by West and Northeast and by East The 58. Chapter The course or Nauigation to the riuer Rio dos Ilhas that is the riuer of the Islands in the coast of Brasilia IF you desire to saile to the riuer of the Islands you must vnderstand that the Islands lie vnder 14. degrées and ¾ séeking to finde them from the moneth of March forward then you shall run to the height of 15. degrées and ½ and although you be vnder 15. degrées and 2 â— you néede not feare and séeing the land vnder these degrées then you shall see certaine high hilles called As Serras dos Aymores when you sée those hilles then you shall come along the coast Northwarde not fearing any thing for from thence Northward there are no shallows As soone as you sée the Ilands for there are no other then on the same coast you shall sée a rouÌ„d hill standing along by the Sea side on the North side whereof you put into the Riuer and if you chance to be there at such time as you can not put in then hold your course to Seaward from the Islands kéeping from them and there by the said Islandes you may anker and if you be in that country when the north-Northeast winds doe blow then looke for land vnder 14. degrées and if you see a flat land then it is the Island called Camamuâ— by the which you shall run southward and being at the end of the flatte land then you shall sée a high land along by the sea side like the other aforesaid all along by the sea side In the place where this lande beginneth to shew high there lieth a small riuer called Rio das Contas that is the riuer of Beads but it is not to be entered and hath a white harde stone for a marke From thence to the Islands are 9. miles Southward and comming where the aforesaid high land endeth then you shall finde a great Créeke and being West Southwest you shall see another high land at the foot whereof which is almost in the middle way to the créeke you shall see certaine white houses which are the Ingenies or Sugar houses where the Sugar is prepared and being there you shal presently see the Islands The 59. chapter How to saile to the Hauen of Porto Seguro that is the sure Hauen lying in the coast of Brasilia IF you desire to saile to the Hauen of Porto Seguro in the time of the Southeast windes which is in March and so forward you shall not put higher then to 16. degrées ½ for there it hath a Reddish sand called Os Baixos dos Abrolhos which are very dangerous and run very far into the sea and when you saile East West you must not be negligent to throw your Lead out often times being by the land that you sée a long high hill like a sharpe point which is called Monte Pasqual froÌ„ thence you shall run Northward west the same hill is westward from you then you must hold towards the land yet with good regard and foresight And when you sée the land and that you perceiue a round Houell then Southward from the saide Houell you shall see a Hill with a great strand on the North side whereof lyeth the Hauen of Porto Seguro and running along by the coast aboue in the lande you find the towne of Porto Seguro This height is a white stonie rocke and on the North side of this stonie rocke there is a great vally when you are East and west with this stonie rocke then Northward you shall sée the water breake which is vpon a sand reaching two miles into the Sea on the South side whereof you are right ouer against the towne of Porto Seguro If you begin this voyage when the winds are north-northeast come to 15. degrees and â…” not seeing any hills then leaue not running along the coast when you are vnder 15. degrées the first high land you shall sée will be with white sandy strands along the sea coast if vnder that height you see a riuer then make not towardes the land for there it hath certaine dangerous shallowes called Os Baixos de Sant Antonio from thence Southward lyeth Porto Seguro and passing along the coast and séeing the water breake vpon the other sand lying two miles further inward to sea then you shall passe by it kéeping to seaward from it and when you are at the end thereof then the towne will be Westward from you you may well put to it alwaies hauing a care how you goe and anker vnder the height aforesaid Departing from the Islands to Porto Seguro then you must run 10. or 12. miles to Seaward from them to shun the sands lying by the riuer called Rio Grande that is the great Riuer and when you are past Rio Grande then make towards the land againe to know it as aforesaid The 60. Chapter How to saile to the Hauen called Bahia dâ— Espirito Santo that is the Bay of the Holy Ghost lying in the coast of Brasilia SAiling to the hauen of Spirito Santo béeing past the Sandes called Os Baixos dos Abrolhos vnder 19. degrées and ½ then you shall sée lande at 20. degrées for in this coast you haue no monsons or courses of certaine winds If you chance to sée land at 19. degrées and ½ and that it bée on the Northwest side from you being flat land then you are on the North side of the Hauen of Spirito Santo which is the land lying aboue Criquare and aboue y e riuer called Rio Dolce that is the riuer of Swéet or fresh water you shall holde your course along by the land vntill the land beginneth to rise hauing some Hilles but trust not to the first that you shall sée but you shall sée a high round hill which lyeth along by the sea side and is called La Sierra de Mestre Aluaro And when you come to this Hill on the North side you shall sée a riuer called Rio dos Reis Magos that is the riuer of the thrée Kings of Cullen and on the South side then the mouth of the Baye will presently
open At the end of the said hill on the South side there is a point of stonie Cliffes called A punto do Tubaron that is the point of the Hedge And on the South side of the Baye there are two or thrée high hilles being there you shall put right ouer to the Bay and so run Westward If you should be in the same course vnder twentie degrées then you shall sée many hilles among the which standeth a high sharpe point called Serra de Guarapari that is the hill of Guarapari it hath likewise another on the North side called A Serra de Pero Can that is the Hill of Peterwood these hils stand on the South side of Spirito Santo From these Hilles southwarde you shall see a hill standing alone called Guape when you sée it then you shall likewise sée thrée small Islandes lying togither on the south side whereof lyeth another small round flat Island and the land lying right against this roūd flat Island hath a great Baye where if néed be you may put in and anker if you desire to goe into it then you shall runne East and west with the hill and so runne in and then the round Island will bée on the North side This Island is called Ilha de Repouso that is the Island of rest it lyeth very close by the land and betwéene it and the land you may well anker From these thrée Islands aforesaid to the bay of Spirito Santo are 12. miles and holding your course Northward to Spirito Santo you shall sée another Island lying alone which you passe running to Seaward by it and being by it you shall presently sée the mouth or Hauen of Spirito Santo this bay or hauen lyeth vnder 20. degrées The 61. Chapter To saile from the Bay or Hauen of Spirito Santo to the Bay of S. Vincent SAyling from Spirito Santo to y e Bay S. Vincent you must runne along the coast about 7. or 8. miles from it to the point called Cabo Frio that is the cold point vntill you come to it in the way you haue a great bay called A Bayho de Saluador the Baye of our Sauiour which is distant from Cabo Frio 12. miles Before you come to Cabo Frio there are two Islands from the which you run to seaward yet if néed be or if you desire it you may passe betwéene them and the land Cabo Frio hath an Island right ouer against it which hath a point where you may anker if néede be on the West side where it is faire and cléere This Cabo Frio lieth vnder 23. degrées from thence to the riuer called Rio de Ianero that is the riuer of Ianuarie are 18. miles this riuer of Ianero hath thrée or foure Islandes in the mouth thereof If you will enter into this riuer you may well goe in taking your way betwéene two of the Islandes that lie in the mouth thereof on the South side of this riuer there is a Hill that sheweth like a man with a Friars Coule or Cape vpon his head When you are vnder the height of this riuer you shall to Landward see certaine high Hilles which shewe like Organs which is a good marke to knowe that you are by the riuer and when you begin to goe néere the lande you shall see a round high and bare Island on the South side the mouth of this riuer lieth vnder 23. degrées and ½ From this riuer to the Rode or open Hauen by the Portingales called Angra are fiftéene miles and there are two riuers in the way but being in that country put not to the land vnlesse you be compelled thereunto From the mouth of this riuer West Southwest and Southwest by West you shall sée a great Island called A Ilha de Sant Sebastian which on the Southwest side hath another small high Island called A Ilha dos Alcatrases that is the Islande of Seamewes before you come at it you must holde your course Westward to shunne certaine Sands that lie by it whereby you shall come to the mouth of the bay of Saint Vincent where you shall see an Island called Ilha da Muda that is the Island of the Dumbe woman and to put into the Bay of S. Vincent you shall leaue the Islandes on the East side The Bay of Saint Vincent lyeth vnder 24. degrées and if you be to leeward from it then you shall sée many Islands whereof some stretcheth outward which are the best markes for this Hauen and being there you are Northwest and Southeast with the mouth of the Bay The 62. Chapter How to saile from Cabo Frio or the cold point to the riuer of Rio de Plata or the riuer of siluer with all the course thereof FRom Cabo Frio to the riuer of Ianero or Ianuarie are eightéene miles and you saile East and West and lyeth vnder 23. degrées and hath these markes First inward to the land it hath certaine high Hilles called Organs but at this time most of them are falne down and on the West Southwest side towards the Sea side it hath the forme of the Mass of a shippe and in the mouth of the riuer lieth foure Islands whereof one is high and round which is a good marke as also the Sugar loafe being a houell that is called so lying in the Hauen although you can not sée it when you are at sea you may saile along this coast without daunger and you need feare nothing but that you sée before your eyes From thence to Saint Vincent the coast reacheth East Northeast and West Southwest and is in length two and fortie miles and all that way there is neither shallowes nor Sandes but there you finde good Hauens for all winds Twelue miles from the riuer lieth an Island called Ilha grande or the great Island which hath verie good Hauens as well on the Southwest as the East sides with very good fresh water and great fishing it is a high lande with many trees and inwarde to the lande it is verie high and sharpe pointed if you desire to put in there you néed not feare to do it for there is no danger From this great Island to the Island of S. Sebastian are eighteene miles and to the Island A Ilha dos Porcos that is the Island of Hogges are fourtéene miles the Isles of Hogges hath a very good Hauen but it is too farre inward Frō thence to the Island of Saint Sebastian are foure miles which is a great high Island full of trees it hath a verie good entrie as well on the one side as on the other it lyeth north-Northeast and Southwest From thence to the lande about halfe a mile distant lyeth the Rode Southwestwarde there lyeth another long Island called A Ilha dos Alcatrases or the Island of Sea-mewes Close by this Island there lyeth three Cliffes on the South side whereof lyeth an Island which is a verie good marke for the land is sometimes couered with miste and thicke weather whereby you can
20 or 30 miles wherewith you shall finde ground at 80 fadome being shels From thence you shal run west and west and by South till you be at 30 fadome and from 30 fadome west-ward to 30 fadome with the which course you should sayle along this Countrey And being a greater depth you shall run west and west and by south wherby you shall come again to the former depth By this course you shall passe through the Islāds of Ilha de Sconocida Ilha d'Arena that is the vnknowne Island and the sandy Island From the Iland la de Sconocida to the Islād d'Arena west west and by south you shall descry the Hils Las Sierras de San Martin which are two high Hils in the middle hauing a great opening or cliffe Sailing from these Hils you shall runne West by the which course you shal sée the stony rock which is a clouen hil you shall run Northwest and northwest by west wherewith you shall sée the Riuer of Medelyn which is a lowe land somewhat more to Loofeward lieth the Island called Ilha Blanca or the white Island as also y e Island Rio Riffias which a farre off sheweth like a ship vnder saile then presently you shal sée the Island of S. Iohn de Luz and from the riuer called Rio Varado to the Riuer of Vera Crus There is no high land but only one black shining hill lying aboue the aforesaid Hauen The 65. Chapter How to sayle from the Island La Desseada to the Island of Porto Riso through the channell called De Passagie SAyling from the Island La Desseada to the Island Puerto Riso y t is the rich Hauen Desiring to passe through y e channel of De Passagie that is the thorow faire you must vse all y e means you can to runne betwéene the Islands of Moncerrate Redonda or to Loofeward y t is betwéen y e Island of S. Christopher and the Islands d'Estacio and from thence you shal hold your course Northwest somewhat more to loofeward frō the Islands of Estacio which are 2. Islands one greater thē the other shewing almost like 2. loaues of bread when you are by them you shall find 10.12 and 25. fadome déepe at the depthes of 10. 12. fadome you haue white sandy ground and at 25. fadome black sand to sayle from this Banke to the Ilandes las Virgines that is the maydes you shal holde your course northwest for there the streams draw Southwestward to shunne S. Crus which stretcheth almost Northwest and Southeast and when you see las Virgines the first poynt is the greatest and therefore it is called la Virgin Gorga or the fatte mayde and presentlie after follow the rest which are long full of Houels they stretch East and West and runne one within the other hauing certaine Cliffes and Rockes hard by them running on the South syde in the middle way frō them you shall sée a great Cliffe two myles into the sea This Cliffe hath for a marke a grayish colour and besydes these there are manie other cliffes and to know whē you are in the passage running along by it to Porto Riso as aforesaid then you shal sée white cliffes that a farre off shew like a ship vnder sayle the whitenes of these cliffes procéedeth of birds filings when you sée them you must make towards them and desiring to run through the passage you shall hold your course betwéene these Ilands the Ilands las Virgines whē you are by them thē you must run northwest to a smal Iland which lieth two miles further forward called Ilha Verde that is the gréen Iland and being right against this Iland thē you are out of the passage or without the channel and being ther you shal presently sée the land of y e Iland Puerto Riso the first point wherof called la Punto de Loquillo lieth East west with the Iland Ilha Verde if you chance to be by the aforesaid cliffe and that the winde scanteth y t you can not passe to loofeward from it then you shall passe to léeward of it for it is also a good chānell of 18. 20. fadom deep with sand and shels vpon the ground about a mile to léeward from it to know whē you are out of the Channell with this course then this cliffe must lie Southeast from you and being at 30. fadome déep with white sandy ground you shall presently as I said passe by the Ilande of Ilha Verde running by the point of Loquillo along by the land of Puerto Riso Westnorthwest and if you desire to be in the hauen of Puerto Riso and that you cannot get thether then you shal lauere or ly driuing to léeward with the point of Loquillo Southeastward from you and from midnight forward you shall follow your course because the streames draw Southeastward the marks you haue there are these that is ouer the hauē of Puerto Riso standeth an hermitage vpon a high hil which is called Santa Barbara and sheweth like a white patch vpon a hill and passing along by it you shall see the Cloyster or Conuent of Dominican Fryers which is about a quarter of a myle from the hermitage and then you shall presently sée the hill that sheweth like a clouen Iland these are the right marks of this Hauen and to put into it you must goe néere the hill but not too néer to shunne a shallow place that lieth within the said hill after that you must loofe asmuch as you can vntil you comé wher you must anker which is right against the houses that stand on the East side of the hauen The 66. Chapter The groundes and depthes by the coast and countrie of New Spaigne BY the Ilāds called Alaclanes lying betwéen the Iland Cuba and the coast of New Spaigne right ouer against the poynt called Punta de S. Anton. the ground is shelly by the Iland called Ilha de Robos it is muddy slyme ground by the Riuer of S. Pedro S. Paulo from 40. fadom to the land it is shelly ground by the fields or playnes of Almeria called Los Islano◠de Almeria at 40. fadome it is sandy ground from thence outwards shelly ground by Vilila Rica or the rich stone at 16 fadome it is muddy ground East west with the cliffes sands de Tortugas of Torteaux it is white sand north-Northeast and southwest with the same Tortugas it is blacke sand and eastward frō it reddish sand by the riuer of Panuco from 40. fadom outwards it is white and red sand and towardes the land muddy ground by the riuer called Rio Hermoso or the faire riuer frō 30. fadome towardrs the land it is white sand ◠outward towards y e sea muddy groūd by the riuer called Rio de Palmase de Mōtanas that is the riuer of palm trees of hils frō 40. fadom towards y e land you haue sand but most white and outwards muddy groūd mixed with gray sand
of Spain and from the same flat land it is higher for it is 7. miles long now to put into this Iland you must hold your course on the north-northeast point being close by it within a stones cast you néed not fear for ther it is 15. fadom deepe and within it is all faire ground this is the road on the side of the Iland close by if from this Iland to the firme land there is no more but a quarter of a mile and you cannot see the entrie till you be hard by it and if there be any ships within the hauen you shall see them before you can discerne or know the Iland which sheweth as if it were trees y t stand vpon the land the farthest point outward on the northeast side of this Iland lieth vnder 9 deg therefore deceiue not your selfe by the card for some of them haue it vnder 9. deg and others vnder 9 deg and a halfe therfore beleeue none but such as haue it vnder 9. deg at the north-northeast end of the aforesaid IlaÌ„d Hereafter followeth the degrees and hightes of all the principal hauens riuers points Ilands places of the Nauigations of the Portingals Spaniards in the countries by them discouered and part inhabited each place with their right names and surnames as they are by them called and ordinarily named in their Seacardes First from the furthest point outward of Portingale called Cabo de Finisterra following along by the coast of Portingale Spain Barbary to the line of Tropicus Caueri and from thence along the Coast of Guinea to the Equinoctiall lyne The degrees on the north side of the line CAbo de Finisterra that is the point of the lands end lieth vnder degrees 43 The Ilandes of Bayona lie vnder 42. Porto de Portug y t is Porte port ly vn 41 As Berlengas y t is the Barles ly vnder 40. Lisboa or LisboÌ„ y t IlaÌ„d of tercera vn 29. Perseueira and the Iland of S. Michael lieth vnder 38. Cabo de san Vincente and the Iland santa Maria lie vnder 37. Trastalgar lying on the coast is vnder 36 Larache lyeth vnder 35 Soneia lyeth vnder 34. Cabo de Canty Porto santo y t is the holy haueÌ„ lying by the IlaÌ„d of Madera are vn 33 Rio dos saueis y t is y e riuer of faries is vn 32 The Iland of Madera or the Iland of wood is vnder the same heights of 32 Taffatama lieth vnder 31 Mecca and Ilha dos Saluaes that is the Iland of the wilde men lyeth vnder 30 Cabo de non and the Ilandes Palma and Lancarotte being of the Ilands of Canarie lyeth vnder 29 A Ilha or the Ilande de Forte Ventura lyeth vnder 28 Cabo de Boâ—ador and the Ilandes of great Canarie and also A Ilha de Hierro or Iland of Iron lyeth vnder 27 Angra dos Cauallos that is the Hauen of horses lieth vnder 25 Rio d'Ouro or y e riuer of Gold lieth vnd 24 The line or Tropicus Cancri Angra or the open hauen of Goncalo de Sintra lyeth vnder 23 Cabo das Barbas or the point of Baerden lyeth vnder 22 Cabo Branco or the white point lieth vn 21 Rio de Sao Ioâ—o or the riuer of S. Iohn lieth vnder 20 Furna de Santa Maria or the caue of S. Marie lyeth vnder 19 Sete monte or seuen hils vnder the Ilands of S. Anna S. Vincent S. Lucia and S. Nicolas lieth vnder 18 Ante Rotte and Ilha de Sal. or the Iland of Salt vnder 17 Rio or the Riuer of Canaga and the Iland Ilha de Maâ—a vnder 16 Cabo verde or the gréen point the IlaÌ„ds of S. Iago and Ilha do Fogo or of fyer vnder 15 Rio or the riuer of Gambia vnder 14 Rio das Ostras or the riuer of oisters vn 13 Cabo Roxo vnder 12 Buguba vnder 11 Rio do Pichel or the riuer of y e Can vnd 10 Rio or the riuer of Cachecache vnder 9 Rio de Serra Lioa or the riuer of the Lions hill vnder 8 Rio das Palmas or the riuer of Palms vn 7 Cabo de monte or the point of the hill vn 6 Cabo dos Baixos or the point of sands and the myne of S. George vnder 5 A Ilha or the IlaÌ„d of Fernando Poa Cauo dà s Palmas or point of Palmes vnder 4 Rio de Campo or the riuer of the field vn 3 Rio de Princepe or y e riuer of y e prince vnd 2 The Iland of S. Thomas vnder 1 From the Equinoctiall line to the south side following the coast of Congo Angola and Ethiopia to the cape de Bona Speranza The degrees of the south side of the Equinoctial lyne CAbo or the point of Lopo Gonsalues vnder deg 1 Cabo or the point of Catharina vnder 2. Angra da Iudia or the hauen of the Iewe vnder 5. Praya de San Domingos or the straÌ„d of S. Dominico vnder 6. Rio or the riuer of Congo vnder 7 A Ilha d' Ascention or the ascention vnd 8. Rio or the riuer of Angola and the Iland of Loanda vnder 9 Cabo Ledo vnder 10. Rio or the riuer of S. Lazaro vnder 11. Cabo de Loubos or y e riuer of wolues vn 12 Monte Negro or the black hill vnder 14 Serra Parda or the gray hill vnder 15 Angra das Aldeas or the open hauen of the villages the Iland of S. Helena vnd 16. Manga das Areas or the sandy sleue vn 17. Cabo Negro or the blacke point vnder 18. Os Mendoins vnder 19 A Serra de S. Lazaro or Hill S. of Lazaro vnder 20. Praya or the straight of Ruy Pires vnd 21. Cabo do Padrao or the point of Colosso or Colume vnder 22. Praia Fria or the cold strand vnder 23. The lyne or Tropicus Cancri Ponta da concepsao or the conceptioÌ„ vn 24 Praya das Ala-goas vnder 25. Feiaco da Boca or the maÌ„ner of the mouth vnder 26. Angra or the hauen of S. Anthony vnd 27 Angra or hauen of S. Thomas vnder 28. Angra or the haueÌ„ of S. Christopher vn 29 Rio do Infante or the Riuer of the Kinges sonne vnder 32. Angra or hauen of S. Helena vnder 33. As Ilhas or IlaÌ„d of Tristan de CuÌ„ha v. 34. Cabo de Bona Speranza or poynt of good hope vnder 34. ½ From the cape de Bona Speranza northwards along the coast to Soffala Mosambique and Melinde to the Equinoctial lyne all being on the south side of the same lyne CAbo das Agulhas or the poynt of the Compas full vnder 35. Cabo de Infante or point of the kings sonne vnder 34. ½ Cabo Talhado or the clouen point vnd 34. Cabo das Vaccas or point of cowes Baya Fermosa or the faire bay vnder 34. Cabo de Areciffe or the point of the Cliffe vnder 33. Rio de infante or point of y e kings son v. 32. Ponta Primeira or the first point vnder 32. Terra do Natal vnder 31.
12. From this place forward beginneth the coast of Malabar which is contained within the coast of India FRom Angediua to Batecala are miles 12. From Batecala to the fortresse of Barcelar are 5. From Barcelar to the Ilands called Primeiro are 6. From Primeiro Ilandes to the fortresse of Mangalor are 6. From Mangalor to Monte Fermoso are 4 From Monte Fermoso to Monte de Lin are 10. From Monte de Lin to the fortresse of Cananor are 6. From Cananor to Calecut are 8. From Calecut to Coulette are 2. From Coulette to Chale and Parangale are 7. From Parangale to Tanor are 3. From Tanor to Panane are 6. From Panane to Cochiin are 15. From Cochiin to a place called Arbore de Porca or the tree of the Sow or Hogge are 9. From Arbore de Porca to Caule Coulao are 9. From Caule Coulao to the fortresse Coulao are 6. From Coulao to the Barreiras are 4. From the Barreiras to Briniao are 8. From Briniao to the Ilandes called Ilha de Tarauancor are 6. From Tarauancor to the Cape de Comoryn are 6. There endeth the coast commonly called in the Orientall coast the Countrie of India wherein is contained the coast of Malabar as aforesaid all the rest of the Orientall coastes haue their particular names seuerall from India as I haue sufficiently declared and all the miles aforesaid as also all those in the description of the voiage to and from India are all Spanish myles whereof 17 and ½ are one degrée which are fiftéene Dutch miles Hereafter followeth an Instruction memorie of the yeelding or declining of the compasse in the Nauigations and courses of the Portingales into the East Indies both outward and homeward in what places and how much they yeeld northwest northeast that is how much the needle of the compasse windeth or turneth towards the east or west all perfectlie set downe and truly marked by the Portingale Pilots that saile ordinarilie SAyling from Lisbone almost to the point of Cabo Verde theÌ„ the néedles or lines of the compasse doe yéeld northeastward that is towards the east two 3. parts of a strike and more From thence about 4 or 5. degrées further on the north side of the Equinoctiall being 70. or 80. miles from the coast then the néedle of the comâ—â—sse windeth Eastward that is northeastward halfe a strike if you be 100. or 120. miles from the land then it windeth northeastward â…“ part of a strike Running along by the coast of Brasilia to 7.8 10. degrées on the south side of the Equinoctiall then the compasse will winde Northeastward or to the east â…“ part of a strike that is when you sayle close by the coast of Brasilia from 17. 18. degrées vnder which height lieth the sands called os Baixos dos Abrolhos then the compasse will winde Northeastward ¼ or â…” partes of a strike that is when you run not aboue 100. or 120. miles from the coast of Brasilia Running along by the Iland of Martin Vaaz theÌ„ the compasse windeth northeastward a strike or more From thence forward till you bee vnder 33. degrées the compasse windeth northeastward a strike and a halfe to seauentie or eightie miles beyond the Iland of Tristan da Cunha From thence to the Cabo de Bona Speranza then the compasse beginneth againe to winde lesse and if you marke the compasse well that it windeth halfe a strike to the northeast then you are hard by the Cape de bona Speranza not aboue 30. or 40. miles at the furthest froÌ„ it for when you are north south with the cape then the compasse wil winde northeastward â…“ part of a strike Sayling from thence forward if you mark the compasse find it euen then you are 80. miles eastward from the cape das Agulhas Sayling the Compasse if it windeth Northwestward â…” parts of a strike that is towards the west then you are North South with the point called Cabo das Correntes and being vnder 25. and 26. deg till you come vnder 20. degrées and that the Compasse yéeldeth ¼ of a strike and more Northwestward then look out for the Islande called S. Laurence for you shal presently sée it when you are right ouer against Mosambique then the Compasse yeeldeth a strike or somewhat lesse towards the northwest hath y e same differeÌ„ce til you come to the Equinoctial line towards India Being 200. miles East and West with the hauen of Goa or the coast of India to Cabo de Comorijn then the Compasse windeth Northwestward a strike and a half and vpon the coast of India a strike and â…“ Sayling from Cochiin to Portingal vntill you haue past the Ilands Maldiua south and southwestward then the Compasse will wind Northwestward a strike and a half till you be vnder 8. and 10. degrées on the south side of the Equinoctiall line and if you find it lesse then a strike a halfe then you are on y e west side of the sands called A Saya de Malha that is the dublet of Iron rings because they are like it And when you are vnder 27. or 30. degrées holding your course west then you shall find that the Compasse yéeldeth a strike and ¼ Northwestward and when you find it so theÌ„ you are North south with the point of S. Roman lying on the furthest end southeastward from the Iland of S. Laurence Being north and south with the sands called Os Baixos de Iudia making towardes the land called Terra do Natal til you bee vnder 30. and 31. deg then the Compasse wil yéeld Northwestward ¾ of a strike or somewhat lesse then you shall be North south with the point called Cabo das Correntes Comming vnder 32. 33. degr forward and finding the Compasse euen not winding Eastward nor westward then you are right vnder the Meridian you must vnderstande that to marke the Compasse well that it saileth not any thing at all you must alwaies haue your eye vpon if in the Peylen the better to looke vnto it for if you sayle therin you shal hardly gesse right nor make any good account Hauing past the Cape de bona Speranza sayling to the Ilande of S. Helena then the Compasse windeth Northeastward 1 â— part of a strike in the Islande of S. Helena halfe a strike and from the Iland of S. Helena to the Iland of Ascention then the Compasse windeth Northeastward â…” parts of a strike When you sayle from Portingall to Brasilia till you bee vnder the height of the point of Cabo de S. Augustin this Iland of Ascention then you must vnderstand that the more the Compasse windeth northeastward or eastward the further eastward you are from the said point therefore you must haue great regard thereunto for that if you bee comming in Peylen you shall find it there to be euen as I said before From the Islande of Ascention to the cliffe called Penedo de S. Pedro about 20. or
the declination those are the miles and the way that you haue sayled that is if the Sunne be risen or descended 6. degrées more or lesse so haue you likewise so much furthered or gone on your way Q. If you were by y e land in any place vnder one degrée on the Coast lying East West holding your course 89. miles from thence West west by North vnder what height and how far shal you as then be from y e land A. Vnder the height of two degrées and 15. Dutch 17. Spanish miles and a halfe from the land Q. If the Sunne were in the one Tropicus you in the other what height should you then make in taking of the Sunne A. The sunne is as then distant from y e Equinoctiall line 23. deg ½ with 23. deg and ◠more that you are distant from it which make 47. degrées then there wanteth thrée 43. degrées to make vp 90. deg those you must take by the Astrolabe those you shall compare or ad to the declination which is 23. deg and ½ it maketh 66. ½ then there wanteth 23. 1 ◠degr to make 90. and that is your height Q. If you were in a place knew y e height thereof but not the declination of the day how would you know it without your book A. Take the height of the Sun by your Astrolabe and that you find you must adde to the height that the place lyeth vnder and whatsoeuer it amounteth vnto aboue 90. degrées or that it wanteth of 90. degrées is the declination of the day Q. Which are the places of y e world wherin it is 6. monthes day 6. monthes night A. Vnder the Poles of the worlde Q. What is the height A. All that the Sunne riseth from morning to noone likewise the height is the degrees that you haue from the Pole to the Horizon also the height is all the distance you haue from the Equinoctiall line Q. How shall you know the declination of the Sunne A. You shall take the height of the Sun vpon the 21. of Iune Stilo nouo and then stayed till the 23. of December after vpon the which day again you shal take the height of the Sunne which done you must subtract the least number out of the greatest and that which resteth you shall deuide in the middle in this sort you shall find the declination Q. What is the greatest declination that the sunne maketh in one day A. Foure and twentie minutes Q. How many degrees doe account for a strike or line of the Compasse A. Eleuen ◠for 32. times 11. ¼ maketh 360. degrees which is the Compasse of the world Q. How far is the southstarre distant from the Pole A. Thirtie degrees keeping neither neerer nor further off Q. What doth the Compasse signifie A. The Horizon with the Compasse of the world deuided into 32. degrees Q. What is the Sea Carde A. The land and the Sea Q. What is the Astrolabe A. The 4. part of y e world which is 90. deg Q. Wherefore are the lines of the Compasse or in the nauigation euen and alike and passe altogether through the Center of one length without difference in greatnesse or compasse of roundnes wherefore thē doe you recken more miles vpon one degree and line then vpon the other for y t by order they should haue as many miles as the other A. The great circles or compassing lines which y e Equinoctiall naturally hath that is the 32. deg are altogether euē alike ech being 15. Dutch 17. Spanish miles and ½ but the smal circles or comparing lines haue some more some lesse according to y e eleuation of y e Pole in such maner y t the nearer you be to y e Equinoctial line so much longer your way wil be the nearer you go to the Poles the shorter will be your way for the Pole riseth or descēdeth one degrée running along by the line it neither riseth nor declineth Q. How shall you at noone time knowe how much the sunne declineth Northeast in Northwest in any place of the world whatsoeuer you shal be A. You shal make a rounde circle or Ring vpon the ground set a néedle or any other thing in the middle thereof so stay the rising of y e Sun in the first comming out thereof you may mark where y e shadow lyeth which hauing marked you shal stay til euening vntill the Sun goeth down thē looke where y e shadow of the néedle is marke it as before whereby you shal make your account in this sort you shal measure how much there is frō the one marke to y e other so deuide it crosse wise in equall distance which shall bee your North south now when the shadow of the Sunne commeth vpon those lines or strikes then it is noone now to know how much the néedle of y e Compas lieth northeast or northwest set the Compasse by thē you shal presently sée where the needle declineth whether it be eastward or westward and how much whereupon you may make your account Q. Where is the needle of the Compasse euen and alike A. Vnder the Meridian or at noone time The end of the 3 Booke THE FOVRTH BOOKE A most true and certaine Extract and Summarie of all the Rents Demaines Tolles Taxes Impostes Tributes Tenthes third-pennies incommings of the King of Spaine throughout all his Kingdoms lands Prouinces and Lordships as they are collected out of the originall Registers of his Chamber of accompts Together with a briefe and cleere description of the gouernment power and pedegree of the Kings of Portingall Translated out of Spanish into Low-Dutch by Iohn Hughen of Linschoten And out of Dutch into English by W. P. HISPANIA LONDON Imprinted by John Wolfe 1598. The fourth Booke A most true and certain extract summarie of all the Rents Demaines Tolles Taxes Impostes Tributes Tenthes third-pennies and incommings of the King of Spaine throughout all his kingdomes lands prouinces Lord shippes as they are collected out of the originall Registers of his seuerall Chambers of accomptes together with a briefe and cleare description of the gouernment power and pedegree of the Kings of Portingall To the Reader FOrasmuch as this mine itinerario or nauigation is onely a Treatise of the lands and coasts of the East-Indies Orientall Countries all which are at this day vnder the Gouernment and command of the king of Spaine so do I thinke it not impertinent nor from the purpose to ioyne herewithall an Extract and Summarie of all the Rents Demaynes and Reuenewes of the same king in all his Kingdomes Lands Prouinces and Lordships euen as I haue drawne them all out of the Originall Registers of his seuerall Chambers of accounts and translated out of Spanish into the Low-Dutch tungue wherein there are declared not onely the reuenewes of euerie Prouince and iurisdiction by themseues but
the battaile by him erected hee wonne the Castle and towne of Septa from the Mores in Barbaria or Affrica and was Father to the Infant Don Ferdinand that is Canonized for a Saint After him raigned his sonne Don Duarte or Eduart and was the 11. king of Portingale he liued 42. yeares whereof he raigned 5. yeares king hee died in the Pallace of the couent of Thomar in Anno 1438. he lieth buried in the Cloyster of the battaile Don Alfonso his sonne was borne in S. Arein in the yeare of our Lord 1432. and because he was but 6. yeares of age wheÌ„ his Father died his vncle the Infant Don Pedro raigned in his place vntill the yeare of our Lord 1448. Then the said Don Afonso was himselfe crowned king was the 12 king of Portingale he died in S. Arein in y e same chamber where he was borne the 28 of August 1481. and lieth buried by his Ancestors in the Cloyster of the battaile After his death raigned his sonne Don Ioan the great called the seconde of that name being the 13. King of Portingal he was borne in Lisbone the 4. of May anno 1455. hee did openly himselfe being present cause Don Fernando Duke of Beâ—ganca vpon the market place of the towne of Euora to be beheaded on the 22. of Iune in An. 1483. with his owne hand with a Poynyard slew Don Domingos Duke of Begia brother to his wife Dona Lianor presently calling Don Manoel the said Dukes brother gaue him the same Dukedome with all that belonged therunto he liued 40. yeres and died at Aluor in the bath the 25. of October An. 1495. lieth buried in the Cloister of the battaile by his Ancestors died without issue By his last Wil and Testament he gaue the Crowne of Portingale vnto Don Manoel Duke of Viseu who was crowned king of Portingale was the 14. king hée was crowned in Alcacer do Sal the 27. of October An. 1495. he caused all the Iewes in his land eyther willingly or by force to such as refused it to be christened in the yere of our Lord 1499. and caused all the Mores that dwelt at Lisbone without the gate of Moreria to be banished whereof the gate to this day holdeth the name In the â—â—me of this king there happened an insurrection of Portingales in Lisbone against the new Christened Iewes whereby they slew certaine hundereths of them both men women and children burning some of them with a thousand other mischiefes robbing their houses shops and goods for the which the king did great Iustice and finding out the principall beginners of the same caused them to bée punished This king did first discouer and by his captaines souldiers conquered y e Countries and passages into the East Indies and y e orientall countries for spices also the hauens passages in Prester Iohns land hee likewise conquered the towns fortresses of Saffâ—in Azamor in Affrica he died in an 1521. vpon S. Luces day lieth buried in the Cloyster of Bethlehem by the dutchmeÌ„ called Roysters After his death raigned his son Don Ioan the 3. was the 15. king of Portingale he was borne in the month of Iune in Anno 1502. in the citie of Lisbone where he was crowned in anno 1521. he was simple curteous mild and a great friend vnto all religious persons as also to all students he fouÌ„ded the vniuersitie of Coymbra and other colledges died the 11. of Iune An. 1557. lieth buried in the Cloyster of Bethelem or Roysters After his death was crowned Don Sebastian and was the 16. king of Portingale he was son to the Prince of Portingale eldest sonne to the aforesaid Don Ioan that maried with Dona Ioana daughter to the Emperour Charles the fift and Sister to Phillip king of Spaine which Prince dying before his father left his wife great with childe of this Don Sebastian who after the death of his Grandfather was Crowned king of Portingale he was born on Sebastians day in the yeare of our Lord 1553. hee passed with a great armie into Africa to conquere the countrie in the yeare 1578. where hee with most of his Armie was slaine the rest taken prisoners and so died without issue After this ouerthrow and death of the said king Don Sabastian was Crowned Don Henricke a Cardinall vncle vnto the saide Don Sabastian and was the 17. King of Portingale and died without issue in Anno 1580. leauing by his last will and testament for heire of the Crowne of Portingale Don Phillip king of Spaine as lawfull successor vnto the same for that his Father Charles the 5. maried the eldest daughter of the king Don Manoel which was mother to Don Phillip king of Spaine and sister to the grandfather of Don Sebastian and of the aforesaid Don Henrick although there had bin another brother of the said don Henrick named Don Luiis who dying left a son called Don Antonio that was Prior de Ocrato of the order of the knightes of the Crosse of S. Iohns whome the Portingales chose for their king but by meanes of the great power and might of the king of Spaine who by monie had gotten the greatest part of the nobilitie of Portingale to hold with him partly by monie and partly by force he got the kingdome into his hands and subiection driuing Don Antonio out of the countrie so in anno 1581. he came into Portingale in Lisbon was crowned king in the cloyster of Thomar by all the 3 estates of the countrie that is the nobility spiritualtie and commons is the 18. king of Portingale who as yet liueth raigneth ouer the same countrie whereby the Crowne of Portingale is now fallen into the handes of the kinges of Spaine hauing continued in the handes of the kinges of Portingales for the space of 442. yeares which their successors till then inioyed being of the race and progenie of the house of Loraine Thus endeth the fourth Booke FINIS TYPVS ORBIS TERRARVM QVID EI POTEST VIDERI MAGNVM IN REBVS HVMANIS CVI AETERNITAS OMNIS TOTIVSQVE MVNDI NOTA SIT MAGNI TV DO CICERO Exacta acurata deliucatio cum orarum maritimarum tum etiam sororum terrestrium quae in regionibus China Cauchinchinâ— Cambojn siue Câ—ampa Syao Malaca Aracan Pegu una cum omnium vicinarum iusu latum descriptione ut sunt Samatra Java utraque Timora Molucca Philippinâ— Luconja de Leqveos dicta nec non insulae Japan Corece reliquaeque omnes adsacentes ubj etiam adnotauimus scopulos â—reviâ—i omniaque Vadosa loca siquce alia a quibus periculum navigantibus Qvemadmodum singula hoc aeâ—o à Lusitanis nauium gubernatoribus còmperta inaâ—â—gitata in tobulaâ— relaâ—a fuere Equoâ—um recentibus ac emen daâ—is tabulis perqà m studiose haec destribi ex primiâ— curavimus in eorum hominum coÌ„modum quibus ista usvi voluptatia